V5370 02ae Not

Conversion d'énergie Technical Manual – Dual UPS 40kVA V5370-02
Conversion d'énergie
Order N° : V5370-02
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Operating, installation, start-up and maintenance
DUAL UPS SYSTEM
40kVA
with Battery 185 cells type SBM84 SAFT
UE-EE-UPS
REVISION INDEX
Revision 1 First Issue
Revision 1 2
NAME DATE NAME DATE

Prepared R.L 19/11/2021
Checked C.V 22/11/2021
Approved S.N 22/11/2021
43, Avenue Winston Churchill - 27400 LOUVIERS

Telephone +33.(0)2.32.25.23.94 - Fax +33.(0)2.32.25.08.64
SUMMARY
RESPONSIBILITY AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................. 3
NORMS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS NCE1195 ................................... 4
1. PRESENTATION OF THE EQUIPMENT .............................................. 5
2. DESCRIPTION OF UPS......................................................................... 10
3. ELECTRICAL EQUIPEMENT AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS .. 11
4. BOM ........................................................................................................ 12
5. TCP/IP INTERFACE .............................................................................. 13
6. UPS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................. 14
7. DESCRIPTION OF BATTERY TYPE SBM84 SAFT .......................... 15
2/15
RESPONSIBILITY AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
RESPONSIBILITY:
The user must ensure that the safety instruction in this manual are read and observed by the technical personnel.
The manufacturer will not be responsible in any of direct, indirect or accidental personal or material damage.
The installation of the power supply system must be performed by authorised electricians or by qualified internal
personnel.
Please read the entire Operating manual before you perform the installation and start-up the power supply system.
The contents of this manual may be changed. The manufacturer has produced this manual with the purpose to
provide precise and simple information and will therefore take no responsibility for any misinterpretation or undesired
mistakes of this manual.
SAFETY NOTES:
This material must be carried out and installed by a personnel qualified and
authorised
This unit in question is an electrical device requiring DANGEROUS LEVELS OF

VOLTAGE AND CURRENT!
The followings instructions should be therefore be carefully observed:
 Ensure that only trained and authorised personnel have access to the unit. Only certain persons should
be authorised to open the housing.
 Even when the unit is switched off, some of the internal components may still be live as long as they are
connected to the mains power supply or to the battery.
 Integrated capacitors may still be live, even when the unit is disconnected and free of any voltage. They
should therefore be correctly discharged by a qualified person before to touch to the terminals.
 Only insulated tools should be used for work on the unit.
 All persons working with the unit should be familiar with first-aid-measure to be taken in the event of an
accident involving electricity.
 The regulations of the local power supply authority and all applicable safety regulations should be observed
at all times.
 Before any mains input connecting, connect the earth to the terminal PE (Green/yellow cable).
If the system is out of service more than 24 hours, the battery must
be insulated from the system by opening the battery protection in
order to avoid battery deep discharge.
For any information on the equipment, don't hesitate to contact our after sales department:
BENNING Conversion d'énergie

After sales service
Tel. : +33.(0).2.32.25.12.37
43 Avenue Winston Churchill
Fax: +33.(0).2.32.25.13.97
27400 Louviers Cedex France
Email: [email protected]
3/15
NORMS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS NCE1195
MAIN NORMS APPLICABLE IN OUR PRODUCTION:
IEC 364/NFC 15-100/VDE 0100 Low voltage electrical installation (nominal voltage
below 1000V)
IEC 60146-2 Semiconductors converters
IEC 76 Choke and transformer
IEC 51558 1.2.4.6 Small transformer specification
IEC 947-2-3 Circuit breakers rules
IEC 269 Fuses rules
IEC 947 Contactor rules
IEC 255 Relay rules
IEC 384 Chemical capacitors rules
IEC 950 Safety for telecom equipment
IEC 60529 Degree of protections (IP code)
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT:
- Humidity:
. Temperature: (°C) 20 40 50
. Relative humidity: (%) 95 80 50
- Temperature: Operating - 5°C to + 50°C.

Derating 1,25% / °C From 50°C to 55°C
- Altitude: 1000 m without derating

Derate 7% / 1000m Between 1000 m to 4000m
4/15
1. PRESENTATION OF THE EQUIPMENT
INDOOR APPLICATION
GENERAL DATA DUAL REDUNDANT 40KVA UPS System
In accordance with the single line diagram N° V5370-02 sheet 04.
A. UPS TYPE ENERTRONIC I, D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
TAG number : UE-EE-UPS

1. MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
UPS cabinet (x2):

Front : 1600 mm Depth : 800 mm Height : 2000+100 mm Weight : around 1000 kg
Degree of protection : IP41 Colour : RAL7033
BYPASS cabinet :
Front : 800 mm Depth : 800 mm Height : 2000+100 mm Weight : around 700 kg
Degree of protection : IP41 Colour : RAL7033
Max. ambient temperature ...................................................... + 50°C

Humidity (at 50°C, non condensing) ...................................................... max. 95%
Acoustic noise ...................................................... < 65dB
2. INPUT AC DATA FOR RECTIFIER PART (EACH UPS)
. Nominal voltage 3 phases /3W ................................................................................................................................................................ 400V ± 10% 3Ph., PE

. Frequency................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 60Hz ± 5%
. Power consumption from AC mains
Battery fully charged : ............................................................................... 37.1kW
Battery under charge (boost charge voltage) : .......... 42.5kW
3. OUTPUT DC DATA FOR RECTIFIER PART (EACH UPS)
. Nominal voltage ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 220V

. Floating mode 185 Cells NiCd 1.4V/cell at 25°C............................................................................................... 259V
. Boost/Equalising mode 185 Cells NiCd 1.5V/cell .................................................................................................... 277.5V
. Temperature compensation factor ......................................................................................................................................................... -3mV/°C/cells
. Nominal current .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 188.7A
. Battery current limit ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 16.8A
. Rectifier voltage tolerance ................................................................................................................................................................................. ± 1%
. Voltage ripple ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... < 2% RMS
. Automatic transfer floating/ equalising charge .................................................................................................................... Yes
. Inverter shutdown on battery end of discharge ...................................................................................................................... 185V
. Battery recharge time to 80% ........................................................................................................................................................................ ≤ 8h
4. OUTPUT AC DATA FOR INVERTER PART (EACH UPS)
. Nominal voltage 1 phase 2W ....................................................................................................................................................................... 230Vac, 1 Ph, 2W, PE

. Nominal power ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40kVA (cos phi=0.8)
. Output current ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 174A (cos phi=0.8)
. Nonimal frequency (Crystal controlled) ...................................................................................................................................... 60Hz ± 0 .1%
. Synchronizing range ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 60Hz ± 4%
. Overall Efficiency at nominal load ...................................................................................................................................................... > 75%
. Heat dissipation............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4400W max.
. System configuration............................................................................................................................................................................................... Dual Redundant
5/15
5. STATIC-SWITCH DATA
. Nominal input voltage ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 400V ± 10% 3Ph., PE

. Isolating three phases 40kVA transformer ................................................................................................................................ 400V/230V, 1Ph., 2W, PE
. Overload characteristic ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 150% for 10 min.
. Short circuit characteristic .................................................................................................................................................................................. 500% for 100ms
. Switching time inverter to mains .......................................................................................................................................................... < 4ms
. Manual by-pass (3 positions) by-pass-test-auto (Bypass cabinet) ............................................................. YES (Make before break
type)
. Heat dissipation in normal operation ................................................................................................................................................. 500W max
6/15
6. CONTROL AND ALARM
. 13 LED’s for single event :
- Internal power supply (green LED)

- UPS Mains operation (green LED)
- UPS battery operation (yellow LED)
- Bypass operation (yellow LED)
- Parallel operation (red LED)
- Manual bypass closed (red LED)
- Overload (red LED)
- UPS Failure (red LED)
- Battery Low Voltage (red LED)
- Battery circuit fault (red LED)
- DC Earth fault (red LED)
- Output switch open (red LED)
- Distribution MCCB tripped (red LED)
. Measurement readings on UPS Digital display :
- Input AC voltage - L-L for each phase

- Input AC current for each phase
- Load kVA, load kW, load currents, load power factor
- System output frequency (inverter and bypass AC line source)
- Output AC voltage: line to line for each phase
- Bypass AC line voltage
- Battery voltage
- Battery charge/discharge current
. Measurement readings on BYPASS cabinet through digital display :
- AC Analog Input Ammeter with phase selector switch.
. Digital inputs :
- Remote power OFF
- Battery charging blocked
- Battery MCCB fault
- Distribution MCCB tripped
. no-nc contact (remote alarms)
- UPS operation
- UPS on battery (mains fault / charger failure)
- Bypass operation
- Maintenance Bypass closed
- Battery low voltage
- Common Alarm
- Charger fail
- Battery discharged
- DC earth fault
- Mains failure
- Battery circuit fault (battery MCCB tripped/open)
7. REMOTE MONITORING FACILITIES
. TCP/IP interface with Web-Based monitoring facilities (HTTP), SNMP and Modbus protocols
7/15
B. 230VAC Distribution type E230E230/250 VT
1. MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS (per Distribution)
Front: 800 mm Depth: 800 mm Height: 2000+100 mm Weight: around 270 kg

Degree of protection: IP41 Colour: RAL7033
2. PROTECTION
. Main Input MCCB 3 poles, rating 250A (from UPS), Icu 50kA
. Distribution Feeders:
- 2 x MCCB 3 poles, rating 50A, Icu 25kA

3. INSTRUMENTS AND REMOTE ALARMS
. AC Analog Input Ammeter.
. Alarm contacts on terminal X5 (opened in fault condition):
 Load CB open (to UPS)
. Voltage free alarm contacts on terminal X3 (opened in fault condition):
 Load CB open
8/15
C. Battery disconnect switch panel

1. MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS, see drawing N° V5370-02, sheet 05.
Front : 635 mm Depth : 300 mm Height : 835 mm Weight : around 30 kg

Degree of protection: IP41 Colour : RAL7035
Internal wiring characteristics : All power and control conductors shall be stranded copper, 85°C minimum temperature
rating, heat resistant and flame retardant. Power wiring shall have 600 volt rated insulation. Control wiring shall have
300 volt or higher rated insulation.
2. INPUT/OUTPUT DATA
. Nominal input/output voltage ...................................................................................................................................................................... 220VDC

. Nominal current .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 200A
3. PROTECTION
. Battery circuit breaker 3 poles: 200A Icu 15kA suitable for DC current
4. INSTRUMENTS AND REMOTE ALARMS
. Voltage free alarm contacts :
 Battery circuit tripped/open (to UPS)
. inputs :
 External remote for Battery circuit tripping
D. Stationary Nickel Cadmium battery 185 cells SBM84

1. MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Front : 1950 mm Depth : 860 mm Height (with battery) : 891 mm

Total weight : around 1007 kg
2. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
. Number of cells ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 185

. Nominal voltage per cell .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.2V
. Floating voltage per cell ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1.4V
. Boost / Equalising charge voltage per cell ................................................................................................................................. 1.5V
. Capacity ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 84Ah
3. VENTILATION REQUIREMENT / HEAT DISSIPATION
In floating operation at 20°C

. Heat dissipation per battery bank ........................................................................................................................................................... 5.5W
. Air flow (IEC 62485-2 / EN50272-2) .............................................................................................................................................. 3.92 m3/h
Manufacturer : SAFT Sweden.
9/15
2. DESCRIPTION OF UPS
10/15
ENERTRONIC I
ENERTRONIC I 3-1 (UEG)
ENERTRONIC I 3-3 (UDG)
Operating instructions
English original version
4999 en
Version 1.23
14.04.2023
See operating instruction before
connection to the supply
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

This operating instruction contains important
instructions that shall be followed during
installation and maintenance of the Systems
Legal notice
Notes concerning the documentation
For safe operation of the product, knowledge is required that is provided in this original version. The
information is shown in a brief, clear format. The chapters and pages are numbered consecutively.
The product is documented in these instructions. The relevant data can be found in the technical
information. During installation, commissioning, operation and the performance of maintenance work, it
must be ensured that the documentation that applies to the product is used.
The products are subject to continuous further development. The manufacturer reserves the right to make
changes to the shape, equipment and technology of the product. The information corresponds to the state
of technical knowledge at the time of printing. For this reason, no claims for certain product characteristics
can be derived from the contents of this documentation.
Manufacturer/holder of right
BENNING Elektrotechnik und Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG
Münsterstraße 135 – 137
46397 Bocholt
Germany
Telephone: +49 2871/93-0
Commercial register Coesfeld HRA No. 4661
General non-discrimination
The manufacturer is aware of the importance of language with regard to the equality of men and women,
and endeavors to take this into account at all times. Nevertheless, for the sake of improving legibility,
differentiated formulations have not been used.
Copyright
© 2018, BENNING Elektrotechnik und Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved.
This document, particularly all of the contents, texts, photographs and graphics that it contains, are
protected by copyright.
No part of this document or the associated texts may be reproduced or edited, copied or distributed using
electronic media in any form (printed, photocopied or using any other method) without express written
permission.
The information in this documentation can be changed without notice, and does not represent any
obligation on the part of the manufacturer. The manufacturer is not obliged to make additions to this
documentation or keep them up to date. The manufacturer reserves the right to make improvements to
this documentation and the products described therein at any time without notice.
Support/Helpdesk
BENNING Helpdesk Team
Phone: +49 2871 93-555
Fax: +49 2871 93-417
E-Mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.benning.de
List of contents
List of figure.................................................................................................................................. VIII
List of tables .................................................................................................................................. XII
1 Basic notes .................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Applicability ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Document storage..................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Purpose of the instructions ....................................................................................................... 1
1.4 Special information ................................................................................................................... 1
1.4.1 Description of the accumulator ................................................................................................. 1
1.5 Legal notes ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.5.1 Warranty ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.5.2 Liability exclusion ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.5.3 Software changes ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.5.4 Hardware changes .................................................................................................................... 1
1.5.5 Figures and drawings ............................................................................................................... 1
1.5.6 Trademarks ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.5.7 Legal claims .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.6 Identification .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.7 Type plates (example) .............................................................................................................. 1
1.7.1 Type code (example) ................................................................................................................ 2
1.8 Declaration of conformity .......................................................................................................... 2
2 Safety ............................................................................................................................. 3
2.5 Basic information about safety.................................................................................................. 3
2.6 Safety notes .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.7 Safety marking .......................................................................................................................... 4
2.8 Safety information warning levels ............................................................................................. 5
2.9 Safety marking in the operating room ....................................................................................... 5
2.10 Used symbols ........................................................................................................................... 6
2.11 Personnel qualifications ............................................................................................................ 8
2.12 Qualification for installation and maintenance .......................................................................... 9
2.13 Intended use ............................................................................................................................. 9
2.14 Handling of batteries ............................................................................................................... 11
2.15 Residual risk ........................................................................................................................... 13
2.16 Personal protective equipment ............................................................................................... 14
2.17 Safety rules according to EN 50110 / NFPA 70E / VDE 0105 ............................................... 14
2.18 Fire protection ......................................................................................................................... 15
2.19 Emergency plan ...................................................................................................................... 16
3 Transport ..................................................................................................................... 17
3.1 Center of gravity of the systems ............................................................................................. 19
3.2 Transport options .................................................................................................................... 20
3.2.1 Transport with lifting belts ....................................................................................................... 20
3.2.2 Transport to swivel lifting eyes................................................................................................ 21
3.2.3 Upright (vertical) transport on swivel lifting eyes .................................................................... 21
3.2.4 Transport with fork lift, lift trucks or crane fork ........................................................................ 22
3.2.5 Transport with the crane ......................................................................................................... 23
3.3 Lifting in................................................................................................................................... 24
4 Storage ........................................................................................................................ 25
5 Principle of operation and setup of the system ....................................................... 26
5.1 General principle of operation................................................................................................. 26
5.1.1 Protection Concepts ............................................................................................................... 26
5.2 Views ...................................................................................................................................... 27
5.2.1 Front view ............................................................................................................................... 27
V 1.23 I 4999 en
5.3 Schematic diagram ................................................................................................................. 28
5.3.1 Schematic diagram IGBT 1-ph K006 powerblock ................................................................... 28
5.3.2 Schematic diagram IGBT 3-ph K006 powerblock ................................................................... 29
5.3.3 Schematic diagram IGBT 1-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter ...................................... 30
5.3.4 Schematic diagram IGBT 3-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter ...................................... 31
5.3.5 Schematic diagram SCR 1-ph K006 powerblock.................................................................... 32
5.3.6 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph K006 powerblock.................................................................... 33
5.3.7 Schematic diagram SCR 1-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter ....................................... 34
5.3.8 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter ....................................... 35
5.3.9 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q500 double rectifier separate rectifier and inverter.............. 36
5.3.10 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q051 double rectifier common mains .................................... 37
5.3.11 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q051 double rectifier common mains 600 V .......................... 38
5.4 Battery ..................................................................................................................................... 39
5.4.1 Battery data and charging ....................................................................................................... 39
5.4.2 Battery charging with temperature tracking (optional) ............................................................ 40
5.5 Battery monitor ........................................................................................................................ 42
5.6 Battery circuit test ................................................................................................................... 43
5.7 Battery capacity test ................................................................................................................ 43
5.8 Manual bypass (operation/bypass) ......................................................................................... 44
5.9 Static bypass ........................................................................................................................... 44
5.10 Event recorder (event memory) .............................................................................................. 44
5.11 Backfeed protection ................................................................................................................ 45
6 Operating elements and important components......................................................46
6.1 Alphanumerical display and operating panel .......................................................................... 46
6.1.1 LED- Operating panel ............................................................................................................. 47
6.1.2 LED-strip ................................................................................................................................. 47
6.1.3 Display .................................................................................................................................... 48
6.2 TFT, Touch-Display and operating panel (optional) ............................................................... 49
6.2.1 Visual layout ............................................................................................................................ 49
6.2.2 TFT Mechanical design........................................................................................................... 50
6.2.3 Operating elements:................................................................................................................ 51
6.3 Controller board „A100“ .......................................................................................................... 55
6.4 A230 I/O card, A330 expansion card ...................................................................................... 56
6.4.1 Customer connection of A230 (only systems with this terminals) .......................................... 57
6.4.2 LEDs on A230 ......................................................................................................................... 58
6.4.3 Battery temperature sensor on A230 ...................................................................................... 59
6.4.4 A330 expansion card .............................................................................................................. 60
6.4.5 Customer connection of A330 (only systems with this terminals) .......................................... 61
6.4.6 LEDs on A330 ......................................................................................................................... 62
6.4.7 Relay contacts (external messages) A230, A330 ................................................................... 63
6.4.8 Digital inputs A230, A330........................................................................................................ 65
6.4.9 Digital input: Manual bypass ................................................................................................... 66
6.4.10 Digital input: External output breaker ...................................................................................... 67
6.4.11 Digital input: External battery breaker ..................................................................................... 67
6.4.12 Digital input: Coupling switch .................................................................................................. 67
6.4.13 Digital input: Battery charging off ............................................................................................ 67
6.4.14 Digital input: Remote Power OFF ........................................................................................... 68
6.4.15 Digital input: Remote On ......................................................................................................... 68
6.4.16 Digital input: Remote bypass .................................................................................................. 68
6.4.17 Digital input: Diesel operation ................................................................................................. 69
6.4.18 Digital input: Disable bypass ................................................................................................... 69
7 Assembling ..................................................................................................................70
7.1 Installation location requirements ........................................................................................... 72
7.1.1 Subsurface .............................................................................................................................. 72
V 1.23 II 4999 en
7.1.2 Room atmosphere .................................................................................................................. 72
7.1.3 Space requirement.................................................................................................................. 73
7.1.4 Escape route ........................................................................................................................... 73
7.2 Tools required ......................................................................................................................... 74
7.3 Preparing components ............................................................................................................ 75
7.4 Assembling the system cabinet .............................................................................................. 75
7.4.1 Assembly of several cabinet units .......................................................................................... 75
8 Installation ................................................................................................................... 76
8.1 Preparation for installation ...................................................................................................... 79
8.2 Requirements for electrical connection................................................................................... 80
8.2.1 Cable entry from below ........................................................................................................... 81
8.2.2 Cable entry from above .......................................................................................................... 82
8.2.3 Incoming mains supply ........................................................................................................... 83
8.2.4 Network configurations ........................................................................................................... 83
8.3 Earthing................................................................................................................................... 84
8.3.1 Views busbar and stud for protective earthing conductor connection .................................... 85
8.4 AC connections ....................................................................................................................... 86
8.4.1 Main AC connection ................................................................................................................ 87
8.4.2 Main power connection X001 (rectifier) .................................................................................. 88
8.4.3 Mains connection bypass input X005 ..................................................................................... 90
8.4.4 System output X006 ............................................................................................................... 91
8.5 Recommended cable cross-sections main AC input .............................................................. 92
8.5.1 Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) (separated mains) (SCR) ........................................... 93
8.5.2 Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) (separated mains) (IGBT) .......................................... 94
8.5.3 Cable cross-sections X005 (separated mains) (IGBT & SCR) ............................................... 95
8.5.4 Cable cross-sections X005 (common mains) (SCR) .............................................................. 97
8.5.5 Cable cross-sections X005 (common mains) (IGBT) ............................................................. 98
8.5.6 Cable cross-sections X006 Output (IGBT/SCR)..................................................................... 99
8.6 Recommended AC safety equipment and selectivity ........................................................... 101
8.6.1 AC- Fuse main power X001 (separated mains) (IGBT)........................................................ 102
8.6.2 AC- Fuse main power X001 (separated mains) (SCR) ........................................................ 103
8.6.3 AC- Fuse main power X005 (separated mains) (IGBT & SCR) ........................................... 104
8.6.4 AC- Fuse main power X005 (common mains) (IGBT) .......................................................... 105
8.6.5 AC- Fuse main power X005 (common mains) (SCR)........................................................... 106
8.7 DC connection (battery) ........................................................................................................ 107
8.7.1 Battery connection range X004 ............................................................................................ 108
8.8 Recommended cable cross-sections DC (battery) ............................................................... 109
8.8.1 Cable cross-sections battery input X004 at 125 V................................................................ 110
8.9 Recommended DC safety equipment and selectivity ........................................................... 111
8.9.1 DC battery input fuse Q100 (X004) at 125 V ........................................................................ 111
8.9.4 Switch batteries to one device .............................................................................................. 112
8.10 Connecting external control lines (signal wiring) .................................................................. 113
8.10.1 Installation of digital inputs (control lines) ............................................................................. 114
8.10.2 Paralleling signaling wires (optional) .................................................................................... 116
8.10.3 REMOTE OFF (digital input) ................................................................................................. 118
8.10.4 EMERGENCY POWER OFF ................................................................................................ 118
8.10.5 Connecting the voltage-free relays (status) .......................................................................... 118
8.11 Notice sign Backfeed Protection ........................................................................................... 118
8.12 Parallel operation with coupling switch (optional) ................................................................. 119
8.13 Wiring the parallel function ................................................................................................... 121
V 1.23 III 4999 en

8.13.1 Block diagram “Common parallel wiring for 2 units” .............................................................121
8.13.2 Block diagram “Parallel wiring for 4 units” ............................................................................122
8.14 Wiring the “Coupling switch” (group connector)....................................................................123
8.14.1 Parallel wiring for 2 units and “Coupling switch” (group connector) .....................................123
8.14.2 Block diagram “Control wiring for 2x2 coupling switch (group connector) system” ..............124
8.14.3 Block diagram “Parallel wiring for 2x2 units and coupling switch (group connector)............125
8.14.4 Sychronisation wiring for coupling system (group connector) of 2x2 units ...........................126
8.15 Configuration “A100” for parallel operation ...........................................................................127
8.15.1 DIP Switches “A100” for parallel operation ...........................................................................128
8.16 Install wiring the parallel function (optional) ..........................................................................129
8.16.1 Stripping data cables ............................................................................................................129
8.16.2 Earthing data cables .............................................................................................................129
8.16.3 Fixing data cables .................................................................................................................129
8.16.4 CAN Bus connection .............................................................................................................130
8.16.5 24V-Control cables ...............................................................................................................130
9 Commissioning .........................................................................................................131
9.1 Tools required .......................................................................................................................131
9.2 Preparation for commissioning .............................................................................................132
9.2.1 Disconnector “Q005” manual bypass switch (only systems with Q005) ...............................132
9.2.2 Disconnector “Q051” mains supply switch (only systems with Q051) ..................................132
9.2.3 Disconnector “Q052” system output switch (only systems with Q052).................................132
9.2.4 Make-before-break switch Q500 (optional)...........................................................................133
9.2.5 Battery breaker Q100 ............................................................................................................134
9.2.6 DC fuse “Q400” internal power supply (system) ...................................................................135
9.2.7 AC circuit breaker “Q401” for internal power supply (system) ..............................................135
9.2.8 Circuit breaker “Q520 (only systems with Q520) ..................................................................135
9.3 Checking the electrical connection mechanically .................................................................136
9.3.1 Checking the electrical connection electrically .....................................................................137
9.4 Performing commissioning....................................................................................................138
10 Alphanumerical display and operating panel menu ..............................................140
10.1 Top menu level/measured values/submenus .......................................................................140
10.2 Event menu ...........................................................................................................................143
11 Alphanumerical display: Settings in the configuration main menu .....................144
11.1 Configuration/Settings ...........................................................................................................144
11.2 Menu Language ....................................................................................................................145
11.3 Menu Date/Time ...................................................................................................................146
11.4 Menu Print Events/Stat. ........................................................................................................148
11.5 Menu Save settings (Setup)..................................................................................................149
11.6 Menu Autostart ......................................................................................................................150
11.7 Menu Contrast and brightness ..............................................................................................152
11.8 Menu Output voltage .............................................................................................................153
11.9 Menu Password ....................................................................................................................154
11.9.1 Password entry .....................................................................................................................154
11.9.2 Change Password .................................................................................................................156
11.10 Menu Software versions .......................................................................................................157
11.11 Menu Type and serial-no. .....................................................................................................159
11.12 Menu Battery charging ..........................................................................................................160
11.12.1 Setting high current charging ................................................................................................160
11.12.2 Capacity test .........................................................................................................................161
11.12.3 Charging off...........................................................................................................................166
11.13 Battery – Central battery for parallel operation .....................................................................168
11.14 Boost charging ......................................................................................................................170
11.14.1 Switching on (boost) charging manually ...............................................................................170
11.14.2 (Boost) charge abort .............................................................................................................172
V 1.23 IV 4999 en
11.14.3 Auto charging ........................................................................................................................ 172
11.15 Menu Key lock (password protection)................................................................................... 173
11.16 Menu Parallel operation (optional) ........................................................................................ 175
11.17 Menu Disable bypass ........................................................................................................... 177
11.18 Menu Synchronisation .......................................................................................................... 179
11.19 Menu Battery limits ............................................................................................................... 180
12 Touch display and operating panel ........................................................................ 181
12.1 Settings in the configuration main menu .............................................................................. 181
12.2 Settings and options ............................................................................................................. 181
12.3 Security (read: PW0, write: PW0) ......................................................................................... 181
12.3.1 Change password level (read: PW0, write: PW0) ................................................................ 182
12.3.2 Change password (read: PW1, write: PW1) ......................................................................... 182
12.3.3 Key lock (read: PW1, write: PW1) ........................................................................................ 183
12.4 General settings (read: PW1, write: PW1) ............................................................................ 183
12.4.1 Display (read: PW1, write: PW1) .......................................................................................... 183
12.4.2 Date/Time (read: PW1, write: PW1) ..................................................................................... 186
12.4.3 Presentation (read: PW1, write: PW1) .................................................................................. 187
12.5 System settings (read: PW1, write: PW1)............................................................................. 189
12.5.1 Complete system (read: PW1, write: PW2) .......................................................................... 189
12.5.2 Battery management (read: PW1, write: PW1/PW2)............................................................ 197
12.6 System (information) (read: PW1, write: PW1) ..................................................................... 201
12.6.1 Events (read: PW1, write: PW1) ........................................................................................... 201
12.6.2 System type (read: PW1, write: PW1) .................................................................................. 202
12.6.3 Software versions ................................................................................................................. 202
12.6.4 Detailed measurements (read: PW1, write: PW1) ................................................................ 203
12.7 Language (read: PW1, write: PW1) ...................................................................................... 204
13 Operation, systems with alphanumerical display ................................................. 205
13.1 Basics ................................................................................................................................... 205
13.2 Single operation .................................................................................................................... 206
13.2.1 Starting normal/mains priority operation ............................................................................... 206
13.2.2 Switching normal operation to bypass operation .................................................................. 210
13.2.3 Switching mains priority operation to bypass operation (option) .......................................... 212
13.2.4 Switching bypass operation to normal operation/mains priority operation ........................... 214
13.2.5 Switching on manual bypass – maintenance ....................................................................... 216
13.2.6 Switching manual bypass operation to normal/mains priority operation .............................. 218
13.2.7 Switching on bypass operation ............................................................................................. 220
13.2.8 Switching off bypass operation ............................................................................................. 221
13.2.9 Switching off normal operation – switching off the system ................................................... 222
13.2.10 Switching off mains priority operation – switching off the system (option) ........................... 224
13.3 Battery operation / mains failure and return ......................................................................... 226
13.3.1 Mains failure and return in normal operation ........................................................................ 227
13.3.2 Mains failure and return in mains priority mode (option) ...................................................... 229
13.4 Faults .................................................................................................................................... 231
13.5 Black-start (Option) ............................................................................................................... 232
13.5.1 Black start, Start up procedure ............................................................................................. 233
13.5.2 Black start, with battery voltage and closed battery breaker Q100 ...................................... 235
13.5.3 Black start, faults................................................................................................................... 236
13.6 Manual bypass (only during maintenance work by the manufacturer) ................................. 238
13.6.1 Manual bypass (systems with Q005, Q051, Q052) .............................................................. 239
13.6.2 Manual bypass for systems with make-before-break switch Q500 (Option) ........................ 240
13.7 Make-before-break switch Q500 (Option) – Using test function.......................................... 241
13.7.1 Using test function make-before-break switch – Starting from state “UPS off” .................... 242
13.7.2 Using test function make-before-break switch – Starting from state “normal operation” ..... 245
V 1.23 V 4999 en
13.7.3 Using test function make-before-break switch – Starting from state “mains priority
operation” (option) ..........................................................................................................................................247
13.7.4 Using test function make-before-break switch – Starting from state “bypass operation” .....250
13.8 Parallel operation (alphanumerical display) ..........................................................................252
13.8.1 General, redundancy and power parallel considerations......................................................252
13.8.2 Starting a parallel system......................................................................................................257
13.8.3 Starting a parallel system without bypass mains ..................................................................263
13.8.4 Isolation one unit from a parallel system – Maintenance ......................................................267
13.8.5 Isolation one unit from a parallel system in mains priority mode (option) .............................270
13.8.6 Switching back one unit on a running parallel system – Maintenance .................................273
13.8.7 Switching a parallel system from normal operation to bypass operation..............................275
13.8.8 Switching a parallel system from mains priority operation to bypass operation ...................276
13.8.9 Switching a parallel system from bypass operation to normal operation..............................278
13.8.10 Switching on bypass operation .............................................................................................282
13.8.11 Switching off bypass operation .............................................................................................282
13.8.12 Black – Start up procedure for a parallel system (Option) ....................................................282
14 Operation, systems with touch display ...................................................................283
15 Interface and software options ................................................................................284
15.1 Communication gateway (optional).......................................................................................284
15.2 MODBUS - Profibus adapter (optional) ................................................................................286
15.3 SNMP Adapter (optional) ......................................................................................................289
15.3.1 Shutdown software (optional) ...............................................................................................291
15.4 MODBUS protocol ................................................................................................................292
15.4.1 LED-Marker (Mimic diagram) ................................................................................................293
15.4.2 Measurement Pages .............................................................................................................295
15.5 MODBUS protocol structure .................................................................................................309
15.5.1 Data telegram structure ........................................................................................................309
15.5.2 Data telegram structure ........................................................................................................309
15.5.3 Calculating the check sum ....................................................................................................310
15.5.4 Processing functions .............................................................................................................311
15.6 RS-232/422/485 to fiber converters (optional) ......................................................................313
15.6.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................313
15.6.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................314
15.6.3 Dimensions ...........................................................................................................................315
15.6.4 Switch Setting .......................................................................................................................316
15.6.5 LED Description ....................................................................................................................318
15.7 Protocol converter IEC-61850...............................................................................................319
15.7.1 Views.....................................................................................................................................319
15.7.2 Hardware Installation ............................................................................................................320
15.7.3 Configuration .........................................................................................................................321
15.7.4 Admin Password ...................................................................................................................324
15.7.5 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................324
15.7.6 Diagnostics............................................................................................................................325
15.7.7 Restart...................................................................................................................................331
16 Hardware options ......................................................................................................332
16.1 Battery symmetry monitoring (optional) ................................................................................332
16.2 AC earth-fault monitoring (optional) ......................................................................................333
16.3 DC earth-fault monitoring (optional) ......................................................................................333
16.4 Cabinet lighting (optional) .....................................................................................................334
16.5 Cabinet heaters (optional).....................................................................................................334
16.6 Extra signaling terminals (optional) .......................................................................................334
16.7 Current monitoring relay (optional) .......................................................................................335
16.8 Fan and filter units (optional) ................................................................................................337
16.9 Harmonic filter for systems with thyristor rectifier (option) ....................................................337
V 1.23 VI 4999 en
17 Isolating the system complete ................................................................................ 338
17.1 Schematic diagram external separators (example) .............................................................. 340
17.2 Check isolation...................................................................................................................... 341
18 Maintenance management ....................................................................................... 343
18.1 General information for maintenance ................................................................................... 345
18.2 Inspection.............................................................................................................................. 346
18.3 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................... 347
18.3.1 Maintenance interval ............................................................................................................. 347
18.3.2 Battery maintenance ............................................................................................................. 348
18.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 349
18.4.1 Replace filter mats (only systems with filter) ........................................................................ 350
18.4.2 Replacing the battery on the controller card A100 ............................................................... 351
18.5 Measuring the controller board battery voltage .................................................................... 352
18.6 Firmware update ................................................................................................................... 352
18.7 Safety check in accordance with DGUV Provision 3 ............................................................ 352
19 Spare part list ............................................................................................................ 353
19.1 General spare parts list ......................................................................................................... 353
20 Decommissioning and dismantling ........................................................................ 354
20.1 Switching off the system ....................................................................................................... 354
20.1.1 Disconnect the AC and DC supply........................................................................................ 354
21 Disposal ..................................................................................................................... 355
21.1 Packaging ............................................................................................................................. 355
21.2 Disposal of components ....................................................................................................... 355
21.3 Disposal of batteries ............................................................................................................. 356
22 Abbreviations used .................................................................................................. 357
23 Appendix ................................................................................................................... 358
23.1 Fault event messages and their cause ................................................................................. 358
23.2 Operational event messages ................................................................................................ 363
23.2.1 Rectifier ................................................................................................................................. 363
23.2.2 Inverter/output ....................................................................................................................... 364
23.2.3 Bypass .................................................................................................................................. 365
23.2.4 Pre-charging ......................................................................................................................... 365
23.2.5 Operating elements .............................................................................................................. 366
23.2.6 I/O cards A230/A330 ............................................................................................................ 367
23.2.7 Parallel operation (OPTION)................................................................................................. 367
24 Contact partners in the Service department .......................................................... 368
V 1.23 VII 4999 en

List of figure
Figure 1-1: System type plate (example)................................................................................................. 1
Figure 3-1: TILTWatch® ok ................................................................................................................... 19
Figure 3-2: TILTWatch® red .................................................................................................................. 19
Figure 3-3: Symbol center of gravity...................................................................................................... 19
Figure 3-4: Transport with lifting belts ................................................................................................... 20
Figure 3-5: Swivel lifting eyes vertical ................................................................................................... 21
Figure 3-6: Swivel lifting eye vertical transport ...................................................................................... 21
Figure 3-7: Transport ............................................................................................................................. 22
Figure 3-8: Crane eyelet example ......................................................................................................... 24
Figure 5-1: Front view ENERTRONIC I (example 80 kVA) ................................................................... 27
Figure 5-2: Schematic diagram IGBT 1-ph K006 powerblock ............................................................... 28
Figure 5-3: Schematic diagram IGBT 3-ph K006 powerblock ............................................................... 29
Figure 5-4: Schematic diagram IGBT 1-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter .................................. 30
Figure 5-5: Schematic diagram IGBT 3-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter .................................. 31
Figure 5-6: Schematic diagram SCR 1-ph K006 powerblock ................................................................ 32
Figure 5-7: Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph K006 powerblock ................................................................ 33
Figure 5-8: Schematic diagram SCR 1-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter ................................... 34
Figure 5-9: Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter ................................... 35
Figure 5-10: Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q500 double rectifier separate rectifier and inverter ........ 36
Figure 5-11: Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q051 double rectifier common mains .............................. 37
Figure 5-12: Schematic diagram of the ENERTRONIC I ...................................................................... 38
Figure 5-13: Battery voltage compensation characteristic .................................................................... 41
Figure 6-1: Alphanumerical display and operating panel ...................................................................... 46
Figure 6-2: LED strip.............................................................................................................................. 47
Figure 6-3: Display................................................................................................................................. 48
Figure 6-4: Example for status messages in the display ....................................................................... 48
Figure 6-5: Visual layout of the display and control unit TFT ................................................................ 49
Figure 6-6: Mechanical design of the display and control unit TFT A240 ............................................. 50
Figure 6-7: Controller board A100 ......................................................................................................... 55
Figure 6-8: I/O card A230 ...................................................................................................................... 56
Figure 6-9: BR24 A230 .......................................................................................................................... 56
Figure 6-10: Customer connection of A230 ........................................................................................... 57
Figure 6-11: I/O card A230 X400........................................................................................................... 59
Figure 6-12: Expansion card A330 ........................................................................................................ 60
Figure 7-1: Tools.................................................................................................................................... 74
Figure 8-1: Cable entries with IP21 ....................................................................................................... 82
Figure 8-2: View earthing busbar .......................................................................................................... 85
Figure 8-3: View detail earthing busbar ................................................................................................. 85
Figure 8-4: Protective earthing stud ...................................................................................................... 85
Figure 8-5: Mains connection rectifier input X001 ................................................................................. 88
Figure 8-6: Type plate common mains input ......................................................................................... 88
Figure 8-7: Type plate separated mains input ....................................................................................... 88
Figure 8-8: Mains connection bypass input X005 three phases (example) .......................................... 90
Figure 8-9: Mains connection bypass input X005 single phase (example) ........................................... 90
Figure 8-10: Connection range system output X006 three phases ....................................................... 91
Figure 8-11: Connection range system output X006 single phase ....................................................... 91
V 1.23 VIII 4999 en

Figure 8-12: Battery connection range X004 (example) ......................................................................108
Figure 8-13: Example wiring for external manual bypass with internal 24 V supply for digital input ...114
Figure 8-14: Example wiring for external manual bypass with external 24 V supply for digital input ..114
Figure 8-15: Example wiring for installation of more than one digital input with internal 24 V supply. 115
Figure 8-16: Example wiring for paralleling of digital input with internal 24 V supply. .........................115
Figure 8-17: Example wiring for paralleling of digital input with external 24 V supply. ........................116
Figure 8-18: Example wiring for paralleling of digital input with internal 24 V supply ..........................117
Figure 8-19: Notice sign .......................................................................................................................118
Figure 8-20: Block diagram “Common parallel wiring for 2 units” ........................................................121
Figure 8-21: Block diagram “Parallel wiring for 4 units” .......................................................................122
Figure 8-22: Parallel wiring for 2 units and group connector................................................................123
Figure 8-23: Block diagram “Control wiring for 2x2 coupling switch system” .......................................124
Figure 8-24: Block diagram “Parallel wiring for 2x2 units and group connector...................................125
Figure 8-25: Sychronisation wiring for coupling system of 2x2 units ...................................................126
Figure 8-26: Controller board A100 ......................................................................................................127
Figure 8-27: Master address ................................................................................................................127
Figure 8-28: 24 V Slave address ..........................................................................................................127
Figure 8-29: Stripping data cable .........................................................................................................129
Figure 8-30: Earthing data cable ..........................................................................................................129
Figure 8-31: Fixing data cable ..............................................................................................................129
Figure 8-32: CAN Bus connector .........................................................................................................130
Figure 8-33: Master 24 V control cable ................................................................................................130
Figure 8-34: Slave 24 V control cable ..................................................................................................130
Figure 9-1: Disconnector Q005 bypass ................................................................................................132
Figure 9-2: Disconnector Q051 mains supply ......................................................................................132
Figure 9-3: Disconnector Q052 system output .....................................................................................132
Figure 9-4: Q500 position AUTO ..........................................................................................................133
Figure 9-5: Battery breaker Q100 .........................................................................................................134
Figure 9-6: DC fuse “Q400” ..................................................................................................................135
Figure 9-7: AC circuit breaker “Q401” ..................................................................................................135
Figure 9-8: circuit breaker “Q520” ........................................................................................................135
Figure 9-9: Disconnector Q052 on .......................................................................................................138
Figure 9-10: Make-before-break switch................................................................................................138
Figure 9-11: Disconnector Q051 on .....................................................................................................139
Figure 9-12: Disconnector Q520 on (single phase) ............................................................................139
Figure 9-13: Disconnector Q520 on (three phases) .............................................................................139
Figure 12-1: “Settings/Options” menu ..................................................................................................181
Figure 12-2: “Security” menu ................................................................................................................181
Figure 12-3: Pop-up for entering the password ....................................................................................182
Figure 12-4: “General settings” menu ..................................................................................................183
Figure 12-5: Displaytest........................................................................................................................184
Figure 12-6: Touchpaneltest ................................................................................................................185
Figure 12-7: Entry window for setting date and time ............................................................................186
Figure 12-8: Selection window for the presentation of voltage, temperature and load (bar graphs) ...187
Figure 12-9: Presentation of system loading by means of bar graphs .................................................187
Figure 12-10: Block diagram of the UPS system output ......................................................................188
Figure 12-11: Diagram Smax = f(CosPhiLoad) - normalised presentation ..........................................188
Figure 12-12: “System settings” menu .................................................................................................189
Figure 12-13: “Complete system” menu ...............................................................................................189
V 1.23 IX 4999 en
Figure 12-14: Default activation of external synchronisation............................................................... 192
Figure 12-15: Display of bypass measurements when bypass is available ........................................ 192
Figure 12-16: Display of phase shifting angle when bypass is available ............................................ 192
Figure 12-17: Display of bypass measurements when bypass is not available (U) ............................ 193
Figure 12-18: Display of phase angle when bypass is not available (U)............................................. 193
Figure 12-19: Display of bypass measurements when bypass is not available (f).............................. 193
Figure 12-20: Display of phase angle when bypass is not available (f) .............................................. 193
Figure 12-21: Display of bypass measurements when bypass is not available (U, f, ext.) ................. 194
Figure 12-22: Display of phase angle when bypass is not available (U, f, ext.) .................................. 194
Figure 12-23: Setting for output voltage and autostart ........................................................................ 195
Figure 12-24: Bypass management settings ....................................................................................... 195
Figure 12-25: General battery management settings .......................................................................... 198
Figure 12-26: Service macro for carrying out a battery capacity test .................................................. 198
Figure 12-27: Equalisation management settings ............................................................................... 199
Figure 12-28: Setting the battery limits ................................................................................................ 200
Figure 12-29: “System” menu .............................................................................................................. 201
Figure 12-30: Depiction of “Events” ..................................................................................................... 201
Figure 12-31: Display of system type .................................................................................................. 202
Figure 12-32: Display of software versions ......................................................................................... 202
Figure 12-33: Display of operating variables ....................................................................................... 203
Figure 12-34: Detailed list of all inverter data ...................................................................................... 203
Figure 12-35: Display of temperatures ................................................................................................ 203
Figure 12-36: Display of fan speeds and statistics .............................................................................. 204
Figure 12-37: Display of language selection ....................................................................................... 204
Figure 12-38: Pop-up for restarting the display and control unit ......................................................... 204
Figure 13-1: Disconnector Q005 bypass ............................................................................................. 239
Figure 13-2: Disconnector Q052 system output .................................................................................. 239
Figure 13-3: Disconnector Q051 mains supply ................................................................................... 239
Figure 13-4: Make-before-break switch, position “TEST" ................................................................... 240
Figure 13-5: Make-before-break switch, position “BYPASS” .............................................................. 240
Figure 13-6: Make-before-break switch position factory setting “AUTO” ............................................ 241
Figure 15-1: Communication gateway A250 ....................................................................................... 284
Figure 15-2: Profibus adapter .............................................................................................................. 286
Figure 15-3: Profibus address switch .................................................................................................. 286
Figure 15-4: Bus termination configuration for PROFIBUS (see PROFIBUS standard) ..................... 286
Figure 15-5: SNMP adapter ................................................................................................................. 289
Figure 15-6: UPSMAN and RCCMD in a network environment .......................................................... 291
Figure 15-7: Alphanumerical display and operating panel .................................................................. 293
Figure 15-8: RS-232/422/485 to fiber converter .................................................................................. 313
Figure 15-9: Protocol converter IEC-61850front view ......................................................................... 319
Figure 15-10: Protocol converter rear view ......................................................................................... 319
Figure 16-1: Battery symmetry monitor unit ........................................................................................ 332
Figure 16-2: Example installation battery monitor ............................................................................... 332
Figure 16-3: AC Mains insulation Monitor unit .................................................................................... 333
Figure 16-4: DC Insulation Monitor unit ............................................................................................... 333
Figure 16-5: Cabinet lightning with switch and power connector ........................................................ 334
Figure 16-6: Cabinet heaters optional ................................................................................................. 334
Figure 16-7: Extra signaling terminals optional ................................................................................... 334
Figure 16-8: Current monitoring relay.................................................................................................. 335
V 1.23 X 4999 en
Figure 16-9: Filter unit ..........................................................................................................................337
Figure 17-1: Schematic diagram external separators (example) .........................................................340
Figure 17-2: battery test free from voltage ..........................................................................................341
Figure 17-3: main power input X001 ....................................................................................................341
Figure 17-4: Bypass input X005 three and single phase .....................................................................341
Figure 17-5: Output X006 three and single phase ...............................................................................341
Figure 18-1: Filter frame .......................................................................................................................350
Figure 18-2: Battery controller ..............................................................................................................351
V 1.23 XI 4999 en
List of tables
Table 1: Type code (example) ................................................................................................................. 2
Table 2: Material for crane transport ..................................................................................................... 24
Table 3: Devices IGBT 1-ph powerblock ............................................................................................... 28
Table 4: Devices IGBT 3-ph powerblock ............................................................................................... 29
Table 5: Devices IGBT 1-ph separate rectifier and inverter .................................................................. 30
Table 6: Devices IGBT 3-ph separate rectifier and inverter .................................................................. 31
Table 7: Devices SCR 1-ph powerblock ................................................................................................ 32
Table 8: Devices SCR 3-ph powerblock ................................................................................................ 33
Table 9: Devices SCR 1-ph separate rectifier and inverter ................................................................... 34
Table 10: Devices SCR 3-ph separate rectifier and inverter ................................................................. 35
Table 11: Devices SCR 3-ph Q500 double rectifier separate rectifier and inverter .............................. 36
Table 12: Devices SCR 3-ph Q051 double rectifier .............................................................................. 37
Table 13: Key schematic diagram ......................................................................................................... 38
Table 14: LED operation panel .............................................................................................................. 47
Table 15: X003 for A230 connection ..................................................................................................... 57
Table 16: LEDs on A230 ....................................................................................................................... 58
Table 17: X003 for A330 connection ..................................................................................................... 61
Table 18: LEDs on A330 ....................................................................................................................... 62
Table 19: Data A230/A330 X3 ............................................................................................................... 63
Table 20: Relay A230 X3 assignment ................................................................................................... 64
Table 21: Relay A330 X3 assignment ................................................................................................... 64
Table 22: Relay contact data ................................................................................................................. 64
Table 23: Data A230/A330 X12 ............................................................................................................. 65
Table 24: A230 assignment X12 ........................................................................................................... 65
Table 25: A330 assignment X12 ........................................................................................................... 65
Table 26: A230/A330 Input data X12 .................................................................................................... 66
Table 27: BR24 ...................................................................................................................................... 66
Table 28: Protective earthing conductor connection ............................................................................. 84
Table 29: Mains connection rectifier input X001 ................................................................................... 89
Table 30: Torque values for X001 ......................................................................................................... 89
Table 31: Mains connection bypass input X005 .................................................................................... 90
Table 33: Connection range system X006 ............................................................................................ 91
Table 35: Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) separated mains (SCR) ............................................ 93
Table 36: Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) separated mains (IGBT) ........................................... 94
Table 37: Cable cross-sections X005 Bypass input (separated mains) ................................................ 96
Table 38: Cable cross-sections X005 (Rectifier and ) common mains (SCR) ...................................... 97
Table 39: Cross-sections common mains X005 (IGBT) ........................................................................ 98
Table 40: Cable cross-sections X006 Output (IGBT/SCR) ................................................................. 100
Table 41: AC- Fuse main power X001 (separated mains) (IGBT) ...................................................... 102
Table 42: AC- Fuse main power X001 (separated mains) (SCR) ....................................................... 103
Table 43: AC- Fuse main power X005 (separated mains) (SCR) ....................................................... 104
Table 44: AC- Fuse main power X005 (common mains) (IGBT) ........................................................ 105
Table 45: AC- Fuse main power X005 (common mains) (SCR) ......................................................... 106
Table 46: Battery connection range X004 ........................................................................................... 108
Table 47: Cross-sections battery- input X004 at 125 V ....................................................................... 110
V 1.23 XII 4999 en

Table 48: Cross-sections battery- input X004 at 216 V........................................................................110
Table 49: Cross-sections battery- input X004 at 240 V........................................................................110
Table 50: DC battery input fuse Q100 at 125 V ...................................................................................111
Table 53: Spare part list .......................................................................................................................353
Table 54: Abbreviations used ...............................................................................................................357
Table 55: Fault event messages and their cause ................................................................................362
Table 56: Operational event messages recitier ....................................................................................363
Table 57: Operational event messages inverter/output .......................................................................364
Table 58: Operational event messages bypass ...................................................................................365
Table 59: Operational event messages pre-charging ..........................................................................365
Table 60: Operational event messages opertating elements ...............................................................366
Table 61:Operational event messages I/O cards .................................................................................367
Table 62: Operational event messages parallel operation ...................................................................367
V 1.23 XIII 4999 en

1 Basic notes
NOTICE
Danger due to improper handling of the product
You must have read and understood the instructions, to be able to safely
install and use the product!
This documentation contains important instructions that must be followed

during installation and maintenance.
As well as the instructions, the generally applicable and local regulations of the energy
supply companies, accident prevention regulations and the environmental protection
regulations must also be observed.
The installer and the user must have access to these instructions at all times.
During installation of the product in USA and CANADA, requirements
specified in National Electrical Code NFPA 70 and Canadian Electrical
Code (CEC) shall be followed.
Special attention must paid to the safety instructions. This includes transport, assembly
and installation, operation, maintenance, dismantling and disposal.
The operator must ensure that the instructions are permanently available at the product,
and that the personnel who work with the product are aware of the directives in these
instructions.
The safety and danger instructions on the product must not manipulated.
1.1 Applicability
This documentation is intended for users and qualified installers.
It contains a description of how to safely assemble, install, configure, commission and
operate the system.
1.2 Document storage

Keep the operating instructions in a safe place.
In case of an operator change, the documentation must passed onto the successor.
1.3 Purpose of the instructions

These instructions were created to the best of our knowledge. They are intended to
introduce the operator, the user and the maintenance personnel of the system to the
setup, function, operation and maintenance, as well as to the safety-relevant conditions.
Furthermore, these instructions are to ensure that trained and qualified personnel can
operate and maintain the system as intended.
Supplementary information to these instructions must requested from the manufacturer or
supplier.
1.4 Special information

This is a product for commercial and industrial use in the second
environment. Restrictions regarding the installation or additional measures
may be necessary to prevent interference.
1.4.1 Description of the accumulator

The accumulator will called battery in these instructions and in the display unit. For
reasons of better readability, continuous implementation of differentiating formulations
had been dispensed with.
V 1.23 1 4999 en
1.5 Legal notes
1.5.1 Warranty
Warranty or guarantee claims and the warranty period depend on the respective
contractual relationship, as well as the general terms and conditions of the manufacturer.
Details about the manufacturer’s warranty can be found in the contractual arrangements.
Warranty and liability claims are generally excluded if the damage is the result of faulty
assembly, improper use or force majeure. The information in these instructions was
checked carefully. However, no liability can be assumed for errors.
If any prescribed services are not performed regularly or not on time according to
manufacturer specifications during the system warranty, a decision about a warranty can
only be made once the findings are available.
1.5.2 Liability exclusion

The manufacturer has checked the contents of the documentation for correspondence
with the hardware and software that is described. Nevertheless, errors cannot be ruled
out, meaning that the manufacturer cannot guarantee complete correspondence. The
contents of this documentation are checked at regular intervals, and any corrections that
are needed are contained within the versions that follow.
Any abuse of the product shall lead to cancellation of the warranty, the guarantee and the
general liability of the manufacturer.
The manufacturer is not liable for damage as a result of non-observance of these
instructions.
The product may only be opened by an experienced electrician, if this is at all permitted.
The electrician must be familiar with and adhere to the standards and regulations of the
supply company and the work safety regulations.
Any use other than that described in the documentation is considered to be incorrect. The
manufacturer is not responsible for resulting damage.
Modifications to the product or the documentation are forbidden.
1.5.3 Software changes

If a software change is performed without the knowledge and approval of the
manufacturer, the warranty and guarantee claim becomes void.
1.5.4 Hardware changes

If changes are made to the housing or other system components without the knowledge
and approval of the manufacturer, the warranty and guarantee claim becomes void.
1.5.5 Figures and drawings

For general illustrative purposes, these instructions include figures and drawings. The
functional possibilities and representations can deviate from the present system.
1.5.6 Trademarks
All Trademarks used, even if these are not marked separately, are the property of their
respective owners and are hereby acknowledged.
1.5.7 Legal claims

Any Liability on the part of the manufacturer for consequential damage arising from
improper use or incorrect installation of the product is expressly excluded.
V 1.23 1 4999 en
1.6 Identification
The system cabinet has an unambiguous device identification (serial number). You
should make a note of this data before installation, so you have it to hand for ordering
spare parts or if you have any questions.
Have the serial number ready to hand if you contact the Customer Service with a query.
1.7 Type plates (example)

The type plate of the system can be found on the inside of the cabinet door.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11, 12 13, 14
15, 16 17, 18
19, 20 21, 22
23, 24 25, 26
27
28 31
29
30
Figure 1-1: System type plate (example)
Type plate inscription:

Field Contents
1 Manufacturer
2 Product type/classification
3 Series
4 Type/rating Field Contents
5 Serial number 6 Year of manufacture
7 Part number 8 Software version
9 Option number 10 Mode of operation
11 Current type, input 1 13 Current type, input 3
12 Current type, input 2 14 Current type, output
15 Rated input frequency 1 17 Rated input frequency 3
16 Rated input frequency 2 18 Nominal output frequency
19 Rated input voltage 1 21 Rated input voltage 3
20 Rated input voltage 2 22 Rated input voltage
23 Rated input current 1 25 Rated input current 3
24 Rated input current 2 26 Rated output current
27 cos/kW/kVA Output
28 ICW in kA
29 type of load
Free choice 31 Protection class (IP Code
30
EN 60529)
V 1.23 1 4999 en
V 1.23
D
Input current type "E" = Single-phase "D" = Three-phase alternating current
Rated input voltage in volts = xxx V

xxx
Type code:
X
Output current type "E" = Single or "D" Three-phase alternating current
Rated output voltage in volts = xxx V

xxx
1.7.1 Type code (example)
Table 1: Type code (example)

/
1.8 Declaration of conformity

Nominal output current in A (max. one decimal place)
xxx – xxx
2
/
3
Code for nominal output frequency, "2" = 50 Hz "3" = 60 Hz

r
The type code is made company-internal code:
Characteristic forced by control, "r" = IU characteristic curve

f
Smoothing of the input voltage

g
Smoothing device (excluding interference suppression) on output side

-
U
"U" = Uninterruptible Power Supply

X
"E" = Single- phase ,"D" = Three-phases

G
"G" = Unit
xxx=Power, yyy=Battery voltage

xxx-yyy
The EU declaration of conformity can be requested from the manufacturer.

I
„I“=IGBT, „S“=SCR
4999 en
2 Safety
2.5 Basic information about safety
The product is built according to the state-of-the-art and the recognized safety
regulations. Despite this, there might be danger to life and limb of the user or a third
person in case of improper use, and the product or other material assets might be
affected.
 If the product is operated by persons who are untrained or have not been
instructed.
 If the products is not used for its intended purpose.
 If the product is maintained or repaired improperly.
 If the product is not operated in technically perfect condition.
The system operates in mains, battery or bypass operation. It contains components at
which high currents and voltages are present. Provided that it has been correctly
installed, the system is earthed and corresponds to protection class: See type plate.
Installation and maintenance must only be performed by the service

engineer of the manufacturer or his contract partner.
These instructions are an essential constituent of the product, and apply exclusively to
this product from the manufacturer.
The information in these instructions is binding. The instructions must be read in full, and
the information therein must be followed at all times.
Failure to follow the action instructions and safety instructions in these instructions,
manipulation thereof or misappropriation can result in considerable danger.
In the event of erroneous operation or misuse, the life and limb of the operator or third
parties may be put at risk, the product and other assets belonging to the operator may be
damaged, or efficient working with the product may be restricted.
As well as the instructions and the binding regulations relating to the prevention of
accidents that are applicable in the country and place of use, the recognized professional
rules for safe and proper working must also be observed.
Additional warnings are provided in order to guarantee adequate safety for personnel.
Adequate safety when handling the product will only be guaranteed when this is
observed.
2.6 Safety notes

This instruction contains notes that must be taken into consideration for personal safety
and avoiding injuries and damage to property.
The notes concerning operator safety are marked with warnings. The warning instructions
are shown in descending order depending on the severity of the danger. Warnings occur
in front of an action that may potentially cause damage. Note contains details of the
nature and source of the danger, the consequences if the danger arises and measures
for averting the danger if necessary.
If you see one of these symbols in the documentation, extreme caution is required.
V 1.23 3 4999 en
2.7 Safety marking
Safety information and warnings mark hazard areas and are attached according to
DIN ISO 3864 and ANSI Z535.6.
All safety information are structured as follows:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of the danger
Possible consequences in case of non-compliance
Measures und prohibition to avoid the danger
V 1.23 4 4999 en
2.8 Safety information warning levels
DANGER
Extremely dangerous situation for persons
Failure to pay attention to this note will result in irreversible or
fatal injuries.
WARNING
Danger for persons
Failure to pay attention to this note may result in irreversible or fatal
injuries.
CAUTION
Slight danger for persons
Failure to pay attention to this note may result in minor or moderate
injuries.
NOTICE
Slight danger for persons
Failure to pay attention to this note may result in damage to property and
environmental damage and affect further operation.
Work that is marked "Electrically skilled person"

Electrically skilled person may only be carried out by an electrical expert!
2.9 Safety marking in the operating room

The access area to the operating room must have clearly visible safety markings for
unauthorized and limited access of for codes of conduct in the operating room according
to the appropriate local provisions.
In case of strong magnetic fields there must be prohibitions for persons with pacemakers
and implants made of metal.
Additional safety and warning signs can be found near the hazard areas. They provide
information about electrical risks and residual risks associated with working on the
system.
Setup of the system and safety marking for hazards with fire and rescue drawing, escape
route, phone numbers and handling are within the scope of legal provisions
IEC 60364-7-729 in the sovereignty of the system operator.
V 1.23 5 4999 en
2.10 Used symbols
Warning of obstacles on the floor
Warning of non-ionizing radiation
General prohibition
General warning
General requirement
Warning against electrical voltage
Warning against explosive materials
Risk of fire
Warning against hot surfaces
Warning! Even after disconnecting the unit from external voltage supplies
in the unit remain live.
You must observe the discharge time of the capacitors at all times!
Denotes additional information and instructions.
protection earth
Recycling mark
Identification of assemblies, which are subject to electronic scrapping

regulations.
Identification of assemblies or parts, which must be disposed of in a

specific manner. Never dispose of these components in the normal waste.
Protect against the effects of weather
Labelling of packages/shipping goods that are fragile due to their

properties.
Labelling of packages or shipping goods, with correct storage position

indicated by “Up” arrows.
V 1.23 6 4999 en
Protect from cold
Protect from direct sunlight
(DC) direct voltage or current
(AC) alternating current or voltage
V 1.23 7 4999 en
2.11 Personnel qualifications
The product to which this documentation relates must only be handled by persons who
are qualified for the respective task.
The customer must ensure that the personnel performing the respective task have the
required qualifications.
A clear distinction must be made between personnel responsibilities for the
task.
Before using the product, the customer must arrange and successfully carry out the
required training courses, further education and instruction that the personnel require.
Inadequately qualified personnel are a risk factor for which the customer of the product is
liable.
Trained personnel in the sense of the accident prevention regulations are persons who
can assess the work that has been assigned to them and recognize potential dangers on
the basis of their technical training, knowledge, experience and knowledge of the
applicable regulations.
Electrically skilled person (Qualified personnel) in the context of this information are
persons who are familiar with erection and installation, commissioning, operation,
maintenance and dismantling, and have the appropriate qualifications. He is responsible
for compliance with existing standards and regulations as e.g. the OSHA Part 1910.332.
The maintenance of the product must only be carried out by qualified and authorized
electricians.
Further education or training that is required by personnel is available from the
manufacturer or supplier.
The electrical expert in the scope of this information are persons who are familiar with
assembly and installation, commissioning, operation, maintenance and disassembly, and
have the appropriate qualifications. This person is responsible for compliance with
applicable standards and regulations.
The electrical expert with AuS certification is responsible for compliance with existing
standards and regulations, in particular VDE 0105, DGUV Provision 3 and
DGUV Rule 103, or national rules and regulations as e.g. the OSHA Part 1910.332. This
certification is required, so that work on live parts of electrical systems and operating
materials (AuS) can be performed safely.
Furthermore, the following is to be considered:
 Keep unauthorized persons away from the unit or system.
 Ensure operational safety with proper earthing, conductor dimensioning and
respective short-circuit protection.
 Observe safety notes on the device and in these operating instructions.
 Switch off all power sources before any visual inspections and maintenance work.
Protect the power sources against accidental reactivation.
Observe the following in case of measurements on the live system:
 Do not touch electrical connection points.
 Remove any jewelry from wrists and fingers.
 Ensure safe operating condition of the test materials used.
 Stand on isolated ground when working on the unit.
 Do not place any objects on the housing.
 Changes in the proximity of the device must correspond to the applicable national
standards.
V 1.23 8 4999 en
2.12 Qualification for installation and maintenance
Electrically skilled person
The electrical installation as well as all maintenance works to the electrical system must
only be carried out by an electrician in accordance with the electrical technical
regulations.
2.13 Intended use

The product may only be used for the deployment cases described in
these instructions and in the technical descriptions, and only using the
accessories and components that have been recommended and approved
by the manufacturer.
The product may only be used if it is in a technically perfect and safe

condition.
All instructions and notes in the instructions must be followed.
Operation outside the prescribed specifications are not allowed.
This system may only be operated for the uninterruptible power supply with the maximum
admissible connected load according to the technical data in the pre-described position of
use and operation.
Only this authorized use is permissible.
In the event of improper use or use for incorrect purpose, there might be
danger to life and limb of the user or third parties, and the system or other
material assets might be affected.
Among other things, incorrect use and use for incorrect purpose are:
Connection that is not fixed.
 Mobile deployment.
 Use in explosive areas.
 Usage in areas with humidity >95 % (see data sheet).
 Operation outside of specifications prescribed by the manufacturer.
Any unauthorized modifications and changes to this system, the use of spare parts and
replacement parts that have not been approved by the manufacturer or any other kind of
use of the system are not permitted.
V 1.23 9 4999 en
The system administrator must ensure that:
 Safety and operating instructions are available and complied with Operating
conditions and technical data must be observed.
 safety devices are used,
 It must be performed required maintenance.
 Maintenance personnel must immediately have notified or the system be shut
down immediately if abnormal voltages or noises, higher temperatures, vibrations
or similar occur to determine the causes.
This documentation contains all the information required for professionals in the use of
the system. Additional information and explanations for unqualified persons and for the
use of the system outside of industrial installations are not contained in this manual.
Only observe and comply with this manual, the warranty obligation of the
manufacturer applies.
V 1.23 10 4999 en
2.14 Handling of batteries
DANGER
Risk of explosion and fire caused by unsuitable batteries.
Severe injuries and/or considerable damage to property can result from
connecting the wrong batteries or batteries that are unsuitable for the
product because of their type, voltage or capacity, or from connecting
batteries that are not rechargeable.
DANGER
Risk of explosion and ignition by short circuit
The batteries are sealed gas-tight, so that during normal operation to
prevent the spread ingredients. If the housing is mechanically damaged so
ingredients can escape in gaseous form or in liquid form. Damage to the
housing may be accomplished by mechanical damage (crash, improper
handling) or by overpressure in the cell. Overpressure usually arises due to
overheating of the cell, which may be the result of an overload, a short
circuit or an overload.
DANGER
Risk of explosion and inflammation caused by heating
Batteries may not be associated with sources of heat or thrown into fire.
Risk of explosion!
DANGER
Risk of electric shock
When changing the batteries:
 Disable the chargers of battery string
 Disconnect the battery from the UPS system
The battery voltage remains at the feed still exists!
WARNING
Warning when handling batteries
Do not open or destroy batteries.
The released electrolyte is dangerous for humans and the environment!
V 1.23 11 4999 en
Recharging, servicing and changing batteries may be carried out only by qualified
personnel. This manual and the rules of the batteries Her-manufacturer must be
observed when carrying out!
When handling batteries, do not smoke and do not use open flames.
In the area of the charging batteries parked no flammable substances or spark-
generating equipment (e. g. As machine tools) may be located at a distance of at least
2 m. The electronic products with high surface temperature (e. g. As soldering iron, hot
air blower, etc.) is prohibited.
Instructions and notes of the battery manufacturers are to be observed!
A change of batteries requires an adjustment of the configuration data!

Connecting the batteries is permitted only after adjustment!
V 1.23 12 4999 en
2.15 Residual risk
DANGER
Risk of explosion and fire caused by unsuitable batteries.
Severe injuries and/or considerable damage to property can result from
connecting the wrong batteries or batteries that are unsuitable for the
product because of their type, voltage or capacity, or from connecting
batteries that are not rechargeable.
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock because of damaged cables.
Potentially fatal electric shock
DANGER
Danger caused by electromagnetic fields
Persons with pacemakers, metal implants or hearing aids may be at risk.
These persons should consult their doctor before entering the system.
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock
The system is supplied by several power sources: AC network and
batteries.
The one-side shutoff does not result in absence of voltage for the complete
system.
WARNING
Failure to pay attention to this note may result in irreversible or fatal
injuries.
WARNING
Dangerous voltages are present within the system even when
fuses have blown. For this reason, if fire should break out, do
not use water to extinguish the fire.
The standard NFPA 70 or national regulations describe
protective measures for firefighting in the area of electrical
systems.
Only use suitable means for extinguishing purposes.
V 1.23 13 4999 en
2.16 Personal protective equipment
WARNING
Risk of injury when not wearing protective equipment!
Protective equipment must be worn when transporting, setting up,
assembling, installing and maintaining the system!
It is strictly prohibited to perform assembly, installation or maintenance procedures on the

unit without the following specified personal protective equipment.
The personnel instructed with the installation or maintenance must not wear wristbands,
watches or other conductive parts.
The protective equipment to be worn is summarized in the following information labels.
The individual equipment must be specified and assessed depending on the type of risk
(particularly for electrical risks) existing for the unit.
Safety shoes Protective clothing
Use: always Use: always
Helmet Working gloves

Use: If suspended loads Use: always
present
Safety goggles
Use: always
2.17 Safety rules according to EN 50110 / NFPA 70E / VDE 0105

The 5 safety rules
Disconnect completely
Secure against re-connection
Verify that the installation is dead
Carry out earthing and short-circuiting
Provide protection against adjacent live parts
V 1.23 14 4999 en
2.18 Fire protection
WARNING
The use of water or foam as extinguishing agents in
electrical systems is prohibited.
Danger to life due to electric shock!
Use CO2 or extinguishing agent of the fire
class B.
The handling of fire, open light and smoking is prohibited in the operating room.
Inflammable materials or explosive substances are not to be stored in the operating
room.
The operating and maintenance personnel is to be demonstrably instructed regularly in
compliance with NFPA 70 or country-specific regulations on how to act in case of fire.
Perform firefighting in electrical systems according to NFPA or country-
specific standards as e.g. OSHA 1910 Subpart E or existing NFPA
standards.
 The rescue of persons takes precedent over material damage.

 Alert fire service/rescue teams.
Regularly maintain electrical systems for fire prevention in accordance with

IEC/EN 61557 or country-specific regulations.
Isolate the system immediately if there is development of smell or smoke or

fire according to the regulations! See chapter 17, Isolating the system
complete, page 338.
Notify the person responsible for the system and the maintenance
personnel and start firefighting measures if required.
V 1.23 15 4999 en
2.19 Emergency plan
The manufacturer recommends the drawing up of an emergency plan to
the operator of the system.
Exceptional circumstances can occur because of the influence of force majeure or

erroneous behavior during the operation of the system, and lead to critical operating
conditions.
In order to avoid damage or electrical loads failures, the action that the responsible
personnel must take if an incident occurs must described on site.
The production of an emergency plan must take the situation of the installation site and
the structure of the overall system into consideration.
The manufacturer does not provide a standardized emergency plan.
The manufacturer can provide assistance in drawing up an emergency

plan.
V 1.23 16 4999 en
3 Transport
DANGER
Danger to life caused by suspended loads!
In case of crane transport, suspended installation or deinstallation, the
system is to be carefully attached to lifting devices and secured. Only use
suitable and technically flawless lifting devices with sufficient load-bearing
capacity!
Never stay or work below suspended loads!
Only commission experienced expert personnel with the attachment of
loads and the instruction of crane operators. The banksman must be within
sight of the crane operator or maintain voice contact with him.
Non-observance of these instructions can lead to death or severe physical
injury.
WARNING
Risk of injury from not wearing protective equipment!
Protective equipment must be worn when transporting, setting up,
assembling, installing and maintaining the system!
WARNING
Danger caused by installation of damaged components!
Do not accept systems with visibly damaged packaging and do not install
under any circumstances.
Contact your supplier!
WARNING
Risk of breakage!
The system and components can be damaged by careless transport.
 Securely pack the system cabinet and components (Modules) for
transport purposes.
 Transport the system cabinet on a pallet.
Do not expose the components to vibrations.
WARNING
Risk due to battery impacts!
Damaged batteries may release hazardous substances that lead to
irreversible chemical burns if they come into contact with the skin.
 Batteries must be transported in the manufacturer's original
packaging.
 Remove batteries from original packaging prior to installation.
 Check that batteries are in perfect condition before use.
V 1.23 17 4999 en
CAUTION
Danger due to falling or tipping over of the system!
The weight of the system can injure a person and cause severe crushing
injuries! For this reason, the system must be lifted with suitable lifting gear
that is designed for the weight of the system.
CAUTION
Risk due to high weight!
The system and the components have a high weight.
In order to avoid injuries, attention must be paid to the weight.
CAUTION
Risk of tipping over!
The system must be transported upright.
The system must be secured to prevent it from tipping over!
The center of gravity is marked on the outside of the packaging
CAUTION
Risk of crushing due to tipping over, falling or swinging of lifted or
suspended systems.
 The system can tip over or fall due to careless or excessively fast
lifting and transportation.
 Always transport the system as close as possible to the ground.
 Use all attachment points for transport.
 Only use means of transport and lifting gear that is designed for the
weight of the system.
 Avoid fast and jerky movement during transport.
Always maintain a sufficient safety distance from the system.
The system must be transported and setup in vertical position.
When transporting the system, all modules must be removed from the
system cabinet!
The system leaves the manufacturer in electrically and mechanically perfect condition.
Special packaging ensures safe transport. The transport company is responsible for any
transport damage.
The system is transported upright on a pallet.
The Manufacturer's sales / service department must be notified of transport
damage immediately in writing (within 6 working days of receipt of the
goods at the latest).
V 1.23 18 4999 en
To identify improper handling during transport, a “SHOCKWATCH® label” is applied to the
outside packaging of the system. If the shock indicator shows the color red, the
consignment was exposed to severe shock. The cabinet might be damaged.
 The product must only be transported to the intended location in its original
packaging. The same applies for removals or returns. Attention must be paid to
securing the load.
 The product must only be transported and stored in an upright position. The
transport position must be secured during transport. Attention must be paid to the
center of gravity of the product. With this product, slight changes in position can lead
to individual components suddenly toppling due to the heavy weight.
 It must also be ensured that the product has a firm footing when placed in storage.
 Lifting belts must be used when transporting the product in an unpacked state.
These must be positioned in such a way that no damage can occur.
Figure 3-1: TILTWatch® ok Figure 3-2: TILTWatch® red
3.1 Center of gravity of the systems

The center of gravity of the systems in not in the center. Observe this during transport.
The center of gravity is marked on the packaging with the center of gravity symbol.
Figure 3-3: Symbol center of gravity
V 1.23 19 4999 en
3.2 Transport options
NOTICE
Risk due to overload!
Transport on the crane eyelets at the top of the systems is only permissible
with certain restrictions!
NOTICE
Material damage due to non-observance of the transport instructions
Crane eyelets must only be used with the protective cover and bolts
removed!
Use only the original crane eyelets or swivel lifting eyes for transporting the
system with the crane. Crane eyelets and swivel lifting eyes are not
supplied, you can get these from the manufacturer.
3.2.1 Transport with lifting belts

For transporting the systems in unpacked condition, lifting belts are to be used. These
must be positioned so that the instruments and switches on the front door cannot be
damaged.
Figure 3-4: Transport with lifting belts
V 1.23 20 4999 en
3.2.2 Transport to swivel lifting eyes
DANGER
capacity!
injury.
Use of the swivel lifting eyes
Figure 3-5: Swivel lifting eyes vertical
The number and arrangement of the attachment points on the load must be chosen so
that the load is safely carried and cannot unforeseeably change its position during
transport. The chain link of the swivel lifting eye must be aligned properly in direction of
the force transmission and be freely moveable.
3.2.3 Upright (vertical) transport on swivel lifting eyes

For upright transport of the systems with swivel lifting eyes, the information from figure 9
is to be observed.
A maximum weight of 1.200 kg applies to these housings.
Figure 3-6: Swivel lifting eye vertical transport
V 1.23 21 4999 en
3.2.4 Transport with fork lift, lift trucks or crane fork
CAUTION
Danger due to falling or collapsing of the system!
The weight of the system can injure a person and cause severe crushing
injuries! For this reason, the system must be lifted with suitable lifting gear
that is designed for the weight of the system.
The system, based on the UC housing, may be lifted using a crane fork. When doing this,
pay attention to symmetrical load distribution and secure the system to prevent it from
tilting!
Prerequisites:
The fork lift is designed for the weight of the systems.
The fork lift must be moved all the way beneath the transport pallet in suitable locations.
Attention must be paid to the center of gravity when doing this.
PERMISSIBLE: NOT PERMISSIBLE
Center of gravity symbol "Tilting"
Fork lift/lift truck
Figure 3-7: Transport
V 1.23 22 4999 en
3.2.5 Transport with the crane
DANGER
capacity!
injury.
NOTICE
Risk due to overload!
Transport on the crane eyelets at the top of the system is only permissible
with certain restrictions!
NOTICE
Material damage due to non-observance of the transport instructions
Crane eyelets must only be used with the protective cover and bolts
removed!
Use only the original crane eyelets or swivel lifting eyes for transporting the
system with the crane. Crane eyelets and swivel lifting eyes are not
supplied, you can get these from the manufacturer.
V 1.23 23 4999 en
Systems in the UC housing may be transported by crane if the following requirements are
met:
 The loading on all four crane eyelets must be symmetrical and the single cabinet
unit must be lifted with a rope angle >60°.
 With symmetrical loading and a rope angle of >60°, the maximum permissible
transport weight is 1,200 kg.
For crane transport, an accessory kit is required.
Material for crane transport (crane eyelets):
Pos Part no. Description Quantity Figure
1 10017499 Crane eyelet 4
2 786841 Size 12 contact washer 4
3 787132 M12 x 25 hexagonal bolt 4
Table 2: Material for crane transport
Figure 3-8: Crane eyelet example
Crane eyelets or swivel lifting eyes must only be used with the protective
cover and bolts removed!
3.3 Lifting in
When planning the location of the system, the options for lifting it in must be considered.
Are there steps or ramps to be negotiated?
Are there any hoists?
Are doors, passageways and transport paths wide and high enough?
Are there obstacles like tight corners for example?
Are the transport paths accessible?
Please observe the maximum permissible floor load on the transport path
and the installation site.
V 1.23 24 4999 en
4 Storage
NOTICE
Material damage caused by improper storage of the components!
Operational faults can be caused by faulty storage. For this reason, please
observe the conditions specified.
NOTICE
During storage please note
Systems must never be stored unprotected outside or stacked on top of each other.
It is recommended to store the system in dry, dust-free rooms away from chemical
substances. The optimum storage temperature is between 0 °C … ≤ 40 °C.
 The system should be stored in a suitable place. Because of condensation
formation, it must be ensured that the system is not subjected to major temperature
differences.
 Storage temperature: The values can be found in the technical data. The values
specified in the technical data must not fall below or be exceeded.
 Temperature variations greater than 20 K per hour are not permissible.
 Relative humidity (non-condensing): The values can be found in the technical data.
The values specified in the technical data must not be exceeded.
 If the system is stored for a longer period of time with high humidity, it must dry out
for more than one day before it is connected to the power supply.
 In the event of long periods of intermediate storage, the system should be covered
with film. Condensation formation must be prevented.
Please contact the manufacturer's helpdesk if the storage time

exceeds 2 years.
V 1.23 25 4999 en
5 Principle of operation and setup of the system
The ENERTRONIC I system ensures an uninterruptible supply of power to loads, both
when a public mains supply is available or not. The power supplied to the connected
critical loads is stable with regard to voltage and frequency.
5.1 General principle of operation

Under normal conditions (public mains supply available) the rectifier converts the
alternating mains voltage into a direct voltage and supplies the inverter and the battery.
From the direct voltage, the inverter once more forms an alternating output voltage, which
is stable in frequency and amplitude and is fed to the AC loads.
Rectifier as well as inverter are each monitored and controlled by a control and
monitoring unit, so that a precise supply is ensured at any time, even if changes should
occur at the load end.
If there is no public mains system available, the battery will supply the inverter for a
limited period of time. An alarm appears which indicates that the electrical supply is
available for a limited period only. After the mains voltage has been restored, the rectifier
will automatically take over the supply of the inverter and, in addition, recharge the
battery, so that any new mains failure can be bridged.
If the inverter is overloaded or disconnected during maintenance work, the bypass
immediately takes over supply from the mains without interruption.
5.1.1 Protection Concepts

For the safety of the following monitoring and protective functions are integrated into the
system:
 Temperature monitoring of the heatsink
 multistage and redundant overcurrent protection
 multistage and redundant overvoltage protection
 Extensive and regular self-test of all components
 EMC filters to protect against noise may,
V 1.23 26 4999 en
5.2 Views
5.2.1 Front view
Figure 5-1: Front view ENERTRONIC I (example 80 kVA)
V 1.23 27 4999 en
5.3 Schematic diagram
5.3.1 Schematic diagram IGBT 1-ph K006 powerblock
Figure 5-2: Schematic diagram IGBT 1-ph K006 powerblock
Mapping – Device- type to schematic diagram

Device type Output power Part- no
D480E120/83/3rfg-UEG10-125I 10 kVA 00100079072
D480E120/166/3rfg-UEG20-240I 20 kVA 00100075531
Table 3: Devices IGBT 1-ph powerblock
V 1.23 28 4999 en
5.3.2 Schematic diagram IGBT 3-ph K006 powerblock
Figure 5-3: Schematic diagram IGBT 3-ph K006 powerblock

D480D208/56/3rfg-UDG20-240I 20 kVA 00100079084
Table 4: Devices IGBT 3-ph powerblock
V 1.23 29 4999 en
5.3.3 Schematic diagram IGBT 1-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter
Figure 5-4: Schematic diagram IGBT 1-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter

D208E120/167/3rfg-UEG20-125I 20 kVA 00100079073
D480E120/250/3rfg-UEG30-240I 30 kVA 00100079079
D480E120/417/3rfg-UEG50-240I 50 kVA 00100079080
D480E277/144/3rfg-UEG40-240I 40 kVA 00100079085
D480E120/333/3rfg-UEG40-240I 40 kVA 00100079094
D400E230/434/2rfg-UEG 100 kVA 00100053901
Table 5: Devices IGBT 1-ph separate rectifier and inverter
V 1.23 30 4999 en
5.3.4 Schematic diagram IGBT 3-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter
Figure 5-5: Schematic diagram IGBT 3-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter

D480D480/48/3rfg-UDG40-125I 40 kVA 00100079081
D600D600/14/3rfg-UDG15-125I 15 kVA 00100079082
D600D600/58/3rfg-UDG60-125I 60 kVA 00100079083
D208D208/167/3rfg-UDG60-240I 60 kVA 00100079086
D480D208/333/3rfg-UDG120-240I 120 kVA 00100079087
D400D400/173/2rfg-UDG 120 kVA 00100053902
Table 6: Devices IGBT 3-ph separate rectifier and inverter
V 1.23 31 4999 en
5.3.5 Schematic diagram SCR 1-ph K006 powerblock
Figure 5-6: Schematic diagram SCR 1-ph K006 powerblock

D480E120/83/3rfg-UEG10-125S 10 kVA 00100079089
D480E120/167/3rfg-UEG20-240S 20 kVA 00100079099
Table 7: Devices SCR 1-ph powerblock
V 1.23 32 4999 en
5.3.6 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph K006 powerblock
Figure 5-7: Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph K006 powerblock

D480D208/28/3rfg-UDG10-125I 10 kVA 00100079088
D480D208/28/3rfg-UDG10-125S 10 kVA 00100079095
D480D208/56/3rfg-UDG20-240S 20 kVA 00100079102
Table 8: Devices SCR 3-ph powerblock
V 1.23 33 4999 en
5.3.7 Schematic diagram SCR 1-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter
Figure 5-8: Schematic diagram SCR 1-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter

D480E120/125/3rfg-UEG15-125S 15 kVA 00100079090
D480E120/167/3rfg-UEG20-125S 20 kVA 00100079091
D480E120/250/3rfg-UEG30-125S 30 kVA 00100079092
D480E120/333/3rfg-UEG40-240S 40 kVA 00100079100
D480E120/417/3rfg-UEG50-125S 50 kVA 00100079093
D208E277/217/3rfg-UEG60-240S 60 kVA 00100079101
Table 9: Devices SCR 1-ph separate rectifier and inverter
V 1.23 34 4999 en
5.3.8 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter
Figure 5-9: Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph K006 separate rectifier and inverter

D480D208/56/3rfg-UDG20-125S 20 kVA 00100079096
D480D208/83/3rfg-UDG30-125S 30 kVA 00100079097
D480D208/111/3rfg-UDG40-125S 40 kVA 00100079098
D480D208/111/3rfg-UDG40-240S 40 kVA 00100079104
Table 10: Devices SCR 3-ph separate rectifier and inverter
V 1.23 35 4999 en
5.3.9 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q500 double rectifier separate rectifier and
inverter
Figure 5-10: Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q500 double rectifier separate rectifier and inverter

D480D480/144,5/3rfg-UDG120-240S 120 kVA 00100066975
Table 11: Devices SCR 3-ph Q500 double rectifier separate rectifier and inverter
V 1.23 36 4999 en
5.3.10 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q051 double rectifier common mains
Figure 5-11: Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q051 double rectifier common mains

D600D600/77/3rg-UDG-80-240S 80 kVA 00100072896
Table 12: Devices SCR 3-ph Q051 double rectifier
V 1.23 37 4999 en
5.3.11 Schematic diagram SCR 3-ph Q051 double rectifier common mains 600 V
1
10 2
11
3
Figure 5-12: Schematic diagram of the ENERTRONIC I
Pos Meaning
1 Input- mains / bypass
2 Rectifier
3 Battery isolator
4 Battery
5 Output thyristor
6 Output switch
7 Output
8 Inverter
9 Mains input switch
10 Manual bypass switch
11 Backfeed contactor
Table 13: Key schematic diagram
V 1.23 38 4999 en
5.4 Battery
5.4.1 Battery data and charging
The battery of the system is charged according to the UI charging procedure (CCCV).
This means that first of all, the battery is charged with a constant charging current
(constant current charge). As soon as the float charge voltage is reached, charging no
longer occurs with constant current. Instead, the float charge voltage is constantly
charged. Here, a current gets established below the charging current that was present
during the constant current charge.
The battery data like:
 Float charge voltage
 (Boost) charge voltage
 Charging current
 High current charging current
 Warning threshold
 Shutdown threshold (deep discharge protection)
 Discharge curve for the battery monitor
are programmed ex factory. For this purpose, our sales department is notified of the
battery type when ordering. If these data are to be changed subsequently, please contact
our service.
The battery data of the battery are entered at the manufacturer or during
commissioning by service staff of the manufacturer.
The user cannot change these points!
All given values are examples. The correct data are to be found in the
datasheet!
Float charge voltage

The float charge voltage is programmed according to the battery type.
(Boost) charging voltage
The (Boost charging voltage is programmed according to the battery type. (Boost)
charging is off during normal operation and can be activated via the display and control
panel for a certain time. (see chapter 11.14.1, Switching on (boost) charging manually,
page 170)
The boost charge starts when reaching the float charging voltage and remains active for
a configurable period. After the expiration is switched to normal Float charge voltage.
In addition, an automatic boost charge can be configured to the corresponding function in
the display and control panel must be enabled. (see 11.14.1, Switching on (boost)
charging manually, page 170)
Auto-charging
In Auto-charge (Boost-) charging is activated when the battery voltage falls below the
programmed initial threshold. As with the manual (Boost-) charge the (Boost-) charging is
carried out for the programmed time, once the float voltage is reached.
V 1.23 39 4999 en
Initial threshold
The initial threshold is a configurable stress at below which during battery operation
(discharge) the auto-charge is initiated (if configured) when the rectifier input power
available and the conservation charging voltage is reached again.
Charging current
The charge current is programmed according to the battery type. It is usually from C10
(capacity [Ah]/10 h).
High-current charging current
The high-current charging current is programmed according to the battery type. He is
usually C5 (capacity [Ah]/5 h). It is thus twice as large as the C10-charging current.
Warning threshold
The warning thresholds are configurable voltage values at below which during battery
operation (battery discharge) a message (event log) is output.
 Warning of timely plant shut down (in about 10 - 15 min shutdown threshold
battery reaches)
There is a display on the control panel (battery voltage), and the issue on a
Signaling relay. The assurance of operation-relevant process data of the operator
should from this
Time be made (factory setting: 1.85 V/c).
 Warning end of the capacity test (factory setting: 1.85 V/c).
Cut-off threshold (deep discharge protection)
The cut-off threshold is the voltage at which the inverter disconnects the battery and the
battery thus protecting against deep discharge. It is programmed in accordance with the
battery type. It is lead-acid batteries usually between 1.65 V/cell until 1.8 V/cell.
(Factory setting 1.80 V/c)
5.4.2 Battery charging with temperature tracking (optional)

For charging with temperature tracking, a battery temperature sensor must be installed,
also see chapter 6.4.3, Battery temperature sensor, page 59.
The battery temperature sensor is switched off ex factory. However, it can

be ordered optionally or retrofitted. Voltage compensation must be adapted
on the battery types.
If this is desired, please contact our service department.
If no battery temperature sensor is configured, the system controls the

battery voltage for a temperature of 25 °C.
In order to ensure an optimum service life of the battery, it is necessary to decrease the
battery charging voltage if the ambient temperature in the battery room exceeds a defined
value.
The ambient temperature of the battery room can be measured by means of an external
temperature sensor (option). The characteristic required for this must be configured by
the manufacturer during activation. A two-wire temperature sensor must be installed for
activation.
V 1.23 40 4999 en
The configured end-of-charging voltage is lowered in a temperature-controlled fashion.
The reduction (battery voltage compensation) can be set in the range between 20 °C and
50 °C. The start value of the reduction can be selected within this range. The gradient of
the reduction can also be set between 1 … 5 mV/(°C cell). Figure 5-13 shows some
examples for different battery types of various manufacturers. Some manufacturers
already recommend lowering of the temperature from 20 °C, others from 25 or 30 °C.
Compensation [mV/cell] for temperature [°C]
A
Figure 5-13: Battery voltage compensation characteristic
V 1.23 41 4999 en
5.5 Battery monitor
The battery monitor detected during plant operation parameters voltage and current -
time increment, and calculated on the basis of the stored battery specific values (see
chapter 11.13, Battery – Central battery for parallel operation, page 168) the available
remaining term that appears on the display.
The displayed remaining term is only an indicator of the customer for
residual availability of the plant. Due to a variety of influences on the
battery (age, temperature cycles, maintenance), this value may differ
significantly from the actual remaining term.
See chapter 5.7, Battery capacity test.
V 1.23 42 4999 en
5.6 Battery circuit test
The battery circuit test is used to check the connections, fuses and battery.
The battery-circuit-test is performed only when the inverter is switched on
and the battery breaker is closed.
When the battery breaker is opened (deliberate switching operation), the
battery-circuit-test is suppressed in order to conceal non-actual error
messages in the UPS system.
The battery circuit test is performed with a negative current, i.e., by a short discharge. For
this purpose, the rectifier lowers the intermediate circuit voltage slightly below the battery
voltage. For a current to flow, the battery must be disloaded by the inverter. For this
reason, the inverter must be switched on. If this is not the case, the test is not carried out
and the battery LED flashes yellow for warning.
If the battery current exceeds a certain threshold for 2 seconds during the lowering of the
intermediate circuit voltage, the battery circuit test is positively evaluated. The battery
LED lights green and the rectifier restores the intermediate circuit voltage to the
maintenance charging voltage.
If there is no current flow during the test, the rectifier lowers the intermediate circuit
voltage up to the test threshold (1.85 V/cell). If a battery current is still not flowing, the test
is terminated with a negative result. The rectifier restores the intermediate circuit voltage
to maintenance charging voltage. The battery LED flashes red and the collective fault is
output. For faults, see chapter 23.1, Fault event messages and their cause, page 358.
5.7 Battery capacity test
In order to avoid distortion of the test result, the manufacturer recommends

a waiting time of 48 h before a second capacity test is carried out.
When capacity test, under defined conditions, by lowering the rectifier voltage battery
discharge until the warning threshold (1.85 V/Z) enforced. In this test, the battery is
discharged with a discharge current of 10 % of the C10 capacity at constant temperature.
The battery monitor determined analogously to control operating parameters for voltage
and the current time increment and compares them with the stored discharge
characteristic(s). See chapter 11.12.2, Capacity test, page 161.
The capacity test should be performed at least once a year according to

the specifications of the battery manufacturer.
The displayed remaining term is only an indicator of the operator

responsible for residual availability of the plant.
Due to various influences on the battery (age, temperature cycles,
maintenance), this value may deviate significantly from the actual expiry.
(See chapter 11.12.2, Capacity test, page 161.
The discharge curve of the battery is entered by the manufacturer or during

commissioning service personnel of the manufacturer.
The user can not change these points!
V 1.23 43 4999 en
5.8 Manual bypass (operation/bypass)
The manual bypass is intended to supply loads directly from the mains supply during
maintenance work or repairs.
Q005 or Q500 switch, manual bypass
5.9 Static bypass

The electronic changeover device (static switch) consists of a static microprocessor-
controlled anti parallel semiconductor switch (thyristor) in the mains bypass. If the output
voltage deviates from the set values by an appropriate amount (e. g. in the case of an
inverter fault), it switches the connected loads automatically and without interruption to
the bypass supply.
The static switch automatically switches the load back to the inverter when normal
operation is resumed (e. g. after an overload or a short circuit).
The bypass can be switched on manually via the display- and control panel.
The changeover from inverter to mains and back again takes place with no interruption
whatsoever in synchronous mode.
5.10 Event recorder (event memory)

The system stores each occurring event (key operation, switching process, fault)
complete with date and time details in the internal event memory. These events can be
displayed via the event menu in the display. Up to 1199 entries can be stored.
The following appears:
 Date and time
 Event designation
 Event ID and event number
The event ID has the following meaning:
E 0019 Event no. 19 (example) has occurred
* 0734 Event no. 734 (example) must be acknowledged
R 0734 Event no. 734 (example) has been acknowledged
A 0734 Time of acknowledging event no. 734 (example)
V 1.23 44 4999 en
5.11 Backfeed protection
This system is equipped with a backfeed protection.
The ‘backfeeding’ refers to a situation where power is fed back towards the input termi-
nals of an electrical device i.e. where the direction of power transfer is opposite to that of
normal operation. This creates a safety hazard, since backfeeding of power may result in
the input terminals being on power even if they have been disconnected from the mains
supply.
The backfeed protection prevents a hazardous voltage to appear on input terminals of
bypass- (X005) and the rectifier mains (X001), if the preceding separators are turned off
for maintenance, and the system is in battery mode.
The thyristor rectifier with the output transformer (T1) is not capable of regenerative
feedback.
For Systems with IGBT- rectifier the backfeed protection is realized with contactor (K1).
In addition, the backfeed is blocked by software.
For bypass X005, the backfeed protection (K005) is installed. This will switch so that the
dangerous state can not occur.
In case of backfeed error, the system behaves as follows:
 The horn in the control panel is turned on
 Bypass LED No.5 flash red
 Event-No. 622 “Backfeed protection triggered” stored in eventregister on System.
More see chapter 23.1, Fault event messages and their cause.
The following events relate to the backfeed protection:
 620, 622, 628, 630
At all the external switches of the UPS, a sign with the following text must
be attached:
Warning sign
Before starting work on this circuit:
Switch off UPS
test for hazardous voltage between all terminals, including the protective
earth.
Risk of voltage feedback!
V 1.23 45 4999 en
6 Operating elements and important components
6.1 Alphanumerical display and operating panel
A
J
C
B
H
8 9
IV
5 10
1
I VI
6
G 4 D E F
Figure 6-1: Alphanumerical display and operating panel
Pos Signification
I Main input
IV Bypass input
Load output system output contactor K6,
VI
(LED green)
1 Rectifier (LED multicolored)
4 Battery (LED multicolored)
5 Static bypass (LED multicolored)
6 Inverter (LED multicolored)
8 Manual bypass
9 Manual bypass contactor (LED Green)
10 Output contactor (LED multicolored)
Short keystroke: Scroll back in the MENU
A
Long keystroke: Exit MENU/Accept changes
Short keystroke: Scroll forward in the MENU
B
Long keystroke: MENU/Access function
C Acknowledging faults
D Switch on static bypass
E Switch off
F Switch nn
G LED- Test
H LED strip, see chapter 6.1.2
J Display
V 1.23 46 4999 en
6.1.1 LED- Operating panel
LED state Signification
Green - yellow flashing Component in start/initialization
Special operating states, for example.
Green flashing
Preloading threshold reached (LED 4)
Green illuminated switched on
Warning/Overload
Yellow flashing
Reduced system availability
Yellow illuminated available/ready to switch on
Yellow illuminated Internal fault component
Red illuminated External fault at system interface e. g. main power fault
Table 14: LED operation panel
4
6.1.2 LED-strip
The LED strip (H) consists of 13 LEDs
The top LED is assigned permanently and shows “Internal power supply on”, i. e. that the
internal 5 V supply is ok
The additional LEDs H2 to H9 are programmed by the manufacturer’s factory as agreed.
The meaning of the LEDs can be found in the supplied table.
Currently, the LEDs H10 and H13 are not assigned. They can be programed with variable
alarms.
LED Signification
H H1 UPS int. power supply
H2 UPS mains operation
H3 UPS battery operation
H4 UPS bypass operation
H5 UPS parallel operation
H6 UPS manual bypass
H7 UPS overload
H8 UPS failure
H9 UPS batt. voltage low
H10
H11
H12
H13
Figure 6-2: LED strip
V 1.23 47 4999 en
6.1.3 Display
The display (I) consists of an alphanumerical 20 x 4 matrix.
The following information can be requested with it:
Measurement values
Status messages like for example “UPS normal operation, bypass
operation etc.”
Settings
Events
Figure 6-3: Display
.................... ....................
........USV......... ..Bypassoperating...
...Normaloperating.. ....................
.................... ....................
Figure 6-4: Example for status messages in the display
V 1.23 48 4999 en
6.2 TFT, Touch-Display and operating panel (optional)
6.2.1 Visual layout
2 4
Figure 6-5: Visual layout of the display and control unit TFT
The graphical interface of the display and control unit is divided into four main areas:
1. System designation including nominal power of the system
2. Mimic diagram of the UPS system with all main system components for controlling
the system by pressing/touching the respective symbols and for visualising
particular operating states
3. Selection bar in the bottom part of the control unit with the symbols or calling up
help, measurement mode, the UPS settings and for information on the other
possible switching operations; display of date and time
4. Pop-up/information area for displaying information on the current UPS status
In the following descriptions, the term symbol is used whenever a
pushbutton with a graphical symbol is involved.
All other pushbuttons with a plain text inscription are accordingly
referred to as pushbuttons.
V 1.23 49 4999 en
6.2.2 TFT Mechanical design
1 15
3 14
4
13
5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 6-6: Mechanical design of the display and control unit TFT A240
The following main components are shown in the mechanical layout:

 Supplying the LCD-Moduls
 CAN bus interface X20 for supplying the unit and communication with the
controller board A100
 CAN-Bus interface
 RS485 interface
 Backup battery (Type: CR 2450/3 V/0,56 Ah)
 Modbus-interface (RS232)
 Modbus-interface (RS232)
 Supply voltage
 Supply voltage
 Ethernet-interface (not activated for the application)
 USB-interface for connecting USB-Sticks (Type A)
 USB-interface (Typ B)
 Single-Board-Computer for controlling the display and control unit
 Signal horn
 Serial interface (RS232)
V 1.23 50 4999 en
6.2.3 Operating elements:
The illustration of the symbols in the mimic diagram has been designed based upon color
so that the respective range of functions is evident at the same time. The symbols are
only for visualisation purposes and display the current status of the respective element by
means of coloration and switch setting. The operation of these switching elements takes
place manually (by hand) in the Inverter unit.
Display view
4
7 8
9
2 5
6
F
A B C D
Mimic diagram (example)
V 1.23 51 4999 en
6.2.3.1 Meaning of the symbols
No Symbole Signification
1 Load breaker bypass
2 Rectifier
3 Load breaker manual bypass
4 Electronic bypass
5 Fused load breaker “Battery

The battery symbol is a special case. As well as indicating the
status of the battery by appropriate coloring of the battery symbol,
further battery data can be called up in measurement mode
6 (symbol displayed in blue) by pressing the symbol briefly. The info
screen contains data such as voltage, current, capacity,
temperature, etc.
7 Inverter
8 output contactor
9 Load breaker DC- supply
Help:
General information on contacting Benning and a manual for the
A display and control unit (in work) are stored here as further
selection options.
Measurement mode:
When the Measurement symbol is pressed, the symbols in the
mimic diagram are colored blue. The current measurements for the
particular assembly are then obtained by pressing the rectifier,
inverter, bypass or battery symbols. The blue color indicates that
B
no switching operations will be initiated by pressing the various
symbols during this phase. The mode can be terminated manually
by pressing the red “X” button in the top right-hand corner. The
system switches automatically to the standard colors and the
switching functions are actuated after 60s.
Settings/Options:
Pressing the “Settings/Options” symbol opens a further level where
C
detailed measurements and overviews can be called up as well as
various system settings made.
D Date/Time-Bottom: Change of date and time
V 1.23 52 4999 en
The following further symbols may appear in the selection bar at the bottom in certain
operating cases:
No Symbole Signification
The pipe displays the respective status via different colors
Option
Mains input/bypass input (transformer)
Messages:
An important event has occurred in the system which needs to be
acknowledged. Pressing the “letter symbol” automatically switches
to the “Events” sub-menu. Here, events can be called up and
confirmed.
Service interval:
The “Wrench symbol” is displayed if the service interval will due to
expire in the next few operating hours. If the service interval has
already expired, the symbol is shown flashing. Pressing on the
symbol switches directly to the “Fan/Statistics” sub-menu. The
current operating hours are shown here.
Horn:
A horn is activated if an important event (alarm) has occurred in the
system. This can be acknowledged and the horn deactivated by
pressing the symbol briefly.
To increase the life of the horn, it is automatically
deactivated after one-hour even if a fault/alarm is
still present. In this case, the fault continues to be
indicated only by the pop-ups in the display and
control unit.
Cancel
Back to main view
Back
One level back
V 1.23 53 4999 en
The color and the illumination or flashing of the symbols in the mimic diagram provide
information on the current operating state. These can be seen from the table below:
Overview of the respective status colors and their meaning:
Not
Designation Ready Ready Fault Mode
ready
Grey Green Yellow Red Blue
Main input/Bypass-input --- --- --- ---
Breaker/Fuse Breaker ---- ---- ----
Inverter ---- ----
Bypass ---- ----
Info ---- ---- ----
Values ---- ----
Overview of the respective status colors and their meaning of the pipeline:
Color Signification
This part of the system is live

(blue)
This part of the system is not live

(grey)
No information is available on the current status of this part of
flashing blue/grey the system (e.g. because no measuring circuit is currently
connected to this section of the pipe)
Blue with arrows If energy is flowing in a particular part of the system, this is
indicated by white flashing arrows in the pipes.
V 1.23 54 4999 en
6.3 Controller board „A100“
The controller board “A100” is equipped with two 16 bit micro controllers and takes over
complete control of the system.
Figure 6-7: Controller board A100
In case of a defect, the assembly is to be replaced or the service

department of the manufacturer is to be notified.
V 1.23 55 4999 en
6.4 A230 I/O card, A330 expansion card
DANGER
Danger due to electric shock
Life-threatening voltages could be present at the signaling relay contacts.
Please ensure that the power is switched off before working on the card.
Wiring for external monitoring and relay contacts

shall be based on involved voltages and carrying currents and shall be
done according to national wiring rules e. g. NEC, VDE0105;
IDC ET 101:2008; IEC 60364
Jumper
ext./int.
supply
24 V
Figure 6-9: BR24 A230
Figure 6-8: I/O card A230

The I/O card A230 provides the following interfaces:

6 x permanently programmed potential-free changeover relay contacts
(connector X3.1 … 6)
6 x permanently programmed SELV digital inputs (connector X12.1 …
12.6)
1 x insulated SELV 24 V DC output max. 200 mA (connector X24)
See circuit diagram.
The connections at the customer side are carried out with the plugable terminals X003.
This increases the protection from polarity reversal and makes handling easier for service
purposes.
In case X24 is set by BR24 as an input, it has to be SELV 24VDC input.
V 1.23 56 4999 en
6.4.1 Customer connection of A230 (only systems with this terminals)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 6-10: Customer connection of A230
Terminal Meaning Designation

A1 UPS operation X3.1:1
B1 UPS operation X3.1:2
C1 UPS operation X3.1:3
A2 Battery operation X3.2:1
B2 Battery operation X3.2:2
C2 Battery operation X3.2:3
A3 Bypass Operation X3.3:1
B3 Bypass Operation X3.3:2
C3 Bypass Operation X3.3:3
A4 Manual Bypass X3.4:1
B4 Manual Bypass X3.4:2
C4 Manual Bypass X3.4:3
A5 Battery Voltage X3.5:1
B5 Battery Voltage X3.5:2
C5 Battery Voltage X3.5:3
A6 Common alarm X3.6:1
B6 Common alarm X3.6:2
C6 Common alarm X3.6:3
Table 15: X003 for A230 connection
V 1.23 57 4999 en
6.4.2 LEDs on A230
LED Color Signification Terminal
Red/Green Initialization
H1 Green Communication with A100
Red Failure
H4 Yellow Battery charging off (I) X12.5
H5 Yellow Remote Power OFF (I) X12.6
H8 Yellow External battery breaker (I) X12.3
H9 Yellow Coupling switch (I) X12.4
H10 Yellow Manual bypass (I) X12.1
H11 Yellow External output breaker-breaker open X12.2
H24 Yellow +24 V DC- supply
H31 Yellow Bypass operation (O)/(K1) X3.1
H32 Yellow Manual bypass (O)/(K2) X3.2
H33 Yellow Battery boost charge 2,4 V/c. (O)/(K3) X3.3
H34 Yellow Battery pre warning (O)/(K4) X3.4
H35 Yellow Rectifier failure (O)/(K5) X3.5
H36 Yellow Inverter failure (O)/(K6) X3.6
Table 16: LEDs on A230
I: Input -X12.n:1/:2
O: Output -X3.n:1/:2/:3
Kn: Signal relay n
n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
V 1.23 58 4999 en
6.4.3 Battery temperature sensor on A230
IDC ET 101:2008; IEC 60364
The battery temperature sensor is switched off ex factory. However, it can

be ordered optionally activated or retrofitted.
If this is desired, please contact our service department.
If no battery temperature sensor is configured, the system controls the

battery voltage for a temperature of 25 °C.
Optionally, a battery temperature sensor can be connected on the I/O card.
Figure 6-11: I/O card A230 X400
The max. length of the sensor is 15 m. If a longer length is required, please

contact our service.
Connection:
System: Assembly A230 connector X400
A connector X400 with screw terminals is provided on system side on assembly A230
for connection of the sensor with any polarity. The battery temperature sensor is
supplied preconfigured, i.e. the individual wires are separated at the end and can be
directly inserted into the terminal and screwed.
Battery/Sensor:
The sensor end should be inserted in the center of the battery string between two
blocks/cells. However, it should not come into direct contact with the battery, as the
sensor is to measure the ambient temperature of the battery and not the surface of a
block/cell.
Example: Battery, - 108 cells, - 2 strings, - 2 x 18 x12 V blocks per 6 cells
The sensor is inserted in any strings between block 8 and 9 (approx. center). In case
of 3 strings, the sensor is inserted into the string that is between the two other strings.
All battery blocks/cells must be housed in the same room.
V 1.23 59 4999 en
6.4.4 A330 expansion card
DANGER
Danger due to electric shock
Life-threatening voltages could be present at the signaling relay contacts.
Please ensure that the power is switched off before working on the card.

IDC ET 101:2008; IEC 60364
Jumper
ext./int.
supply
24 V
Figure 6-12: Expansion card A330

The expansion card A330 provides the following interfaces:

6 x freely programmed potential-free changeover relay contacts
(connector X3.7 … 3.12)
5 x permanently programmable SELV digital inputs (connector X12.7 …
12.11)
2 x freely programmable SELV digital inputs (connector X12.12 … 12.13)
1 x insulated SELV 24 V DC output 200 mA (connector X24)
See circuit diagram.
The connections at the customer side are carried out with the plugable terminals X003.
This increases the protection from polarity reversal and makes handling easier for service
purposes.
In case X24 is set by BR24 as an input, it has to be SELV 24 V DC input.
V 1.23 60 4999 en
6.4.5 Customer connection of A330 (only systems with this terminals)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Terminal Meaning Designation

A1 Fan failure X3.7:1
B1 Fan failure X3.7:2
C1 Fan failure X3.7:3
A2 Free programmable X3.8:1
B2 Free programmable X3.8:2
C2 Free programmable X3.8:3
Table 17: X003 for A330 connection
V 1.23 61 4999 en
6.4.6 LEDs on A330
LED Color Signification Terminal
H1 Yellow Remote On (I) X12.7
H2 Yellow Remote bypass (I) X12.8
H3 Yellow Diesel operation (I) X12.9
H5 Yellow +5 V DC- supply X1/X3
H6 Yellow Disable bypass (I) X12.10
H7 Yellow not connected (I) X12.11
H8 Yellow not connected (I) X12.12
H12 Yellow Bypass group active (I) X12.13
H37 Yellow fault bypass (O)/(K7) X3.7
H38 Yellow Battery operating (O)/(K8) X3.8
H39 Yellow fault Battery (O)/(K9) X3.9
H310 Yellow manual bypass (O)/(K10) X3.10
H311 Yellow fault UPS (O)/(K11) X3.11
H312 Yellow Battery deep discharge (O)/(K12) X3.12
Table 18: LEDs on A330
I: Input -X12.n: 1/:2
O: Output -X3.n: 1/:2/:3
Kn: Signal relay n
n = 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 oder 13
Input diesel operation = 1 (I/O card -X12.9:1 /:2) prevents charging of the
UPS battery only when the “Charger OFF” function is enabled in the
display. Charging only occurs in case of status “0” at input X12.9:1/:2 or if
“Charger OFF” is disabled.
 Applied if using temporary diesel units.
See chapter 11.12.3, Charging off, page 166.
V 1.23 62 4999 en
6.4.7 Relay contacts (external messages) A230, A330
DANGER
When voltage is applied to the relay contacts, the areas of the customer
connection card are live.
When relay contacts are supplied by hazardous voltages, wires with
appropriate ratings shall be used and appropriate insulation to other wires
connected to SELV circuit shall be maintained.
DANGER
These areas are safe from finger touch, but it must be noted that they are
under life-threatening voltage when a voltage of 30 VAC or 60 VDC is
applied.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by excessive contact rating
The maximum voltage and contact load must never be exceeded.
The contacts of the relays have gold plating, and are therefore also
suitable for low-level signal voltages.
If the relays are used to switch high currents such as a 230 V contactor,
the gold flashing will evaporate. Subsequently, the relays can no longer be
used to switch extra-low signal voltages.
Data A230/A330 X3
Terminal strip (connector) X3.1 – X3.12
Quantity 12
Table 19: Data A230/A330 X3
V 1.23 63 4999 en
Relay A230 X3 assignment
Relay Signal Plug connector C NC NO
K1 UPS operation X3.1 1 2 3*
K2 Battery operation X3.2 1 2 3*
K3 Bypass operation X3.3 1 2 3*
K4 Manual bypass X3.4 1 2 3*
K5 Battery low voltage X3.5 1 2 3*
K6 Common alarm X3.6 1 2 3*
Table 20: Relay A230 X3 assignment
Relay A330 X3 assignment

Relay Signal Plug connector C NC NO
K7 not connected X3.7 1 2 3*
Table 21: Relay A330 X3 assignment
* Contact position in case of signal
C = Common contact
NC = normally closed
NO = normally open
Quiescent/working current principle can be realized with both (possibly note in table)
Relay contact data

Parameter Value Unit Addition Comment
Max. alternating voltage 240 V ~
Max. alternating current 8 A ~
Max. direct voltage 240 V =
Max. direct current 0.13 A = pure ohm resistive load
Max. direct current at 24V 8 A = pure ohm resistive load
Max. switching cycles 100,000
PLC suitable yes gold-plated contacts
Table 22: Relay contact data
V 1.23 64 4999 en
6.4.8 Digital inputs A230, A330
NOTICE
Material damage caused by excessive voltages
The maximum SELV DC voltage of 30 VDC must not be exceeded under
any circumstances. This would Led to the destruction of the digital input.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by excessive voltages
In case of internal supply (BR24 2 - 3, factory setting), external voltage
must not be applied. This would be added to the internal one and damage
the digital input.
Data A230/A330 X12

Terminal strip (connector) X12.1 – X12.12
Quantity 12
Signal voltage 24 V
Signal voltage internal/external (BR24: 2 – 3/1 - 2)
Standard DIN EN 61131-2
Table 23: Data A230/A330 X12
Assignment A230 X12

No. Signal Plug connector Contact
1 manual bypass X12.1: 1 2
2 external output breaker-breaker open X12.2: 1 2
3 external battery breaker X12.3: 1 2
4 coupling switch X12.4: 1 2
5 battery charging off X12.5: 1 2
6 Remote Power OFF X12.6: 1 2
Table 24: A230 assignment X12
Assignment A330 X12

No. Signal Plug connector Contact
1 remote On X12.7: 1 2
2 remote bypass X12.8: 1 2
3 diesel operation X12.9: 1 2
4 disable bypass X12.10: 1 2
5 X12.11: 1 2
6 X12.12: 1 2
Table 25: A330 assignment X12
V 1.23 65 4999 en
Input data X12
Parameter Value Unit Addition Comment
Rated voltage 24 V =
Min. voltage 15 V =
Max. voltage 30 V =
Power consumption 24 V 12,5 mA = nominal value
Table 26: A230/A330 Input data X12
Internal/external 24 V- supply
For activating the digital inputs, either an internal or an external supply can be selected.
Example Digital inputs supply Jumper pin (BR24)
1 internal 24 V- supply* 2 - 3*
2 external supply 1-2
Table 27: BR24
* Factory setting
Example 1 (internal 24 V supply)
Remote power OFF is activated by simply interconnecting terminals X12.6:1 and X12.6:2.
Example 2 (external supply)
Remote Power off is activated by connecting an external voltage of between 15 and
30 VDC to terminals X12.6:1 and X12.6:2.
6.4.9 Digital input: Manual bypass

If an external manual bypass breaker parallel is installed then its auxiliary contact must
be connected to this input.
In case of parallel systems (optional):
The auxiliary contact must be connected to each system of a parallel unit.
See chapter 8.10.2 Paralleling signaling wires (optional), page 116.
Auxiliary contact must be connected to A230 X12.1:1-2

The auxiliary contact must be a make contact.

See chapter 6.4.8, Digital inputs A230, A330, page 65.
V 1.23 66 4999 en
6.4.10 Digital input: External output breaker
If an external output breaker is installed its position must be notified by the systems
controller. Because of that it must have an auxiliary contact with has to be connected to
I/O card.
 Auxiliary contact must be connected to A230 X12.2:1-2.
 Auxiliary contact must be a break contact
6.4.11 Digital input: External battery breaker

An external battery breaker is a breaker, which is in series connection with the systems
battery input. If installed its auxiliary contact must be connected to I/O card.
 Auxiliary contact must be a make contact
6.4.12 Digital input: Coupling switch

For using this digital input the option group-connector is mandatory.
A coupling switch is a switch between two load bars from two UPS or UPS parallel units.
If the coupling switch is closed both UPS parallel units work in parallel operation. If the
coupling switch is opened both UPS parallel units work in single operation respectively
the two parallel unit work on their own bus bar. For more see chapter 8.12, Parallel
operation with coupling switch (optional), see page 119.
 Auxiliary contact: make
 Option group connector mandatory
 If installed its auxiliary contact must be connected to this board
6.4.13 Digital input: Battery charging off

Input prevents charging of the UPS battery independent of the display setting “Charger
off”.
Applied if using stationary diesel units for power reduction.
See chapter 11.12.3, Charging off, page 166
V 1.23 67 4999 en
6.4.14 Digital input: Remote Power OFF
Input “Remote power OFF” switches off rectifier, inverter and bypass. The output of the
system is completely off then.
DANGER
Danger to life caused by non-compliance
The remote shutdown does not have the functionality of an emergency
stop or EPO device (emergency power off).
National and local regulations must be taken into account.
If an emergency stop or EPO circuit is to be implemented, these circuits
must be additionally installed externally.
Approved isolating devices must then galvanically isolate all AC and DC
inputs (AC supply and battery inputs)!

 A signal pulse of 100ms is sufficient to trigger function.
 To prevent switching on again the signal must be applied
permanently.

6.4.15 Digital input: Remote On

If this input is set the system switches in normal or battery operation, if it is possible.
This is dependent if battery is connected and if mains power is available and necessary
parts for this operation are failure free.
Auxiliary contact must be connected to A330 X12.7:1-2.
A signal pulse of 100ms is sufficient to trigger function.
Auxiliary contact: make
6.4.16 Digital input: Remote bypass

If this input is set the system switches in bypass operation. As long as bypass is ready,
bypass not locked and failure free.
Auxiliary contact must be connected to A330 X12.8:1-2.
A signal pulse of 100ms is sufficient to trigger function.
Auxiliary contact: make
V 1.23 68 4999 en
6.4.17 Digital input: Diesel operation
Input prevents charging of the UPS battery if display setting “Charger off” is set.
Applied if using stationary diesel units for power reduction.
 A permanent signal must be applied to activate this function.
See chapter 11.12.3, Charging off, page 166
6.4.18 Digital input: Disable bypass

Input disables bypass.
NOTICE
Possible voltage failure
Voltage black out is possible if bypass is the last backup source,
particularly in single system (no parallel system).

V 1.23 69 4999 en
7 Assembling
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to fire and explosion!
Fire due to flammable or explosive material in the proximity of the system
can result in severe injuries.
Do not install the system in potentially explosive areas or near easily
inflammable materials.
WARNING
Danger to life caused by installation of damaged components!
Check the components for visible damage.
Damaged components must not be installed!
WARNING
Danger to life due to incorrect assembly!
Incorrect assembly can lead to life-threatening situations. The system and
the connected components may be damaged.
WARNING
Risk of fire if not installed correctly
Incorrect assembly increases the risk of fire.
WARNING
Danger to life caused by missing protective equipment!
When working on the system, the correct personal protective equipment as
well as its condition is important.
CAUTION
Risk of crushed fingers or hand
Crushing can occur on the hinge side of the door.
Do not reach into the hinge side of the door!
Close the door carefully!
CAUTION
Crushing can occur when assembling the system cabinets.
Do not reach between separate system cabinets!
Position the cabinets with utmost care!
V 1.23 70 4999 en
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to great weight
The weight of the system must be considered.
The installation site and ground must be suitable.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by aggressive gases in connection with
humidity.
The housing can be severely damaged by aggressive gases (ammonia,
sulfur and other chemicals) in connection with humidity caused by the
weather.
Installation in rooms with aggressive gases is not permitted.
All connection and commissioning work must only be carried out by

an electrically skilled person. Before starting work on the system, this
specialist must familiarize himself with the particular features of this
range of products by reading the instructions and the installation
instructions.
Access for maintenance and service work

Additional effort that is the result of unfavorable construction- or
installation-related work is charged to the customer in case of a
manufacturer service visit.
V 1.23 71 4999 en
7.1 Installation location requirements
WARNING
Risk of fire caused by wrong installation location
As standard, the system is suitable only for mounting on fire-resistant, non-
flammable surfaces.
CAUTION
Risk of crushing caused by incorrect setup and lack of space!
The system must be positioned so that risk-free assembly, installation,
operation, maintenance and disassembly are possible if used as intended.
The system must be installed indoors.
Electrical operating room

The system should be installed in a room with limited access rights.
(Qualified personnel as defined by standard EN 62040-1-2).
Electrical locations
UPS system shall be installed only in restricted access locations
7.1.1 Subsurface
The subsurface must be able to carry the weight. A reserve for a future
expansion is to be taken into account.
The subsurface must be even.
The subsurface must not be non-flammable.
7.1.2 Room atmosphere
 The installation site must be dry and ventilated.
 It must be possible to drain the waste heat from the system.
Unhindered air circulation is to be ensured.
 The clearance distance above the system must be adhered to in order to ensure
sufficient cooling.
 The installation site is to protect against air pollution.
 The system is to be protected against direct sunlight and direct contact with water.
 The temperature range indoors must not exceed or fall below the values specified
in the technical data.
 The humidity must not exceed or fall below the values specified in the technical
data.
 The system must not be installed near flammable materials or in potentially
explosive atmospheres.
V 1.23 72 4999 en
7.1.3 Space requirement
CAUTION
Risk of crushing caused by incorrect setup and lack of space!
The system must be positioned so that risk-free assembly, installation,
operation, maintenance and disassembly are possible if used as intended.
 The system must be freely accessible from the front without additional tools.
 Sufficient space for commissioning and maintenance is required in front of the
system cabinet.
Power reduction due to trapped heat

In case of non-compliance with the recommended minimum distances, the
capacity of the system can be affected due to deficient ventilation and the
associated heat development.
Minimum distance:
A B C D E
≥0 mm ≥800 mm ≥0 mm ≥0 mm ≥600 mm
7.1.4 Escape route
An escape route must be available at all times
Please pay attention to the following points regarding

escape routes in electrical operating rooms:
 A minimum passage of A ≥ 500mm (escape
route) must be complied with when the switch
cabinet door is opened to its maximum.
(ANSI/NFPA 70) or national regulations.
V 1.23 73 4999 en
7.2 Tools required
Philips screwdriver:
Size: PZ 1 - 3
Size: PH 1 - 3
Philips screwdriver
Size: 4 – 8 – 12
Allen key
different sizes
Torx screwdriver
Size: T10, T20, T25, T30
Spanner
Size: 6 - 24
Torque wrench
Combination pliers
Long nose pliers
Side cutters
Cable knife
Crimping tool
Stripping tool
Continuity tester
Voltage tester with rotary field tester
Multimeter
Figure 7-1: Tools
V 1.23 74 4999 en
7.3 Preparing components
CAUTION
Risk of cutting caused by faulty handling!
The used tool is unsuitable or handling results in injury!
Unpacking
1 Open the packing with a suitable tool.
2 Remove the accompanying documentation and the mounting parts.
7.4 Assembling the system cabinet

CAUTION
Crushing can occur on the hinge side of the door.
Do not reach into the hinge side of the door!
Close the door carefully!
CAUTION
Crushing can occur when assembling the system cabinets.
Do not reach between separate system cabinets!
Position the cabinets with utmost care!
CAUTION
Risk of injury due to tool
A tool may only be used if it is in a technically perfect condition. Use
carefully!
The setup and assembly of the system must only be

performed by electrically skilled persons according to applicable
norms and standards.
The minimum distances must be complied with for trouble-
free operation.
Sufficient air circulation must be ensured.
Fixing individual electrical cabinets to one another

When installing several cabinet units, the system cabinets must be
screwed together on the specified points.
7.4.1 Assembly of several cabinet units
Connecting several electrical cabinets to each other

When installing several cabinet units, the system cabinets must be
screwed together on the specified points.
V 1.23 75 4999 en
8 Installation
DANGER
Before any work can be performed, the system must be completely
disconnected from the supply voltages!
All feed-ins must be switched off!
All feed-ins must be protected against reactivation!
It must be checked that no voltage is present before starting installation!
 See chapter 2.17, Safety rules according to EN 50110 / NFPA 70E /
VDE 0105, page 14
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury if the protective conductor is missing
High fault currents (leakage currents):
A proper earth connection must be ensured before connecting to the
mains!
WARNING
Potentially fatal voltages!
WARNING
Risk caused by short circuit or spark formation
Severe injuries caused by touching or connecting live components.
 Damaged components must not be installed.
 Use an insulated tool.
NOTICE
Damage to the system
The polarity of the mains input, L and N and the polarity of the battery must
not be reverse.
Incorrect connections can cause damage to the system.
The technical connection requirements of your power supply company

must be observed!
The electrical installation as well as all maintenance works to the electrical

system must only be carried out by an electrician in accordance with the
electrotechnical regulations.
V 1.23 76 4999 en
In order to ensure proper installation, we recommend to instruct the
assembly personnel of the manufacturer.
We will be pleased to undertake complete assembly and installation
including previous planning and subsequent commissioning for you.
Please contact us on the phone numbers given in chapter 24 or send us
your enquiry by email.
In general, it must be noted that a “Residual Current Device” (RCD) will

affect the availability of the protected output voltage. The consequences of
undefined tripping of the protective device must be taken into account.
V 1.23 77 4999 en
The mains connection must be prepared for the system on customer side. The electrical
installation is described as follows. Installation and commissioning of the system must
only be performed by the service engineer of the manufacturer or his contract partner.
The UPS system must be cabled in accordance with the installed power. For correct
rating of fuses and cable cross-sections for the mains connection, load connection and
battery connection, the tables of these instructions described in this chapter are to be
taken into account.
Also see chapter 8.4.4, page 91, chapter 8.6, page 101, 8.8, page 109 and chapter 8.9.,
page 111.
The manufacturer does not recommend the use of “Residual Current
Device” (RCD) for the incoming supply to the system. As a result of the RFI
interference filters that are used, the leakage current to earth may possibly
trigger the protective mechanism.
Before installation, make sure that the feed-in data as well as the load data match.
The standard version of the system is supplied for a common mains feed to the bypass
and to the rectifier.
Please note:
 For connecting the system, use cables with sufficient cross-sections.
 The mains connection to the system must be protected by a fuse.
 Connecting cables must be kept as short as possible.
 Check the cables for damage to the insulation.
 The rating of the back-up fuse must correspond to the technical data.
 Pay attention to the polarity of the DC connections.
 Make sure that a clockwise phase rotation is maintained.
 All cables must be fixed to the cable clamp rails and thus relieved from
stress.
 Check that all contacts used are securely tightened.
 Hazards such as tripping, crushing, pinching etc. must be avoided.
 Do not connect any loads to the system which could overload it.
The mains connection to the system must be protected by a fuse!

See chapter 8.6, page 101, Recommended AC safety equipment and
selectivity, page 101.
V 1.23 78 4999 en
8.1 Preparation for installation
DANGER
 Before electrical connection at the installation site, the system
must be assembled and earthed.
 Please comply with all safety instructions and the currently valid
technical connection requirements of the responsible energy
supply company, where applicable.
 Secure against from boing switched on again
 Ensure that the system is completely free from voltage.
 Dangerous voltages are present on the busbars.
 Establish isolation of mains and system supply
This system must be installed by electrically skilled persons from

manufacture.
The connection of the electrical equipment is part of the installation in readiness for
operation.
 Note that the electrical installation and the connection of the inputs and outputs
must be carried out in accordance with the local regulations.
This also applies to the connection of the loads.
 Do not connect any loads to the product which could overload it.
Connecting cables should be kept as short as possible.
 Connect the system using cables of adequate cross-section. Check the cables for
damage to the insulation.
Pay attention to the polarity of the DC cable connections.
All cables must be fixed to the cable clamp rails and relieved from stress. Check that all
contacts used are securely tightened.
All requirements for the environmental and operating conditions listed in the technical
data must be adhered to in order to guarantee trouble-free operation of the product.
V 1.23 79 4999 en
8.2 Requirements for electrical connection
CAUTION
Material damage caused by wrong fuse of the grid supply cable!
Rate the mains fuse according to the currents specified in the technical
data. The wrong fuse can result in operational faults or even fire.
Only conductors and no isolation must be inserted in the connecting

terminals. It must be checked that the connecting terminals are screwed
tight.
If required, the cable inlet screws are to be adapted to the cable cross-
section.
Only copper conductors are used
Use flexible cables to make installation easier.

Make sure cable end sleeves of the correct size are used.
The UPS system shall be connected only to a dedicated branch circuit
All incoming and outgoing cables shall have a minimum rating of 75 °C
The Power connections of the ENERTRONIC I are available at the bottom of the
cabinets. (rectifier (X001), bypass (X005), output (X006) and battery (X004))
Connecting cables must be kept as short as possible.
 Check the cables for damage to the insulation.
 The rating of the upstream fuse can be found in chapter 8.6, page 101 and
chapter 8.9, page 111.
 Make sure that a clockwise phase rotation is maintained.
 All cables must be fixed.
 Check that all contacts used are securely tightened.
 If several cabinets are connected in parallel, it must be ensured that the bypass
input and the consumer output have the same phase.
 Do not connect any loads to the system that could overload it.
The battery cables are connected to terminals X004.

Polarity reversal may cause damage to the system!
Readily accessible disconnect devices for the AC input and AC output

circuit shall be incorporated external to the UPS
Readily accessible disconnect device for the DC input circuit shall be

incorporated external to the UPS system
V 1.23 80 4999 en
8.2.1 Cable entry from below
The cable is led in from below as standard.
If no false floor is available, it may be necessary to install a higher cabinet

plinth. (bending radius)
Access to the terminals is obtained by opening the doors and removing the
front protective cover.
Once the installation work is complete, the protective cover must be fitted
again.
The connections are in the bottom area of the cabinet (mains, bypass and load).
Access to the terminals is obtained by undoing the screws and removing the front
protective covers.
The cables can be routed to the cabinet from all sides and introduced via the cabinet
bottom.
Please refer to the attached figures in:
chapter 8.4.2, Main power connection X001 (rectifier), page 88 to chapter 8.4.4, System
output X006, page 91
and tables in:
chapter 8.5.1, Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) (separated mains) (SCR), page 93 to
chapter 8.5.6, Cable cross-sections X006 Output (IGBT/SCR), page 99
and:
chapter 8.8.1, Cable cross-sections battery input X004 at 125 V, page 110 to chapter
8.8.3, page 110 (for information on where the cables are to be connected and what size
they must be).
V 1.23 81 4999 en
8.2.2 Cable entry from above
The cables are inserted from above.
Removable top cable entry covers shall be provided with sealing or
gasket in order to comply with IP 21 requirement
To fulfill the IP21 conditions, observe the manufacturer’s data of the

cable glands.
For terminals X001, X005 and X006, the cables are inserted in the right baying cabinet.
For terminal X004, the cables are inserted in the left GR cabinet.
To install the AC connections

and the mains protective
conductor, follow the general
instructions.
Unscrew the bolts of the cable
1
entry plates.
Drill the proper holes for the
cable glands, into the cable
2 entry plates, regarding to the
manufacturer’s data of the
cable glands.
Assemble the cable glands
3
and feed the cables through.
Screw the cable entry plates
4 back onto the top of the
enclosure.
Connect the mains protective
5 conductor to the stud.
See chapter 8.3
Connect the mains supply to
6
X001 and X005.
Figure 8-1: Cable entries with IP21
The connections for rectifier (X001), bypass (X005) and load output (X006) are located in
the right cabinet at the top.
Access to the connecting terminals is obtained by opening the doors, undoing the screws
and removing the front protective covers.
The connecting cables are sized and routed to the system on site.
Brackets and cable clamps must be provided on site.
V 1.23 82 4999 en
8.2.3 Incoming mains supply
A bypass connection can only be realized with the mains that is identical with regard to
the incoming mains supply, phase and phase sequence.
8.2.4 Network configurations
System rectifier input/bypass input

The system supports the network configuration Solidly Grounded Wye
System output
The system supports the network configuration Solidly Grounded Wye
The standard system is configured for the network form described above.
BENNING offers also customized systems which are setup for a different
network configuration. In that case see to the system data sheet for the
network configuration.
V 1.23 83 4999 en
8.3 Earthing
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock because of missing
protective earthing conductor.
The protective earthing conductor must be connected before the supply
cables are connected. The system must not be operated without a
protective earthing conductor.
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury if the protective earthing conductor is missing
Before connecting to the mains a protective earthing conductor connection
must be ensured!
The terminal for connection of the protective earthing conductor is always

located in the cabinet part in which the corresponding terminals of the
mains input or load are located.
System cabinet with rated current ≤160 A:

There is a busbar for protective earthing conductor connection in this
system cabinet.
System cabinet with rated current >160 A:
There are two studs for protective earthing conductor connection in this
system cabinet.
See Table 28: Protective earthing conductor connection
List of built in terminals for protective earthing conductor connection

Nominal current of
mains input from the
corresponding Bolt/Screw Signification
protective earth
conductor
8 mm A washer of at least 14 mm diameter must
≤160 A
(busbar) rest on the cable lug.
10 mm A washer of at least 19,2 mm diameter
≤230 A
bolt/screw must rest on the cable lug.
12 mm A washer of at least 22 mm diameter must
>230 A
bolt/screw rest on the cable lug..
Table 28: Protective earthing conductor connection
V 1.23 84 4999 en
8.3.1 Views busbar and stud for protective earthing conductor connection
Busbar
Figure 8-2: View earthing busbar
Figure 8-3: View detail earthing busbar
Only one cable lug may be connected to each bolt of the busbar.
The connections of the protective earthing conductors are marked with the
symbol 5019 according to IEC 60417.
Stud
1 Pos. Designation
1 bolt M10 or M12
2 2 nut
3 spring washer
3
4 washer
5 nut
4
6 spring washer
5 7 washer
.
Identification
6
Symbol 5019
7
.
Figure 8-4: Protective earthing stud
To connect the supplied protective earthing conductor to the stud, follow the instructions.
1. Remove pos.2 up to pos.7
2. Secure mains protective earthing conductor with the washer (pos. 7), then with the
spring washer (pos. 6) and at last with the nut (pos. 5).
3. Secure a second mains protective earthing conductor (if available) with the washer
(pos. 4), then with the spring washer (pos. 3)
and at last with the nut (pos. 2).
4. Connect the protective earthing conductor from the load to the other stud.
Always use the stud closest to the connection terminal to be used.
Only two cable lugs are allowed to connect to each stud M10 or M12.
Each cable lug must be installed as described above.
V 1.23 85 4999 en
8.4 AC connections
DANGER
All connections, AC and battery, must be switched off!
 See chapter 2.17, Safety rules according to EN 50110 / NFPA 70E
/ VDE 0105, page 14
DANGER
protective conductor.
The protective earth must be connected before the supply cables are
connected. The system must not be operated without a protective earth.
DANGER
mains!
NOTICE
Material damage caused by faulty phase sequence of the AC inputs
Make absolutely sure that phase sequence is correct (clockwise phase
rotation).
V 1.23 86 4999 en
8.4.1 Main AC connection
DANGER
See chapter 2.17, Safety rules according to EN 50110 /
NFPA 70E / VDE 0105, page 14
DANGER
protective conductor.
The protective earth must be connected before the supply cables are
connected. The system must not be operated without a protective earth.
DANGER
mains!
NOTICE
Material damage caused by faulty phase sequence of the AC inputs
Make absolutely sure that phase sequence is correct (clockwise phase
rotation).
Circuit diagram and item designation

The locations of the individual connecting points can be determined using the item
designation and the circuit diagram provided. In the front part of the circuit diagram, you
will find an overview with details of the cable numbers and the respective connecting
points.
Always use the circuit diagram provided for all electrical connections.
The following steps are required in order to make the electrical connection:
 Connect (PE) protective earthing conductor
 Connect AC supply cables
 Connect DC supply cables
 Connect AC output cables
 Connect external control cables
 Connect external communications cables
V 1.23 87 4999 en
8.4.2 Main power connection X001 (rectifier)
In case of common mains wiring do not connect any wire at X001. In that
case mains connection is done only at X005.
Common mains wiring can be identified at type plate.
In case “Option” “common wiring only one input is allowed.
You can identify on the type plate whether it is a system with separate or
common main power input.
For systems with a separate main input, values are included in the field
"Input (Bypass)".
X001
1 2 3 4
Figure 8-5: Mains connection rectifier input X001
Figure 8-7: Type plate separated mains input

Figure 8-6: Type plate common mains input
V 1.23 88 4999 en
Rectifier Input X001
Pos Des. Signification
1 L1 Phase 1
2 L2 Phase 2
3 L3 Phase 3
4 N (MP) Neutral (Midpoint)
Table 29: Mains connection rectifier input X001
X001 torques
Clamp type Value Unit Designation
UKH50 7,2 - 8,0 Nm Terminal
UKH240 27,5 - 30.5 Nm Terminal
AKH10 2,0 - 2,3 Nm pick-off terminal blocks
Table 30: Torque values for X001
V 1.23 89 4999 en
8.4.3 Mains connection bypass input X005
X005
X005
1 2 3 4a
1 4b
Figure 8-9: Mains connection bypass input X005

Figure 8-8: Mains connection bypass input X005
single phase (example)
three phases (example)
Bypass input X005

1 L1 Phase 1
2 L2 Phase 2
3 L3 Phase 3
4a MP Midpoint
4b N Neutral
Table 31: Mains connection bypass input X005
X005 torques
The same source is used for supplying the rectifier and bypass.
See Figure 8-8: Mains connection bypass input X005
When the mains fuses are removed, the rectifier as well as bypass and
service bypass are no longer supplied.
V 1.23 90 4999 en
8.4.4 System output X006
MP from the output must be grounded.
X006
X006
1 2 3 4
1 4
Figure 8-11: Connection range system output X006

Figure 8-10: Connection range system output
single phase
X006 three phases
System output X006

1 L1 Phase 1
2 L2 Phase 2 (three phases)
3 L3 Phase 3 (three phases)
4 N Neutral
Table 33: Connection range system X006
X006 torques
V 1.23 91 4999 en
8.5 Recommended cable cross-sections main AC input
WARNING
Risk of fire caused by wrong cable cross-section
When non-linear loads are connected to the output, the current in the
neutral conductor can be greater than that in the phase conductor; this also
applies to the bypass input. Neutral conductors in the system must be
rated so as to take into account harmonic currents which are summated in
this conductor when single-phase loads are connected.
WARNING
Risk of fire caused by wrong cable cross-section
Design of the minimum cross-sections according to EN 62040-1 and
EN 60950-1 Tab3b.
The cross-section must be selected depending on the external fuse
upstream and the laying method in accordance with
IEC 60364-5-52/ANSI/NFPA 70.
Local country-specific requirements are to be observed.
All standard and special national and local regulations for electrical
installations must be observed. These may vary from country to country.
The cable cross-section should be dimensioned so that for the used cable
length, the ohmic voltage drop in the cable is limited to <1 %.
Select the cross-section of the AC grid supply cable in such a way that the cable losses
are kept as low as possible (max. possible cross-section, with min. cable length).
For the correct rating of backup fuses and cable cross-sections for the
mains supply of the distributor, the values specified in the technical data
are to be observed.
Cable cross-sections are specified according to UPS standards UL

1778 and CSA C22.2 NO. 107.3-14!
The specification of the corresponding AWG size is informative!
V 1.23 92 4999 en
8.5.1 Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) (separated mains) (SCR)
Main input X001 Rectifier
Cross-sections
Power Voltage X001 (REC)
according to UL 60950-1:2014
L1 - L3 AWG12 2,5 mm²

10 kVA 480 V MP AWG12 2,5 mm²
PE AWG12 2,5 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG8 6 mm²
15 kVA 480 V MP AWG8 6 mm²
PE AWG8 6 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG8 6 mm²
PE AWG8 6 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG4 16 mm²
PE AWG4 16 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG2 25 mm²
PE AWG2 25 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG1 35 mm²
PE AWG1 35 mm²
L1 - L3 300 kcmil 150 mm²
60 kVA 208 V MP 300 kcmil 150 mm²
PE 300 kcmil 150 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG3/0 95 mm²
120 kVA 480 V MP AWG3/0 95 mm²
PE AWG3/0 95 mm²
Table 35: Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) separated mains (SCR)
V 1.23 93 4999 en
8.5.2 Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) (separated mains) (IGBT)
Main input X001 Rectifier
Cross-sections
Power Voltage X001 (REC)
L1 - L3 AWG14 1,5 mm²

10 kVA 480 V MP AWG14 1,5 mm²
PE AWG14 1,5 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG12 2,5 mm²
15 kVA 600 V MP AWG12 2,5 mm²
PE AWG12 2,5 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG10 4 mm²
PE AWG10 4 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG8 6 mm²
PE AWG8 6 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG3/0 70 mm²
60 kVA 208 V MP AWG3/0 70 mm²
PE AWG3/0 70 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG0 50 mm²
120 kVA 480 V MP AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
Table 36: Cable cross-sections X001 (Rectifier) separated mains (IGBT)
V 1.23 94 4999 en
8.5.3 Cable cross-sections X005 (separated mains) (IGBT & SCR)
Main input X005 Bypass
Cross-sections
Power Voltage X005
L1 AWG2 25 mm²
E120 N AWG2 25 mm²
PE AWG2 25 mm²
10 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG10 4 mm²
D208 MP AWG10 4 mm²
PE AWG10 4 mm²
L1 AWG0 50 mm²
E120 N AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
15 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG14 1,5 mm²
D600 MP AWG14 1,5 mm²
PE AWG14 1,5 mm²
L1 AWG3/0 70 mm²
E120 N AWG3/0 70 mm²
PE AWG3/0 70 mm²
20 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 250 kcmil 120 mm²
E120 N 250 kcmil 120 mm²
30 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG2 25 mm²
PE AWG2 25 mm²
E120 N 400 kcmil 185 mm²
L1 AWG0 50 mm²
E277 N AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
40 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG1 35 mm²
PE AWG1 35 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
50 kVA E120 N 600 kcmil 300 mm²
V 1.23 95 4999 en
L1 AWG3/0 95 mm²
E277 N AWG3/0 95 mm²
PE AWG3/0 95 mm²
L1 – L3 AWG3/0 70 mm²
60 kVA D208 MP AWG3/0 70 mm²
PE AWG3/0 70 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG4 16 mm²
80 kVA D600 only three phases
PE AWG4 16 mm²
L1 - L3 400 kcmil 185 mm²
D208 MP 400 kcmil 185 mm²
120 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
Table 37: Cable cross-sections X005 Bypass input (separated mains)
V 1.23 96 4999 en
8.5.4 Cable cross-sections X005 (common mains) (SCR)
Main input X005 Rectifier and Bypass (common)
Cross-sections
Power Voltage X005 (REC/bypass)
L1 - L3 AWG12 2,5 mm²

10 kVA 480 V MP AWG12 2,5 mm²
PE AWG12 2,5 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG8 6 mm²
PE AWG8 6 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG8 6 mm²
PE AWG8 6 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG4 16 mm²
PE AWG4 16 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG2 25 mm²
PE AWG2 25 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG1 35 mm²
PE AWG1 35 mm²
L1 - L3 300 kcmil 150 mm²
60 kVA 208 V MP 300 kcmil 150 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
80 kVA - L1 - L3 AWG3/0 95 mm²

120 kVA 600 V MP
enlarged
bypass PE AWG2/0 70 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG3/0 95 mm²
120 kVA 480 V MP AWG3/0 95 mm²
PE AWG3/0 95 mm²
Table 38: Cable cross-sections X005 (Rectifier and ) common mains (SCR)
V 1.23 97 4999 en
8.5.5 Cable cross-sections X005 (common mains) (IGBT)
Main input X005 Rectifier and Bypass
Cross-section
Power Voltage X005 (REC/Bypass)
L1 - L3 AWG14 1,5 mm²

10 kVA 480 V MP AWG14 1,5 mm²
PE AWG14 1,5 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG12 2,5 mm²
15 kVA 600 V MP AWG12 2,5 mm²
PE AWG12 2,5 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG10 4 mm²
PE AWG10 4 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG8 6 mm²
PE AWG8 6 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG3/0 70 mm²
60 kVA 208 V MP AWG3/0 70 mm²
PE AWG3/0 70 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG0 50 mm²
120 kVA 480 V MP AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
Table 39: Cross-sections common mains X005 (IGBT)
V 1.23 98 4999 en
8.5.6 Cable cross-sections X006 Output (IGBT/SCR)
Main input X006 Output
Cross-sections
Power Voltage X005
L1 AWG2 25 mm²
E120 N AWG2 25 mm²
PE AWG2 25 mm²
10 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG10 4 mm²
PE AWG10 4 mm²
L1 AWG0 50 mm²
E120 N AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
15 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG14 1,5 mm²
D600 MP AWG14 1,5 mm²
PE AWG14 1,5 mm²
L1 AWG3/0 70 mm²
E120 N AWG3/0 70 mm²
PE AWG3/0 70 mm²
20 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
E120 N 250 kcmil 120 mm²
30 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG2 25 mm²
PE AWG2 25 mm²
E120 N 400 kcmil 185 mm²
L1 AWG0 50 mm²
E277 N AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
40 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG1 35 mm²
PE AWG1 35 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
50 kVA E120 N 600 kcmil 300 mm²
V 1.23 99 4999 en
L1 AWG3/0 95 mm²
E277 N AWG3/0 95 mm²
PE AWG3/0 95 mm²
L1 – L3 AWG3/0 70 mm²
60 kVA D208 MP AWG3/0 70 mm²
PE AWG3/0 70 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG6 10 mm²
PE AWG6 10 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG4 16 mm²
80 kVA D600 only three phases
PE AWG4 16 mm²
L1 - L3 AWG3/0 95 mm²
80 kVA
enlarged D600
bypass
PE AWG3/0 95 mm²
L1 - L3 400 kcmil 185 mm²
D208 MP 400 kcmil 185 mm²
120 kVA
L1 - L3 AWG0 50 mm²
PE AWG0 50 mm²
Table 40: Cable cross-sections X006 Output (IGBT/SCR)
V 1.23 100 4999 en

8.6 Recommended AC safety equipment and selectivity
NOTICE
Risk of fire caused by wrong connection of the system to an
unprotected circuit.
To reduce the risk of fire, connect only to a circuit with fuse.
The maximum branch circuit overcurrent protection, see chapter 8.6.1,
page 102 to chapter 8.6.5, page 106, in accordance with the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/ NFPA 70 and the Canadian Electrical Code, Part I,
C22.1.
Special attention must be paid to the selection of fuse ratings to guarantee correct
selectivity in case of a short circuit.
The distribution into which the system is integrated must be designed in such a way that
in case of a short circuit only the nearest fuse to the short circuit must tripped (in this
case, this is called selectivity). This way, power supply is maintained for the other
outgoing lines.
For mains power supply, the fuse at the output must be selective with
the fuse at the input.
Branch circuit overcurrent protection for the AC output circuit shall be

provided in the end installation
V 1.23 101 4999 en

8.6.1 AC- Fuse main power X001 (separated mains) (IGBT)
600 V Input Fuse only:
LPJ-xxxSP Cooper Bussmann or AJTxxx Mersen
xxx = current
Main input X001 (separated mains)

Power Voltage X001 (REC) Fuse Interrupt rating
10 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 20 A 300 kA
15 kVA 600 V L1 - L3 20 A 300 kA
20 kVA 208 V L1 - L3 70 A 300 kA
20 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 30 A 300 kA
30 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 45 A 300 kA
40 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 60 A 300 kA
50 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 70 A 300 kA
60 kVA 208 V L1 - L3 200 A 300 kA
60 kVA 600 V L1 - L3 70 A 250 kA
120 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 175 A 300 kA
Table 41: AC- Fuse main power X001 (separated mains) (IGBT)
V 1.23 102 4999 en

8.6.2 AC- Fuse main power X001 (separated mains) (SCR)
xxx = current

Power Voltage X001 (REC) Fuse Interrupt rating
10 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 30 A 300 kA
15 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 40 A 300 kA
20 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 45 A 300 kA
30 kVA 208 V L1 - L3 80 A 300 kA
30 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 80 A 300 kA
40 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 100 A 300 kA
50 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 125 A 250 kA
60 kVA 208 V L1 - L3 350 A 50 kA
120 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 250 A 50 kA
Table 42: AC- Fuse main power X001 (separated mains) (SCR)
V 1.23 103 4999 en

8.6.3 AC- Fuse main power X005 (separated mains) (IGBT & SCR)
xxx = current

Voltage
Power E = single-phase X005 (Byp) Fuse Interrupt rating
D = three-phase
10 kVA E120 V L1 90 A 300 kA
10 kVA D208 V L1 - L3 35 A 300 kA
15 kVA E120 V L1 150 A 250 kA
15 kVA D600 V L1 - L3 20 A 300 kA
20 kVA E120 V L1 175 A 250 kA
20 kVA D208 V L1 - L3 60 A 300 kA
30 kVA E120 V L1 300 A 50 kA
30 kVA D208 V L1 - L3 90 A 300 kA
40 kVA E120 V L1 350 A 50 kA
40 kVA E277 V L1 175 A 250 kA
40 kVA D208 V L1 - L3 125 A 250 kA
40 kVA D480 V L1 - L3 60 A 300 kA
50 kVA E120 V L1 450 A 25 kA
60 kVA E277 V L1 250 A 50 kA
60 kVA D208 V L1 - L3 200 A 250 kA
60 kVA D600 V L1 - L3 70 A 300 kA
120 kVA D208 V L1 - L3 350 A 50 kA
120 kVA D480 V L1 - L3 175 A 250 kA
Table 43: AC- Fuse main power X005 (separated mains) (SCR)
V 1.23 104 4999 en

8.6.4 AC- Fuse main power X005 (common mains) (IGBT)
xxx = current
Main input X005 (common mains)

Power Voltage X005 (REC & Byp) Fuse Interrupt rating
10 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 20 A 300 kA
15 kVA 600 V L1 - L3 20 A 300 kA
20 kVA 208 V L1 - L3 70 A 300 kA
20 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 30 A 300 kA
30 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 45 A 300 kA
40 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 60 A 300 kA
50 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 70 A 300 kA
60 kVA 208 V L1 - L3 200 A 300 kA
60 kVA 600 V L1 - L3 70 A 250 kA
120 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 175 A 300 kA
Table 44: AC- Fuse main power X005 (common mains) (IGBT)
V 1.23 105 4999 en

8.6.5 AC- Fuse main power X005 (common mains) (SCR)
xxx = current
Main input X005 (common mains)

Power Voltage X005 (REC & Byp) Fuse Interrupt rating
10 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 30 A 300 kA
15 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 40 A 300 kA
20 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 45 A 300 kA
30 kVA 208 V L1 - L3 80 A 300 kA
40 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 100 A 300 kA
50 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 125 A 250 kA
60 kVA 208 V L1 - L3 350 A 50 kA
80 kVA 600 V L1 - L3 90 A 50 kA
200 A T, 600 V
LPJ-200SP
80 kVA Cooper
enlarged 600 V L1 - L3 Bussmann 200 kA
bypass or
AJT200
Mersen
120 kVA 480 V L1 - L3 250 A 50 kA
Table 45: AC- Fuse main power X005 (common mains) (SCR)
V 1.23 106 4999 en

8.7 DC connection (battery)
DANGER
/ VDE 0105, page 14
NOTICE
Material damage caused by polarity reversal of the DC inputs
Make absolutely sure that the polarity of the battery connection is correct.
The following safety rules must be observed when working on the

system:
Wristwatches, rings and other metal objects must be
removed.
Use only insulated tools.
The system must not be dismantled.
An isolating device for the DC input is provided within the system.

An isolating switch for the batteries is recommended and may be
necessary to meet local specifications.
An isolating switch should be installed between the batteries and the system.
The external overcurrent protection for the DC input and also the breaker-
breakers for the external batteries must be provided by the user.
The fuse for the external batteries must be carried out on all poles.
The battery connection to the system must be protected by a fuse!

See chapter 8.9
V 1.23 107 4999 en

8.7.1 Battery connection range X004
1 2
X004
Figure 8-12: Battery connection range X004 (example)
DC- connector X004

Pos Designation Signification
1 B- (2L-) - Battery
2 B+ (2L+) + Battery
Table 46: Battery connection range X004
V 1.23 108 4999 en

8.8 Recommended cable cross-sections DC (battery)
DANGER
Risk of fire caused by incorrect cross-section
The following table provides an overview of the current loading capacity for
installation type C/30 °C. The actual cross-sections and back-up fuses
must be chosen with regard to ambient temperature, bunching of the
cables and cable lengths in accordance with the local regulations.
All standard and special national and local regulations for electrical
installations must be observed. These may vary from country to country.
The cable cross-section should be dimensioned so that for the used cable
length, the ohmic voltage drop in the cable is limited to <1 %.
V 1.23 109 4999 en

8.8.1 Cable cross-sections battery input X004 at 125 V
Battery input X004 (120 V)
Power Voltage Cross-sections (for each pole)
5 kVA AWG2 35 mm²
10 kVA AWG2 35 mm²
15 kVA AWG4/0 120 mm²
20 kVA AWG4/0 120 mm²
125 V
30 kVA 2 x AWG3/0 2 x 95 mm²
40 kVA 2 x AWG3/0 2 x 95 mm²
50 kVA 2x AWG4/0 2 x 120 mm²
60 kVA 2x AWG4/0 2 x 120 mm²
Table 47: Cross-sections battery- input X004 at 125 V

100 kVA 2 x AWG4/0 2 x 120 mm²
216 V
120 kVA 2 x AWG4/0 2 x 120 mm²

10 kVA AWG4 25 mm²
15 kVA AWG2 35 mm²
20 kVA AWG2 35 mm²
30 kVA AWG2/0 70 mm²
40 kVA AWG4/0 120 mm²
240 V
50 kVA 2 x AWG2/0 2 x 70 mm²
60 kVA 2 x AWG2/0 2 x 70 mm²
80 kVA 2 x AWG3/0 2 x 95 mm²
100 kVA 2 x AWG4/0 2 x 120 mm²
120 kVA 2 x AWG4/0 2 x 120 mm²
V 1.23 110 4999 en

8.9 Recommended DC safety equipment and selectivity
Special attention must be paid to the selection of fuse ratings to guarantee correct
selectivity in case of a short circuit.
The distribution into which the system is integrated must be designed in such a way that
in case of a short circuit only the nearest fuse to the short circuit must tripped (in this
case, this is called selectivity). This way, power supply is maintained for the other
outgoing lines.
For mains power supply, the fuse at the output must be selective with the fuse at the
input.
8.9.1 DC battery input fuse Q100 (X004) at 125 V

Fuse only:
Manufacture = Siemens, Type SITOR, NH, gR
or equivalent
Battery input Q100 (X004) (125 V)

Power Voltage Fuse
5 kVA 125A
10 kVA 125A
15 kVA 250A
20 kVA 250A
125 V
30 kVA 400A
40 kVA 400A
50 kVA 630A
60 kVA 630A
Table 50: DC battery input fuse Q100 at 125 V

Fuse only:
or equivalent

Power Voltage Fuse
100 kVA 630A
216 V
120 kVA 630A
V 1.23 111 4999 en

Fuse only:
or equivalent

Power Voltage Fuse
10 kVA 80A
15 kVA 125A
20 kVA 125A
30 kVA 160A
40 kVA 250A
240 V
50 kVA 315A
60 kVA 315A
80 kVA NH-GR.2, 400 A, gR, 690V, IR 100 kA
100 kVA 630A
120 kVA 630A
8.9.4 Switch batteries to one device
When using all batteries on one UPS system
1. Switch the UPS system to bypass operation from which the battery is disconnected.
2. Open the associated external battery isolator (battery box)
3. Measure the battery voltage on all batteries.
 The battery voltage must be at the same level.
NOTE
Property damage due to high equalizing currents
If the voltage level deviates significantly, high equalizing currents can lead
to failure of the fuse!
4. Insert the coupling switch of the active UPS system

Switch back batteries
See chapter 9.2, Preparation for commissioning, page 132
V 1.23 112 4999 en

8.10 Connecting external control lines (signal wiring)
DANGER
/ VDE 0105, page 14
DANGER
Danger to life caused by non-compliance
The remote shutdown does not have the functionality of an emergency
stop or EPO device (emergency power off).
If an emergency STOP or EPO circuit is to be implemented, these circuits
must be additionally installed externally.
Approved isolating devices must then galvanically isolate all AC and DC
inputs (AC supply and battery inputs)!

IDC ET 101:2008; IEC 60364
The signal wiring must separately from the power cables laid.
The installation cable is double insulated, be designed with twisted pairs
and for Uo/U = 300 V/500 V.
Conductor cross-section at least 1.5 mm².
Cable run >25 m:

If a cable run >25 m is required, please contact the manufacturer’s
helpdesk in advance.
To fulfill the IP21 conditions, observe the manufacturer’s data of the

cable glands.
V 1.23 113 4999 en

8.10.1 Installation of digital inputs (control lines)
As described in chapter 6.4, A230 I/O card, A330 expansion card, page 56, it is possible
to install a digital input in two ways:
 With internal 24V
 With external 24V
Both ways of installation are shown in the following example wirings.
A230
X12.1:1
aux
Manual Twisted contact
pair
External
bypass
manual bypass
X12.1:2
1 2 3
BR24
Figure 8-13: Example wiring for external manual bypass with internal 24 V supply for digital input
A230
X12.1:1
aux
Manual Twisted contact
pair
External
bypass
manual bypass
X12.1:2
1 2 3
24 VDC external
BR24
Figure 8-14: Example wiring for external manual bypass with external 24 V supply for digital input
V 1.23 114 4999 en

A230
X12.1:1
Manual Twisted External
bypass pair
aux manual bypass
X12.1:2 contact
X12.2:1
external output Twisted External
breaker open pair output breaker
aux
contact
1 2 3 X12.2:2
BR24
Figure 8-15: Example wiring for installation of more than one digital input with internal 24 V supply.
X12.1:1
A230
Twisted
pair
External
Manual aux
X12.1:2 manual bypass
contact
bypass
X12.2:1
external output Twisted
pair
breaker open
X12.2:2 External
output breaker
aux
contact
1 2 3
BR24
24 VDC external
Figure 8-16: Example wiring for paralleling of digital input with internal 24 V supply.
Mixed wiring with one input with internal and the other with external
wiring is not possible!
V 1.23 115 4999 en

8.10.2 Paralleling signaling wires (optional)
In parallel systems some signals have to be paralleled because every system has to get
the same information. Two of these signals are for example:
RPO (Remote Power Off)
or
External manual bypass
A230
X12.1:1
Manual Twisted
pair
bypass aux
External
X12.1:2 contact
manual
bypass
1 2 3
Twisted
BR24 pair
A230
X12.1:1
Manual Twisted
pair
bypass
X12.1:2 Twisted
pair
1 2 3
24 VDC external
BR24
Figure 8-17: Example wiring for paralleling of digital input with external 24 V supply.
V 1.23 116 4999 en

A230
X12.1:1
Twisted
Manual pair
bypass
X12.1:2
1 2 3
BR24
aux
External
contact
manual
bypass
A230
X12.1:1
Twisted
Manual
pair
bypass
X12.1:2
1 2 3
BR24
Figure 8-18: Example wiring for paralleling of digital input with internal 24 V supply
V 1.23 117 4999 en

8.10.3 REMOTE OFF (digital input)
REMOTE off does not have an EMERGENCY STOP or EPO function!

See chapter 6.4.8, Digital inputs A230, A330, page 65.
8.10.4 EMERGENCY POWER OFF

If an emergency STOP or EPO - circuit is needed these circuits must be
set up externally.
Legal separation devices must isolate all AC and DC inputs (AC power and
battery inputs) galvanically!
8.10.5 Connecting the voltage-free relays (status)

Technical data relays
Maximum DC switching voltage: 24 VDC
Maximum DC switching current: 1A
Maximum AC switching voltage: 240 VAC
Maximum AC switching current: 1A
Minimum contact loading: 100 mA
8.11 Notice sign Backfeed Protection

Backfeed Protection
The ENERTRONIC I have an internal backfeed protection device. If the
circuit breaker is located outside the facility, a notice sign with the following
text on all the external scarf tern of UPS supply to install:
Notice sign
Before starting work on this circuit:
Switch off UPS
test for hazardous voltage between all terminals, including the protective
earth.
Risk of voltage feedback!
Figure 8-19: Notice sign
V 1.23 118 4999 en

8.12 Parallel operation with coupling switch (optional)
The installation is described in chapter 8.13, Wiring the parallel function,
page 121, page 119 and chapter 8.14, Wiring the “Coupling switch” (group
connector), page 123
With a coupling switch two load bus bars can be switched together. Each load bus bar
can be feed by one unit or a set of more units.
A group is formed by the units which feed on the same load bus bar. In the example
above “unit1” and “unit2” form “group1” and “unit3” and “unit4” form “group2”.
If the coupling switch is open then each group feed their own load bus bar.
If the coupling switch is closed, then “group1” and “group2” form a new group “group3”.
All units (unit 1...4 in the example) work parallel now.
Remark:
All units and group of a parallel system must have the same bypass mains
source.
The most common coupling switch system is the system where each group consists of a
single unit, show below.
V 1.23 119 4999 en

The system is controlled by the group connector. It connects the units of each group
during the coupling action.
Additionally a multicolor LED is installed nearby the coupling switch. It guides the user
whether the user is allowed to turn the coupling switch. Following states can appear:
MEANING OF MULTICOLOR COUPLING LED
Coupling allowed. System is decoupled. User is permitted to perform a
switching action.
Coupling forbidden. System is decoupled. User is not allowed to do any
coupling actions.
Reasons:
 Load bus bars are asynchrony
 Each group has different operating states, f. E.:
Group1: Normal operation
Group2: Bypass operation
 Failure: -F105 tripped
System is coupled. System is coupled. Decoupling can be performed
anytime.
Coupling is NOT allowed, when the manual bypass is on and the

systems controller board “A100” is off.
Because then the information "manual bypass is on" is not send to the
other systems of the parallel unit, and the coupling LED shows green
anyway.
V 1.23 120 4999 en

8.13 Wiring the parallel function
8.13.1 Block diagram “Common parallel wiring for 2 units”
Figure 8-20: Block diagram “Common parallel wiring for 2 units”
V 1.23 121 4999 en

8.13.2 Block diagram “Parallel wiring for 4 units”
Figure 8-21: Block diagram “Parallel wiring for 4 units”
V 1.23 122 4999 en

8.14 Wiring the “Coupling switch” (group connector)
8.14.1 Parallel wiring for 2 units and “Coupling switch” (group connector)
Figure 8-22: Parallel wiring for 2 units and group connector
V 1.23 123 4999 en

8.14.2 Block diagram “Control wiring for 2x2 coupling switch (group connector) system”
Figure 8-23: Block diagram “Control wiring for 2x2 coupling switch system”
V 1.23 124 4999 en

8.14.3 Block diagram “Parallel wiring for 2x2 units and coupling switch (group connector)
Figure 8-24: Block diagram “Parallel wiring for 2x2 units and group connector
V 1.23 125 4999 en

8.14.4 Sychronisation wiring for coupling system (group connector) of 2x2 units
Figure 8-25: Sychronisation wiring for coupling system of 2x2 units
V 1.23 126 4999 en

8.15 Configuration “A100” for parallel operation
Figure 8-26: Controller board A100
Figure 8-27: Master address Figure 8-28: 24 V Slave address
V 1.23 127 4999 en

8.15.1 DIP Switches “A100” for parallel operation
S2
Switch Meaning Normal position

1 slave BSL mode (only for test lab for flashing) OFF
2 boot monitor programming (only for test lab for flashing) OFF
3 output of residual battery capacity via serial interface OFF
4 baud rate: 19200 ON
5 baud rate: 38400/57600 ON
S3

depending on address in parallel
1 CAN ID bit 0, external CAN bus connection / for single system:
OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF
5 idle
S3
S1.1 termination of internal CAN bus ON

Table 7: DIP switches of the controller board
V 1.23 128 4999 en

8.16 Install wiring the parallel function (optional)
All units of a parallel system and a coupling switch system must have the
same bypass mains source.
The bypass mains may be switched each unit, but it must
be the same source.
The bypass mains may be switched off for each group,
but it must be the same source.
Different un-synchrony sources for bypass mains for unit of a parallel

system and each group of a coupling system are not allowed.
The parallel wiring must separately from the power cables laid.
The installation cable is double insulated, be designed with twisted pairs
and for Uo/U = 300 V/500 V.
Cable run >25 m:

If a cable run >25 m is required, please contact the manufacturer’s
helpdesk in advance.
Only original cables from BENNING are allowed to install.
8.16.1 Stripping data cables
Figure 8-29: Stripping data cable
8.16.2 Earthing data cables
Figure 8-30: Earthing data cable
8.16.3 Fixing data cables
Figure 8-31: Fixing data cable
V 1.23 129 4999 en

8.16.4 CAN Bus connection
Figure 8-32: CAN Bus connector
8.16.5 24V-Control cables
Figure 8-33: Master 24 V control cable Figure 8-34: Slave 24 V control cable
V 1.23 130 4999 en

9 Commissioning
DANGER
mains!
DANGER
Serious injuries or death by touching the cables and terminals on the
device. The system must only be opened, installed and maintained by an
electrically skilled person.
WARNING
NOTICE
Damage to the system
The polarity of the mains inputs, L and MP must not be reversed.
Commissioning measures must be carried out when

 The system is put into operation for the first time,
 Changes or repairs have been made.
Commissioning must only be performed by an electrically skilled

person!
Before first commissioning, check for correct grounding and mains

installation.
9.1 Tools required

In order to be able to take the system into service, you require the following:
 Voltage tester, e. g. DUSPOL
 Rotary-field measuring instrument
 Various screwdrivers
V 1.23 131 4999 en

9.2 Preparation for commissioning
Before startup commissioning, open breaker-breakers and circuit breaker
Before commissioning, these breakers and circuit breakers must be open.
For systems with make-before-break switch “Q500” see chapter 9.2.4,

Make-before-break switch Q500 (optional), page 133.
9.2.1 Disconnector “Q005” manual bypass switch (only systems with Q005)
Make sure, that disconnector is switched off.
With the disconnector Q005, supply to the:
 bypass supply, from terminal X005 to terminal X006 (output)
can be switched off.
Figure 9-1: Disconnector Q005 bypass
9.2.2 Disconnector “Q051” mains supply switch (only systems with Q051)
 mains, terminal X005
Figure 9-2: Disconnector Q051 mains supply
9.2.3 Disconnector “Q052” system output switch (only systems with Q052)
The output of the system can be switched off with disconnector Q052.
Figure 9-3: Disconnector Q052 system output
V 1.23 132 4999 en

9.2.4 Make-before-break switch Q500 (optional)
WARNING
For systems with make-before-break switch Q500 (Option):
Connection between input X005 and output!
In position AUTO the power block is live, when voltage is applied to clamp
X005.
Make-before break switch “Q500” must be in the “AUTO” position.
The factory state of the make-before-break switch Q500 switch must

be in position “AUTO”.
Figure 9-4: Q500 position AUTO
The make-before-break switch is a multifunction switch.

In one position can more than one connection be connected or disconnected.
Following table shows the function:
Input Output Bypass
Position (Connection from (Connection from (connection from
X005 to power block) power block to X006) X005 to X006)
AUTO X X
TEST X X
BYPASS X
X = connection set
V 1.23 133 4999 en

9.2.5 Battery breaker Q100
WARNING
Risk of fire due to incorrect fuse value
Check the fuse rating in battery separators and compare this with the data
sheet!
Only the value specified in the data sheet must be used
Make sure, that battery breaker is switched off.
The battery breaker can be built in or be external!
Do not apply any voltage to the system, if the battery breaker is

closed.
In case of external breaker (no Q100 build in):
Do not apply any voltage to clamp X4!
Close battery breaker only when you are ask by display

command or when it is expressly emphasized mentioned in
this manual.
The battery breaker-breaker has the following functions:

 Isolate the battery from the system.
With the battery disconnector the supply of the battery to the system can be switched off.
Figure 9-5: Battery breaker Q100
V 1.23 134 4999 en

9.2.6 DC fuse “Q400” internal power supply (system)
The fuse “Q400” has the following functions:
 Breaker
 Protection of the internal power supply
 Protection of the control cables
 Protection in case of abnormal states, fire protection.
With “Q400”, the supply of the battery to the internal power supply:
 X004
or
Figure 9-6: DC fuse “Q400”
9.2.7 AC circuit breaker “Q401” for internal power supply (system)

The circuit breaker “Q401” has the following functions:
 Breaker
 Protection of the internal power supply
 Protection of the control cables
 Protection in case of abnormal states, fire protection.
With “Q401”, the supply of the mains to the internal power supply:
 bypass, terminal X005
Figure 9-7: AC circuit breaker “Q401”
9.2.8 Circuit breaker “Q520 (only systems with Q520)

The circuit breaker “Q520” has the following functions:
With “Q520”, the measurement voltage for “A520” from
 bypass, terminal X005
Figure 9-8: circuit breaker “Q520”
V 1.23 135 4999 en

9.3 Checking the electrical connection mechanically
DANGER
/ VDE 0105, page 14
A report of the testing that has been carried out in accordance with
ANSI/NFPA 70 or national regulations must be provided.
The earth resistance of the system must also be measured as part of this
test. The earth resistance is one of the decisive factors for the safety of the
system.
The start-up report will help you to follow the start-up procedure.
The work that has been carried out must be carefully checked before start-
up.
The following prerequisites must be met before commissioning:

 All electrical connections made on site must be checked for correct connection and
a firm seating.
 The entire electrical system must have been tested in accordance with
ANSI/NFPA 70 “Erection of low voltage systems - Part 6” or national regulations.
If required, faults must be rectified.
 Wiring errors must be remedied using this documentation and the circuit diagram.
If faults cannot be rectified, please contact the manufacturer’s service line.
The most important start-up checks are described below.
 Check that the connections have been tightened.
 Check the AC mains connection:
 Check that the connections are tight.
 Check for correct connection in accordance with the circuit diagram.
 Check that the copper links are correct for the type of supply on site and change if
necessary.
 Check the phase sequence.
 Check the correct fitting of the covers, so that protection against touch is provided.
V 1.23 136 4999 en

Check the DC cabling.
 Check that the connection is tight.
 Check polarity of the DC cables.
 Check the correct fitting of the covers, so that protection against touch is provided.
Check the control and communications cabling
 Check that the connection is tight.
9.3.1 Checking the electrical connection electrically
DANGER
Serious injuries or death by touching the cables and terminals on the
device. The system must only be opened, installed and maintained by an
electrically skilled person.
Check the system voltages

 Check the AC- rectifier voltage.
 L1 - L2; L1 - L3; L2 - L3; L1 - MP; L2 - MP; L3 – MP (three-phase)
 L1 – N (single-phase)
Check the rotary field for clockwise phase rotation.
 Check the AC- bypass voltage (if available).
 L1 - L2; L1 - L3; L2 - L3; L1 - MP; L2- MP; L3- MP (three-phase)
 L1 – N (single-phase)
Check the rotary field for clockwise phase rotation.
 Check the DC voltages
closed.

this manual.
 Check correct polarity of all DC inputs.

 Check the voltage against earth for each input and for each pole
The voltages must not exceed the maximum DC voltage of the system.
During initial switch-on:
 Check the fault indication on the system.
 Check the LED displays on the ENERTRONIC I.
 Check the LED indicators on the display and operating panel.
 Check the displays.
V 1.23 137 4999 en

9.4 Performing commissioning
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock.
The system is operated with high voltages.
All work on the system must be performed in compliance with the
DGUV regulation 3 or national regulations!
WARNING
For systems with make-before-break switch Q500 (optional):
Connection between input X005 and output!
In position AUTO the power block is live, when voltage is applied to clamp
X005.
Always carry out individual steps in the correct order
Check that all disconnectors and circuit breakers are switched off.
 For systems with make-before-break switch Q500:
Make sure that Q500 is in the “AUTO” position.
Switch on the voltage for the system and check the following on the input
terminals:
connection three phases single phase single phase

(optional isolated earth)
X001 L1 - L3, MP, PE
X005 L1 - L3, MP, PE L1 – N, PE L1 – L2, PE
Voltage values
Phase <--> Phase
(values see data Phase <--> Neutral Phase <--> Phase
Phase <--> MP
sheet)
Check: Voltage and clockwise phase rotation.
Now switch on disconnector Q052 (only systems with Q052)
If you have a system with make-before-break switch “Q500” you just

have to make sure that Q500 is in the “AUTO” position.
Figure 9-9: Disconnector Q052 on Figure 9-10: Make-before-break switch
For parallel systems with external load separator, this must be closed
before commissioning!
V 1.23 138 4999 en

1. Now switch on disconnector Q051 (only systems with Q051)
If you have a system with make-before-break switch “Q500” you just
have to make sure that Q500 is in the “AUTO” position.
Figure 9-11: Disconnector Q051 on
2. Now switch on the disconnector Q520 (only systems with Q520)

(three phases)
(single phase)
3. Now switch on the disconnector Q401 and circuit breaker Q400
Q401 Internal power supply (AC)

The system will start up (boot).
Q400 Internal power supply (DC)
 Now the system boots
The boot process take 60 seconds!
Once the controller is started, the backfeed contactor K005 energizes

if the voltage values and the rotary field on X005 are correct!
For systems with alphanumerical display:
 To switch on the system, follow the steps in chapter 13.2.1,
Starting normal/mains priority operation, page 206.
For system with TFT (Touch) display
 To switch on the system, follow the steps in chapter xy, page xy.
V 1.23 139 4999 en

10 Alphanumerical display and operating panel menu
You can browse between the different menus of the first menu level by briefly pressing
the arrow keys “ ” or “ ”. On this menu level, the menus are arranged so that you will
return to the initial menu where you started.
The menus at the top level show status messages, measured values and provide access
to submenus.
10.1 Top menu level/measured values/submenus

All specified values are example values!
....................
........UPS-........
Status message, depends on operating
..NORMAL.OPERATION.. mode.
....................
Browse menu
“short”
Date/time menu
10.MAY.2016.11:44:09 Date/time
HOURS:..........521h Operating hours counter
COUNTER:..........32 Mains failure counter GR/BYP
OUTPUT:..........7kW Output active power
Browse menu
“short”
Inverter/output menu
INV:....7kVA..60.0Hz Apparent power/frequency
L1....230V......10A. Phase L1/voltage/current
Browse menu
“short”
V 1.23 140 4999 en

Phase angle menu
....PHASE ANGLE..... Phase angle between:
INV.-.BYP:.....0.DGR INVERTER and bypass
INV.-.BUS:.....0.DGR INVERTER and parallel operation and
master
INV.-.EXT:...---.DGR
INVERTER and external synchronization
source
Browse menu
“short”
Rectifier/input menu
REC:...10kVA..59.6Hz Power/frequency
Browse menu
“short”
Static bypass menu
BYP:....0.kVA.60.0Hz Power/frequency
L1....600.V......0.A Phase L1/voltage/current
Browse menu
“short”
DC link menu
U.BATT:........245V. DC link voltage
I.BATT:..........6A. Battery current
I.REC.DC........0.A. Rectifier current
SWITCH.OF.AT...188V. Lower shutdown threshold/voltage
Browse menu
“short”
Battery status menu
BATTERY:.........6.A Battery current
TEMPERATURE:....-.-C Battery temperature
REMAIN.TIME:.---.MIN Remaining battery support time
REM.CAPACITY:.28.0Ah Remaining battery capacity
Browse menu
“short”
Event menu
....SHOW.EVENTS.?... To open the Event menu, press and hold the
(PRESS.PUSH.BUTTON.. “ ” key.
'↓'.LONG............ The event messages can be displayed here.
....................
V 1.23 141 4999 en

Browse menu
“short”
Main menu
.......MENU.?....... To open the Main menu, press and hold the
'↓'.LONG............ Additional menus and settings.
....................
Browse menu
“short”
Date/time menu
10.MAY.2016.11:46:35
HOURS:..........521h Starting point, see above.
COUNTER:..........32
OUTPUT:..........7kW
V 1.23 142 4999 en

10.2 Event menu
To open the Event menu, briefly press the arrow keys “ “ or “ “ at the top menu level
repeatedly until the following menu shown below is displayed.
To open the submenu, press and hold the arrow key “ ”.
To exit the submenu, press and hold the arrow key “ ”.
....SHOW.EVENTS.?... To open the Event menu, press and hold the
The event messages can be displayed here.
'↓'.LONG............
....................
Open menu
“long”
10.FEB15.16:35:00:35 Date/time/hh.mm.ss.zz
Event text
State.Bypass.Ready..
....................
Event type and number
..............E.0505
Browse menu
or “short”
10.FEB15.16:35:00:35 Date/time/hh.mm.ss.zz
Event text
EXTERNAL.OUTPUT.BREA
KER.OPEN............
Event type and number
..............E.0701
...
Exit menu
“long”
....SHOW.EVENTS.?... Starting point, see above.
(PRESS.PUSH.BUTTON..
'↓'.LONG............
....................
V 1.23 143 4999 en

11 Alphanumerical display: Settings in the configuration main
menu
11.1 Configuration/Settings
Changes of the settings made on factory-side can result in failure or
damage of the system or downstream loads.
The information in the following chapters is to be observed!
Different settings can be made and information can be read out in the main menu:
MENU see chapter
Language 11.2
Date/Time 11.3
PRINT EVENTS/STAT.* 11.4
Save settings 11.5
AUTOSTART 11.6
Contrast and brightness 11.7
Output voltage 11.8
Password 11.9
Software versions 11.10
Type ans serial-no. 11.11
Battery charging 11.12
Battery – Central battery 11.13
Boost charging 11.14
Key lock 11.15
Parallel operation 11.16
Disable bypass 11.17
Synchronisation 11.18
Battery limit 11.16, 11.19
They are usually available as submenus.
Settings must be saved after changes, see chapter 11.5 “Menu Save
settings (Setup)”, page 149.
V 1.23 144 4999 en

11.2 Menu Language
Settings must be saved after changes,
see chapter 11.5 “Menu Save settings (Setup)”, page 149.
To change the language, first of all the main menu must be opened.
The submenu “Language” is selected.
.......MENU.?.......
(PRESS.PUSH.BUTTON.. To open the Main menu, press and hold
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”
Browse the menu until...

“short”
****.MAIN.MENU..****
..LANGUAGE.......... ... the cursor is at this point.
..DATE./.TIME.......
↓.PRINT.EVENTS/STAT.
Open submenu
“long”
***...LANGUAGE...***
-->...ENGLISH....<--
....................
....................
Browse options until...

or “short”
***...Language....***
-->....ENGLISH....<-- this is selected.
.....................
.....................
Exit menu
“long”
**...MAIN MENU....**
..LANGUAGE.......... Done!
..DATE/TIME.........
V 1.23 145 4999 en

11.3 Menu Date/Time
To change the date or time, first of all the main menu must be opened. Then the
submenu “Date/Time” is selected.
.......MENU.?.......
To open the Main menu, press and hold
'↓'.LONG)........... the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
..LANGUAGE.......... ... the cursor is at this point.
..DATE./.TIME.......
Open submenu
“long”
****.DATE/TIME..****
.................... Set day.*
11.Dec.2016.17:00:54
SET.DATE/TIME?....NO
Change setting.
or “short”
or
or
Select the next option if no change is
necessary.
“long”
.................... Set month.*
11.Dec.2016.17:00:54
Change setting.
or “short”
or
or
necessary.
“long”
.................... Set year.*
11.Dec.2016.17:00:54
V 1.23 146 4999 en

Change setting.
or “short”
or
or Select the next option if no change is
necessary.
“long”
.................... Set hour*
11.Dec.2016.17:00:54
Change setting.
or “short”
or
or
necessary.
“long”
.................... Set minute.*
11.Dec.2016.17:00:54
Change setting.
or “short”
or
or
necessary.
“long”
.................... Set second.*
11.Dec.2016.17:00:54
*The cursor jumps to the respectively selected position.
V 1.23 147 4999 en

or “short”
or
“long”
....................
11.Dec.2016.17:00:00
Scroll options until the desired one is set.

or “short”
....................
12.Dec.2016.17:30:00
SET.DATE/TIME?...YES
“long”
..LANGUAGE.......... Date/Timet is now set to
..DATE./.TIME....... 12 December 2016 17:30:00 Uhr.
11.4 Menu Print Events/Stat.
This function cannot be selected and executed!
V 1.23 148 4999 en

11.5 Menu Save settings (Setup)
To save settings, first of all the main menu must be opened.
Then the submenu “Setup” is selected.
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG)........... the “ ” key..
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.DATE./.TIME....... ... the cursor is at this point.
..SETUP.............
↓.BATTERY.CHARGING..
Open submenu
“long”
*****..SETUP...*****
....................
SAVE.NEW.SETUP:...NO
LOAD.OLD.SETUP:...NO

or “short”
*****..SETUP...*****
.................... ... this is selected.
SAVE.NEW.SETUP:..YES
LOAD.OLD.SETUP:...NO
Exit menu
“long”
**..WRITE SETUP..***
....................
........OK!.........
PRESS.A.KEY:........
Press key to save.

“short”
↑.DATE./.TIME....... Done!
..SETUP.............
↓.BATTERY.CHARGING..
V 1.23 149 4999 en

11.6 Menu Autostart
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock on return of the mains
voltage
There is a high risk of fatal injury when “Autostart” is enabled.
On return of the mains voltage, the system automatically switches the
output on again.
To change this setting, a password must be entered. (see chapter 11.9,

Menu Password, page 154)

In order to enable or disable “Autostart”, the main menu must first be

opened. Then select the “Autostart” submenu.
If the Autostart function is enabled, the system returns to normal operation, even if the
battery was completely discharged in case of a mains failure and even if the controller
board A100 was de-energized.
However, the system also needed to be in normal operation previously.
Apart from the Autostart function, the system always returns to normal operation (e.g. in
case of a mains failure or a reversible fault) as long as it was in this operating state
before and the controller board A100 was supplied uninterruptedly.
When “Autostart” is enabled, in case of failure of both supplies:
Rectifier supply and
Bypass network
the system returns to the state it was in before the mains failure.
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key..
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
..AUTOSTART......... ... the cursor is at this point.
..CONTRAST..........
↓.OUTPUT.VOLTAGE....
Open submenu
“long”
V 1.23 150 4999 en

****.Autostart..****
....................
Autostart:.......OFF
....................

or “short”
****.AUTOSTART..****
.................... ... this is selected.
AUTOSTART:........ON
....................
Exit menu
“long”
..AUTOSTART......... Done!
..CONTRAST..........
↓.OUTPUT.VOLTAGE....
V 1.23 151 4999 en

11.7 Menu Contrast and brightness
To set the contrast and brightness of the display, first of all the main menu must be
opened. Then select the “Contrast” submenu.
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key..
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
..BOOST.CHARGING.... ... the cursor is at this point.
..AUTOSTART.........
↓.CONTRAST..........
Open submenu
“long”
****..CONTRAST..****
.................... Example
CONTRAST:.......95.%
BRIGHTNESS:.....64.%
Change setting.
or “short”
or
or
necessary.
“long”
.................... Example
Change setting.
or “short”
.................... Example
Exit menu
“long”
..BOOST.CHARGING.... Done!
..AUTOSTART.........
↓.CONTRAST..........
V 1.23 152 4999 en

11.8 Menu Output voltage
To set the output voltage in the inverter operation, first of all the main menu
must be opened. Then select the “Output voltage” submenu.

.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key..
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.OUTPUT.VOLTAGE.... ... the cursor is at this point.
..PASSWORD..........
↓.SOFTWARE.VERSIONS.
Open submenu
“long”
*..OUTPUT.VOLTAGE..*
.................... Example
VOLTAGE:.......208.V
....................
Change setting.
or “short”
*..OUTPUT.VOLTAGE..*
.................... Example
VOLTAGE:.......210.V
....................
Exit menu
“long”
↑.OUTPUT.VOLTAGE.... Done!
V 1.23 153 4999 en

11.9 Menu Password
11.9.1 Password entry
To enter the password, first of all the main menu must be opened.
Then select the “Password” submenu.
The password must be entered to be able to change most settings.
The preconfigured password is: ENER
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key..
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
Open submenu
“long”
*****.PASSWORD.*****
....................
..PASSWORD:.########
....................
Enter characters.
or “short”
or or
Select next character.

“long”
....................
..PASSWORD:.E#######
....................
Enter characters.
or “short”
or or

“long”
V 1.23 154 4999 en

....................
..PASSWORD:.EN######
....................
Enter characters.
or “short”
or or

“long”
... etc. until password entry is complete.
Once the last character is entered:

Exit menu
“long”
........OK!.........
PRESS.A.KEY.OR.INPUT
TO.CHANGE.PASSWORD:.
“short”
****.MAIN.MENU..**** The password has now been entered
successfully.
↑.OUTPUT.VOLTAGE....
Done!
The password-protected functions must now be edited within 5

minutes. Once 5 minutes since entering the password have expired,
this is blocked and must be entered again!
In the case of incorrect operation (arrow pointing downwards) , the first

character of the password changes to the symbol.
V 1.23 155 4999 en

11.9.2 Change Password
The current password must be entered before.
(see chapter 11.9.1)
Proceed as for entering a password, then:
*****.Password.*****
........OK!.........
press the “ ” key.
Press.A.KEY OR.’↓’..
for.change..........
„short“
....................
..Password:.########
....................
Enter characters.
or „short“
or or

„long“
....................
..Password:.B#######
....................
Enter characters.
or „short“
or or

„long“
....................
..Password:.BB######
....................
Enter characters.
or „short“
or or

„long“
etc. to complete password input.
After entering the last character:
„lang“ exit menu
........OK!.........
Press.A.KEY OR.’↓’..
for.change..........
„short“
****..MAINMENU..**** The password has been changed
↑.OUTPUT.VOLTAGE.... successfully.
..Password..........
Done!
↓...................
V 1.23 156 4999 en

11.10 Menu Software versions
To read out the software versions and their creation dates, first of all the
main menu must be opened.
Select the “Software versions” submenu:

When service is required, the software versions might be required or
requested by the manufacturer’s service line.
Please make a note of the software version and date of the following
software components:
 Monitor
 Master
 Slave
 User
 Setup
 Relay
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
Open submenu
“long”
.SOFTWARE.VERSIONS..
......MONITOR....... Monitor
NUMBER:..062.0xx.xxx
DATE:.....22.09.2015
Open next menu.
“short”
V 1.23 157 4999 en

.......MASTER....... Master
DATE:.....22.09.2015
call next menu.
„ short“
.......SLAVE........ Slave
DATE:.....22.09.2015
call next menu.
„ short“
........USER........ User
DATE:.....22.09.2015
call next menu
„ short“
.......SETUP........ Setup
NUMBER:..002.005.000
DATE:.....06.11.2015
call next menu.
„ short“
.......RELAIS....... Relais
NUMBER:..276.256.221
DATE:.....06.11.2015
call next menu.
„short“
..SOFTWAREVERSION...
......Monitor....... Monitor
DATE:.....06.09.2015
exit Menu.
„long“
↑.OUTPUT.VOLTAGE.... done
V 1.23 158 4999 en

11.11 Menu Type and serial-no.
To read out the type and serial number, first of all the main menu must be
opened. Then select the “Type” submenu.
In case of a service, the type and serial number might be required or

requested by the manufacturer’s service line. Please make a note of this
information.
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.PASSWORD.......... ... the cursor is at this point.
..SOFTWARE.VERSIONS.
↓.TYPE..............
Open submenu
“long”
*****..TYPE..*******
ENERTRONIC.I..xxxkVA
D480D208/xxx/2rfgUDG
SERIAL.NUM:.12345678
Exit menu.
“long”
↑.PASSWORD.......... Done!
..SOFTWARE.VERSIONS.
↓.TYPE..............
V 1.23 159 4999 en

11.12 Menu Battery charging
To change this setting, a password must be entered. See: Chapter 11.9.2

see chapter 11.5 „Menu Save settings (Setup)“, page 149.
Here, boost charging and charge operation can be enabled.
11.12.1 Setting high current charging

To make changes, first of all the main menu must be opened.
Then the submenu “Battery charging” is selected.
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG)........... the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.SETUP............. ... the cursor is at this point.
..BATTERY.CHARGING..
↓.BOOST.CHARGING....
Open submenu
“long”
*.BATTERY.CHARGING.* Here, high current charging can be
2XCURRENT.CHARGE.OFF enabled. If high current charging is
enabled, the battery is charged with twice
....................
the current. I5 instead of I10.
CHARGING.OFF:....OFF
Change setting.
or “short” or
or
Press and hold the “ ” key to select
the next option if no change is required
“long”
*.BATTERY.CHARGING.*
CURRENT.CHARGE.:..ON Press and hold the “ ” key to enable
high current charging and exit the
.................... submenu.
To exit this function please perform the same steps as for starting, but
replace “ON” with “OFF”.
V 1.23 160 4999 en

11.12.2 Capacity test
In order to avoid distortion of the test result, the manufacturer recommends

a waiting time of 48 h before a second capacity test is carried out.
The capacity test is carried out with the discharge of the connected consumers (no
regenerative feedback). Here, the rectifier regulates the output voltage so that a
discharge current of I10 (C10/10 h) of the respective battery is achieved. The energy
required for the load is provided by the rectifier.
Discharge is to achieve the defined warning threshold of the battery voltage.
(Factory setting 1.85 V/c)
The implemented automated capacity test the UPS system without
system/battery shutdown, can’t the capacity test as specified by the battery
manufacturer replace (see. Documentation of the battery manufacturer).
It is an indication for the customer to the state of the battery can be
determined. If the test result is negative, please contact the battery
manufacturer
The capacity test can only be started when the battery is fully charged.
(DC battery voltage = float voltage)!
The capacity test has priority over (boost) charge!
It will be issued the following results:

 The discharged from the battery (in the display).
 A positive or negative result at the end of the test.
The following conditions must be met in order to start the test:
 The system must be located in the UPS normal operation.
 the rectifier, inverter and output contactor are on.
 The last battery circuit test has been successfully concluded
 The internal and external battery breaker (if included) are closed.
 A negative test result (Event no. 632) or a test termination (event no. 636) of a
possibly previously performed test in the event memory was RESET confirmed.
 The high-current charging is disabled.
 The diesel mode is off
 The battery is fully charged.
A fully charged battery is detected on the following criteria:
 The float voltage is reached and the charging current is a certain time at a
certain value befall.
 The battery is fully charged.
A fully charged battery is detected on the following criteria: The float voltage is reached and the
charging current has dropped a certain time under a certain value.
Upon detection of the fully charged battery the Ah value is set in the Menu battery status
to zero in any case. Provided that a fully charged battery will be known, is the latest
battery circuit test has been completed with positive results (without this condition would
an unconnected battery recognized as fully charged because the criteria: Reach float
voltage and battery power would be given zero).
V 1.23 161 4999 en

Start Capacity Test
In this test, the load supply is not lost.
If the conditions are met, the test can be started manually by the display and control
panel.
.......MENU.?.......
the “ ” key.
'↓'.LONG............
....................
Open menu
„long“
„short“
↑.Setup............. ... the cursor is at this point
..BATTERY.CHARGING..
↓.BOOST.CHARGING....
Open submenu
„long“
BOOST.CHARGING.:.OFF Submenu, set the Cursor to capacity test.
Capacity test.:..OFF
Change setting.
or „short“
or
or.
Press and hold the “ ” key to select the
next option if no change is required
„long“
Press and hold the “ ” key to enable
BOOST.CHARGING.:.OFF high current charging and exit the
Capacity test.:...ON submenu.
If the aforementioned conditions for the test are not met, the "capacity test" in the menu
shown "ON" but does not run.
After leaving the menu and called again, the previously set was set by the system to
"OFF".
To cancel this function, please run the same steps as for starting by, but
they switch "ON" and "OFF".
V 1.23 162 4999 en

Capacity test is carried out
After activating the test, the battery is discharged with I10.
The test is positive if the test threshold (1.85 V/cell) at least 90 % of C10 capacity could
be taken. (Uncertainty due to temperature deviation from the 20 °C or the age of the
battery)
If the test threshold without a removal of at least 90% of capacity, based, achieved on the
C10 capacity, the test is terminated with a negative result.
The test threshold (1.85 V/cell) must necessarily be greater than the Battery deep
discharge threshold (1.8 V/cell) to prevent a shutdown of the inverter.
If the test is not canceled in advance: the rectifier will charge at the trigger point if the test
threshold again.
The criterion "90% of the C10 capacity" is preset in the "Battery limits" menu under
"Discharge degree2". See chapter 11.19, Menu Battery limits, page 180.
At test termination is immediately switched to float charging.
TIME.LIMIT.1:.30.MIN
TIME.LIMIT.2:.10.MIN
DISCHARGE LEV.1:90.%
DISCHARGE LEV.2:90.%
Definition discharge level
The discharge degree is the value of capacitance, which was taken from the battery. 95 % discharge level
would be at a 100 Ah battery that 95 Ah of 100 Ah (C10 capacity) were taken. Ideally 5 Ah residual capacity
would still exist.
Battery capacity
The displayed remaining term is only an indicator of the customer for
residual availability of the plant. Due to a variety of influences on the
battery (age, temperature cycles, maintenance), this value may differ
significantly from the actual remaining term.
The determined capacity of the battery can be read on the display of the system in each
case after completion/termination of the test. For this, the value of 'extraction' frozen and
marked with an asterisk "*". In case of positive and negative results happens the freezing
at the time of reaching the test threshold (1.85 V/cell) and the corresponding end of the
test immediately.
This value remains frozen until it is acknowledged by pressing the RESET button. Then,
the value of 'extraction' is set to the current value and the identification by the asterisk "*"
away.
If the battery is now fully charged, the value of 'extraction' jumps to zero.
Menu Battery status

TEMPERATURE:....-.-C Temperature battery
REMAIN.TIME:.015.MIN remaining time of the battery (example)
REMOVEL:......27.3Ah
Menu Batterie Status
TEMPERATURE:....-.-C Temperature battery
REMAIN.TIME:.015.MIN remaining time of the battery (example)
REMOVEL:.........0Ah charge drawn (example)
V 1.23 163 4999 en

Visualization/Test results/termination criteria
There are three different test results:
Capacity test positive
At least 90 % of the C10 capacity was taken. The battery can still be used.
Capacity test negativ
Less than 90% of the C10 capacity was taken. Restart the capacity test after 48 h
and full recharge.
If the result is negative again, refer to the battery manufacturer's
maintenance documentation, or contact the battery manufacturer to check
or replace the battery.
Capacity test termination

The capacity test was interrupted due to a test current deviation or disconnection
of the rectifier. See chapter 23.1, Fault event messages and their cause, page
358.
terminate or cancel capacity test
The capacity test is terminated under the following conditions:
 reaches warning threshold (equivalent to full test, duration approx 10
hours)
 Battery breaker-breaker opens.
 Manual stop over menu navigation
 Rectifier/GR - mains fault/manual shutdown rectifiers
 discharge current less than 0.8 x I10 for about 60 seconds
Voltage threshold (warning threshold) is reached
The value set in Battery setup limit for the capacity test is achieved.
In the lead-acid batteries is typically 1.8 V/cell.
By achieving the above-mentioned Threshold of the capacity test is completed.
The result of the measurement during the test shall be entered in the following
menu.
Menu Batteriestatus
TEMPERATURE:....-.-C Temperature Battery
REMAIN.TIME:..15.MIN remaining time of the battery (example)
REM.CAPA.:....28.0Ah remaining capacity of battery
See chapter 10.1, Top menu level/measured values/submenus, page 140

In case of:
One battery circuit fault or
Battery fault
If the above-mentioned reaches threshold voltage, which leads to the termination
of the capacity tests.
V 1.23 164 4999 en

Battery breaker opens
If the battery breaker opened during the capacity test, the test is aborted. This
causes the battery circuit test is negative (LED 4 = yellow flashing).
Capacity test is interrupted
The capacity test is interrupted under the following conditions:
Rectifier mains fault
Rectifier fault
rectifier is switched off manually
Once the rectifier is no longer running, the capacity test is interrupted. See the
before-mentioned criteria. When the rectifier is switched on again, as the capacity
test is continued.
High current charging and capacity test
As long as the function of high current charging = ON (whether high-current charge
is actually active) can be carried out no capacity test.
The high-current charging must be switched off before starting the capacity tests.
If the high-current charging is not turned off, the capacity test is not started.
(Boost-) charge and capacity test
It is not recommended to start a capacity test during the UPS mode (Boost)
charge is. (falsification of the test results).
If the UPS is (boost) charge, as described in Section 11.14.3 in the state (e. g. "Auto
load" after long power outage), this is interrupted by the activation of the capacity test and
the battery is discharged again.
That is, although the (boost) charging timer will continue, but there will be no (boost)
charge carried out because the capacity test has priority.
Battery limits and capacity test
See chapter 11.19, Menu Battery limits, page 180.
V 1.23 165 4999 en

11.12.3 Charging off
WARNING
The charger and / or the battery are not actively switched off.
Low charging currents or discharging currents can flow due to tolerances in
the measuring circuits or dynamic load jumps.

If “Charger off” is activated, the battery is not charged with a 24 V signal present at the
digital input “diesel operation”. The rectifier then sets the DC voltage so that the battery
current is zero.
The digital input can be found on the card “A330 expansion card”. (see chapter 6.4.8,
Digital inputs A230, A330, page 65)
The digital input "diesel mode" must be activated, so that the system
performs the function described in a 24 V signal.
In contrary, the digital input "battery off" is always activated.
In order to open the “Battery charging” menu, perform the same steps as in
chapter 11.12, Menu Battery charging, page 160.
2xCURRENT.CHARGE:OFF Browse through the Battery charging
submenu until the cursor is at this point.
....................
Change setting.
or „short“
or
or
Press and hold the “ ” key to select the
next option if no change is required.
„long“
*.BATTERY.CHARGING.* Press and hold the “ ” key to disable
2xCURRENT.CHARGE:OFF battery charging in diesel operation.
....................
CHARGING.OFF:.....ON
This function is performed via optional I/O card(s). (see chapter 6.4, A230
I/O card, A330 expansion card, page 56).
V 1.23 166 4999 en

A230
Input on card: Battery charging off (I/O card X12.5:1 /:2)
If Input is set it prevents charging of the UPS battery independent of the display setting
“Charger off”.
Charging is blocked, if this input is set.
 Applied if using stationary diesel units for power reduction.
A330 (option):
Input on card: diesel operation = 1 (I/O card -X12.9:1 /:2)
If Input is set it prevents charging of the UPS battery only when the “Charger OFF”
function is enabled in the display.
Charging is blocked, if this input is set and function in display on.
 Applied if using temporary diesel units.
Soft starter (only systems with thyristor rectifier):
If input is set the thyristor rectifier starts with a soft start current ramp to prevent bad
intertion between diesel generator and rectifier. This function is independent of “Charger
OFF” function in the display.
Soft start ramps factory set is 40s. To change this parameter contact
BENNING service.
Remark:
In soft start mode the rectifier need longer to disburden battery in case of
mains failure and return. This counts also for reversible failures like rectifier
over temperature and DC over voltage. For small batteries this time (40s)
must be recognized!
V 1.23 167 4999 en

11.13 Battery – Central battery for parallel operation
NOTICE
Damage caused by faulty configuration
This option is set in the factory for systems with central battery and should
only be changed by the customer after consulting the manufacturer’s
service department.
To change this setting, a password must be entered. (see: chapter 11.9.1).
To change the battery configuration, first of all the main menu must be
opened. Then select the “Battery” submenu.

The central battery can be configured in this submenu. Furthermore, the maximum
capacity of the battery can be configured.
When a central battery is used is it necessary for all systems connected to the central
battery to set the Central Battery function in the menu to “Yes”.
Battery number: When a central battery is used, it is necessary for all systems connected
together to a battery to be allocated the same battery number (1 to 7) in the menu.
The number of rectifiers connected to the battery and the resulting total battery current
are calculated using this number.
.......MENU.?....... To open the Main menu,
Press and hold the “ ” key.
'↓'.LONG............
....................
Open menu
“long”
“short”
↑.SYNCHRONIZATION... ... the cursor is at this point.
..BATTERY.LIMITS....
↓.BATTERY...........
Open submenu
“long”
V 1.23 168 4999 en

****..BATTERY...**** The Central Battery option is enabled
here (must be set to “Yes” for all system
CENTRAL.BATTERY:..NO on the central battery).
BATTERY.NO:........1
SET.MAX.CAPAC.:...NO
Change setting.
or „short“ or
or
necessary.
„long“
****..BATTERY...**** The battery number (1…7) is selected
here. (Must be the same for all systems
CENTRAL.BATTERY:.YES on the central battery).
Change setting.
or „short“ or
or Select the next option if no change is
necessary.
„long“
****..BATTERY...**** At max. capacity, “Yes” must be set once
the battery has been fully charged for the
CENTRAL.BATTERY:.YES first time (set later if necessary).
Change setting.
or „short“ or
or
necessary.
„long“
****..BATTERY...**** Press and hold the “ ” key to confirm
CENTRAL.BATTERY:.YES settings and exit the submenu.
SET.MAX.CAPAC.:..YES
“long”
****.MAIN.MENU..**** Battery configuration is now complete.
↑.SYNCHRONIZATION...
↓.BATTERY...........
V 1.23 169 4999 en

11.14 Boost charging
To change this setting, a password must be entered.
(see: chapter 11.9.1).

(Boost) charging is a charge with increased charging voltage, also see chapter 5.4.1,
Battery data and charging, page 39. (Boost) charging is performed for the set time. The
charging voltage is then lowered to the float charge level.
After activation in the display, (boost) charging is only enabled for the
programmed time when the float charge voltage is reached.
In this submenu, (boost) charging can be enabled manually or automatically.
Furthermore, the time for which (boost) charging is to be performed can be set.
11.14.1 Switching on (boost) charging manually

In order to enable (boost) charging, the main menu must first be opened. Then the
submenu “(Boost) charging” is selected.
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG)........... the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.BATTERY.CHARGING.. ... the cursor is at this point.
..BOOST.CHARGING....
↓.AUTOSTART.........
Open submenu
“long”
BOOST.CHARGING:..OFF
AUTO.BOOST:......OFF Here, (boost) current charging can be
enabled.
TIMER.OFF.......1MIN
PRESET.TIME:.0001MIN
Change setting.
or “short” or
or
Press and hold the “ ” key to select
the next option if no change is required.
“long”
V 1.23 170 4999 en

BOOST.CHARGING:...ON
AUTO.BOOST:......OFF  Now the (boost) charging time must
be set in “Charging time”.

“long”
“long”
BOOST.CHARGING:..OFF ... the cursor is at this point.
AUTO.BOOST:......OFF You can switch from the thousands

position the hundreds position etc. by
PRESET.TIME:.0001MIN pressing and holding the “ ” key.
The timer value can be modified by briefly

pressing the ‘‘ or ” arrow keys.
or “short”
BOOST.CHARGING:..OFF You have set the time value “‘100
AUTO.BOOST:......OFF minutes” for example.
TIMER.OFF.......1MIN If the cursor is at the ones position of

“Charging time”, ...
a long press of the “ ” key will open the
following menu:
“long”
AUTO.BOOST:......OFF
TIMER.OFF.....100MIN The setting can be changed by briefly
PRESET.TIME:..100MIN pressing the “ or ” arrow keys.

PRESET.TIME:......NO
or “short”
By pressing the arrow key “ ” for
TIMER.OFF.....100MIN longer, the timer is set and the following
PRESET.TIME:..100MIN menu is displayed again…
PRESET.TIME:.....YES
“long”
BOOST.CHARGING:...ON
AUTO.BOOST.......OFF By pressing the “ ” arrow key, (boost)
TIMER.OFF:....100MIN charging is switched on.
“long”
After the timer elapses, the rectifier
↑.BATTERY.CHARGING.. controls the battery voltage back down to
..BOOST.CHARGING.... the charging voltage.
V 1.23 171 4999 en

11.14.2 (Boost) charge abort
An amended timer setting also affects the function AUTO charge.
A manual interruption of the (boost) charge should therefore be avoided.
An incorrect input of time on manual (boost) charge this to a shorter period
of time (eg., 1 minute) is set, and these perform properly.
Thereafter, set the timer setting to the desired value of AUTO charge.
11.14.3 Auto charging

Auto-charge is enabled only when through work/Service BENNING an
initial threshold is set (factory setting 1.9 V/cell).
Auto-charge is only activated when the timer - setting has been set >0
minutes.
During auto charging, (boost) charging is enabled when the battery voltage falls below
the programmed warning threshold. This happens for example when the battery
discharges during battery operation. As for manual (boost) charging, (boost) charging is
performed for the programmed period. The start time here is when the float charge
voltage is reached. Also see chapter 5.4.1, Battery data and charging, page 39.
AUTO.BOOST:......OFF Press and hold the “ ” key to select
TIMER.OFF.....100MIN the Auto charging option.
„long“
BOOST.CHARGING:..OFF “Auto charging” can be switched on by
briefly pressing the “ or ” arrow
TIMER.OFF.....100MIN keys.
or „short“
AUTO.BOOST:.......ON By pressing and holding the “ ” arrow
TIMER.OFF.....100MIN key, “Auto charging” is enabled.
„long“
****.MAIN.MENU..**** “(Boost) charging is now carried out
↑.BATTERY.CHARGING.. automatically if the battery has been
..BOOST.CHARGING.... discharged below a certain voltage
(1.8 V/cell)
V 1.23 172 4999 en

11.15 Menu Key lock (password protection)
In order to enable the key lock, the main menu must first be opened. Then
select the “Key lock” submenu.


Here you determine whether switching the ENERTRONIC I
on, off or over (keys “ , , ”) at the control panel should only be possible
after entering a password.
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.TYPE.............. ... the cursor is at this point.
..PUSH.BUTTON.LOCK..
↓.PARALLEL.OPERATION
Open submenu
“long”
V 1.23 173 4999 en

**PUSH.BUTTON.LOCK**
....................
PROTECT.PUSH.BUTTONS
WITH.PASSWORD:....NO
or „short“
....................
PROTECT.PUSH.BUTTONS
WITH.PASSWORD:...YES
Exit menu
“long“
↑.TYP............... Password protection is now enabled.
..PUSH.BUTTON.LOCK..
↓.PARALLEL.OPERATION
If the On, Off or Bypass key is now
pressed, the following menu is displayed:
or or
ENTER.PASSWORD.TO... Password entry: (see chapter 11.9)
ENABLE.PUSH.BUTTONS:
............########
V 1.23 174 4999 en

11.16 Menu Parallel operation (optional)
NOTICE
This option is set in the factory for parallel systems and should only be
changed by the customer after consulting the manufacturer’s service
department.
NOTICE
Parallel operation must only be modified with the parallel group switched
off. E.g. in manual bypass operation. To switch on etc., see chapter 13.2.4,
Switching bypass operation to normal operation, page 214.
The parallel operation menu may only be modified under the following
conditions:
Parallel wiring in combination with PCB module A260 is correct.
The correct CAN ID has been set at all systems on controller board A100.
A parallel system is programmed with the following characteristics in the
following example:
Number of systems n = 1
Redundant-parallel
In order to enable the key lock, the main menu must first be opened. Then
select the “Key lock” submenu.

(see chapter 11.9.1).

.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.PUSH.BUTTON.LOCK.. ... the cursor is at this point.
..PARALLEL.OPERATION
↓.DISABLE.BYPASS....
Open submenu
“long”
V 1.23 175 4999 en

.PARALLEL.OPERA:.OFF Parallel operation can be switched on by
.GROUP.NUMBER:.....1 briefly pressing the “ or ” arrow
.PARALLEL.MODE:..... keys.
↓..POWER.PARALLEL...
or “short”
.PARALLEL.OPERA:..ON
The group number is fixed by the parallel
.GROUP.NUMBER:.....1 wiring. Systems in the same parallel
.PARALLEL.MODE:..... group must have the same group number.
“long”
.GROUP.NUMBER:.....1 The operating mode can be selected here.
Parallel power or redundant-parallel.
.PARALLEL.MODE:.....
Change setting.
or “short”
or
or
necessary.
“long”
.GROUP.NUMBER:.....1 The operating mode must be the same for
all systems within the parallel group.
.PARALLEL.MODE:.....
↓.REDUNDANT.PARALLEL
Change setting.
or “short”
or
or
necessary.
“long”
↑GROUP.NUMBER:.....1
Here you can select how many systems
.NUMBER.OF.UNITS.... (n 1-8) are required to supply the
.AT.LEAGT..........1 connected load.
....................
Change setting.
or “short” or
or
Press and hold the “ ” key to confirm
settings and exit the submenu.
“long”
V 1.23 176 4999 en

11.17 Menu Disable bypass
In order to enable bypass locks, the main menu must first be opened. Then
select the “Disable bypass” submenu.


The manual bypass (switch Q005) can still switched on.

For systems with make-before-break switch Q500:
Manual bypass is switched on in the positions TEST and BYPASS.
Two options can be selected in the “Disable bypass” submenu:

1. Block bypass in mains operation.
Here, the bypass of the system can be blocked for mains operation. This means that
during mains operation, you can neither switch to bypass manually by pressing a key nor
automatically, e.g. in the event of a fault.
2. Disable bypass in diesel operation.
Here, the bypass of the system can be blocked for diesel operation. This means that if
the system is supplied by a generator, you can neither switch to bypass manually by
pressing a key nor automatically, e.g. in the event of a fault.
.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.PARALLEL.OPERATION ... the cursor is at this point.
..DISABLE.BYPASS....
↓.SYNCHRONIZATION...
Open submenu
“long”
**.DISABLE.BYPASS.**
DISABLE.BYPASS.AT... If the bypass is to be disabled for mains
operation…
MAINS.OPERATION:..NO
DIESEL.OPERATION:.NO
The option can be changed by briefly
pressing the “ or ” arrow keys.
or “short”
V 1.23 177 4999 en

DISABLE.BYPASS.AT... Press and hold the “ ” key to enable
the bypass block during mains operation
MAINS.OPERATION:.YES and exit the submenu.
“long”
↑.PARALLEL.OPERATION The bypass is now disabled for mains
operation.
To enable bypass block in diesel
operation…
“long”
DISABLE.BYPASS.AT... …return to the submenu “Disable
bypass”.
Press and hold the arrow key so that
“long”
DISABLE.BYPASS.AT... ... the cursor is at this point.
or “short”
DISABLE.BYPASS.AT... Press and hold the “ ” key to enable
the bypass block during diesel operation
MAINS.OPERATION:..NO and exit the submenu.
DIESEL.OPERATION:YES
“long”
↑.PARALLEL.OPERATION The bypass is now disabled for diesel
operation.
V 1.23 178 4999 en

11.18 Menu Synchronisation
NOTICE
This option is set in the factory for systems with external synchronization
and should only be changed by the customer after consulting the
manufacturer’s service department.
In order to enable external synchronization, the main menu must first be

opened. Then select the “Synchronization” submenu.


.......MENU.?.......
'↓'.LONG............ the “ ” key.
....................
Open menu
“long”

“short”
↑.DISABLE.BYPASS.... ... the cursor is at this point.
..SYNCHRONIZATION...
↓.BATTERY.LIMITS....
Open submenu
“long”
*.SYNCHRONIZATION..*
.................... This function is only advisable if an A270
EXTERNAL.SYNC:...OFF external synchronization is installed.
CONTROL.SIGNAL:..INT
or “short”
*.SYNCHRONIZATION..*
.................... Press and hold the “ ” key to enable
external synchronization and exit the
EXTERNAL.SYNC:....ON submenu.
CONTROL.SIGNAL:..INT
“long”
↑.DISABLE.BYPASS.... The bypass is now disabled for mains
operation.
..SYNCHRONIZATION...
↓.BATTERY.LIMITS....
V 1.23 179 4999 en

11.19 Menu Battery limits
This setting is only advisable if the I/O card A230 has been configured for
these alarm messages in the factory.
To change this setting, a password must be entered. (see: chapter 11.9.1).
To set the battery limits, first of all the main menu must be opened. Then
select the “Battery limits” submenu.
Settings must be saved after changes.

See chapter 11.5 „Menu Save settings (Setup)“, page 149.
.......MENU.?....... To open the Main menu, press and hold
(PRESS.PUSH.BUTTON.. the “ ” key.

'↓'.LONG............
....................
Open menu
“long”
“short”
****.MAIN.MENU..**** ... the cursor is at this point.
↓.BATTERY...........
Open submenu
“long”
TIME.LIMIT.1:..0.MIN
TIME.LIMIT.2:..0.MIN
CAPACITY.LIM.1:..0.%
Change setting.
or “short” or
or
necessary.
“long”
TIME.LIMIT.1:..30MIN
Press and hold the “ ” key to confirm
TIME.LIMIT.2:..10MIN settings and exit the submenu.
CAPACITY.LIM.1:.10.%
“long”
****.MAIN.MENU..**** The limit values are now set.
↓.BATTERY...........
V 1.23 180 4999 en

12 Touch display and operating panel
12.1 Settings in the configuration main menu
12.2 Settings and options
The system settings and further information on the current state of the system can be
obtained by pressing the Settings symbol (“gear wheels”) in the selection bar at the
bottom of the control unit. The following menu opens with five further selection buttons
(password level 1).
Figure 12-1: “Settings/Options” menu
The additional sub-menus and the setting options for password level 1 (customer level)
are described below.
12.3 Security (read: PW0, write: PW0)
Figure 12-2: “Security” menu
The “Security” menu provides three further menu items which essentially deal with
protecting the system against unauthorised operation.
V 1.23 181 4999 en

12.3.1 Change password level (read: PW0, write: PW0)
The password level and the setup options associated with it can be changed in this sub-
menu. The following password levels are provided:
Password level Rights
0: Basic level (if password entered incorrectly)
1: Customer level
2 Technician level
In the following descriptions, the password level with which the operator has read and
write access to the form is given in the heading in each case.
When you are in password level 0, you can change to level 1 by entering the default
password “0000” (as-supplied state of the system). The service engineer can reach the
technician level by means of the appropriate password in order to find out important
information for fault analysis and to carry out more in-depth adjustments.
The following pop-up for entering the password appears in the information area of the
mimic diagram.
Figure 12-3: Pop-up for entering the password
Below the padlock symbol is another symbol which can be used to switch the display of
the password which has been entered between plain text and encrypted form (asterisks).
The password can be corrected using the yellow arrow key – individual digits are deleted
and can be re-entered.
When the password has been successfully confirmed, a pop-up appears which confirms
that the password has been entered correctly and displays the appropriate password
level.
If the operator enters an incorrect password, the password level is automatically set to
“0”. No further information is visible under the “Settings” symbol at this level.
12.3.2 Change password (read: PW1, write: PW1)

When the system is first delivered, password level 1 is set in the control unit. The code
“0000” is stored as the default password. Select this item accordingly to change this
password to one which is specific to the customer. In a similar way to the pop-up in the
previous diagram, the old password (default: 0000) must be entered first in order to be
able to define the new password. To check the new password, it must be entered twice.
The successful change of password is again confirmed by an appropriate pop-up.
If you happen to have forgotten the customer password and can no longer access
password level 1, the Benning service engineer can reset the password to the default
value.
V 1.23 182 4999 en

12.3.3 Key lock (read: PW1, write: PW1)
This menu item enables the operator to block the switching functions (rectifier, inverter,
output contactor K6 and electronic bypass) for other operators by means of a key lock.
This enables the system to be set to a required operating state and further switching
operations by unauthorised operators to be prevented.
For this purpose, the key lock must be activated under password level 1 and the
password level then set to 0. This can be achieved by entering an incorrect password.
The key lock can only be deactivated after entering the customer password (level 1). The
system can then be operated in the usual manner once more using the symbols in the
mimic diagram.
12.4 General settings (read: PW1, write: PW1)
Figure 12-4: “General settings” menu
The “General settings” menu contains three further menu items which enable details of
the visualisation on the control unit to be set and managed.
12.4.1 Display (read: PW1, write: PW1)

The “Display” item on the menu is in turn divided into three further selection buttons:
1. Start remote control
The graphical interface of the UPS system display and control unit can be mirrored
on a remote control unit.
This option for controlling the system remotely is available as an option and requires
a network connection. After installing the additional components, the remote control
is activated using this button. Successful activation is confirmed by an appropriate
pop-up in the info area.
The network administrator must take appropriate security measures to
prevent unauthorised access to the display and control unit and to the
system via the network.
V 1.23 183 4999 en

2. Displaytest
To continue, simply touch the display surface.
To cancel the display test, touch the display surface twice.
The display can be tested for pixel errors using this menu item. When the button is
pressed, the whole display first appears black. When the control unit is again pressed
briefly, the colors white, red, green and blue appear one after the other.
If there are any pixel errors, then these can be seen by way of small color deviations in
the surface colors.
The display test can be terminated by a long press (min. 5s) on the middle of the display.
A message to this effect appears permanently in the middle of the display.
Figure 12-5: Displaytest
V 1.23 184 4999 en

3. Touchpaneltest
The touch panel test is used to check that the touch screen has been properly fitted
and is calibrated correctly. With this button is pressed, the whole display area is filled
in white. Information on how to terminate the test (press the middle of the display for
5s) again appears in the middle of the display.
When the white display surface is pressed, a black crosshair must appear on the
display immediately under the point of contact. If this does not appear directly under
the point of contact, this indicates that the calibration of the touch screen is not ideal.
If an inadmissibly high mechanical pressure is exerted on the touch screen when the
display and control unit is assembled, a crosshair appears permanently at the point
on the display at which too high a mechanical pressure is present immediately after
starting the touch panel test.
To continue, simply touch the display surface.
To cancel the test, touch the display surface twice.
Figure 12-6: Touchpaneltest
V 1.23 185 4999 en

12.4.2 Date/Time (read: PW1, write: PW1)
The date and time are set in this menu. The following window opens for this purpose:
Figure 12-7: Entry window for setting date and time
To set the date, select the pull down arrow in the date bar. This opens a further pop-up
showing the calendar days in the currently set month. The month can be changed by
means of the arrow symbols in the top half of the pop-up. Press the required day in order
to select it.
The arrow symbols next to the display boxes for hours, minutes and seconds are used to
set the time. The required time is set in 24-hour format by pressing the arrow keys for the
appropriate direction (up/down).
The data are accepted by pressing the “Accept” button – the window remains open. Exit
the menu by pressing “OK”. If no changes are made to the date and time, you can exit
the menu by pressing “Cancel”.
V 1.23 186 4999 en

12.4.3 Presentation (read: PW1, write: PW1)
The presentation of system voltages, temperatures and the load display can be set in this
menu.
Figure 12-8: Selection window for the presentation of voltage, temperature and load (bar graphs)
Presentation of system voltages

Pressing the appropriate button enables you to determine whether the UPS
system voltages are presented as a voltage relative to the neutral conductor or as
a voltage between phases (phase-to-phase voltage: factor 3 ).
Presentation of system temperatures
Pressing the appropriate button enables you to determine whether the system
temperatures are presented in units of °C (Celsius) or in units of °F (Fahrenheit).
UPS load display (F)
Pressing the selection box activates the UPS load display. This is shown by
means of a tick. The load display appears in the info area of the mimic diagram
and provides information on the percentage loading of the UPS system output by
means of a bar graph for each phase.
Figure 12-9: Presentation of system loading by means of bar graphs
V 1.23 187 4999 en

Basic information on the UPS load display and on the apparent power output available
from the UPS system:
The UPS system has been sized such that it can provide its rated apparent power at the
output at a power factor of cos phi = 0.8 ind.
IInv IL
L601-603 K6
IC
C600
Figure 12-10: Block diagram of the UPS system output
This results in a rated inverter bridge current. As this working point is defined for a
resistive-inductive load, the output filter C600 of the UPS system in this case works in a
compensating manner, i.e. the inverter bridge provides only part of the required output
reactive power, as a significant part is already provided by the output filter C600.
As a result, the inverter bridge has to provide a smaller apparent power for inductive
loads. On the other hand, with capacitive loads, the inverter bridge supplies the reactive
power for the output filter C600 and for the connected output load. Consequently, the
rated bridge current is reached with lower loads at the output.
To protect the output cabling with resistive-inductive loads, the output power is limited to
the rated power.
This fact results in a diagram which shows the maximum apparent power to be produced
at the output of the UPS as function of the cos phi of the connected output load. This is
shown normalised with respect to the nominal output apparent power in the following
diagram.
S_Last_max
Smax = =f(Cos
f(cos_Phi_Last)
Phi)
105
100
95
inductive
90
85
S max [%]  
100SL_max_proz_limit L
80
capacitive
75
70
65
60
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
 
cos L
Cos Phi []
Figure 12-11: Diagram Smax = f(CosPhiLoad) - normalised presentation
V 1.23 188 4999 en

12.5 System settings (read: PW1, write: PW1)
Figure 12-12: “System settings” menu
The settings for the complete system and for battery management can be found as
additional selection buttons in the “System settings” menu.
12.5.1 Complete system (read: PW1, write: PW2)
Figure 12-13: “Complete system” menu
The interface is divided into four main areas:

I. Parallel operation
II. Synchronisation
III. Output voltage
IV. Bypass
V 1.23 189 4999 en

I. Parallel operation
As a basic principle, the following applies for configuring parallel mode:
Units connected in a parallel group: Parallel operation ON
Single units: Parallel
operation OFF
When parallel operation is activated, the system is configured from a regulation point
of view such that the outputs of the units can be connected in parallel.
“Redundant-parallel” – “Parallel power” modes
“Redundant-parallel”
When this mode is selected, the parallel system is configured such that the load is
supplied by a greater number of units than would actually be necessary.
“Parallel power”
When this mode is selected, the parallel system is configured such that all the units
of the parallel group are required to supply the load.
Group number
The group number for the UPS system can be set under this item. This information is
necessary when units work in group-parallel mode, i.e. different groups of parallel
operating systems are connected together or are isolated from one another.
Minimum number of units
The minimum number of units specifies how many units of the parallel group are
required as a minimum to supply the consumer/load. When the “Parallel power”
mode is selected, the exact total number of all UPS systems in the parallel operating
group must be set here.
In “Redundant-parallel” mode, the minimum number of units must be specified here
depending on the total number of units and the number of redundant units in the
parallel operating group.
Example:
If a parallel operating group consists of three units and one unit has been provided
for redundancy, then at least two units are required to supply the load. “Two” must
therefore be entered as the minimum number of units.
All settings must be confirmed with the “Accept” button. This saves the settings and
transmits them to the units connected to the parallel CAN bus.
As a basic rule, the acceptance of the settings by all units should be checked
and if necessary corrected.
V 1.23 190 4999 en

II. Synchronisation
“External active”
Activating the “External ON” checkbox enables the UPS system to synchronise its
output voltage to an external signal. Synchronisation only takes place when its own
bypass voltage is no longer available or lies outside the specified tolerance band.
The voltage is measured using an additional measuring board.
“External control signal”
When the “External control signal” checkbox is activated, instead of the availability of
the bypass voltage being used as the criterion for changing over to an external
synchronisation signal, the changeover to external synchronisation is solely
dependent on a control signal on the customer connection board. The digital input
DIN12 (Terminal X1.17) on the optional customer connection board A231 is provided
for this purpose.
Fundamentals of “external synchronisation”
External synchronisation is required if a parallel-connected UPS system with n UPS
units (n≤8) is to be divided by means of an external bus-tie switch into 2 independent
UPS systems with m UPS units (m≥1) on two output busbars 1 and 2 in each case.
The number of UPS units in the newly formed UPS groups can be different. The
parallel operating bus is divided by means of the group connector in UPS unit 1. This
division creates two new completely independent UPS systems, which are in each
case connected in two different UPS groups by the group connector. As a result of
this separation, the UPS systems can also run different parallel operation protocols
(see also Figure 38: Configuration of a UPS system with bus-tie switch consisting of
n UPS units).
A new parallel operation protocol must be programmed for each group.
The function of the external synchronisation is to synchronise the output of the UPS
system to the external synchronisation signal, so that the UPS output and the
external synchronisation signal are always synchronous with regard to phase and
frequency.
The external synchronisation is always active if the bus-tie switch is open and
the bypass for the UPS system is not available.
There must be a synchronisation card in each UPS system! This card is always
installed in the UPS unit with the highest unit number in the UPS system.
An LED H1 is provided for the bus-tie switch Q1. This should be mounted in the
immediate vicinity of the bus-tie switch. If the LED is green, the UPS out-puts are
synchronised and the bus-tie switch can be closed.
If the LED is red, the bus-tie switch must not be closed as the deviation from the
synchronisation signal is too great.
If the LED does not come on, this means that the bus-tie switch is closed and the
output bars are connected to one another.
In systems with 2 bus-tie switches, the auxiliary contacts must be connected in
series.
V 1.23 191 4999 en

Synchronisation with an external synchronisation signal only takes place when the
following three conditions are fulfilled:
1. Synchronisation is activated on the display and control unit under Synchronisation in
the menu:
Figure 12-14: Default activation of external synchronisation
2. The bypass of one or more UPS systems is not available!

Bypass button red: Bypass voltage out of tolerance
or
Bypass button flashes yellow and grey: UPS is on bypass in the synchronising phase
3. Bus-tie switch between both output bars 1 and 2 is open! (i. e. output bars 1 and 2
are not connected to one another.)
Under the conditions described above, the following indications may appear on the
display and control unit when the measurement button (blue mode) is pressed and then
the bypass button:
 Bypass available
0 50.0
230
230
230
Figure 12-15: Display of bypass measurements when bypass is available
Associated with this operating condition, the following display for the phase angle is
available under “Settings\System info\Detailed measurements”:
0°
0°
---°
Figure 12-16: Display of phase shifting angle when bypass is available
The UPS system is synchronised with the bypass. Synchronisation does not take place
via the synchronisation card, as the bypass is available.
V 1.23 192 4999 en

 Bypass voltage out of tolerance
Bypass frequency within tolerance
(bypass button red)
If this is the case the following current measured values are displayed:
0 --.-
65
65
65
Figure 12-17: Display of bypass measurements when bypass is not available (U)
The display of dashes --.- Hz signifies that external synchronisation is active. The
following display for the phase angle is available under “Detailed measurements”:
---°
0°
0°
Figure 12-18: Display of phase angle when bypass is not available (U)
Synchronisation takes place via the external synchronisation signal. The UPS system is
synchronised with the external synchronisation signal.
 Bypass voltage within tolerance,
Bypass frequency out of tolerance,
(bypass button red)
The unit is no longer synchronised with the bypass!
--,-
230
230
230
Figure 12-19: Display of bypass measurements when bypass is not available (f)
The display of dashes --.- Hz signifies that external synchronisation is active.

The following display for the phase angle is available under “Detailed measurements”:
---°
0°
0°
Figure 12-20: Display of phase angle when bypass is not available (f)
Synchronisation takes place via the external synchronisation signal. The UPS system is
synchronised with the external synchronisation signal.
V 1.23 193 4999 en

 Bypass voltage out of tolerance,
Bypass frequency out of tolerance,
(bypass button red)
no external synchronisation signal available
The unit is no longer synchronous with the synchronisation signal!
--.-
130
130
130
Figure 12-21: Display of bypass measurements when bypass is not available (U, f, ext.)
The display of dashes --.- Hz signifies that external synchronisation is active.

The following display for the phase angle is available under “Detailed measurements”:
---°
0°
---°
Figure 12-22: Display of phase angle when bypass is not available (U, f, ext.)
The unit has switched to the internal clock pulse.
V 1.23 194 4999 en

III. Output voltage
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock on return of the mains
voltage
There is a high risk of fatal injury when “Autostart” is enabled.
On return of the mains voltage, the system automatically switches the
output on again.
Figure 12-23: Setting for output voltage and autostart
The output voltage can be varied from 400 V in a range of ±5% in this menu.
The box at the bottom for activating autostart has the following function:
When this function is activated, the UPS will be automatically restarted when the
mains returns assuming that it had switched off at the end of the battery bridging time.
If the unit was in bypass mode at the time of the power failure, it returns to this state
when the power is restored.
IV. Bypass management
Figure 12-24: Bypass management settings
In many cases, a diesel unit is used to supply the UPS with power when extended
mains failures need to be bridged. As these units are often unable to maintain the low
frequency tolerance of ±1%, the tolerance can be increased to ±5% in this menu. The
bypass continues to be available, as a result of which the availability of the UPS
system as a whole is improved.
It must be borne in mind that, as a result of the synchronisation of the inverter to the
bypass, the set frequency tolerance will also be passed to the load!
V 1.23 195 4999 en

 Block in diesel operation
In some cases, the voltage and frequency tolerance of diesel units is often not
sufficient for supplying particularly sensitive loads directly. In this regard, bypass
operation when the supply is taken from a diesel unit can be blocked by means of
this function. The following conditions must be fulfilled to enable the bypass to be
blocked during diesel operation:
- “Block in diesel operation” activated
- H-level on DIN3 on customer connection board A230 (Terminal X1.8)
The UPS system has a digital output which can be used to start the diesel
unit. This is located on customer connection board A230, Terminal X30.1
(DOUT1).
 Block in mains operation

The electronic bypass can be blocked as a general principle by means of this
function. No further conditions are required to deactivate it when using this selection.
As well as deactivating the bypass by means of this function, it is also possible to
block the bypass in the same way by reading in a control signal on customer
connection board A230. DIN6 on Terminal X1.11 is provided for this purpose.
V 1.23 196 4999 en

12.5.2 Battery management (read: PW1, write: PW1/PW2)
When Battery Management is selected, the following interface opens:
Figure 1: “Battery management” menu

1. Battery management
2. Equalisation management
3. Central battery
4. Capacity
5. Battery limits
Settings which are made on the menu pages described below must
be confirmed with “Accept” and subsequently with “OK”.
V 1.23 197 4999 en

I. Battery management (read: PW1, write: PW1/PW2)
Figure 12-25: General battery management settings
Charging in diesel operation (read: PW1, write: PW2)

In the default setting, the rectifier charging unit is switched on and the battery is
charged in accordance with the characteristic described earlier.
If charging mode is not activated AND an H-level is present at DIN3 on customer
connection board A230 (Terminal X1.8), battery charging is prevented in this case.
The diesel unit therefore does not have to provide the additional power for charging
the battery.
Boost charging (read: PW1, write: PW1)
When the boost charging function is activated, the battery is charged in the I-leg of
the characteristic at twice the normal charging current (I5 = 2 x I10).
This enables the available nominal capacity of the battery to be achieved more
quickly after a mains failure.
Capacity test (read: PW1, write: PW1)
The capacity test is used to check the battery capacity. During this test, a constant
current which is 5 times the value of the normal charging current is taken from the
battery. The rectifier is not switched on during this test phase.
If the battery current taken from the inverter is less than the constant discharge
current of the battery, then the resulting difference in energy is fed back into the
mains via the rectifier.
This process has the advantage that no additional equipment (e. g. resistors) is
required for testing the battery. The battery to be tested can remain continuously
connected to the ENERTRONIC UPS system.
For further tests, programmes which display the capacity test during the test phase
graphically and determine the capacity which is actually available are provided by
our service department. In this case, please contact our service department.
Figure 12-26: Service macro for carrying out a battery capacity test
V 1.23 198 4999 en

II. Equalisation management (read: PW1, write: PW1)
Figure 12-27: Equalisation management settings
When this function is activated, the battery is charged at an increased voltage per
cell. As well as the “Active” tick, the timer must also be configured with the required
equalisation time. Equalisation charging is started and the battery voltage increased
by pressing the “Accept” button. The remaining equalisation time can be seen in the
“Remaining equalisation time” display box.
When “Auto” is activated, equalisation charging is automatically activated when an
equalising limit voltage (1.8 V/cell) is reached when the battery is recharged.
III. Central battery (read: PW1, write: PW2)
Figure 2: Settings for using a central battery
When several UPS systems are connected to one battery bank, “Central battery ON”
must be activated on all systems. In addition, the same battery number (1…7) must
be configured on all units connected to the battery bank. This defines the number of
rectifiers connected (charging units) and calculates various system quantities (e.g.
total battery current).
In the case of UPS systems with a central battery, it is possible for the units to
exchange energy with one other on the battery side. When this happens, the battery
current can vary in the display by a few amperes (±4 A). The battery symbol may
also flash. This is a normal condition for the UPS.
IV. Maximum capacity (read: PW1, write: PW2)
Figure 3: Setting the maximum capacity

The UPS system’s battery monitor is programmed so that, when a battery is charged
for the first time, the maximum capacity is available no later than 10 hours after the
battery float voltage has been reached.
If the maximum capacity is displayed by the battery monitor after shorter charging
times (<10 h), then this button must be pressed. Pressing the measurement symbol
and then pressing the battery symbol enables the maximum capacity to be checked.
V 1.23 199 4999 en

V. Battery limits (read: PW1, write: PW1)
Figure 12-28: Setting the battery limits
These settings enable the operator to record messages in the event memory
depending on the remaining battery time available and the available capacity.
These events can be taken into account in the relay programming for the optional
input/output board and therefore also be output as voltage-free signals.
V 1.23 200 4999 en

12.6 System (information) (read: PW1, write: PW1)
Figure 12-29: “System” menu
The events, the system type, information on the software packages installed, and the
detailed measurements are located in the form of further selection buttons in the
“System” menu.
12.6.1 Events (read: PW1, write: PW1)

As already mentioned in the system description, the ENERTRONIC L3-3 UPS system
features an internal event recorder which records all relevant events with time stamp.
These can be called up by means of the “Events” button.
Figure 12-30: Depiction of “Events”
If an important event which requires acknowledgement has

occurred in the system, a yellow letter symbol is shown in the
bottom bar. Pressing the letter symbol automatically switches
to this sub-menu.
These events can be confirmed by pressing the “Confirm all”
button.
The “Save” button is used to write the events to a log file. A USB stick must be plugged
into port X7G for this purpose. The file is stored on the stick in the form
“DD_MM_YYYY_HH_MM_SS Events-LOG.txt”.
The arrow symbols are used to navigate through the events list. The two left-hand arrow
symbols enable you to jump to the beginning and end of the list respectively; the two
right-hand arrow symbols are used for advancing one page at a time.
V 1.23 201 4999 en

12.6.2 System type (read: PW1, write: PW1)
Figure 12-31: Display of system type
D: 3-phase AC (input)
480: Nominal voltage 480V (input)
E: 1-phase AC (output)
120/240: Nominal voltage 120/240V (output)
83: Nominal output current in A
3: Nominal output frequency 60Hz
r: Controlled output
f: Smoothing device on input side
g: Smoothing device on output side
UDG: Internal Benning designation
12.6.3 Software versions
Figure 12-32: Display of software versions
If you contact our service department and have special questions relating
to the system, then have the software versions to hand along with the
system type and serial number.
V 1.23 202 4999 en

12.6.4 Detailed measurements (read: PW1, write: PW1)
The “Detailed measurements” give an overall view of all system data. The associated
measurements for a particular part of the system are shown with a colored background.
Further system data, which are explained below, can be accessed using the arrow button
at the bottom left and right of the bar.
The “More” button provides a facility for obtaining a detailed list of all inverter data. The
percentage utilisation of each phase can also be found in this menu.
Figure 12-33: Display of operating variables
Pressing the “More” button again opens a detailed list of all inverter data.
Figure 12-34: Detailed list of all inverter data
Figure 12-35: Display of temperatures
V 1.23 203 4999 en

Figure 12-36: Display of fan speeds and statistics
As well as the actual fan speeds, the operating hours, the number of mains failures and
the remaining operating hours until the service interval has expired can also be seen from
this overview. As soon as the battery is fully charged (charging current = 0 A), the last
battery test and the following hourly battery test are also displayed.
12.7 Language (read: PW1, write: PW1)
Figure 12-37: Display of language selection
Changing the language and therefore the definition of the date and time format requires
the display and control unit to be restarted.
This is indicated by an appropriate pop-up.
Figure 12-38: Pop-up for restarting the display and control unit
Restarting the TFT control unit does not affect the current UPS status. Only the fans for
the power stage increase in speed for a short time.
V 1.23 204 4999 en

13 Operation, systems with alphanumerical display
13.1 Basics
The signalization of LEDs and alarms on the display are show in the following section
under normal conditions. Please remark that the signalization can be different under
abnormal conditions.
The alarms in the display are prioritized. That means if two or more alarm appear at the
same time only the alarm with the highest priority is shown. If the alarm with the highest
priority is gone then the alarm with the next highest priority is shown.
The system can be setup in two different operation modes:
 “inverter priority mode” (standard)
 “mains priority mode” (option)
The option “mains priority mode” must be setup in the factory. Instead of an
output contact an output thyristor switch must be built in.
At the start of each following section it is stated for which operation mode or modes they
are valid. For example:
This section is only for system in “inverter priority mode” (standard).
Or
This section is for both operation modes:

V 1.23 205 4999 en

13.2 Single operation
The system may be operated only by electrically skilled personnel
This chapter is only for systems with alphanumerical display. If you have a
system with touch display see chapter xy.
13.2.1 Starting normal/mains priority operation

Check the DC voltage on the battery breaker-breaker.
Check that the connections of the battery breaker-breaker are

connected to terminals X004 B+ and B- with the correct polarity!

closed.

this manual.
Battery breaker Q100

Voltage values Battery voltage see technical Data
Check: voltage and polarity
Display and operating panel

Initial state, the system is ready for switching on
3
~ 1=yellow
~ 5
2=off
~ 3=off Initial state
~ 2 4=red System is ready for switching on
1 6
5=yellow
4
6= off
The following conditions are necessary for implementation:

The system is operating correctly
The bypass voltage and frequency are in the valid range
Bypass rotary field is ok (only three phase systems)
Bypass switched off
Rectifier voltage and frequency are in the valid range
Rectifier rotary field is ok
Bypass switched off
Battery properly connected
Battery breaker-breaker open
System is ready for switching on.
V 1.23 206 4999 en

Press short the key on the display and operating panel
Pre-charging was started!
Response on the operating panel

1=green/yellow
3
~ flashing
~ 2=off
5
~ 3=off
~ 2 4=green/yellow
1 6
flashing
4 5=yellow
6=off
Seconds later ...
3 1=green
~ 2=off
~ 5
3=off
~ Pre-charging threshold is reached.
~ 4=off
2
1 6
5=yellow
4
6=yellow
Seconds later ...
3 1=green
~ 2=off ....................
~ 5
3=off ........CLOSE.......
~
~ 2
4=yellow flashing ..BATTERY.BREAKER!..
1 6
5=yellow ....................
4
6=yellow
Make sure before closing the battery breaker, that a battery is connected to
the input of the breaker with valid voltage and polarity.
It is not allowed to operate system without battery for a long time!

Only for service purposes!
Close battery breaker within 30 seconds!
The battery breaker must only be closed if there is a request in the

display and operating panel!
V 1.23 207 4999 en

Make sure before closing the battery breaker, that a battery is
connected to the input of the breaker with valid voltage and polarity.
3 1=green
~
2=off
~ 5
3=off
~
~ 2
4= yellow flashing
1 6
5=yellow
4
6=yellow
„short“
1=green
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
Inverter starts up and switches to
~ 4=green standby.
~ 2
5=yellow
1 6
6=green/yellow
4 flashing
Seconds later...
1=green Inverter is running in standby
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green
~ 2
5=yellow
1 6
6=yellow flashing
4
short
Bypass switches on.
3 1=green
~ Inverter is in state “MAINS PRIORITY
2=green flashing OPERATION”.
~ 5
3=off
~ ....................
~ 4=green
1 6
2
...MAINS.PRIORITY...
5=green flashing
.....OPERATION......
6=green flashing
4
....................
V 1.23 208 4999 en

Seconds later...
3 1=green LED 5 is no longer flashing. The

~
2=green flashing duration of the flashing depends on
~ 5
3=off how long the inverter needs to
~
~ 2
4=green synchronize.
1 6
5=green Once bypass and inverter are
4
6=green flashing synchronized, the flashing stops.
System stays in this state, if option

“mains priority” is built in. This is the
“normal operation state for the
operation mode “mains priority”
Seconds later ...
The electrical output switch switches

3
~ on and the bypass switches off.
1= green
~ The output is supplied by the inverter
5 2= green and is now backed up. The system is
~
3=off in “NORMAL OPERATION”.
~ 2
1 6
4= green ....................
4
5=yellow ........UPS.........
6= green ..NORMAL.OPERATION..
....................
Carry out an LED test by pressing the “LED Test” key on the operating panel.
Check the voltage on the terminals X006 on cabinet-side.
connection three phases single phase

X006 L1 - L3, N, PE L1 – N, PE
Voltage values
Phase <--> Phase
(values see data Phase <--> Neutral
Phase <--> N
sheet)
Check: Voltage and clockwise phase rotation.
V 1.23 209 4999 en

13.2.2 Switching normal operation to bypass operation
During this changeover, the system switches from normal operation to bypass operation.
This is required for example for maintenance work.
This step is performed before the manual bypass is switched on.
 The system is in normal operation.
Please note that in this operating mode, secure supply of the loads on the
output is not guaranteed. The bypass supply should be reliable or a loss of
load should be tolerable at this point.
Initial state
3
~ Bypass LED 5 must be illuminated
1=green
~ 5 yellow, i.e. the bypass is available,
2=green
~ bypass supply within its permissible
~ 2
3=off tolerances and inverter synchronized.
1 6
4=green
....................
5=yellow
........UPS.........
4
6=green
..NORMAL.OPERATION..
....................
“short”
The system switches to bypass
3 1=green
~ without interruption. The inverter
2=green flashing switches off.
~ 5
3=off
~ ....................
~ 4=green
1 6
2
5=green flashing
..BYPASS.OPERATION..
6=yellow
....................
4
....................
V 1.23 210 4999 en

Please note that after the following steps the output will be free of voltage.
Connected consumer wonts be supplied.
The following steps can be

performed if required. They describe
“long” the switching off of the rectifier and
isolation of the battery.
....SWITCH.OFF?.....
YES.->.PRESS.BUTTON.
........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”
3 1=yellow
~ 2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off
~ The rectifier switches off.
~ 4=green
2
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6=yellow
Open the battery breaker
Ignore the message
3 1=yellow
~ 2=green flashing ....................
~ 5
3=off ........CLOSE.......
~
~ 2
4=green ..BATTERY.BREAKER!..
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=yellow
Minutes later ...

....................
3
~
~ 5 1=yellow ....................
~ 2=green flashing ....................
~ 2
3=off
1 6 The system continues to be in bypass
4=red operation, rectifier and inverter are
4
5=green flashing switched off. Battery is isolated from
6=off the system.
If required, the manual bypass can
now be switched on.
V 1.23 211 4999 en

13.2.3 Switching mains priority operation to bypass operation (option)
This section is only for system in mains priority mode (option).
During this changeover, the system switches from normal operation to bypass operation.
This is required for example for maintenance work.
This step is performed before the manual bypass is switched on.
 The system is in normal operation.
Initial state
3
~ 1=green
~ System is in normal operation.
5 2=green flashing
Bypass mains is in tolerance.
~ 3=off
~
1 6
2
4=green ....................
5=green ...MAINS.PRIORITY...
4
6=green flashing .....OPERATION......
....................
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”
~
3
1=green
~ 2=green flashing ....................
5
~ 3=off ..BYPASS.OPERATION..
1
~
6
2 4=green ....................
5= green flashing ....................
4 6=yellow
The following steps can be performed

if required. They describe the
switching off of the rect. and isolation
“long”
of the battery.
V 1.23 212 4999 en

........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”
3 1=yellow
~
~ 2=green flashing
5
~ 3=off The rectifier switches off

~ 2 4=green
1 6
5=green flashing
4 6=yellow
Open the battery breaker
3 1=yellow
~
~ 2=green flashing ....................
5
~ 3=off
~ 2 4=green ....................
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4 6=yellow
Minutes later ...
The system continues to be in bypass

3 1=yellow
~ operation, rectifier and inverter are
~ 2=green flashing
5 switched off, battery is isolated from
~ 3=off the system.
~ 2 4=red
1 6
5=green flashing If required, the manual bypass can
4 6=off now be switched on.
V 1.23 213 4999 en

13.2.4 Switching bypass operation to normal operation/mains priority operation
This section is both operation modes:
The system is in bypass operation, rectifier is switched on and charges the battery and
inverter is ready. This status of the system occurs after switching from normal operation
to bypass operation, see chapter 13.2.2, Switching normal operation to bypass operation,
page 210.
Initial state
3
~
~ 1=green The system is in bypass operation,
5
rectifier is switched on and charges
~ 2=green flashing
~ 2
the battery and inverter is ready.
1 6 3=off
4= green or To switch the system to this state,
4 yellow flashing* follow the procedure described in
5=green flashing chapter 13.2.2, Switching normal
*Depending on the result of the battery circuit test. 6=yellow operation to bypass operation,
page 210.
“short”
3 1=green
~
2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off Inverter starts up and switches to
~
4=green standby.
~ 2
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6=green/yellow
flashing
Seconds later ...
V 1.23 214 4999 en

3 1=green
~
~ 2=green flashing
5
~ 3=off Inverter is running in standby

~ 2 4=green
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6= yellow flashing
“short”
3 1=green Bypass switches on.

~ Inverter is in state
~ 2=green flashing
5 “MAINS PRIORITY OPERATION”.
3=off
~ ....................
~ 4=green
1 6
2
4
6=green flashing ....................
Seconds later ...
3
~ 1=green LED 5 is no longer flashing. The
~ 2=green flashing duration of the flashing depends on
5
~ 3=off how long the inverter needs to

~ 2 4=green synchronize. Once bypass and
1 6
5=green inverter are synchronized, the
4 6=green flashing flashing stops.
System stays in this state, if option

“mains priority” is built in. This is the
“normal operation state for the
operation mode “mains priority”
Seconds later ...
The electrical output switch switches

3
~ on and the bypass switches off.
~ 1=green The output is supplied by the inverter
5
~ 2=green and is now backed up. The system is
~ 2
3=off in normal operation.
1 6
4=green ....................
5=yellow
4 ........UPS.........
6=green
....................
V 1.23 215 4999 en

13.2.5 Switching on manual bypass – maintenance
For maintenance, the manual bypass can switched on. For this purpose, first of all the
electronic bypass must be switched on.
If the system is still in normal operation, follow the instructions in chapter 13.2.2 Switching
normal operation to bypass operation, page 210 or 13.2.3, Switching mains priority
operation to bypass operation (option), page 212.
 Bypass supply is available and safe
 Bypass is switched on
Initial state
3
~ The system is in bypass operation.
~ 1=yellow Rectifier and inverter switched off.
5
~ 2=green flashing The battery is isolated from the

~ 2 3=off system.
1 6
4=red
....................
5=green flashing
4
6=off
..BYPASS.OPERTION...
....................
....................
Switch on the manual bypass
For further information, see chapter 13.6, Manual
bypass (only during maintenance work by the
manufacturer), page 238.
3 1=yellow Manual bypass now switched on.

~
2=green flashing
~ 5
....................
3=green
~
4=red
....MANUAL.BYPASS...
~ 2
....................
1 6
5=green flashing
6=off ....................
4
The electronic bypass (LED 5) can

now switched off.
“long”
V 1.23 216 4999 en

........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”
3 1=yellow
~ The system can now be isolated by
2=off
~ 5 means of the input and output
3=green
~ breaker-breaker as well as the
~ 4=red
1 6
2 DC fuse Q400 and the AC circuit
5=yellow breaker Q401.
6=off
4
V 1.23 217 4999 en

13.2.6 Switching manual bypass operation to normal/mains priority operation
The system is in manual bypass operation and is completely free from voltage. The
controller and the display are free from voltage.
If the system is already ready for switching on, start with the following procedure from
point “System is ready for switching on”.
3
~ 1=off Initial state
~ 2=off
5
The system is in manual bypass
~ 3=off
operation and is completely free from
~ 2 4=off
1 6 voltage. The controller and the
5=off
display are free from voltage.
4 6=off
Switch on the input, output switches and circuit

breaker Q401 and Q400
Minutes later ...
System is ready for switching on

3
~ 1=yellow
~ ... and the manual bypass is switched
5 2=off
on.
~ 3=green
~ 2 4=red
1 6
5=yellow
....................
4 6=off ....MANUAL.BYPASS...
....................
....................
”short”
3 1=yellow
~ The electronic bypass (LED 5)
2=green flashing
~ 5 switches on.
3=green
~
4=red
~ 2 Once it is switched on, the manual
1 6 5=green flashing
bypass can be switched off again.
6=off
4
V 1.23 218 4999 en

Open the manual bypass.
3 1=yellow The electronic bypass (LED 5) is now

~ switched on.
2=green flashing
~
~
5
3=off ....................
~ 2
4=red ..BYPASS.OPERATION..
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=off ....................
“short”
3 1=green/yellow flashing
~ 2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off
~
~ 4=green/yellow flashing
2
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6=off
Seconds later ...
3 1=green
~ 2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off
~ Pre-charging threshold is reached.
~ 4=off
2
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6=yellow
Seconds later ...

Rectifier contactor switches on, pre-
3 1=green
~ charging off. Then the rectifier starts
2=green flashing
~ up.
5
3=off
~
4=yellow flashing
....................
~
1 6
2
5=green flashing
........CLOSE.......
6=yellow
..BATTERY BREAKER!..
4
....................
Close the battery breaker-breaker.
The system is in bypass operation.

3
~ 1=green The rectifier is switched on and
~ charges the battery. The inverter is
5 2=green flashing
~ ready.
3=off
~ 2 This is the initial state for switching
1 6 4=yellow flashing
from bypass to normal operation. For
5=green flashing
4 further steps, see chapter 13.2.4,
6=yellow Switching bypass operation to normal
operation, page 214.
V 1.23 219 4999 en

13.2.7 Switching on bypass operation
The bypass can switched on at any time, if the following conditions are met:
 Bypass is operating correctly
 The bypass voltage and frequency are in the valid range
 Bypass rotary field is ok
If the system is in normal operation, the
 Inverter must additionally be synchronized with the bypass supply.
To switch on the bypass during normal operation, see chapter 13.2.2, Switching normal
operation to bypass operation, page 210.
3 1=yellow
~ 2=off
~ 5
3=off Initial state
~
~ 4=red System is ready for switching on
2
1 6
5=yellow
4
6=off
“short”
3 1=yellow Bypass switches on.

~ 2=green flashing Output is supplied by mains.
~
....................
5
3=off
~
~ 2
4=red ..BYPASS.OPERATION..
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=off ....................
V 1.23 220 4999 en

13.2.8 Switching off bypass operation
Before switching off the bypass, the rectifier and inverter must be switched off.
 Bypass is connected
 Rectifier and inverter are switched off
If the rectifier and inverter are not yet switched off, they switch off with , long”. The
following message is shown in the display for each switch-off process:
........AGAIN!......
....................
The message can be confirmed with , long” in this case.
Initial state
3 1=yellow
~ Bypass is switched on.
~ 2=green flashing
5 Rectifier and inverter are switched off.
~ 3=off
4=red
....................
~
2
1 6
5=green flashing
4 6=off
....................
....................
The electronic bypass (LED 5) can
now be switched off.
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
Following this keystroke, the output is

free from voltage!
“long”
3 1=yellow
~ 2=off
~ 5
3=off
~ Bypass is switched off.
~ 4=red
2
1 6
5=yellow
4
6=off
V 1.23 221 4999 en

13.2.9 Switching off normal operation – switching off the system
The following conditions are necessary:

 The system is in normal operation
If the load is still to be supplied for an individual system, the following condition must be
additionally met:
 Bypass supply must be available
For switching off the system without interrupting the output voltage
See chapter 13.2.5, Switching on manual bypass – maintenance, page 216
If an interruption of the load supply at the output can be tolerated, the system can be
switched off as follows:
3 1=green
~ Initial state
2=green
~ 5
3=off ....................
~ ........UPS.........
~ 4=green
1 6
2
5=yellow or red* ..NORMAL OPERATION..
6=green ....................
4
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
Make sure that throwing off the load
can be tolerated, or in case of
parallel systems, that another
“long” system supplies the load and can
carry it.
3 1=green
~ 2=off
~ 5
3=off
~ Inverter and output switch off.
~ 4=green
2
1 6
5=yellow or red*
4
6=yellow
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
*Depending on whether the bypass is available or not
V 1.23 222 4999 en

“long”
3 1=yellow
~ 2=off
~ 5
3=off
~ The rectifier switches off.
~ 4=green
2
1 6
5=yellow or red*
4
6=yellow
Open the battery breaker-breaker.

After opening of the battery breaker,
the LED 4 is still illuminated green.
After some time (minutes) the LED
illuminates red.
Minutes later ...

The system is now in its initial state.
3
~ Bypass, rectifier and inverter are
~ switched off, battery breaker-breaker
5
~ is opened.
1=yellow
~ 2 The system can now be isolated by
1 6 2=off
means of the input and output
3=off
4 breaker-breaker as well as the circuit
4=red breaker Q401 and Q400.
5=yellow or red*
Once it is verified that the system is
6=off
free from voltage and protected
against restarting, and in compliance
with regulation ANSI/NFPA 70, work
on the system can be performed.
Before any work can start:

Refer chapter 17, Isolating the
system complete, page 338
*Depending on whether the bypass is available or not.
V 1.23 223 4999 en

13.2.10 Switching off mains priority operation – switching off the system (option)
This section is only for system in mains priority mode (option).
The following conditions are necessary:

 The system is in mains priority operation
If the load is still to be supplied for an individual system, the following condition must be
additionally met:
 Bypass supply must be available
For switching off the system without interrupting the output voltage
See chapter 13.2.5, Switching on manual bypass – maintenance, page 216
If an interruption of the load supply at the output can be tolerated, the system can be
switched off as follows:
 Section 13.2.3, Switching mains priority operation to bypass operation (option),
page 212,
AFTER THAT:
 Section 13.2.8, Switching off bypass operation, page 221
 switched off as follows:
3 1=green
~ Initial state
2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off ....................
~ ...MAINS.PRIORITY...
~ 4=green
1 6
2
5=green .....OPERATION......
6=green flashing ....................
4
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”
3 1=green
~ 2=green flashing ....................
~ 5
3=off ..BYPASS.OPERATION..
~
~ 2
4=green .....OPERATION......
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=yellow
Inverter and output switch off. Bypass

and rectifier stay on.
“long”
V 1.23 224 4999 en

........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”
3 1=yellow
~
2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off
~ Rectifier switches off.
~ 2
4=green
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6=yellow
Ignore following message:

....................
Open the battery breaker-breaker. ........CLOSE.......
..BATTERY.BREAKER!..
....................
After opening of the battery breaker,
the LED 4 is still illuminated green.
After some time (minutes) the LED
illuminates red.
Minutes later ...
3 1=yellow
~
2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off
~
~ 2
4=red
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6=off
For switching off the bypass follow the instructions under section 13.2.8, Switching off
bypass operation, page 221.
V 1.23 225 4999 en

13.3 Battery operation / mains failure and return
In the scenario mains failure and return, the system meets the purpose of supplying the
loads with a defined voltage.
The loads at the output are still supplied with voltage during the mains failure or mains
interruption, and are thus protected against a mains failure.
When you have a system with separated mains supplies, that means:
 Rectifier mains at X001
 Bypass mains at (X005)
there are three possibilities for mains failures:
 Bypass mains failure (X005),
 Rectifier mains failure (X001),
 Bypass mains failure (X005) and rectifier mains failure (X001).
When you have a system with common mains supply, that means:
 Rectifier und bypass mains are the same,
 Bypass and rectifier mains failure appear at the same time.
The behavior during and after the mains failure is depending of the operation mode:
“inverter priority mode” (standard)
“mains priority mode” (option)
and will be described in the following sections.
V 1.23 226 4999 en

13.3.1 Mains failure and return in normal operation
There are three possibilities for mains failures, in which the system reacts as described
below:
 Bypass mains failure (X005)
The system remains in normal operation, no battery operation. However, the
bypass is not available for a possible switch due to a fault or a short circuit at the
output.
 Rectifier mains failure (X001)
The system switches to battery operation.
The bypass is available for a possible switch due to a fault or a short circuit at the
output.
 Bypass mains failure (X005) and rectifier mains failure (X001)
The system switches to battery operation.
However, the bypass is not available for a possible switch due to a fault
or a short circuit at the output.
In case of a rectifier or complete mains failure, the system switches to inverter or battery
operation.
On return of the mains voltage, the rectifier switches on again and recharges the battery.
Initial state
3
1=green
2=green
~ 2
1 6
4=green
....................
5=yellow
........UPS.........
4
6=green
....................
V 1.23 227 4999 en

Mains failure
Rectifier switches off. Inverter
3 1=red
~ switches to battery operation. Battery
2=green is discharged (LED 4 flashing).
~ 5
3=off
~ ....................
~ 4=green flashing
1 6
2
5=red*
........UPS.........
6=green
.battery.operation..
4
....................
Return of mains voltage
1=green/yellow
3
~ flashing
~ 2=green Rectifier starts up, inverter might
5
~ 3=off synchronize with BYP (LED 5 flashes

~ 2 4=green flashing yellow).
1 6
5=yellow flashing
4 6=green
Seconds later
Rectifier is switched on and charges

3 1=green
~ the battery. The system is in normal
2=green operation again.
~ 5
3=off
~ ....................
~ 4=green
1 6
2
5=yellow
........UPS.........
6=green
4
....................
* If only the rectifier supply fails for LED 5 yellow.
V 1.23 228 4999 en

13.3.2 Mains failure and return in mains priority mode (option)
This section is only for system in “mains priority mode” (option).
There are three possibilities for mains failures, in which the system reacts as described
below:
 Bypass mains failure (X005)
The system switches to battery operation. The battery and inverter are supplied
by the rectifier. The battery stays fully charged.
 Rectifier mains failure (X001)
The system stays in mains priority operation (normal operation). The inverter runs
in standby from the battery. The battery is discharged.
 Bypass mains failure (X005) and rectifier mains failure (X001)
The system switches to battery operation. The battery is discharged.
In case of a bypass or complete mains failure, the system switches to battery operation.
On return of the mains voltage, the rectifier switches on again and recharges the battery.
Initial state
3
~
5 1=green
yellow, i.e. the bypass is available,
~ 2=green flashing
~ 2
bypass supply within its permissible
1 6 3=off tolerances and inverter synchronized.
4=green
4
5=green ....................
....................
Mains failure
Rectifier switches off. Inverter

~
3
1=red* switches to battery operation. Battery
~ 2=green is discharged (LED 4 flashing).
5
~ 3=off
....................
~ 2 4=green flashing*
1 6 ........UPS.........
5=red
4 6=green
....................
Return of mains voltage
3
1=yellow/green
~ flashing*
~ 5 2=green Rectifier starts up*, inverter might
~ 3=off synchronize with BYP (LED 5 flashes
~ 2
yellow).
1 6 4=green flashing*
5=yellow flashing
4
6=green
V 1.23 229 4999 en

Seconds later
Rectifier is switched on and

3
~ charges the battery. The system is
1=green
~ in normal operation again.
5
2=green
~
3=off ....................
~
1 6
2
4=green ........UPS.........
5=yellow flashing ..NORMAL.OPERATION..
4
6=green ....................
Seconds later
~
3
1=green ....................
2=green flashing
~ 5 ...MAINS.PRIORITY...
3=off
~ .....OPERATION......
~ 4=green
1 6
2
....................
5=green
4 6=green
* If only the bypass supply fails: LED 1 and 4 green.
V 1.23 230 4999 en

13.4 Faults
Generally, there are two different faults:
Reversible faults (rectifier, inverter)
Irreversible faults (RECT, INV, BYP, pre-charging)
In case of reversible faults, the RECT or INV is switched off. Once the cause of the fault
has been resolved (e.g. overtemperature), the respective component switches on again.
In case of irreversible faults, the faulty component is switched off and not switched on
again automatically. To switch on, the cause of the fault must be resolved and
acknowledged with the RESET “ ” key. The respective component must then be
restarted again.
Also see: Chapter 23.1 Fault event messages and their cause, page 358.
If the bypass supply is available in the “Emergency standby operation (continuous
operation)” status, in case of a RECT/INV fault, the system switches the output from
inverter to bypass.
If this is a reversible fault, once the cause has been resolved, the system switches back
to normal operation.
V 1.23 231 4999 en

13.5 Black-start (Option)
With the Black start the system can be started without mains voltage, only with existing
battery voltage.
Optionally the system can be equipped with a black start function.
The DC power supply of the "A400" power supply is connected directly to the battery
terminal "X004" before the battery separator "Q100".
Systems with SCR rectifiers must be equipped with the intermediate circuit
pre-charging "A450" (option).
Systems with IGBT rectifiers are in each case equipped with the
intermediate circuit pre-charge.
Systems with IGBT rectifiers are in each case equipped with the
intermediate circuit pre-charge.
NOTICE
Battery breaker(s) shall only be closed after a successful pre-charge
of the DC filter capacitors.
The following conditions are available at Black start:

 Rectifier mains voltage does not exist
 Bypass mains voltage does not exist
 System is not running
 No output voltage available
In order to start the UPS over the battery it is a requirement that the battery
is not discharged completely.
V 1.23 232 4999 en

13.5.1 Black start, Start up procedure
1=red Initial state

~
3
2=off  Rectifier/bypass mains not available
~  Battery breaker Q100 open
5 3=off
~  Q400/Q401 on
4=red
~ 2  Battery voltage dump X004
1 6 5=red
 Battery full (2.0 V/cell)
6=off
4
„short“
1=red Black start activated
3
~ 2=off
~ If Black start cannot be activated, the
5 3=off
battery breaker is still closed.
~ 4=yellow/red
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=off
4
„short“
1=red Wait for the following message
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=yellow/green
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=off
4
Seconds later ...
1=red ....................
3
~ 2=off ........Close.......
~ 5 3=off ..battery breaker!..
~ 4= yellow/green ....................
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=yellow
4
close battery breaker
1=red Inverter(6) is ready.

3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=yellow
4
„short“
V 1.23 233 4999 en

1=red Inverter starts
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=yellow/green
4
Seconds later ...

1=red Inverter is running.
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green flash
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=yellow flash
4
„short“
1=red Output is switched on. The system
3
~ 2=green supplies the consumers.
~ 5 3=off ....................
~ 4=green flash ........UPS.........
1
~
6
2
5=red
6=green
....................
4
V 1.23 234 4999 en

13.5.2 Black start, with battery voltage and closed battery breaker Q100
The battery charger is closed. The battery voltage is applied to the intermediate circuit.
The intermediate circuit is pre-charged. The inverter is ready.
1=red Inverter (6) is ready
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=yellow
4
„short“
1=red Inverter (6) starts
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=yellow/green
4
Seconds later ...
1=red Inverter (6) is started.

3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green flash
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=yellow flash
4
„short“
1=red Output (2) (K6 or V6) is switched on.
3
~ 2=green The system supplies the consumers.
~ 5 3=off ....................
~ 4=green flash ........UPS.........
1
~
6
2
5=red
6=green
....................
4
V 1.23 235 4999 en

13.5.3 Black start, faults
The following faults can occur during the Black start:

 The inverter can not be started
 Pre-charge fault
The inverter can not be started
The inverter does not start after a successful pre-charging and closed battery breaker.
This can be due to the following reasons:
1. Battery voltage or intermediate circuit undervoltage.
 The battery voltage is below the range specified in the data sheet.
In this case, the inverter can not be switched on. The inverter is in the state
"not ready".
1=red Inverter (6) is not ready.
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=off
4
Try the following:

 Check battery voltage and adjust with the data sheet of the system
 Check battery fuses
2. Battery voltage or intermediate circuit overvoltage

 The battery voltage is above the range specified in the data sheet.
In this case, the inverter can not be switched on. The inverter is in the state
"not ready".
1=red Inverter (6) is not ready.
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=red flash
4
Try the following:

 Check battery voltage and adjust with the data sheet of the system
V 1.23 236 4999 en

Pre-charge fault
After activating the pre-charge, the message below does not appear and the pre-
charge goes into fault.
Target state
1=red Wait until the following screen appears
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=yellow/green
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=off
4
Seconds later ...

1=red Wait until the following screen appears
3
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=red flash
~ 2
1 6 5=red
6=off
4
The pre-charge faults occurs if the pre-charge threshold (intermediate circuit voltage) is
not reached within approx. one minute.
This can have the following reasons:
 Precharge is overheated.
Wait 5 min. Confirm the error
V 1.23 237 4999 en

13.6 Manual bypass (only during maintenance work by the
manufacturer)
Electrically skilled person with AuS certification
DANGER
The system is switched on.
There is increased DANGER during this type of work!
WARNING
WARNING
Severe injuries caused by touching live components.
Use an insulated tool.
Maintenance work may only be carried out by the manufacturer's

customer service.
Before switching to an internal or external bypass!

The electronic bypass must be switched. Proceed as described in chapter
13.2.5, Switching on manual bypass – maintenance, page 216.
For maintenance works the system must be switched to manual bypass.

If any work in the system has to be done the system must be switched off completely. In
that case switch to external bypass and isolate the system completely, refer
chapter 17, Isolating the system complete, page 338.
V 1.23 238 4999 en

13.6.1 Manual bypass (systems with Q005, Q051, Q052)
Q005 manual bypass switch (only systems with Q005)
1. Make sure that the electronic bypass is switched on, see chapter 13.2.5, Switching
on manual bypass – maintenance, page 216.
2. Close Q005
 bypass supply, from terminal X005 to terminal X006 (output)
is switched on.
Figure 13-1: Disconnector Q005 bypass
Q052 system output switch (only systems with Q052)

3. Open Q052
The output of the inverter can be switched off with disconnector Q052.
Figure 13-2: Disconnector Q052 system output
Q051 mains supply switch (only systems with Q051)

4. Open Q051
 mains, terminal X005
Figure 13-3: Disconnector Q051 mains supply
Before any work can commence on the system, the hole system must
be free from voltage refer chapter 17, Isolating the system complete,
page 338.
V 1.23 239 4999 en

13.6.2 Manual bypass for systems with make-before-break switch Q500 (Option)
1. Make sure that the electronic bypass is switched on, see chapter 13.2.5, Switching
on manual bypass – maintenance, page 216.
2. Set switch Q500 into position “TEST”
Figure 13-4: Make-before-break switch, position “TEST"
3. Set switch Q500 into position “BYPASS”
Figure 13-5: Make-before-break switch, position “BYPASS”
be free from voltage
Refer chapter 17, Isolating the system complete, page 338
V 1.23 240 4999 en

13.7 Make-before-break switch Q500 (Option)
– Using test function
The factory setting of the make-before-break switch Q500 switch
must be in position “AUTO”.
Figure 13-6: Make-before-break switch position factory setting “AUTO”
The make-before-break switch is a multifunction switch.

In one position can more than one connection be connected or disconnected.
Following table shows the function:
Input Output Bypass
Position (Connection from (Connection from (connection from
X005 to power block) power block to X006) X005 to X006)
AUTO X X
TEST X X
BYPASS X
X = connection set
With the make-before -break switch it is possible to test the change over from bypass and
back. To bring the UPS in test mode you must know in which state the UPS operates:
1. UPS is off, no voltage at the output
or
2. UPS is in normal operation (output load of UPS is safe)
or
3. UPS is in bypass operation
or
4. UPS is in parallel operation
V 1.23 241 4999 en

13.7.1 Using test function make-before-break switch – Starting from state “UPS
off”
Follow instructions chapter 13.2.1 Starting normal/mains priority operation, page 206 till
system is in the following state:
3
1=green
~ 2=off
~ 5 3=off
~ 4=green or yellow
~ 2 flashing *
1 6
5=yellow
4 6=yellow
*Depending on the result of the battery circuit test.
“short“
3
1=green The system switches to bypass
~ 2=green flashing without interruption. The inverter
~ switches off.
5
3=off
~ ....................
~ 4= green or yellow
1 6
2
flashing * ..Bypass.operation..
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=yellow ....................
*Depending on the result of the battery
circuit test.
V 1.23 242 4999 en

Now switch Q500 to position TEST
1=green Manual bypass is now switched on

~
3
2=green flashing ....................
~ 5 3=green ....MANUAL.BYPASS...
~ 4=green or yellow ....................
~ 2
flashing * ....................
1 6
5= green flashing
4
6=yellow
Till now it will be refer to charters with standard switching

procedures. Please remark, that the LED signalization is different:
LED 3 is green and LED 2 is flashing.
Now the output is supplied over the manual bypass input and the switch over tests
between inverter and bypass can be preceded without influencing the output.
Test the switch over from bypass to normal operation by following chapter 13.2.4,
A second test can be performed by following the chapter13.2.2, Switching normal
operation to bypass operation, page 210. (inverter priority mode, standard) Here you test
the switch over from normal operation to bypass operation.
Switching over from mains priority operation to battery operation cannot be tested in
mains priority mode. To get back to the state before the first test follow the instructions
under chapter 13.2.3 Switching mains priority operation to bypass operation (option),
page 212.
V 1.23 243 4999 en

After that test you will be in the following state

~
3
2=green flashing ....................
~ 5 3=green ....MANUAL.BYPASS...
~ 4=green or yellow ....................
~ 2
flashing * ....................
1 6
5= green flashing
4
6=yellow
If you want to start now the UPS in normal operation, then switch the make-before-break
switch to position AUTO.

~
3
2=green flashing ....................
~ 5 3=off ..Bypass.operation..
~ 4=green ....................
~ 2
....................
1 6 5= green flashing
6=yellow
4
Now you can bring the UPS in normal operation by following

chapter 13.2.4, Switching bypass operation to normal operation, page 214
V 1.23 244 4999 en

13.7.2 Using test function make-before-break switch – Starting from state “normal
operation”
To test the system, the system has to be switched to bypass operation.
Initial state
3
1=green
2=green
~ 2
1 6
4=green
....................
5=yellow
........UPS.........
4
6=green
..normal.operation..
....................
“short”
3 1=green
~ without interruption. The inverter
2=green flashing switches off.
~ 5
3=off
~ ....................
~ 4=green
1 6
2
5=green flashing
..Bypass.operation..
6=yellow
....................
4
....................
3 1=green
~ 2=green flashing ....................
~ 5
3=green ....MANUAL.BYPASS...
~
~ 2
4=green ....................
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=yellow
V 1.23 245 4999 en

LED 3 is green and LED 2 is green flashing.
Test the switch over from bypass to normal operation by following
chapter 13.2.4, Switching bypass operation to normal operation, page 214.
A second test can be done by following
chapter13.2.2, Switching normal operation to bypass operation, page 210.
Here you test the switch over from normal operation to bypass operation. After that test
you will be in the following state.
3 1=green
~ 2=green flashing
~ 5
3=green
~
~ 4=green
2
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6=yellow
Now switch Q500 to position AUTO
3
1=green
~ 2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off
~
~ 2
4=green
1 6
5=green flashing
4 6=yellow
Now you can bring the UPS in normal operation by following

V 1.23 246 4999 en

13.7.3 Using test function make-before-break switch – Starting from state “mains
priority operation” (option)
To test the system, the system has to be switched to bypass operation.
Initial state
3
~ 1=green
~ System is in normal operation.
5 2=green flashing
Bypass mains is in tolerance.
~ 3=off
~
1 6
2
4=green ....................
4
....................
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”

3
~ 1=green without interruption. The inverter
~ 2=green flashing switches off.
5
~ 3=off
~ 2 4=green ....................
1 6
5=green flashing ..Bypass.operation..
4 6=yellow ....................
....................
V 1.23 247 4999 en

3 1=green
~ 2=green flashing ....................
~ 5
3=green ....MANUAL.BYPASS...
~
~ 2
4=green ....................
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=yellow
Till now it will be refer to charters with standard switching procedures. Please
remark, that the LED signalization is different:
LED 3 is green and LED 2 is green flashing.
Test the switch over from bypass to normal operation by following
Switching over from mains priority operation to battery operation cannot be tested in
mains priority mode. To get back to the state before the first test follow the instructions
under chapter 13.2.3 Switching mains priority operation to bypass operation (option),
page 212.
3
5
~ 3=green
~ 2 4=green ....................
1 6
5=green flashing ....MANUAL.BYPASS...
4 6=yellow ....................
....................
V 1.23 248 4999 en


3
5
~ 3=off
~ 2 4=green ....................
1 6
5=green flashing ..Bypass.operation..
4 6=yellow ....................
....................
Now you can bring the UPS in normal operation by following chapter 13.2.4, Switching
bypass operation to normal operation, page 214.
V 1.23 249 4999 en

13.7.4 Using test function make-before-break switch – Starting from state “bypass
operation”
Initial state.
3
~ It can be that LEDs 1, 4 and 6 are
~ different. Depending of, if the rectifier
5
1=yellow
~ (1) or inverter (6) or either are
2=green flashing
~ 2 running or battery is attached to the
1 6
3=off
system (4). In that case ignore these
4
4=red LEDs for now.
5=green flashing
....................
6=off
..Bypass.operation..
....................
....................
3 1=yellow
~ ....................
2=green flashing
~ 5 ....MANUAL.BYPASS...
3=green
~
~ 2
4=red ....................
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=off

LED 3 =green and LED 2 is green flashing.
If the inverter is not ready LED 6 = yellow yet, the inverter has to be brought in this state.
Follow instructions chapter 13.2.1 Starting normal/mains priority operation, page 206 till
system is in the following state:
3
1=green
~ 2=green flashing
~ 5 3=green
~
4=green
~ 2
1 6
5=green flashing
4
6=yellow
V 1.23 250 4999 en

Test the switch over from bypass to normal operation by following chapter 13.2.4,
A second test can be done by following the chapter 13.2.2, Switching normal operation to
bypass operation, page 210.
Here you test the switch over from normal operation to bypass operation. After that test,
you will be in the following state.
3 1=green
~ 3
....................
2=green flashing
~~ 5
....MANUAL.BYPASS...
3=green
~ ~ 5
~ 2
4=green ....................
1
~
6
6
2
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=yellow
4
If you want to start now the system in normal operation, switch the make before-break
3 1=green
~ ....................
2=green flashing
~ 5
3=off ..Bypass.operation..
~
~ 2
4=green ....................
1 6
5=green flashing ....................
4
6=yellow
Now you can bring the system in normal operation by following chapter 13.2.4, Switching
bypass operation to normal operation, page 214.
V 1.23 251 4999 en

13.8 Parallel operation (alphanumerical display)
This chapter is only for systems with alphanumerical display. If you have a
system with touch display see chapter 14, Operation, systems with touch
display page 283.
13.8.1 General, redundancy and power parallel considerations

In this chapter the parallel operation is described for two units. If you have more than two
units, then do the same steps at the additional units as at unit 2.
The system may be operated only by electrically skilled personnel
It is very important, that each running unit of a parallel system must be

connected to each other via the load bus bar. Thus external output
breakers must be feedback to each Unit.
Manual bypass in parallel operation

Following rule is important for operation the manual bypass switch “Q005”:
All manual bypass switches “Q005” of each parallel unit must be
either switched off or on!
Back feed reasons

No parallel unit with manual bypass "Q005" may be
switched on and another unit with "Q005" switched off!
A parallel operation only with parallel communication connected to one or

more unit is prohibited. Otherwise the voltage supply at load bus can fail!
The system does make difference between “REDUNDANCY” and “POWER PARALLEL”
mode only during the start or when one unit is isolated for a running parallel system.
Considerations during system start
For starting a parallel system enough units must have their inverter running in standby.
That is the following state:
(Example taken from section 13.8.3 Starting a parallel system without bypass mains)
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=red 1=green 3=off 5=red

2=off 4=green 6=yellow flash 2=off 4=green 6=yellow flash
Unit 1: Inverter is running in standby. Unit 2: Inverter is running in standby.
V 1.23 252 4999 en

If enough inverters are running, the next key stroke “ ” switches at any unit of the
parallel system switches all units (inverters) to the load bus bar.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4=green 6=green 2=green 4=green 6=green
Unit 1: The electrical output switch switches on. Unit 2: The electrical output switch switches on.
.................... ....................
........UPS......... ........UPS.........
..NORMAL.OPERATION.. ..NORMAL.OPERATION..
.................... ....................
Enough units mean: Enough inverters to carry the load. How many units, that is defined
in the menu Parallel operation, see also 11.16, Menu Parallel operation (optional), page
175
↑GROUP.NUMBER:.....1
.NUMBER.OF.UNITS....
.AT.LEAST..........2
....................
Thus “2” units are necessary to carry the load in this example. If only one inverter of a
parallel system is running and you would press at this unit the key “ ”, you would
receive the following warning:
......Warning!......
Not.enough.inverters
.......running......
.Switch on anyway?..
If you get the message above and you are not sure, then don’t
proceed! Bring more units in the state “inverter standby”!
If you are sure:
For emergency starts check if the load is small enough to be carried
of the units in standby.
With the next key stroke of “ ” after this message the system would switch on to the
load bus bar anyway. Whether the unit could carry the load or not, doesn’t matter. If not it
would be overloaded. After a certain overload time it would switch off. This function is
only for emergency purposes. In this case you must know whether the system can carry
the load or not.
For parallel systems with external load separator, this must be closed
before commissioning!
V 1.23 253 4999 en

Example 1 (normal start):
If you have following parallel system:
Parallel system consisting of 2 units with 100 kVA nominal power
Parallel mode: POWER PARALLEL
Load 125 kVA, PF=0.8 ind
One unit has its inverter in standby.
The other unit has not running its inverter.
You press “ ” at the unit with the inverter running in standby. Then you’d get the
warning message shown above. Now you should bring the other unit in the state “inverter
standby”. Then you could press “ ” at any unit and both 100 kVA units would switch on
to the 125 kVA load safely.
Example 2 (Emergency):
If you have following parallel system:
Parallel system consisting of 2 units with 100 kVA nominal power
Parallel mode: POWER PARALLEL
Load 125 kVA, PF=0.8 ind
One unit has its inverter in standby.
The other unit is broken.
You must start the system anyway to shut down critical processes (back start f. E.).
You have 10 minutes time to shut down the critical processes.
If you press “ ” at the unit with the inverter running in standby. Then you’d get the
warning message shown above. Press “ ” anyway, because 10min load supply is
enough to shut down the process. After the second press only one 100 kVA unit would
switch on to the 125 kVA load and would supply it for 10 minutes.
V 1.23 254 4999 en

Considerations when one unit is isolated from a running parallel system
When a parallel system is running all units are running in normal operation, for example
like show below. If you want to isolate one system from the running parallel system, you
have to consider the redundancy and supply safeness of the system. The system will
remind you before loos of load could happen.
(Example taken from section 13.8.4 Isolation one unit from a parallel system –
Maintenance, page 267)
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=yellow or 1=green 3=off 5=yellow or red

2=green 4=green red 2=green 4=green 6=green
6=green
Unit 1: Running in normal operation. Unit 2: Running in normal operation.
.................... ....................
........UPS......... ........UPS.........
.................... ....................
Example 1 (REDUNDANT PARALLEL SYSTEM):
You have following parallel system:
 Parallel system consisting of 2 units with 100kVA nominal power
 Load 90 kVA, PF=0.8 ind
 Both units are running in normal operation
 Parallel mode (See also chapter 11.16, Menu Parallel operation (optional), page
175
.PARALLEL.OPERA:..ON ↑GROUP.NUMBER:.....1
.GROUP.NUMBER:.....1 .NUMBER.OF.UNITS....
.PARALLEL.MODE:..... .AT.LEAST..........1
↓.REDUNDANT.PARALLEL ....................
Now you want to isolate one unit from the running parallel system. By pressing “long”
at the first time you’d get following message:
........AGAIN!......
....................
V 1.23 255 4999 en

Then you’d confirm switching off the unit by pressing “long”. The unit would switch off
from the output bus bar and the other unit would supply the load safely.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=yellow or red 1=green 3=off 5=yellow or red

2=green 4=green 6=green 2=off 4=green 6=yellow
Unit 1: keeps suppling load safely. Unit 2: Inverter and output switch off.
Unit 2 is now isolated from the parallel system.
Example 2 (POWER PARALLEL SYSTEM):

You have following parallel system:
 Parallel system consisting of 2 units with 100kVA nominal power
 Load 125 kVA, PF=0.8 ind
 Both units are running in normal operation
 Parallel mode (See also chapter 11.16, Menu Parallel operation (optional), page
175
.PARALLEL.OPERA:..ON ↑GROUP.NUMBER:.....1
.GROUP.NUMBER:.....1 .NUMBER.OF.UNITS....
.PARALLEL.MODE:..... .AT.LEAST..........2
↓..POWER.PARALLEL... ....................
Now you want to isolate one unit from the running parallel system. By pressing “long”
one time you’d get following message:
......Warning!......
..Next.key'0'.press.
.can.throw.off.load.
.Switch.off.anyway?.
If you have secure bypass mains, you could switch to BYPASS OPERATION. If not, then
you must reduce the load on the load bus bar or wait till the mains voltage is available, or
you could overload the remaining unit for 10min.
In case of overloading the remaining unit, this unit could switch off after
a certain time. The load on the load / output bus bar would also be
switched off!
V 1.23 256 4999 en

13.8.2 Starting a parallel system


closed.

this manual.

The following conditions are necessary for the system start:

The bypass voltage and frequency are in the valid range
Bypass rotary field is ok (only three phase systems)
Bypass switched off
Bypass switched off
V 1.23 257 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=yellow 3=off 5=yellow 1=yellow 3=off 5=yellow

2=off 4=red 6=off 2=off 4=red 6=off
Unit 1: Initial state. Ready for switching on. Unit 2: Initial state. Ready for switching on.
„short“ „short“
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=yellow green flash 3=off 5=yellow 1=yellow green 3=off 5=yellow

2=off 4= yellow green 6=off flash 4= yellow green 6=off
flash 2=off flash
Unit 1: Pre-charging started. Unit 2: Pre-charging started.
Seconds later ... Seconds later ...
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green yellow flash 3=off 5=yellow 1=green yellow 3=off 5=yellow

2=off 4= off 6=yellow flash 4= off 6=yellow
2=off
Unit 1: Pre-charging threshold is reached.. Unit 2: Pre-charging threshold is reached..
V 1.23 258 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=yellow 1=green 3=off 5=yellow

2=off 4=yellow flash 6=yellow 2=off 4=yellow flash 6=yellow
Unit 1: Unit 2:
.................... ....................
........CLOSE....... ........CLOSE.......
..BATTERY.BREAKER!.. ..BATTERY.BREAKER!..
.................... ....................

Close battery breaker within 30 seconds!


3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=off 4=yellow flash 6=yellow 2=off 4=yellow flash 6=yellow
Unit 1: Unit 2:
V 1.23 259 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=off 4=green 6=yellow green 2=off 4=green 6=yellow green
flash flash
Unit 1: Inverter starts up and switches to standby. Unit 2: Inverter starts up and switches to standby.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

#Starting parallel operation prepared

inverter priority operation (standard)
… is described next. For “mains priority operation” go to remark further on to
“#Starting mains priority operation”.
Unit 1: Unit 2:
It is suficient, if the key “ ” at one unit. At

„short” which unit doesn’t matter.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=green flash 1=green 3=off 5=green flash

2=green flash 4=green 6=green flash 2=green flash 4=green 6=yellow flash
Unit 1:.[inverter priority (standard)]: Bypass switches on. Unit 2 [inverter priority (standard)]: : Bypass switches
Inverter is in state “Mains priority operation”. on. Inverter is in state “Mains priority operation”.
* Or permanently green depending on the * Or permanently green depending on the
synchronization/frequency slew rate of bypass mains. synchronization/frequency slew rate of bypass mains.
.................... ....................
...MAINS.PRIORITY... ..BYPASS.OPERATION..
.....OPERATION...... ....................
.................... ....................
V 1.23 260 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=green 1=green 3=off 5=green flash

2=green flash 4=green 6=green flash 2=green flash 4=green 6=yellow flash
Unit 1 [inverter priority (standard)]: Bypass switches on. Unit 2 [inverter priority (standard)]: No change.
Inverter is in state “Mains priority operation”.
LED 5 is no longer flashing. The duration of the flashing depends
on how long the inverter needs to synchronize.
Once bypass and inverter are synchronized, the flashing stops.
.................... ....................
.....OPERATION...... ....................
.................... ....................
Seconds later ...
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4=green 6=green 2=green 4=green 6=green
Unit 1 [inverter priority (standard)]: Unit 2 [inverter priority (standard)]:
The electrical output switch switches on and the bypass switches The electrical output switch switches on and the bypass
off. switches off.
The output is supplied by the inverter and is now backed up. The The output is supplied by the inverter and is now backed
system is in normal operation. up. The system is in normal operation.
.................... ....................
........UPS......... ........UPS.........
.................... ....................
V 1.23 261 4999 en

#Starting mains priority operation”.
mains priority operation (option)
… is described next. The earlier steps are described before, see
“#Starting parallel operation prepared”
States of Parallel units before tag “#Starting parallel operation prepared”:
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

Unit 1: Inverter is running in standby. (State before) Unit 2: Inverter is running in standby (state before).
You must press the key “ ” at each unit. Otherwise the unit will stay in
BYPASS OPERATION.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=green 1=green 3=off 5=green

2=green 4=green 6=green flash 2=green 4=green 6=green flash
Unit 1 [mains priority (option)]: Bypass switches on. Inverter is Unit 2 [mains priority (option)]: Bypass switches on.
in state “Mains priority operation”. It can be, that the LED, Inverter is in state “Mains priority operation”. It can be, that
marked with “*” are flashing. This is depending on the the LED, marked with “*” are flashing. This is depending
synchronization/frequency slew rate of bypass mains. on the synchronization/frequency slew rate of bypass
mains
.................... ....................
...MAINS.PRIORITY... ...MAINS.PRIORITY...
.....OPERATION...... .....OPERATION......
.................... ....................
V 1.23 262 4999 en

13.8.3 Starting a parallel system without bypass mains
The startup procedure without bypass mains is nearly the same like the
procedure with bypass mains, as described in the section before. The only
difference is that the bypass doesn’t switch on. The output switches are
switched on nearly at the same time.
To start up the system without bypass, the DC-Link must be already

connected to the battery (battery breaker is closed). Or the “black start”
option or the option “auxiliary supply from rectifier” is necessary”.


closed.

this manual.

The following conditions are necessary for the system start:

Power supply from battery (option blackstart) or rectifier mains (Option) or dc-link is
already charged
V 1.23 263 4999 en

If the DC-link is already charged (battery breaker is already closed) then
start from the point where the battery LED (4) are yellow flashing (inverter
is not running, battery breaker closed) or green illuminating (inverter is
running).
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=yellow 3=off 5=red 1=yellow 3=off 5=red

2=off 4=red 6=off 2=off 4=red 6=off
Unit 1: Initial state. Ready for switching on. Unit 2: Initial state. Ready for switching on.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=yellow green flash 3=off 5=red 1=yellow green 3=off 5=red

2=off 4=yellow green 6=off flash 4=yellow green 6=off
flash 2=off flash
Unit 1: Pre-charging started Unit 2: Pre-charging started
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=yellow green flash 3=off 5=red 1=yellow green 3=off 5=red

2=off 4=off 6=yellow flash 4=off 6=yellow
2=off
Unit 1: Pre-charging threshold is reached Unit 2: Pre-charging threshold is reached.
V 1.23 264 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=off 4= yellow green 6=yellow 2=off 4= yellow green 6=yellow
flash flash
Unit 1: Unit 2:
.................... ....................
........CLOSE....... ........CLOSE.......
..BATTERY.BREAKER!.. ..BATTERY.BREAKER!..
.................... ....................

Close battery breaker within 30 sec!


3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=off 4= yellow flash 6=yellow 2=off 4= yellow flash 6=yellow
Unit 1: Unit 2:
V 1.23 265 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=off 4= green 6=yellow green 2=off 4= green 6=yellow green
flash flash
It is suficient, if the key “ ” at one unit. At

„short“ which unit doesn’t matter.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4= green 6=green 2=green 4= green 6=green
Unit 1: The electrical output switch switches on. Unit 2: The electrical output switch switches on.
The output is supplied by the inverter and is now backed up. The The output is supplied by the inverter and is now backed
system is in normal operation. up. The system is in normal operation.
.................... ....................
........UPS......... ........UPS.........
.................... ....................
V 1.23 266 4999 en

13.8.4 Isolation one unit from a parallel system – Maintenance
In this example unit 2 is isolated from the running parallel system.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

.................... ....................
........UPS......... ........UPS.........
.................... ....................
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
If the safeness of the load supply is in

danger, you would get another
message. For further information see
section 13.8.1 General, redundancy
and power parallel considerations,
page 252.
“long”
V 1.23 267 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4= green 6=green 2=off 4= green 6=yellow
Unit 1: keeps suppling load safely. Unit 2: Inverter and output switch off.
Unit 2 is now isolated from the parallel system..
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=yellow or red 1=yellow 3=off 5=yellow or red

2=green 4= green 6=green 2=off 4= green 6=yellow
Unit 1: no change Unit 2: Rectifier switches off.
Open the battery breaker-breaker

....................
........CLOSE.......
....................
After opening of the battery breaker, the LED 4
is still illuminated green. After some time
(minutes) the LED illuminates red.
Minutes later ...
V 1.23 268 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4= green 6=green 2=off 4= red 6=off
Unit 1: no change Unit 2: The system is now in its initial state. Bypass,
rectifier and inverter are switched off, battery
breaker-breaker is opened.
The system can now be isolated by means of the
input and output breaker-breaker as well as the
circuit breaker Q401 and Q400.
Once it is verified that the system is free from
voltage and protected against restarting, and in
compliance with regulation ANSI/NFPA 70, work on
the system can be performed.
Now it is NOT allowed to

switch to manual bypass,
because it would force the
residual safe supply to
bypass.
*Depending on whether the bypass is available or not
V 1.23 269 4999 en

13.8.5 Isolation one unit from a parallel system in mains priority mode (option)
In this example unit 2 is isolated from the running parallel system.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4= green 6=green flash 2=green 4= green 6=green flash
Unit 1: Running in mains priority operation. Unit 2: Running in mains priority operation.
.................... ....................
.................... ....................
“long”
......Warning!......
Consider if the remaining units are
able to carry the actual load.
Otherwise a loss on the load bus bar
can happen, if BYPASS mains fails.
For further information see section
13.8.1 General, redundancy and
power parallel considerations, page
252.
“long”
V 1.23 270 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4= green 6=green flash 2=green flash 4= green 6=yellow
Unit 1: keeps suppling load safely. Unit 2: Inverter switches off and bypass is still on.
....................
....................
....................
“long”
........AGAIN!......
....................
“long”
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=green 1=yellow 3=off 5=green flash

2=green 4= green 6=green flash 2=green flash 4= green 6=yellow
Unit 1: Unit 1 no change Unit 2: Rectifier switches off.
Open the battery breaker-breaker.

....................
........CLOSE.......
....................
After opening of the battery breaker, the LED 4
is still illuminated green. After some time
(minutes) the LED illuminates red.
Minutes later ...
V 1.23 271 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=green 1=yellow 3=off 5=green flash

2=green 4= green 6=green flash 2=green flash 4= red 6=off
Unit 1: Unit 1 no change Unit 2: Bypass is still on.
....................
....................
....................
“long”
......Warning!......
Consider if the remaining units are
able to carry the actual load.
Otherwise a loss on the load bus bar
can happen due to overload of the
remaining unit(s). For further
information see section 13.8.1
General, redundancy and power
parallel considerations, page 252.
“long”
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=green 1=yellow 3=off 5=yellow

2=green 4= green 6=green flash 2=off 4= red 6=off
Unit 1: Unit 1 no change Unit 2: The system is now in its initial state. Bypass,
rectifier and inverter are switched off, battery
breaker-breaker is opened.
The system can now be isolated by means of the
input and output breaker-breaker as well as the
circuit breaker Q401 and Q400.
Once it is verified that the system is free from
voltage and protected against restarting, and in
compliance with regulation ANSI/NFPA 70, work on
the system can be performed.
V 1.23 272 4999 en

13.8.6 Switching back one unit on a running parallel system – Maintenance
In this example unit 2 is switched back on the running parallel system.

Unit 2 is off. Unit 1 is running in:
 Normal operation in case of “inverter priority mode” (standard) or
 Main priority operation in case of “mains priority mode” (option)
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4= green 6=green 2=off 4= red 6=off
Unit 1: [inverter priority mode (standard)]: Running in normal Unit 2: Unit is in the initial state.
operation
....................
........UPS.........
....................
OR
3
~
~ 5
~
~ 2
1 6
1=green 3=off 5=green

2=green flash 4= green 6=green flash
Unit 2: [mains priority (option)]: Inverter is in state “Mains
priority operation”.
....................
....................
„short“
V 1.23 273 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=green 1=yellow green 3=off 5=yellow

2=green flash 4= green 6=green flash flash 4= yellow green 6=off
2=off flash
Unit 1: no change Unit 2: Pre-charging started.
Now follow the instructions for unit 2 under section 13.8.2 Starting a parallel system -First
step with pushing the “ “-Button from that instruction is shown above.
V 1.23 274 4999 en

13.8.7 Switching a parallel system from normal operation to bypass operation
Bypass mains must be available for this procedure.

All inverters must be synchronized to bypass. That means LED number5
must be illuminating permanently yellow at all units of the parallel system.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

.................... ....................
........UPS......... ........UPS.........
.................... ....................
It is suficient, if the key “ ” at one unit. At which unit
doesn’t matter. “short”
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green flash 4= green or 6= yellow 2=green flash 4= green or yellow 6=yellow
yellow
Unit 1: switches to bypass operation. Unit 2: switches to bypass operation.
.................... ....................
..BYPASS.OPERATION.. ..BYPASS.OPERATION..
.................... ....................
.................... ....................
* depends on the result of the battery circuit test. How long after the last test.
V 1.23 275 4999 en

13.8.8 Switching a parallel system from mains priority operation to bypass
operation
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green flash 4= green 6=green flash 2=green flash 4= green 6=green flash
Unit 1: Mains priority operation. Unit 2: Mains priority operation.
.................... ....................
.................... ....................
“long” “long”
......Warning!...... ......Warning!......
..Next.key'0'.press. ..Next.key'0'.press.
.can.throw.off.load. .can.throw.off.load.
.Switch.off.anyway?. .Switch.off.anyway?.
V 1.23 276 4999 en

“long” “long”
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green flash 4= green or 6=yellow 2=green flash 4= green or yellow 6=yellow
yellow flash flash
Unit 1: Inverter switches off. Bypass stays on. Unit 2: Inverter switches off. Bypass stays on.
.................... ....................
.................... ....................
.................... ....................
It is not possible to switch off all the inverter of the whole parallel system at
the same time. In between the display and LED indication is different.
Depending if unit is still in mains priority operation or already in bypass
operation.
V 1.23 277 4999 en

13.8.9 Switching a parallel system from bypass operation to normal operation
Both units are in the last state described in the last section:
 Bypass is switched on
 Rectifier is running
 Battery breaker is closed
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green flash 4= green or 6=yellow 2=green flash 4= green or yellow 6=yellow
yellow flash flash
Unit 1: Bypass operation. Unit 2: Bypass operation.
.................... ....................
.................... ....................
.................... ....................
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green flash 4= green 6=yellow green 2=green flash 4= green 6=yellow green
flash flash
Unit 1: Inverter starts up and switches to standby. Unit 2: Inverter starts up and switches to standby
V 1.23 278 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4
1=green 3=off 5=green* 1=green 3=off 5=green*

2=green flash 4= green 6=yellow flash 2=green flash 4= green 6=yellow flash
* Or green flasing depending on the synchronization/frequency slew * Or permanently green depending on the
rate of bypass mains. synchronization/frequency slew rate of bypass mains.
#Switching back from bypass to normal operation prepared
inverter priority operation (standard)

.. is described next. For “mains priority operation” go to remark
further on to
“#Switching back from bypass to mains priority operation”.
It is suficient, if the key “ ” at one unit. At which

„short“ unit doesn’t matter.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green flash 4= green 6=green flash 2=green flash 4= green 6=yellow flash
Unit 1: [inverter priority (standard)]: Bypass switches on. Unit 2: [inverter priority (standard)]: Bypass is switched
Inverter is in state “Mains priority operation”. * or green, depending on. Inverter is running in standby.
of Synchronization.
.................... ....................
.....OPERATION...... ....................
.................... ....................
Seconds later... Seconds later...
V 1.23 279 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4= green 6=green 2=green flash 4= green 6=yellow flash
Unit 1: [inverter priority (standard)]: Bypass switches on. Unit 2: [inverter priority (standard)]: No change.
Inverter is in state “Mains priority operation”.
LED 5 is no longer flashing. The duration of the flashing depends
If nothing happens after a while, then
on how long the inverter needs to synchronize.
press key ” short“ at unit 2.
Once bypass and inverter are synchronized, the flashing stops.
....................
....................
Seconds later... Seconds later...
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

Unit 1: [inverter priority (standard)]: : The electrical output Unit 2: . [inverter priority (standard)]:: The electrical output
switch switches on and the bypass switches off. switch switches on and the bypass switches off.
The output is supplied by the inverter and is now backed up. The The output is supplied by the inverter and is now backed up.
system is in normal operation. The system is in normal operation.
.................... ....................
........UPS......... ........UPS.........
.................... ....................
#Switching back from bypass to mains priority operation
mains priority operation (option)

is described next. The earlier steps are described before, see
“#Switching back from bypass to normal operation prepared”
V 1.23 280 4999 en

3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green flash 4= green 6= yellow flash 2=green flash 4= green 6= yellow flash
Unit 1: Inverter is running in standby and bypass is switched on. Unit 2: Inverter is running in standby and bypass is switched
* Or green flashing depending on the synchronization/frequency on.
slew rate of bypass mains. * Or permanently green depending on the
synchronization/frequency slew rate of bypass mains.
„short „short
You must press the key “ ” at each unit. Otherwise the unit will stay in
BYPASS OPERATION.
3 3
~ ~
~ 5
~ 5
~ ~
~ 2 ~ 2
1 6 1 6
4 4

2=green 4=green 6=green flash 2=green 4=green 6=green flash
Unit 1: [mains priority (option)]: Bypass switches on. Inverter is in Unit 2: [mains priority (option)]: Bypass switches on.
state “Mains priority operation”. It can be, that the LED, marked with Inverter is in state “Mains priority operation”. It can be, that
“*” are flashing. This is depending on the synchronization/frequency the LED, marked with “*” are flashing. This is depending on
slew rate of bypass mains. the synchronization/frequency slew rate of bypass mains.
.................... ....................
.................... ....................
V 1.23 281 4999 en

13.8.10 Switching on bypass operation
The procedure to switch on the bypass in a parallel system is the same as described in
chapter “Single operation”, section “Switching on bypass operation”.
If you press the key “ ” at any unit all other units switch on bypass operation as well.
13.8.11 Switching off bypass operation

The procedure to switch on the bypass in a parallel system is the same as described in
chapter “Single operation”, section “Switching off bypass operation”.
You must perform the procedure at all unit, one by the other.
If you have a parallel system which needs more than one unit to feed the
load, you must regard that enough bypass are still on to carry the load.
Before you switch them off. Otherwise you have to switch on the manual
bypass first. See also section 13.8.1 General, redundancy and power
parallel considerations, page 252.
13.8.12 Black – Start up procedure for a parallel system (Option)

In the black start case it does not matter if the system is setup for “inverter priority mode”
(standard) or “mains priority mode” (option). The start up procedure is the same.
For black starting a parallel system follow the instructions under chapter “single
operation”, section “Black Start, Start up procedure” for each unit.
If you have a parallel system which needs more than one unit to feed the
load, you must regard that enough inverters a running in standby before
you switch on the inverter to the load. See also section 13.8.1 General,
redundancy and power parallel considerations, page 252.
V 1.23 282 4999 en

14 Operation, systems with touch display
See chapter 12
V 1.23 283 4999 en

15 Interface and software options
15.1 Communication gateway (optional)
The protocol gateway is an interface for communication as well as for transmission of
data protocols.
As connection options two interfaces are available on the protocol gateway which
communicate via the MODBUS protocol. These are a RS 232 interface and a RS 485
interface. As standard, the unit is equipped with a protocol gateway card A250.
For communication with external devices up to 2 protocol gateways can be fitted into
each unit. Each gateway provides a RS485 and a RS232 interface. Both interfaces can
be operated independently. Furthermore a PCMCIA slot is provided, which can be used
alternatively to the RS232 interface. If more than one gateway is fitted, all gateways
interfaces can be operated independently. Some options can only be connected to the
first gateway.
RS-232 Interface
Figure 15-1: Communication gateway A250
Transmit Data 3--------------- 2 Receive Data

Receive Data 2 --------------- 3 Transmit Data
System Ground 5--------------- 5 System Ground
V 1.23 284 4999 en

The DIP-switches on the protocol gateway are to be adjusted as follows:
S1
Switch Switch position Function
1 OFF Boot strap loader operation
2 ON Monitor operation RS232 interface
Baud rate 38400 Baud at RS232 in monitor
ON
Operation
3
Baud rate 19200 Baud at RS232 in monitor
OFF
operation
Termination CAN Bus:
4 ON or OFF ON, if card is at the end of CAN Bus
OFF, if further cards follow on CAN Bus
S2
1 OFF reserved
2 OFF reserved
3 OFF reserved
4 ON ON Address of card on CAN bus (HSB)
5 ON OFF Address of card on CAN bus (LSB)
GW2* GW1*
* Up to 2 gateways can be connected to a unit.
S3
1 ON Termination RS485 interface
V 1.23 285 4999 en

15.2 MODBUS - Profibus adapter (optional)
The function must be enabled at the factory.
A later activation is possible, but can only be carried out by a Benning
service employee.
A PROFIBUS DP interface can be provided with the optional PROFIBUS adapter SPI3.
A null modem cable is used to connect the adapter. This is connected to the protocol
gateway A250 or the touchscreen unit.
Figure 15-2: Profibus adapter
The SPI 3 only updates its PROFIBUS address during a restart. Set the
PROFIBUS address on the SPI 3 before switching on the power, or turn off
the power briefly after changing the PROFIBUS address. You should only
use addresses between 01 and 99.
The PROFIBUS address is set with the two rotary switches

Example: In order to set the PROFIBUS address 68, turn the rotary switch for the 10’s to
6, and the rotary switch for the units to 8.
Figure 15-3: Profibus address switch
Bus terminating resistor

Terminations of a PROFIBUS network must each be terminated with a bus terminating
resistor. Use standardized plugs with integrated terminating resistors.
Figure 15-4: Bus termination configuration for PROFIBUS (see PROFIBUS standard)
Pos Resistor Function

1 390 Ω Pull-up resistance from Pin 3 to positive supply voltage at Pin 6
2 220 Ω Cable terminating resistor between Pin 3 and Pin 8
3 390 Ω Pull-Down resistor from Pin 8 to data reception potential at Pin 5
V 1.23 286 4999 en

Pos Meaning
Power supply connections
24 V Screw terminal for external 24 V power supply
1
GND Signal ground terminal
PE Protective ground terminal
2 Profibus interface
3 Serial interface
Stop lever for top-hat rail
4 for releasing/fixing the SPI 3 from/on a 35 mm DIN top-hat rail (top-
hat rail not included in delivery)
Turn-switch for PROFIBUS address
Two rotary switches for setting the PROFIBUS address
5
Switch for setting the tens value
Switch for setting the unit value
LEDs to indicate operating states
 RUN: lights continuously if supply voltage is present, flashes in case of errors
(see “Error diagnosis and remedies table”)
 PB: lights up if the SPI 3 has been configured by the master and is
6
operational, flashes in case of errors (see “Error diagnosis and remedies
table”)
 TX: flashes if data is being sent to the serial interface
 RX: flashes if data is being received from the serial interface
If errors are detected, the pattern of flashing of the PB and RUN LED’s on the SPI 3 can
be used for error diagnosis. The LED’s can flash with the following patterns:
Error diagnosis and remedies
LED off LED short LED medium LED long LED on
If the PB LED (“PROFIBUS”) is off, the RUN LED is on continuously and

no longer indicates a valid LED code. Accordingly, the RUN LED can only
be used for diagnosis when the PB LED is lit.
The PROFIBUS diagnosis and error statuses are reset when the error is no
longer present or when the slave gets new parameter and configuration
values
PB LED code Status Significance Remedy

Correct data No PROFIBUS Connect up the DP
LED off transfer rate could master in the master
not be determined network Check the wiring
A master is available
but communication is Check address
LED short DP master available
not taking place with setting on the SPI 3
SPI 3
Parameter telegram Check the
Incorrect parameter
faulty configured and
LED medium Incorrect
Configuration parameterized
configuration
telegram faulty modules
SPI 3 working
Data exchange is
Led ON Data exchange OK correctly taking
currently
place
V 1.23 287 4999 en

RUN LED code Status Significance Remedy
Check external
24 V supply not
LED off SPI 3 not ready power supply
present
Check the wiring
Check parameters
Error when of all modules (the
receiving SPI 3 is MODBUS
Receive error
MODBUS slave did master)
LED medium No response from
not respond after Check the address
slave
max. number of of the MODBUS
repeats slave
Check the wiring
MODBUS slave
communicating SPI 3 working
Led ON Communication OK
correctly with the correctly
SPI 3
V 1.23 288 4999 en

15.3 SNMP Adapter (optional)
The function must be enabled at the factory.
A later activation is possible, but can only be carried out by a Benning
service employee.
A network interface can be provided with the optional adapter CS141.

(SNMP protocol, MODBUS over IP and WEB interface)
A null-modem cable is used to connect the adapter. This is connected to the protocol
gateway A250 or the touchscreen unit.
Figure 15-5: SNMP adapter
V 1.23 289 4999 en

Pos Description Function
1 COM1 Port Serial Interface to connect an UPS or another device with a
original RS232 cable
2 COM2 Port To connect additional devices for example (GSM Modem,
temperature and humidity sensor, SENSORMANAGER_II,
Fieldbus devices (MODBUS RS232, Profibus, LONBus,
etc.).
3 LAN Port RJ 45 Ethernet 10/100 Mbit Interface with integrated status LEDs
(green LED: Connection to network established, yellow
LED: network traffic) (not activated for the application)
4 DC Input external device: supplied by a 12V switching adapter
(delivered with the device) internal device: supplied via the
slot interface of the device
5 AUX
6 Status LEDs Operation Status CS141 LED Notification
(red / green) red
Unpacking the operating system
(update procedure) blinking
Error while unpacking the operating red fast
system blinking
Boot process of the operating red lang
system on
Communication to external device red and
lost (e. g. UPS) green
Normal operation - connection to green
external device established blinking
7 Slide Switch For switching between different
DIP Switch boot options
Slide Switch in the middle
position / 1 + 2 position OFF: To
set the CS141 in the configuration
mode and activated the default IP
address 10.10.10.10. after a cold
start.
Slide Switch in the right position
/ 1 position OFF+ 2 position ON:
DHCP Mode, the IP is set by the
DHCP Server. Check the MAC
address of your device to identify
your device in the network.
Slide Switch in the left position /

1 position ON + 2
The network settings of the HTTP
interface are used it is also possible
to configure DHCP Mode.
8 USB
V 1.23 290 4999 en

15.3.1 Shutdown software (optional)
The UPS-Management Software is a client/server application for networks and local
workstations. The server module of the UPS-Management Software is UPSMAN, which
communicates via RS-232/USB or network cable with the UPS. When UPSMAN starts, it
collects the protocol messages from the UPS as a background program (service).
UPSMAN interprets received messages and makes them available to the client module, a
webserver interface UPS View, the WINDOWS UPSMON, JAVAMON or to any other
SNMP application. The data communication to the client modules is achieved via TCP/IP
or SNMP.
The SNMP protocol of UPSMAN with UPSMAN.MIB is a special private MIB type 1, the
UNIX UPSMAN and CS121 web adapters use the newer MIB 2 standard RFC 1213 &
1628.
If UPSMAN detects voltage variations or a power loss it can execute different system
event routines (EVENTS), which, for example, may shutdown the server or send
warnings to connected users. These system event routines, which are part of the UPS-
Management Software, are fully customisable.
The client modules are used for operating and monitoring the active UPSMAN software
connected to an UPS. You can program UPS-Routines (e.g. define dates for automatic
UPS-tests, shutdown the system at defined dates, etc.), check the status of the UPS,
execute different UPS-tests or create power quality statistics. With the client modules you
can also constantly monitor and evaluate the event protocol (log file) that is permanently
updated by UPSMAN.
RCCMD ("Remote Console Command") is an additional module which executes a
command on a remote system, similar to the Remote Shell-Program (RSH) known in the
UNIX world. RCCMD is used to provide a simultaneous shutdown of several servers that
are all supported by the same UPS.
The following listed features depend on the UPS model. Please ask your UPS dealer
which of these functions are available with your UPS model. The following list shows you
the maximum variety of features of the current UPS-Management Software.
Figure 15-6: UPSMAN and RCCMD in a network environment
V 1.23 291 4999 en

15.4 MODBUS protocol
For remote control and monitoring of BENNING ENERTRONIC units there is a MODBUS
interface where you can read out measurement values and events.
Implemented MODBUS functions in the ENERTRONIC units:
Code Original Modbus function
03H Read n output words (read- and writeable words)
04H Read n input words (only readable words)
ENERTRONIC make no difference between output- and input-bits or words, that means
there is no difference between function 03H and 04H. Baudrate is adjustable up to 38400
Baud.
V 1.23 292 4999 en

15.4.1 LED-Marker (Mimic diagram)
9
5
6 10
1
4
Figure 15-7: Alphanumerical display and operating panel
MODBUS
Pos Signification LED status Marker
address
red 253 455.12
red flashing 254 455.13
green 258 456.1
green flashing 285 457.12
1 Rectifier yellow 257 456.0
yellow flashing 255 455.14
yellow green
flashing 256 455.15
yellow red
flashing 253 455.12
MODBUS
address
red 276 457.3
green 262 456.5
4 Battery yellow 261 456.4
yellow green
flashing 286 457.13
yellow red
flashing 287 457.14
V 1.23 293 4999 en

MODBUS
address
red 269 456.12
green 272 456.15
5 Static bypass yellow 273 457.0
yellow green
flashing 259 456.2
yellow red
flashing 278 457.5
MODBUS
address
red 284 457.11
green 268 456.11
6 Inverter yellow 281 457.8
yellow green
flashing 266 456.9
yellow red
flashing 265 456.8
MODBUS
address
9 Manual bypass green 274 457.1
MODBUS
address
green 252 455.11
10 Output
MODBUS
address
on 280 457.7
Signal
interval 279 457.6
V 1.23 294 4999 en

15.4.2 Measurement Pages
Legend
Data: (data size)
U unsigned integer
S signed integer
C character
BW bit-word
DW double word
Dig (Digits) indications of the measurement 'DP' are placed behind the decimal point
15.4.2.1 Rectifier
Addr. Data Signification Dig DP
099 U Rec apparent power 4 0
100 U Rec frequency 3 1
101 U Rec voltage L1 - N 4 0
104 U Rec voltage L1 - L2 4 0
107 U Rec Current L1 4 0
15.4.2.2 Bypass
115 U Byp apparent power 4 0
111 U Byp frequency * 3 1
125 U Byp voltage L1 - N 4 0
128 U Byp voltage L1 - L1 4 0
112 U Byp Current L1 4 0
* Note ! If the frequency can not be measured the value is set to 7FFFh
V 1.23 295 4999 en

15.4.2.3 DC-link
150 U Battery voltage 3 0
149 S battery current 4 0
151 U Battery switch off voltage 3 1
15.4.2.4 Battery
149 S battery current 4 0
177 U battery temperature [°C] 4 1
178 U Battery remaining time 2 0
153 U Drawn battery capacity [Ah] 4 0
15.4.2.5 Default
155 U Operation hours DIV 10000 4 0
156 U Operation hours MOD 10000 4 0
Low word of double word
157 DW 8 0
Operation hours
High word of double word
158 DW
Operation hours
154 U Mains fail counter 5
124 S Output real power 4 0
385 U second 2 0
386 U minute 2 0
387 U hour 2 0
388 U day 2 0
389 U month 2 0
390 U year 2 0
V 1.23 296 4999 en

15.4.2.6 Inverter
135 U Inverter apparent power 4 0
134 U Inverter frequency 3 1
116 U Inverter voltage L1 - N 4 0
119 U Inverter voltage L1 - L2 4 0
131 U Current Ll 4 0
132 U Current L2 4 0
133 U Current L3 4 0
15.4.2.7 Phase
159 S* Phase mains-inverter 3 0
160 S* Phase inverter-bus 3 0
181 S* Phase inverter-bus 3 0
*= if the phase cannot be measured the values is set to 7FFFh
15.4.2.8 Additional Information
There are some more Information available.
Addr. Signification
371 nominal Output power [kVA] 3
373 nominal input frequency [Hz] 3
374 nominal Output frequency [Hz] 3
375 nominal Output voltage [V] 3
376 serial number 1 character [ASCII format]
1
1
V 1.23 297 4999 en

15.4.2.9 Events (numerically)
399.11 H Switch Q51 closed
399.11 L Switch Q51 opened
399.14 H LEM interface at X20 connected
399.14 L LEM interface at X20 disconnected
400.5 L IGBT driver board failure
402.10 H External output breaker opened
402.11 H EXTI 12 is set to high
402.11 L EXTI 12 is set to low
402.2 H Diesel operation
402.5 H Bypass disabled
403.0 H Force central battery mode
403.0 L Force single battery mode
410.2 H Backfeed predection triggered on parall. unit
419.2 H Inverter overcurrent >100%
V 1.23 298 4999 en

419.7 H DC -link voltage too high
423.4 H Battery remaining time 1st warning
423.5 H Battery remaining time 2nd warning
424.11 L Battery temperature <50°C
424.11 H Battery temperature >50°C
424.6 H Output current >100%
425.0 H Bypass overtemperature
425.1 H Overtemperature of inlet air
440.13 H State 'Inv. not available'
440.14 H State 'Inv. ready'
440.7 H Failure precharger
440.7 L Failure precharger nullified
440.8 H Battery breaker closed
440.8 L Battery breaker opened
441.1 H Electric output switch is closed
441.1 L Electric output switch is opened
441.10 H State 'Inv. run up'
441.12 H State 'Device allone in par. oper.'
441.13 H State 'Parallel operation'
441.15 H Bypass ready
441.2 H Close the electric output switch
441.2 L Open the electric output switch
441.3 H Inverter failure reversible
442.13 L Boost charging off
442.13 H Boost charging on
442.14 H Capacity test positive
442.15 H Capacity test current deviation too large
442.4 H Bypass fault
442.8 H Manual bypass closed
442.8 L Manual bypass opened
443.0 H Capacity test started
443.10 H State Rect. contactor on
443.3 H State 'Rec. not available'
443.4 H State 'Rec. available'
443.5 H State 'Rec. startup'
443.6 H State 'Rectifier operation'
443.7 H Rectifier failure reversible
443.8 H Rectifier failure
443.9 H Rectifier failure during startup
444.11 H State 'Inverter running'
444.11 L State 'Inverter running' left
444.12 H Inverter failure
444.13 H State 'Inv. capable to supply the load'
444.14 H State 'Inverter operation'
444.6 H Inverter overload operation
V 1.23 299 4999 en

445.0 H State 'Bypass not available'
446.0 H Rectifier mains out of tolerance
447.0 H Output overvoltage
447.1 H Undervoltage at inverter startup
447.10 H Warning! Rectifier overtemperature
447.11 H A temperature sensor shortcircuited
447.12 H A temperature sensor not connected
447.2 H Warning battery circuit test not possible!
447.8 H Warning! Inverter overtemperature
449.1 L Inverter overload operation enabled
449.1 H Inverter overload predection active
449.15 H Button 'BYPASS' pressed
449.2 H Overload switching off
449.4 H Capacity test switched off
450.0 H Button 'I' pressed
450.15 H Battery operation
450.3 H Button '0' pressed
451.1 H UPS normal operation
451.10 H CPU failure 2! Please call service.
451.11 H Failure measurement 'Output voltage'
451.14 H Failure rectifier fuses
451.2 H Bypass operation
451.8 H Fan is defective
452.15 H Backfeed predection measurement failure
453.0 H Inverter output frequency at limitation
453.10 H Boost charging activated
453.10 L Boost charging deactivated
453.14 H Charger off
453.14 L Charger on
453.15 L Blocking of high charge off
453.15 H Blocking of high charge on
453.6 H 'REMOTE OFF' set
453.8 H 'REMOTE ON' set
453.9 H 'REMOTE BYPASS ON' set
454.11 H Control voltage OK
465.11 H Overtemperature inverter
465.12 H Overtemperature rectifier
465.14 H No CAN ID for parallel mode adjusted
465.15 H Redation failure bypass mains
465.7 H Battery voltage is low
465.8 H Battery is completely discharged
V 1.23 300 4999 en

466.12 H Overvoltage DC - link
466.14 H Overtemperature input transformer
466.2 H Failure battery circuit
466.5 H Failure K1
466.6 H Failure electric output switch
466.7 H Overtemperature output transformer
466.8 H Overvoltage output
466.9 H Undervoltage output
467.0 H Deviation output frequency
467.1 H Firing failure bypass thyristor
467.10 H Failure internal power supply
467.11 H Failure backfeed predection contactor K5
467.12 H Backfeed predection triggered
467.13 H Capacity test negative
467.14 H Capacity test aborted
467.4 H Failure inverter irreversible
467.6 H Failure rectifier irreversible
467.7 H Power block fuse tripped
479.2 L 'Bypass off' command
479.2 H 'Bypass on' command
479.3 L Precharger off
479.3 H Precharger on
480.0 L Inverter off
480.0 H Inverter on
482.0 L Customer relay 7 off
482.0 H Customer relay 7 on
482.12 H EXTO 13 is set to high
482.12 L EXTO 13 is set to low
V 1.23 301 4999 en

V 1.23 302 4999 en

489.1 L High current charging off
489.1 H High current charging on
489.15 L Rectifier off
489.15 H Rectifier on
V 1.23 303 4999 en

15.5.2.10 Events (alphabetically)
447.12 H A temperature sensor not connected
447.11 H A temperature sensor shortcircuited
452.15 H Backfeed predection measurement failure
467.12 H Backfeed predection triggered
410.2 H Backfeed predection triggered on parall. unit
440.8 H Battery breaker closed
440.8 L Battery breaker opened
465.8 H Battery is completely discharged
450.15 H Battery operation
423.4 H Battery remaining time 1st warning
423.5 H Battery remaining time 2nd warning
424.11 L Battery temperature <50°C
424.11 H Battery temperature >50°C
465.7 H Battery voltage is low
453.15 L Blocking of high charge off
453.15 H Blocking of high charge on
453.10 H Boost charging activated
453.10 L Boost charging deactivated
442.13 L Boost charging off
442.13 H Boost charging on
450.3 H Button '0' pressed
449.15 H Button 'BYPASS' pressed
450.0 H Button 'I' pressed
402.5 H Bypass disabled
442.4 H Bypass fault
479.2 L 'Bypass off' command
479.2 H 'Bypass on' command
451.2 H Bypass operation
425.0 H Bypass overtemperature
441.15 H Bypass ready
467.14 H Capacity test aborted
442.15 H Capacity test current deviation too large
467.13 H Capacity test negative
442.14 H Capacity test positive
443.0 H Capacity test started
449.4 H Capacity test switched off
453.14 H Charger off
453.14 L Charger on
441.2 H Close the electric output switch
454.11 H Control voltage OK
V 1.23 304 4999 en

419.7 H DC -link voltage too high
467.0 H Deviation output frequency
402.2 H Diesel operation
441.1 H Electric output switch is closed
441.1 L Electric output switch is opened
402.10 H External output breaker opened
V 1.23 305 4999 en

V 1.23 306 4999 en

467.11 H Failure backfeed predection contactor K5
466.2 H Failure battery circuit
466.6 H Failure electric output switch
467.10 H Failure internal power supply
467.4 H Failure inverter irreversible
466.5 H Failure K1
451.11 H Failure measurement 'Output voltage'
440.7 H Failure precharger
440.7 L Failure precharger nullified
451.14 H Failure rectifier fuses
467.6 H Failure rectifier irreversible
451.8 H Fan is defective
467.1 H Firing failure bypass thyristor
403.0 H Force central battery mode
403.0 L Force single battery mode
489.1 L High current charging off
489.1 H High current charging on
400.5 L IGBT driver board failure
444.12 H Inverter failure
441.3 H Inverter failure reversible
480.0 L Inverter off
480.0 H Inverter on
453.0 H Inverter output frequency at limitation
444.6 H Inverter overload operation
449.1 L Inverter overload operation enabled
449.1 H Inverter overload predection active
442.8 H Manual bypass closed
442.8 L Manual bypass opened
465.14 H No CAN ID for parallel mode adjusted
441.2 L Open the electric output switch
424.6 H Output current >100%
447.0 H Output overvoltage
449.2 H Overload switching off
V 1.23 307 4999 en

466.14 H Overtemperature input transformer
465.11 H Overtemperature inverter
425.1 H Overtemperature of inlet air
466.7 H Overtemperature output transformer
465.12 H Overtemperature rectifier
466.12 H Overvoltage DC - link
466.8 H Overvoltage output
467.7 H Power block fuse tripped
479.3 L Precharger off
479.3 H Precharger on
443.8 H Rectifier failure
443.9 H Rectifier failure during startup
443.7 H Rectifier failure reversible
446.0 H Rectifier mains out of tolerance
489.15 L Rectifier off
489.15 H Rectifier on
465.15 H Redation failure bypass mains
453.9 H 'REMOTE BYPASS ON' set
453.6 H 'REMOTE OFF' set
453.8 H 'REMOTE ON' set
445.0 H State 'Bypass not available'
441.12 H State 'Device allone in par. oper.'
444.13 H State 'Inv. capable to supply the load'
440.13 H State 'Inv. not available'
440.14 H State 'Inv. ready'
441.10 H State 'Inv. run up'
444.14 H State 'Inverter operation'
444.11 H State 'Inverter running'
444.11 L State 'Inverter running' left
441.13 H State 'Parallel operation'
443.4 H State 'Rec. available'
443.3 H State 'Rec. not available'
443.5 H State 'Rec. startup'
443.10 H State Rect. contactor on
443.6 H State 'Rectifier operation'
447.1 H Undervoltage at inverter startup
466.9 H Undervoltage output
451.1 H UPS normal operation
447.2 H Warning battery circuit test not possible!
447.8 H Warning! Inverter overtemperature
447.10 H Warning! Rectifier overtemperature
V 1.23 308 4999 en

15.5 MODBUS protocol structure
The MODBUS protocol recognises 2 transmission modes:
Transmission mode in ASCII
Transmission mode in RTU
15.5.1 Data telegram structure

The basic structure of a MODBUS telegram is formed from 4 types of information:
SLAVE FUNCTION DATA CHECK SUM
Here, the slave number represents the recipient of the message. It is coded in one byte
and has a value from 1 to 255. A telegram with slave number 0 is read and processed
internally by all slaves, but no response telegram is sent.
When the slave number of a telegram is the same as its own number, and the
appropriate slave generates a response, then it places this device number at the
beginning of the answering frame.
The function is coded in one byte. It is a request from the master (read, write, bit, word,
… ). The same function code is placed in the next position in the answering frame if the
slave carries out the master's request. If an error is detected in the request message from
the master, the slave adds the value 128 to this error code and in this way signals to the
master that an error has occurred.
The data field is made up of several fields, wherein certain fields may be included or not
included in the message.
Address: Read or write.
Number of data: Number of bits or words.
Data: Bits or words to be written.
The check sum consists of 2 bytes. It is used to detect transmission errors.
When a master request has been fully transmitted, the slave calculates the check sum
and compares it with the check sum from the master.
If the telegram is not fault-free, no answer is transmitted.
15.5.2 Data telegram structure

The interface unit detects the possible errors in the messages that it receives from the
master. There are three special types of error:
Inadmissible function (error code 1)
Inadmissible address (error code 2)
Inadmissible data (error code 3)
A telegram with an error message has the following format:
SLAVE FUNCTION CODE . . . + 128 ERROR CODE CHECK SUM
V 1.23 309 4999 en

15.5.3 Calculating the check sum
The check sum is 16 bits long and is determined using the CRC method (Cyclic
Redundancy Check).
The calculation starts by loading a 16-bit register with FFFF hexadecimal so that all bits
are set to 1. All incoming bytes of the telegram are then gated with the contents of the
register.
In generating the CRC, each byte is gated with the CRC register using an XOR function.
The CRC register is then shifted to the right by one bit and the most significant bit set to
0. The extracted bit is examined. If its value is 1, the contents of the register are gated
with a fixed check number via the XOR function. If the value is 0, no operation is carried
out.
This process is repeated until 8 shifts have been executed. After the eighth shift, the next
byte of the telegram is read, this byte is gated with the contents of the register using the
Exclusive OR function, and the shifting process described above is subsequently
restarted until the end of the telegram has been reached. The contents of the register
after processing is the CRC16.
The check number vector is a constant with the value A001 hex.
Generating the CRC:
The value FFFF hexadecimal is loaded into a 16-bit register. This is the
CRC register.
Gate the first byte of the telegram with the least significant byte of the
register using the XOR function. Save the result in the CRC register.
Shift the CRC register 1 bit to right and set the most significant bit to 0.
Extract the least significant bit and examine.
If the extracted bit is 0, repeat Step 3. If the bit is 1, gate the CRC register
and the polynomial A001 hexadecimal (1010 0000 0000 0001 binary) using the XOR
function.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until 8 shifts has been executed. When this is
finished, the whole byte operation is complete.
Repeat steps 2 to 5 with the next byte of the telegram. Continue until the
end of the telegram is reached.
Result: When this process is complete, the contents of the CRC register will be the
CRC16.
When the CRC16 is placed in the telegram, the most significant byte and
the least significant byte are swapped as shown below.
CRC16 (CHECK SUM)
Least significant CRC byte Most significant CRC byte
V 1.23 310 4999 en

15.5.4 Processing functions
The following program functions have been implemented and are recognised by the
interface unit:
Function 3 or 4: Read words
Function 7: Rapid read of 8 bits (one byte)
Function 8: Diagnosis of the data exchange between master and slave
Function 11: Function 11 - Read the event counter
Function 3 or 4 - Read words
Request telegram from master:
Number of
SLAVE 3 or 4 Address 1st word CHECK SUM
words
1 byte 1 byte MSB LSB MSB LSB
CRC16 (2 bytes)
MSB: Most significant bit LSB: Least significant bit
The number of words can be between 1 and 125.
Slave response telegram:
Last
SLAVE 3 or 4 Byte count 1st word read CHECK SUM
word
2 Bytes (MSB
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte n bytes CRC16 (2 bytes)
LSB)
Function 7 – Reading the error code (exception code)
SLAVE 7 CHECK SUM
1 byte 1 byte CRC16 (2 bytes)

SLAVE 7 Value of the 8 bits CHECK SUM
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte CRC16 (2 bytes)
Byte read:
27 20
0 0 0 0 0 B A C
This byte reflects the "alarm status" of the UPS MCU.
A = Urgent alarm. B = Non-urgent alarm. C = Informative alarm.
V 1.23 311 4999 en

Function 8 – Transmission system diagnosis
The MODBUS / MCU interface unit has various diagnostic registers. These have a 16-bit
format.
 Counter 1: Contains the number of telegrams correctly received by the slave
(without CRC errors), whether these concerned the slave or not.
 Counter 2: Contains the number of telegrams received with CRC errors.
 Counter 3: Contains the number of telegrams sent back with an error message.
 Counter 4: Contains the number of telegrams addressed to the slave.
 Counter 5: Contains the number of telegrams received but not addressed directly
to the slave (target address = 0).
 Counter 9: Contains the number of telegrams received and correctly executed by
the slave: Read out read, broadcast and diagnostic counters except counter 9.
SLAVE 8 Sub-function Data CHECK SUM
1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes CRC16 (2 bytes)
Data
Sub-function Description
MSB LSB
The slave sends back the request The 2 bytes are defined by the
0
unchanged user
10 Reset all counters 0 0
11 Read counter 1 0 0
SLAVE 8 Sub-function Data CHECK SUM
Function 11 - Read the event counter

The event counter is the counter 9.
SLAVE 11 CHECK SUM
1 byte 1 byte CRC16 (2 bytes)

SLAVE 11 0 Value CHECK SUM
V 1.23 312 4999 en

15.6 RS-232/422/485 to fiber converters (optional)
Connection Power Supply
Before using the TCF-142, first connect the DC power supply to the power
supply terminal block located on the TCF-142’s bottom panel.
15.6.1 Introduction
The TCF-142 media converters are equipped with a multiple interface circuit that can
handle RS-232 or RS-422/485 serial interfaces and multi-mode or single-mode fiber.
TCF-142 converters are used to extend serial transmission up to 5 km (TCF-142-M with
multi-mode fiber) or up to 40 km (TCF-142-S with single-mode fiber).
The TCF-142 converters can be configured to convert either RS-232 signals, or RS-
422/485 signals, but not both at the same time.
Figure 15-8: RS-232/422/485 to fiber converter
V 1.23 313 4999 en

15.6.2 Specifications
Optical-Fiber Side
Fiber Connector: SC or ST
Fiber Cable Requirements:
Low-Speed Fiber Module Multi-Mode Single-Mode
50/125 μm, 800 MHz
Fiber Cable Requirements G.652
62.5/125 μm, 500 MHz
Typical Distance 5 km 40 km
Typical (nm) 850 1310
Wave
TX Range (nm) 840 to 860 1290 to 1330
length
RX Range (nm) 800 to 900 1100 to 1650
TX Range (dBm) 0 to -5 0 to -5
Optical RX Range (dBm) 0 to -20 0 to -25

Power Link Budget (dB) 15 20
Dispersion Penalty (dB) 1 1
RS-232/422/485 Side
Connector: Terminal Block
RS-232 Signals: Tx, Rx, GND
RS-422 Signals: TxD+, TxD-, RxD+, RxD-, GND
RS-485-4w Signals: TxD+, TxD-, RxD+, RxD-, GND
RS-485-2w Signals: Data+, Data-, GND
Baudrate: 50 bps to 921.6 kbps
Physical Characteristics
Housing: Metal
Dimensions:
Without ears: 67 x 100 x 22 mm (2.64 x 3.94 x 0.87 in)
With ears: 90 x 100 x 22 mm (3.54 x 3.94 x 0.87 in)
Weight: 320 g (0.71 lb)
Environmental Limits
Operating Temperature:
Standard Models: 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
Wide Temp. Models: -40 to 75°C (-40 to 167°F)
Storage Temperature: -40 to 75°C (-40 to 167°F)
Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Power Requirements
Input Voltage: 12 to 48 VDC
Input Current: 140 mA @ 12 VDC
Power Line Protection:
1 kV Burst (EFT), EN61000-4-4
1 kV Surge, EN61000-4-5
Voltage Reversal Protection: Protects against V+/V- reversal Overcurrent Protection: 1.1
A (protects against two signals shorted together)
V 1.23 314 4999 en

15.6.3 Dimensions
15.6.3.1 TCF-142-M/S-ST
15.6.3.2 TCF-142-M/S-SC
V 1.23 315 4999 en

15.6.4 Switch Setting
Serial Connection SW1 SW2

RS-232 ON OFF
RS-422 ON ON
RS-485 4-wire OFF OFF
RS-485 2-wire OFF ON
Built-in 120 Ω Terminator SW3 SW4

Enable ON --
RS-422Disable OFF --
Ring mode -- ON
Point to Point mode -- OFF
The S1 DIP Switch is located inside the TCF-142. When the TCF-142 is in
RS-485 mode, use this DIP switch to configure RS-485 data direction
control, data format, and baudrate. When the TCF-142 is in RS-232/422
mode, the S1 DIP switch cannot affect RS-232/422 communication.
RS-485 Data Direction Control Settings

RS-485 Data Direction Control S1 Pin 1
Auto Baudrate OFF
Fixed Baudrate ON
Data Format Settings

Data Format S1 Pin 2 S1 Pin 3 S1 Pin 4
7 Bits OFF ON ON
8 Bits ON OFF ON
9 Bits OFF OFF ON
10 Bits ON ON OFF
11 Bits OFF ON OFF
12 Bits ON OFF OFF
V 1.23 316 4999 en

Baudrate Settings
Baudrate S1 Pin 5 S1 Pin 6 S1 Pin 7 S1 Pin 8 S1 Pin 9
50 OFF ON ON ON ON
75 ON OFF ON ON ON
110 OFF OFF ON ON ON
134,5 ON ON OFF ON ON
150 OFF ON OFF ON ON
300 ON OFF OFF ON ON
600 OFF OFF OFF ON ON
1200 ON ON ON OFF ON
1800 OFF ON ON OFF ON
2400 ON OFF ON OFF ON
4800 OFF OFF ON OFF ON
7200 ON ON OFF OFF ON
9600 OFF ON OFF OFF ON
19200 ON OFF OFF OFF ON
38400 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
57600 ON ON ON ON OFF
115200 OFF ON ON ON OFF
230400 ON OFF ON ON OFF
460800 OFF OFF ON ON OFF
921600 ON ON OFF ON OFF
The S2 DIP switch is located inside the TCF-142. This switch is used to
configure the pull high/low resistors. Note that S2 Pin 1 and Pin 2 must
both be configured to ON or both must be configured to OFF.
Pull High/Low Resistor S2 Pin 1 S2 Pin 2

150 K OFF OFF
1 K (default) ON ON
We recommend setting S2 Pin 1 and Pin 2 to the 1K option (ON/ON) when

termination is enabled.
V 1.23 317 4999 en

15.6.5 LED Description
There are 3 LEDs on the front panel of the TCF-142
LED Color Function

PWR Red Steady ON: Power is ON
Fiber Tx Green Blinking when fiber is transmitting data
Fiber Rx Orange Blinking when fiber is receiving data
V 1.23 318 4999 en

15.7 Protocol converter IEC-61850
The IEC-61850 standard of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an
internationally recognized standard for communication in energy networks. Originally
developed for the continuous communication in electrical switchgear of the high and
medium voltage level, it is increasingly used also for the communication of the devices on
lower voltage levels as well as for the information exchange with decentralized
generators.
15.7.1 Views
15.7.1.1 Front view
Figure 15-9: Protocol converter IEC-61850front view
15.7.1.2 Rear view
Figure 15-10: Protocol converter rear view
V 1.23 319 4999 en

15.7.2 Hardware Installation
15.7.2.1 Network
The network connector is a standard RJ45 socket.
15.7.2.2 Power
The power socket is a two pin AMP 6.3mm UMNL connector with female contacts.
+24V
GND
15.7.2.3 RS485
The socket is a three pin AMP 6.3mm UMNL connector with female contacts.
GND
15.7.2.4 RS232
The socket is a three pin AMP 6.3mm UMNL connector with male contacts.
TX
GND
RX
V 1.23 320 4999 en

15.7.3 Configuration
15.7.2.1 Initial Settings and Config Mode
Initially the device will have the following settings:
IP Address 10.10.10.10
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 10.10.10.1
Username admin
Password 123
If a device has been configured, but the network settings are unknown, it can be switched
to the config mode by pressing the config mode button for at least 5 seconds. When it
enters config mode the LED starts blinking differently, it will be on for 0.5 seconds and off
for 0.5 seconds, and the IP address and netmask will be set to:
IP address: 10.10.10.10
Netmask: 255.255.255.0.
Pressing the config mode button again for 5 seconds switches it back to normal mode.
The LED is then on for about 1 second and off for about 0.2 seconds.
15.7.2.2 Web interface
V 1.23 321 4999 en

15.7.2.3 Network
IP address, netmask and gateway have to always be set. The name servers are optional
and only used for the time servers if they are given by name instead of IP address. 5
seconds after pressing the save button the the device is reachable under the new IP
address. If the device was in recovery mode it switches back to normal mode.
15.7.2.4 Timeserver
To get reliable timestamps in the IEC‐61850 data a timeserver should be configured. It
can be chosen between None, NTP (port 123), Timed UDP (port 37) and Timed TCP
(port 37). It is recommended to use NTP to synchronize the clock. If a hostname is
specified for the timeserver at least one name server must be configured.
15.7.2.5 UPS
Choose the UPS type connected to the device. After saving the device immediately starts
communication with the UPS. BDT and IDT/IDS use serial configuration, all other
systems use the Modbus configuration.
V 1.23 322 4999 en

15.7.2.6 Modbus
The following shows the default Modbus configuration. Most systems use the following
parameters. The IP address and TCP port are only used if the mode is set to “tcp”. When
the UPS system is neither BDT nor IDT/IDS the Modbus configuration is ignored.
15.7.2.7 Serial
These are the standard parameters for BDT and IDT/IDS. For all other systems the serial
configuration is ignored.
15.7.2.8 IEC‐61850
Only the name of the IED can be changed. All other communication parameters are fixed.
V 1.23 323 4999 en

15.7.4 Admin Password
The password of the admin user can be changed. It has to be entered twice to prevent
typos.
Username admin
Password 123
15.7.5 Firmware Upgrade

Choose the firmware file and press the upgrade button. After a few seconds the new
firmware will be running.
V 1.23 324 4999 en

15.7.6 Diagnostics
15.7.6.1 Raw Serial Data
This shows the raw data received from BDT or IDT/IDS over the RS232 serial port.
Systems using Modbus (RS485) do not show any data here. If no data is displayed there
is a communication problem, check the hardware connection and the serial configuration.
V 1.23 325 4999 en

15.7.6.2 Raw Modbus Data
This page shows the raw modbus data received from the UPS. The data depends on the
UPS which is configured. When an update is in progress a shorter list of values can be
showed, just press reload and it will show more data. If no data is shown there is a
communication problem, check the hardware connection and the modbus configuration.
V 1.23 326 4999 en

15.7.6.3 Raw Register Data
This page shows the raw IEC‐61850 register data after conversion from the Modbus data.
The “State” column should always show “OK” for all values. If retrieving a value from the
UPS failed it will show the previous value and the state will be set to “OLD”. When no
valid value could be retrieved for a few seconds the state will be set to “NA” (not
available), this is a sign for a communication problem.
V 1.23 327 4999 en

V 1.23 328 4999 en
V 1.23 329 4999 en
V 1.23 330 4999 en
15.7.7 Restart
The restart page allows to restart, reboot or shutdown the system. “Restart” just restarts
the services, a few seconds after pressing the “execute” but on the services are running
again. “Reboot” does a cold restart, this takes at least 30 seconds. “Shutdown” shuts
down the system, after that a power cycle is needed to start it again.
V 1.23 331 4999 en

16 Hardware options
16.1 Battery symmetry monitoring (optional)
Figure 16-1: Battery symmetry monitor unit Figure 16-2: Example installation battery monitor
Applications
Monitoring of battery systems to find voltage inversions of single cells, internal short
circuits and sulphating.
Function
A middle connection of a battery system is connected to the symmetry monitor unit.
If the two parts of the voltage differ more then the adjusted value for 10 sec, a signal trips.
Also a broken wire of the measuring line trips the signal.
The test button allows a test of the unit. It has to be pressed for at least 10 sec.
New batteries are not symmetric in the beginning. The battery monitor has
to be readjusted after some time of operation. The adjustment has to be
verified.
V 1.23 332 4999 en

16.2 AC earth-fault monitoring (optional)
Figure 16-3: AC Mains insulation Monitor unit
Terminal L is connected to the monitored voltage and PE to earth. If the insulation

resistance RE drops below the adjusted alarm value RAL the red LED goes on and the
output relay switches off (de-energized on trip).
By activating the "Test" button an insulation failure can be simulated to test the function of
the unit.
Indicators
Green LED "ON" On, when supply voltage connected
Red LED "AL" On, when insulation fault detected (RE+ <RAL) on L+
Yellow LED "VW" On, when insulation resistance is under prewarning value, (RE-
<RVW)
An input of an additional relay card is required.
16.3 DC earth-fault monitoring (optional)
Figure 16-4: DC Insulation Monitor unit
If the insulation resistance RE between L+ or L- to ground drops below the adjusted alarm
value RAL (insulation failure) the corresponding red LED goes on and the output relay
switches off (de-energized on trip).
By activating the "Test" button an insulation failure can be simulated to test the function of
the unit.
This option requires the installation of an mains isolating
transformer.
An input of an additional relay card is required.
Indicators
Green LED "ON" On, when supply voltage connected
Red LED "RE+" when insulation fault detected (RE+ <RAL) on L+
Red LED "RE-" when insulation fault detected (RE- <RAL) on L-
V 1.23 333 4999 en

16.4 Cabinet lighting (optional)
1 2 3
Figure 16-5: Cabinet lightning with switch and power connector
Pos Description
1 Power connector
2 Cabinet lightning
3 Switch
16.5 Cabinet heaters (optional)

Cabinets with electrical, electronic or mechanical
installations are often subject to temperature
fluctuations, which lead to condensation, corrosion
and leakage currents. In order to guarantee the
functional safety of these installation elements, it
makes sense and is cost-efficient to create a balanced
inside temperature. A small amount of space is
required thanks to this flat construction and extensive
heat radiation is still provided.
Figure 16-6: Cabinet heaters optional
16.6 Extra signaling terminals (optional)
Figure 16-7: Extra signaling terminals

optional
V 1.23 334 4999 en

16.7 Current monitoring relay (optional)
Short description
Alternating current monitoring in 1-phase networks with adjustable threshold values,
hysteresis, response delay, and the following functions which can be set via the rotary
switch:
5 A AC/10 A AC measuring input
 OVER: overcurrent monitoring
 UNDER: undercurrent monitoring
 WIN: monitoring the range between the minimum and maximum thresholds
Figure 16-8: Current monitoring relay
Operating and indicating elements

Pos Description
1 LED: output relay R
2 LED: minimum threshold value (Min)
3 LED: maximum threshold value (Max)
4 LED: supply
5 "Delay" potentiometer: response delay
6 "Max" potentiometer: upper threshold value
7 "Min" potentiometer: lower threshold value
8 Rotary switch for function selection
9 Snap-on foot for DIN rail mounting
V 1.23 335 4999 en

Status and diagnostics indicators
Color/
Name Description
status
Green ON Supply voltage is available
U
OFF No supply voltage
Red ON Error indicator for the corresponding threshold
Min /
Red flashing Response delay indicator for the corresponding threshold
Max
OFF No error
Yellow ON Output relay picked up
R
OFF Output relay dropped out
Funktion
The lower rotary switch can be used to set the desired function.
Description
O OVER Overcurrent monitoring
U UNDER Undercurrent monitoring
Window function / monitoring the range between minimum and maximum
W WIN thresholds
Overcurrent monitoring - OVER ()

When the supply voltage is applied, output relay "R" picks up, provided that the measured
value is below the maximum value. If the measured current exceeds the maximum value,
output relay "R" drops out after the response delay has elapsed. Output relay "R" picks
up again as soon as the current falls below the minimum value.
Window function - WIN ()

When the supply voltage is applied, output relay "R" picks up, provided that the measured
current is within the range (window) set. If the measured current is not within the range
specified by the Min and Max controller, output relay "R" drops out after the response
delay has elapsed. Output relay "R" picks up again as soon as the current is within the
set range again.
V 1.23 336 4999 en

16.8 Fan and filter units (optional)
Figure 16-9: Filter unit
Maintenance with no need for tools of any kind

Latch on louvred grille for fast filter mat replacement without tools
New diagonal fan technology for greater pressure stability and constant air flows
in use, even with a contaminated filter mat
Extended service life of filter mats and thus longer maintenance intervals
16.9 Harmonic filter for systems with thyristor rectifier (option)

The harmonic filter reduces the harmonic content of the thyristor rectifier input current. It
thus contributes to improving the mains (voltage) quality.
Note on the display in the display and control panel:
When displaying the rectifier AC current, the current of the option
,harmonic filter, is not taken into account!
The display therefore deviates from the actual input current of the thy-ristor
rectifier with harmonic filter. It corresponds to the output current of the
harmonic filter.
V 1.23 337 4999 en

17 Isolating the system complete
DANGER
The system is powered by several voltage sources: AC mains and
batteries.
The unilateral disconnection may not result in the voltage free of the entire
system!
DANGER
Before any work can performed, the system must completely disconnected
from the supply voltages!
All feed-ins must switched off!
All feed-ins must protected against reactivation!
It must checked that no voltage is present before starting installation!
See chapter 2.17, Safety rules according to EN 50110 / NFPA 70E /
VDE 0105, page 14
DANGER
If the system consists of several system cabinets, the output (OUT) of the
affected system must separated from the entire system.
DANGER
Systems with integrated batteries can not be separated from all supply
voltages.
Contact the manufacturer's helpdesk!
DANGER
The supply of the control lines must switched off.
See chapter 2.17, Safety rules according to EN 50110 / NFPA 70E /
VDE 0105, page 14
WARNING
WARNING
Severe injuries caused by touching live components.
Use an insulated tool.
V 1.23 338 4999 en

be free from voltage.
See chapter 2.17, Safety rules according to EN 50110 / NFPA 70E / VDE 0105, page 14
All supplies
 X001 (main power rectifier)
 X005 (main power bypass)
 X004 (external battery)
If the system consists of several system cabinets,
 X006 (output UPS)
the upstream separators must be open!
Before switching to an external bypass!

The internal manual bypass must switched. Proceed as described in
chapter 13.2.5, Switching on manual bypass – maintenance, page 216.
Procedure
 Switch to internal manual bypass. See chapter 13.2.5, Switching on manual
bypass – maintenance, page 216.
 Open the external separator for main power rectifier X001. See Figure 17-1:
Schematic diagram external separators (example), position 1.
 Close the external separator for main power bypass. See Figure 17-1: Schematic
diagram external separators (example), position 3.
 Open the external separator for main power output UPS. See Figure 17-1:
 Open the external separator for main power bypaxss X005. See Figure 17-1:
 Open the external separator for battery X004. See Figure 17-1: Schematic diagram
external separators (example), position 5.
V 1.23 339 4999 en

17.1 Schematic diagram external separators (example)
Figure 17-1: Schematic diagram external separators (example)
V 1.23 340 4999 en

17.2 Check isolation
For checking, use a voltage tester!
E.g. DUSPOL
 Check proper function of voltage tester before
No voltage must be present at any measuring point:

 X001 (main power rectifier)
 X005 (main power bypass)
 X004 (external battery)
 X006 (output UPS)
1. Check X004 (battery) free from voltage
measuring battery voltage
0 - <5 VDC
all poles against each other and
against earth
Figure 17-2: battery test free from voltage
2. Check X001 (main power rectifier) free from voltage
measuring voltage (AC)
0 - <5 VAC
against earth
Figure 17-3: main power input X001
3. Check X005 (main power bypass) free from voltage

Figure 17-4: Bypass input X005 three and single phase

0 - <5 VAC
against earth
4. Check X006 X006 (output UPS) free from voltage

Figure 17-5: Output X006 three and single phase 0 - <5 VAC
against earth
V 1.23 341 4999 en

 Check potential-free contacts of the A230 between N and PE
measuring voltage
all contacts between N and PE
0 - <5 VAC
 Check potential-free contacts of the A230 between N and PE

measuring voltage
all contacts between N and PE
0 - <5 VAC
V 1.23 342 4999 en

18 Maintenance management
DANGER
All work on the system must performed in compliance with the
DANGER
Even if the system is switched off, there can still be voltages present on the
terminals!
DANGER
Potentially fatal voltages are still present in the system even once it
has been isolated and switched off!
Touching the cables and terminals in the system can result in serious
injuries or death.
Even when disconnected from the mains supply, some system
components remain under voltage 10 mins.
The system must only be opened by an electrically skilled person.
All safety instructions and currently valid technical
connection requirements of the respective energy supply company as well
as the DGUV regulation 3 or national regulations must complied with.
DANGER
In addition, the system is operated with high energy battery voltage.
Before any work can performed, the system must completely disconnected
from the supply voltages!
DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due short circuit of battery
Short circuit of batteries risk of explosion!
V 1.23 343 4999 en

NOTICE
Damage caused by short circuit
Do not use compressed air under any circumstances, as dust particles
may get into the inside of the UPS system and cause faults.
NOTICE
Damage caused by incorrect spare parts
Only spare parts approved by the manufacturer must used.

system:
Wristwatches, rings and other metal objects must
removed.
Use only insulated tools.
The system must not dismantled.
V 1.23 344 4999 en

18.1 General information for maintenance
For maintenance of the batteries, the documentation of the battery
manufacturer must consulted!
Maintenance work may only carried out by the manufacturer's

customer service.
As every other electrical device, this system requires preventive maintenance.

Regular maintenance and tests of your installation guarantee higher reliability of your
safe power supply.
Preventive maintenance on the system must only performed by qualified

service engineers.
It is recommended to sign a maintenance and service contract with the

manufacturer.
If any prescribed maintenance services are not performed regularly or not

on time according to manufacturer specifications during the system
warranty, a decision about a warranty can only be made once the findings
are available.
V 1.23 345 4999 en

18.2 Inspection
DANGER
The system is supplied by several power sources: AC network and
batteries.
The one-side shutoff does not result in absence of voltage for the complete
system.
DANGER
Protective covers may only be removed by trained electrically skilled
person
Inspection comprises checking the entire system.

The actual state of the system is determined and documented, whereby the functioning of
the entire system as well as settings and values are inspected. The inspection will
conclude whether the system is in a proper, functioning and safe state.
Inspection will be performed by a qualified person. Checks must performed at regular,
previously determined intervals. The inspection intervals depend on the extent of the
environmental influences as well as the system load.
It is recommended to have the inspection performed by the manufacturer.
The manufacturer recommends annual inspection.
If you require a system check at regular intervals for safety reasons, e. g.

an annual inspection, then please contact the manufacturer’s service
department. The manufacturer will be pleased to submit a quotation for an
appropriate contract.
V 1.23 346 4999 en

18.3 Maintenance
Maintenance work may only by the manufacturer's customer service

department or trained electrically skilled person be carried out.
During maintenance, work on the system takes place. All measures taken should be
recorded in a protocol.
Regularly performed and documented maintenance receive the guarantee.
18.3.1 Maintenance interval

If any prescribed maintenance services are not performed regularly or not
on time according to manufacturer specifications during the system
warranty, a decision about a warranty can only be made once the findings
are available.
To increase system reliability, scheduled maintenance is highly

recommended!
Maintenance work may only be carried out by the manufacturer's customer

service.
The manufacturer recommends annual maintenance.
The manufacturer recommends to check and if necessary replace the following

components in accordance with the specified intervals.
Maintenance
Maintenance work/checks interval
(recommended)
Clean the air vents 12 months
Check tightness of the cable connections and retighten if
required. Watch out for discoloration or changes to the
12 months
insulation and the terminals. Replace damaged cable
connections or corroded contact elements if necessary.
Check warning labels and replace if required. 12 months
Visual inspection of existing fuses and breakers, contacts.
12 months
Replace damaged parts.
Check regulator and auxiliary voltages 12 months
Preventive examination components, for example. Capacitors
12 months
and fan.
Check covers and function of locking mechanisms. 12 months
Check battery voltage in normal operation and compare with
12 months
the display in the display and operating panel
V 1.23 347 4999 en

18.3.2 Battery maintenance
The battery manufacturer’s documentation must used when

maintaining the batteries!
Maintenance work may only be carried out by the manufacturer's

customer service.
V 1.23 348 4999 en

18.4 Cleaning
DANGER
Potentially fatal voltages in the system!
Serious injuries or death caused by penetration of humidity.
Only use dry materials for cleaning the system.
DANGER
Protective covers must removed only by trained electrically skilled person.
WARNING
Risk of fire
Do not use flammable liquids for cleaning.
WARNING
Use of liquids
When cleaning the system, there must be no humidity penetrating the
inside of the system.
Liquid cleaning agents in the interior are not permitted.
CAUTION
Use of wrong cleaning agents
Cleaning agents containing hydrocarbons must not used for electrically
stressed insulating parts.
NOTICE
Do not use compressed air under any circumstances, as dust particles
may get into the inside of the UPS system and cause faults.
Clean the system regularly. Remove loose dust from the fan covers using a
vacuum cleaner or soft brush.
V 1.23 349 4999 en

18.4.1 Replace filter mats (only systems with filter)
Depending on capacity and design, the system can be equipped with filter
mats. If a filter mat is included, it must replaced at regular intervals.
The service life of the filter insert depends on the soiling level.
Procedure for replacing the filter
To replace the filter mat, the filter frame must be removed.
 Loosen the six screws, see figure with a suitable Philips screwdriver.
 Lift the filter frame up vertically and pull it forwards.
The filter frame is supported in the keyholes.
 Remove the filter mat and dispose of it.
 Clean the inside of the perforated grid with a cloth.
 Insert the new filter mat in the filter frame.
 Suspend the filter frame from the door with the keyholes.
Make sure that the filter frame is correctly inserted.
 Screw the filter frame on again.
 Enter the filter replacement into the log file.
Philips screwdriver:
Size PZ 2
Figure 18-1: Filter frame
V 1.23 350 4999 en

18.4.2 Replacing the battery on the controller card A100
Maintenance work may only carried out by the manufacturer's
customer service.
DANGER
DANGER
NOTICE
Do not cause a short circuit, as this can cause significant faults!
NOTICE
Damage caused by incorrect spare parts
Only spare parts approved by the manufacturer must be used.

system:
 Wristwatches, rings and other metal objects must removed.
 Use only insulated tools.
 The system must not dismantled.
 The system must NOT switched off.
 Pay attention to the polarity of the battery.
Battery Pin 1
Figure 18-2: Battery controller
V 1.23 351 4999 en

18.5 Measuring the controller board battery voltage
DANGER
DANGER
NOTICE
Do not cause a short circuit, as this can cause significant faults!

system:
 Wristwatches, rings and other metal objects must removed.
 Use only insulated tools.
 The system must not dismantled.
18.6 Firmware update
A firmware update can only performed by the manufacturer’s service.
The system is not available during this time
18.7 Safety check in accordance with DGUV Provision 3
Contact the manufacturer’s service
V 1.23 352 4999 en

19 Spare part list
19.1 General spare parts list
Pos Use of Description Part-No.
Fuse 10 x 38, 600 V 6 A T, 200 kA 10148646
Q400
Fuse holder 10050278
Motor protection switch MS132–1,6T
10175220
690 V, 50 kA, set on 1,1 A
10175230
690 V, 50 kA, set on 1,6 A
10175230
690 V, 50 kA, set on 2,1 A
Motor protection switch MS132–4T
10175232
The type used 690 V, 50 kA, set on 2,6 A
can be taken Motor protection switch MS132–6,3T
Q401 10175233
from the 690 V, 50 kA, set on 5 A
customer part list. Motor protection switch MS116 – 6,3
748240
690 V, 50 kA, set on 4,2 A
Motor protection switch MS116 – 10
748024
690 V, 50 kA, set on 9,5 A
Auxiliary contact for MS116 748259
Circuit breaker Q401 10179095
Auxiliary contacts for circuit breaker Q401 10179097
Fan Inverter 24 VDC 737120
Fan Rectifier 543562
The type used Fuse NH-GR.000 200 AaR,

750738
can be taken 690 V, 200 kA
F040
from the Fuse NH-GR.000 315 AaR,
customer part list. 750739
690 V, 200 kA
Fuse NH-GR.000 200 AaR,
F041 750738
690 V, 200 kA
Table 53: Spare part list
V 1.23 353 4999 en

20 Decommissioning and dismantling
DANGER
Potentially fatal voltages are still present in the system even once it
has been isolated and switched off!
Touching the cables and terminals in the system can result in serious
injuries or death.
Even when disconnected from the mains supply, some system
components remain under voltage for up to 5 mins.
 All safety instructions and currently valid technical
connection requirements of the respective energy supply company as
well as the DGUV regulation 3 or national regulations must complied
with.
20.1 Switching off the system

Before commencing the work, isolate the system according to
chapter 17, Isolating the system complete, page 338
 Disconnect the supply.
 Observe the 5 safety rules.
20.1.1 Disconnect the AC and DC supply
Refer to chapter 17, Isolating the system complete, page 338.
 Switch off the circuit breaker.

 De-energize the system.
V 1.23 354 4999 en

21 Disposal
The manufacturer is particularly concerned with the environmental compatibility of his
complete product range.
Top priority is given to environmental compatibility even as early as the development
phase. Only halogen-free flame retardants are used in all key components.
The question of environmental compatibility plays a key role in the selection of suppliers.
For the most part recyclable packing is used for the transport of the individual
components.
The complete production process at the manufacturer is completely emission-free.
The system as well as associated transport packaging mostly consist of recyclable raw
materials.
21.1 Packaging
Recycled materials are used for the packaging.

Please observe the relevant local regulations for the recycling of
packaging.
The transport packaging must be properly disposed of.
21.2 Disposal of components
The entire device can dismantled into assemblies that can be recycled.
V 1.23 355 4999 en

21.3 Disposal of batteries
DANGER
Risk of explosion by burning!
Serious injuries or damage to property can occur from burning batteries.
WARNING
Do not open or destroy batteries. The electrolyte which is released is
hazardous to people and the environment!
CAUTION
Batteries contain substances that are toxic to the environment.
They can only be disposed of by companies specialized in this.
Batteries contain substances that are toxic to the environment.

They can only be disposed of by companies specialized in this.
Batteries must not be disposed of with the household waste, but must be
recycled.
For the disposal of batteries, the instructions of local disposal companies with regard to
hazardous waste are to observed.
The batteries, which can still under high voltage, must only removed by our certified
service partners.
V 1.23 356 4999 en

22 Abbreviations used
Shortcut Definition
AC Alternating Current
ANSI American National Standards Institute
BYP BYPASS
DC Direct Current
DIN German institut for standards
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EN European standards
EPO Eemergency power off
GS Generator Protection
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IGBT Insulated-gate bipolar transistor
LED light-emitting diode
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
SELV Saftey extra low voltage
SCR Silicon-controlled rectifier
UPS Uninterruptible power supply
Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik
VDE
e. V. (German Electrical Engineering Association)
Table 54: Abbreviations used
V 1.23 357 4999 en

23 Appendix
23.1 Fault event messages and their cause
Event no. Event text Cause(s)
29 LEM interface on X20  Current transformer card A60 is
connected connected to A100 X20
 Current transformer card is ok
30 LEM interface on X20 not  Current transformer card A60 is not
 Current transformer card is not ok
 Results in event no. 737
35 LEM interface on X25  Current transformer card A10 is
 Current transformer card is ok
36 LEM interface on X25 not  Current transformer card A10 is not
 Current transformer card is not ok
 Results in fault event no. 736
117 Rectifier fault reversible  Rectifier fault (automatically restarting)
 DC overvoltage
 RECT overtemperature, power unit
 RECT overtemperature, transformer
119 Rectifier fault  Fault 117
 or event no. 736
123 Rectifier fault during  OPTION: Only for systems with thyristor
startup RECT, not for systems with IGBT RECT
127 Fault rectifier input  There is no current on the power unit in
current a phase
411 Fault pre-charging  Pre-charging takes longer than 60 s
 Overheating A410
 Fuse on A410 tripped
 DC link overvoltage
 Results in event no. 736 at RECT
startup
412 Fault pre-charging  The pre-charging fault is no longer
rectified present
 Also see event no. 411
V 1.23 358 4999 en

428 Fault measurement of  Measurement of the inverter voltage is
output voltage faulty
435 CPU fault 1! Please  Fault on controller A100
contact the service  Please contact the service department
department.  Results in fault event no. 736
437 CPU fault 2! Please  Fault on controller A100
contact the service  Please contact the service department
department.  Results in fault event no. 736 and event
no. 737
573 Inverter in overload mode  Load of the inverter is larger than 100%
 If the load remains larger than 100%,
this results in fault event no. 739
574 IGBT driver card faulty  Driver card A1..6 on power unit faulty
 Event also occurs during initial startup.
 Results in fault event no. 736 or event
no. 737
617 Battery voltage low  Warning that the battery voltage is too
low.
 The warning threshold is set in the
factory, also see chapter 11.12
618 Fault int. Power supply  Motor protection switch tripped
 A400 fault
 RECT mains failure
 Results in warning in display
 Results in common fault
620 Switching fault RSS  OPTION Backfeed protection
contactor K5 (BACKFEED)
 Switch-on command and feedback
signal do not match.
 Feedback signal did not occur within
300 ms
622 Backfeed protection  OPTION Backfeed protection
triggered (BACKFEED)
 A backfeed fault was detected.
 Backfeed protection K005 is switched
off
 Bypass thyristor(s) is (are) faulty
628 INV output frequency at  OPTION Backfeed protection
limit (BACKFEED)
 Occurs during battery operation when
all bypass thyristors are faulty
 If this fault is present for more than 3 s,
this results in fault event no. 737
V 1.23 359 4999 en

629 Warning! Inverter  Overtemperature of the INV power unit
overtemperature  Inverter overload
 Fault of the INV or output power circuit
630 Fault measurement  OPTION Backfeed protection
backfeed protection (BACKFEED)
 When the bypass is ready and the
backfeed contactor is activated, the
backfeed unit must measure a voltage
>28 V.
631 Short circuit at a  One or more temperature sensors on
temperature sensor the RECT or INV power
unit/transformer have a short circuit
633 A temperature sensor is  One or more temperature sensors on
not connected the RECT or INV power
unit/transformer are interrupted
 Wire break
 Sensor fault
643 Inverter overload  Inverter has been overloaded
protection active  Results in fault event no. 739
712 Overtemperature  Inverter has been overloaded
Inverter  Overtemperature INV – power unit
 Filter mats are too contaminated
713 Rectifier overtemperature  Rectifier has been overloaded
 Overtemperature RECT – power unit
716 Rotary field fault bypass  Rotary field on bypass input X005 is
supply faulty (only 3-PH systems)
 Bypass cannot be switched on (LED 5
remains red)
719 Battery circuit fault  Battery circuit is interrupted
 Wire break
 Battery fuses are faulty
 Battery is faulty
722 Fault K1 Only for systems with IGBT RECT
 Rectifier contactor fault (K1)
300 ms
723 Switching fault elect.  Inverter contactor (K6)* or thyristor
Output switch (V6)*
300 ms
*Depending on the type
V 1.23 360 4999 en

724 Overtemperature output  Inverter has been overloaded
transformer  Overtemperature INV – transformer T6
725 Output overvoltage  System output voltage too high
726 Output undervoltage  System output voltage too low
 Short circuit on the output (results in
bypass switch and back, if possible)
 Overload on output
 If bypass not available, this results in
fault event no. 737
728 Battery fully discharged  Battery fully discharged
 The shutdown threshold is set in the
factory, also see chapter 11.12
 Results in fault event no. 739 (INV) and
event no. 736 (IGBT RECT)
729 DC link overvoltage  DC link voltage is too high
 With the battery breaker closed, this is
the battery voltage
 Results in event no. 117 (RECT) and
event no. 737 (INV)
731 Overtemperature input  Rectifier has been overloaded
transformer  Overtemperature RECT – transformer
T1
734 Bypass thyristor firing  Bypass thyristor fault
fault  Switch-on command and feedback
300 ms
736 Rectifier fault irreversible  DC undervoltage in RECT operation,
not startup
 RECT hardware fault
 DC undervoltage
737 INV fault irreversible  INV undervoltage during INV operation
and no overcurrent
 INV undervoltage with INV running, not
during INV operation or startup
 Inverter overvoltage
 Short circuit on output >3 s
 DC overvoltage
 3 x “INV fault reversible” within 1 min
 INV hardware fault
V 1.23 361 4999 en

739 INV fault reversible  INV overtemperature, power unit
 INV overtemperature, transformer
 DC undervoltage
 No INV overload possible
741 Inverter fault  Fault event no. 737
 or event no. 739
743 Fan failed!  Fan does not achieve set rotation speed
 Fan blocked
 Fan supply faulty
 CAN-BUS fault to A200
851 Inverter current >100 %  Inverter current is larger than 100 %
 Large load step
 Short circuit
 Bypass switch
 Measurement via current transformer
T4..6
853 Inverter current >125  Inverter current is larger than 125 %
 Large load step
 Short circuit
T4..6
855 Inverter current >150 %  Inverter current is larger than 150 %
 Large load step
 Short circuit
T4..6
903 Battery temperature  Battery temperature larger than 50 °C
>50°C (OPTION Battery sensor A230 X400)
904 Battery temperature  Battery temperature smaller than 50 °C
<50 °C again (OPTION Battery sensor A230
X400)
905 Air inlet temperature too  Air inlet temperature is larger than 50°C
high  Filter mats are too contaminated
 Results in common fault.
909 Bypass overtemperature  Bypass temperature too high
 Bypass overload
 Does not result in shutdown of bypass
 Switching on of bypass is blocked if it is
switched off or being switched off.
910 No bypass  Bypass temperature normal again
overtemperature  Bypass operates normally again
 Also see event no. 909
911 Output current >100%  Output current during inverter operation
is larger than 100 %
T60..61
Table 55: Fault event messages and their cause
V 1.23 362 4999 en

23.2 Operational event messages
The term “status” in the event text refers to the control software.
In case of a fault, these events can simplify diagnosis when consulting the service
department.
23.2.1 Rectifier
Event no. Event text Meaning
107 Status RECT not ready for switching on,
‘RECT not ready' voltage/frequency/rotary field not ok
109 Status RECT ready for switching on,
‘RECT ready' voltage/frequency/rotary field ok
113 Status RECT still running, ramp
‘RECT startup'
115 Status Rectifier in operation
‘Rectifier operation'
125 Status RECT contactor on Switch on RECT contactor
441 (Boost) charging on Boost charging is active. Float charging
voltage was reached. Boost charging timer
is running. Also see chapter 11.12 as well
as
442 (Boost) charging off Boost charging is switched off. See also
event no. 441.
443 High current charging on High current charging is active. Also see
chapter 11.12 as well as chapter 11.14
444 High current charging off High current charging is off. See also event
no. 442.
445 Rectifier on RECT switch-on command
446 Rectifier off Rectifier switch-off command
625 Rectifier supply out of Voltage/frequency not ok
tolerance
717 Warning battery breaker Battery breaker is open, no secure supply
open! as no connection to battery established.
LED 4 on the display and operating panel
flashes yellow.
Table 56: Operational event messages recitier
V 1.23 363 4999 en

23.2.2 Inverter/output
180 Electr. output switch is off Feedback “off” output/INV/contactor or thyristor
(optional)
181 Electr. output switch is on Feedback “on” output/INV/contactor or thyristor
(optional)
211 Battery operation Battery operation or inverter operation, battery
is discharged by INV, RECT not working
215 UPS normal operation Normal operation, INV and RECT are working,
output switch connected
288 Electr. output switch on Output/INV/contactor/thyristor switch-on
command
289 Electr. output switch off Output/INV/contactor/thyristor switch-off
command
308 Status INV started up, ramp terminated
‘Inverter started up’
310 Status INV not ready, INV undervoltage, DC link not
‘INV not ready’ charged
312 Status INV ready, direct voltage ok, DC link charged,
‘INV ready’ INV is ready for switching on
321 Inverter ON INV switch-on command
322 Inverter OFF INV switch-off command
461 Status INV operation, electrical output switch
‘INV operation’ [contactor or thyristor (OPTION)] switched on
575 Status INV operating/switched on
‘INV is running’
576 Status INV no longer working
‘INV is running’ exited
745 Status ‘INV capable of load Corresponds to mains priority operation
supply’
Table 57: Operational event messages inverter/output
V 1.23 364 4999 en

23.2.3 Bypass
217 Bypass operation Bypass in operation and connected
323 BypassSwitchonCommand Bypass switch-on command
324 BypassSwitchoffCommand Bypass switch-off command
505 Bypass available Bypass is ready for switching on,
voltage/frequency/rotary field ok, bypass not
overheated and not locked via display or
digital input.
599 Status bypass not ready Voltage/frequency/rotary field not ok or bypass
overheated or locked via display or digital
input on A330 X12.10 (option),
Table 58: Operational event messages bypass
23.2.4 Pre-charging
325 Pre-charging circuit on DC pre-charging switch-on command
326 Pre-charging circuit ‘OFF’ DC pre-charging switch-off command
Table 59: Operational event messages pre-charging
V 1.23 365 4999 en

23.2.5 Operating elements
5 Manual bypass closed Manual bypass closed
6 Manual bypass open Manual bypass open
17 Outgoing breaker closed Outgoing breaker closed
18 Outgoing breaker opened Outgoing breaker opened
23 Switch Q051 closed Input switch Q051 (option) closed
24 Switch Q051 open Input switch Q051 (option) opened
199 ‘BYPASS ON’ key key on the display of the display and
operated operating panel was pressed.
201 ‘ON’ key key on the display of the display and
208 ‘OFF’ key key on the display of the display and
413 Battery breaker closed Battery breaker closed
414 Battery breaker opened Battery breaker opened
Table 60: Operational event messages opertating elements
V 1.23 366 4999 en

23.2.6 I/O cards A230/A330
237 Diesel operation A 24 V signal is present on A330 X12.9. The following
actions are performed:
Block bypass (if
activated)
Battery charging off (if
activated)
For activation refer to:
, page 161
Other behavior of the system as for:
Event no. 243
Event no. 239
239 Battery charging Battery charging is switched off, RECT is no longer
off charging the battery. A 24 V signal is present on the
I/O card A230 terminal X12.5.
240 Battery charging Battery charging is switched on again, RECT is
on charging the battery, also see 239.
243 Bypass blocked Switching on the bypass is blocked. A 24 V signal is
present on A330 X12.10. If the bypass is connected
through, it remains connected through.
451 ‘REMOTE OFF’ Remote OFF was operated. A 24 V signal is present
operated on the I/O card A230 terminal X12.6.
455 ‘REMOTE ON’ Remote ON was operated. A 24 V signal is present on
operated the I/O card A330 terminal X12.7 (OPTION).
457 ‘REMOTE ON Remote BYPASS was operated. A 24 V signal is
BYPASS’ present on the I/O card A330 terminal X12.8
operated (OPTION).
701 External output The external output switch was opened.
switch opened
Table 61:Operational event messages I/O cards
23.2.7 Parallel operation (OPTION)

320 Status ‘System The system is solely in a parallel group
solely in par. op.’
328 Status ‘ Parallel The system is part of a parallel group
operation’
Table 62: Operational event messages parallel operation
V 1.23 367 4999 en

24 Contact partners in the Service department
Spare parts management
Phone: +49 2871 93-553
General service requests

Phone: +49 2871 93-556
Returns management
Phone: +49 2871 93-554
Training management
Phone: +49 2871 93-557
Technical support
Phone: +49 2871 93-555
V 1.23 368 4999 en

Support / Helpdesk
E-Mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.benning.de
Telefax: +49 2871 93-417
Telefon: +49 2871 93-555
BENNING Helpdesk-Team
The text and illustrations correspond to the state of technology at the time of printing. Subject to technical changes No liability accepted for printing errors
3. ELECTRICAL EQUIPEMENT AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
11/15
891
185
860
485
1950
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N conductor does
Rectifier input 3x400V 60Hz not have to be
connected
A -X001 L1 L2 L3 N
A
Copyright as per ISO 16016 to be observed!
PE
8
4
7
2
5
3
-X050 WZ1
PE L1
-BBR_A1_1
FE1
L2
-BBR11 -BBR_A1_2
L3
/2.6A
-BBR_A1_3
PE
N N W10 4 W10 5 N
-BBR_A1_4
W10 7 W10 8 W11 3
B -A001 -A101 B
PE
4
2
8
4
7
2
5
3
-X051 -A130
WZ2
W10 3 L1 L2 L3
FE2
-Q001 I> I> I>
87,5-12 5A 3
1
5
87,5A W96 W97 W98
/4.7F
W34 1L1.1
/13.1D
W36 1L2.1
/13.1D
W35 1L3.1
/13.1D
W11 0 W10 9 W11 4
6
2
C -K001 C
/14.2D
5
1
W99 A10 5 X4:1

/14.1E
W10 0 A10 5 X4:3
/14.1E
W10 1
23
-K001
/14.2D
24
W11 2 W11 1 W11 5 W1
W10 2 W50 W49 W2
-L100 -T00 1_41 -T00 1_43 -T00 1_45 -C100 D

D X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X4:4 X4:5 BBR1:1 BBR1:2
/13.3B /13.3B /13.3A
n=2
-T00 1_42 -T00 1_44 -T00 1_46 X11
/13.3B /13.3A /13.3A X1
X6:1 L1 1N
X2 X6:2 L2 2N
1W1
1V1
1U1
1N
41 42 43 44 45 46 X6:3 L3 3N
X3 X6:4
X6:5 -C100
X10 X6:6
-T1L1 -T1L2 -T1L3
PE X6:7
X6:8
X6:9
E -T001 X7:1 X6:10 E
2W1
2V1
X7:3 X6:11
2U1
Charge unit
X7:5 X6:12
-A105
2L3
2L1
2L2
a
/2.1A
/2.2A
/2.2A
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
Drawn SL AN UPS1 UE-EE-UPS
ENERTRONIC I3-1
Checked CWES Sh eet 1
Circuit diagram 61300004182.00E053
Rev. Chan ge Date Name Ap proved 20 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/1.2F
/1.2F
/1.3F
/1.5A
2L1
2L2
2L3
FE1
W11 6 W11 7 W11 8
A A
-X010 2L+
+
-X010 /3.1A
1L1 1L2 1L3
+
1 X2:1 X3:(L) + X2:(N) -
2 X2:2 -C400
3 X2:3 -A401
X2:4
X1:PE
4 -
- 2L-
/3.1A
1 X3:1 PE
-T001
2 X3:2
B 3 X3:3 X1 11 5 B
/10.5C
4 X3:4
-T002 1 X4:1
2 X4:2
3 X4:3
4 X4:4 -A430 X2:1 X2:5
I-transformer interface
-A010
-T003 Current sink
C C
X10 1:1 X10 1:1 X10 1:1
X20 1:1 X20 1:1 X20 1:1
X10 1:3 X10 1:3 X10 1:3
X10 1:4 X10 1:4 X10 1:4
X20 1:3 X20 1:3 X20 1:3
X20 1:4 X20 1:4 X20 1:4
D C1 3 C1 3 C1 3 D
G1 4 X10 1:5 G1 4 X10 1:5 G1 4 X10 1:5
E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:6 E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:6 E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:6
G2 6 X20 1:5 G2 6 X20 1:5 G2 6 X20 1:5
E2 7 X20 1:6 E2 7 X20 1:6 E2 7 X20 1:6

-V012 -V022 -V032
2E2 2E2 2E2
E X10 1:7 X10 1:7 X10 1:7 E

X2:1 X2:1 X2:1
X10 1:8 X10 1:8 X10 1:8
X2:2 X2:2 X2:2
Driver board
Driver board
Driver board
X20 1:7 X20 1:7 X20 1:7
1
1
X2:3 X2:3 X2:3
X20 1:8 X20 1:8 X20 1:8
2
2
X2:4 -R012 X2:4 -R022 X2:4 -R032
X1 X1 X1
a
-A001 -A002 -A003
11 6 11 7 11 8
/10.1C /10.1C /10.1C
14.10.21 -A061
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2L+ 2L+.1
A /2.8A /4.2E
A
W12 2
2L- 2L-.1
/2.8B /4.2F
W12 3
W11 9
W12 0
B B
0
-L700
1
X2:1 W37
X2:2
X2:3 W38
X3:2 l
DC-measuring board X3:1 k -T040

n=1
-A410
C X1 12 7
/10.4F C
W12 1
W41
2L-.40 0
/11.1A
W42 2L+.40 0
/11.1A
D D
W40
n=2
W39
-L410 /13.7C
2 4
3
5
1
1
-Q100
2L+.46 2
2L-.46 2
E E
/11.1F
/11.1E
B- B+
-X004
Battery
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
60 5 60 7
/10.1A /10.1A
A A
X1 X1
X10 1:1 X2:1 X10 1:1 X2:1
C1 3
X20 1:1
-R041 C1 3
X20 1:1
-R061
X2:2 X2:2
1 2 1 2
G1 4 X10 1:3 X2:3 G1 4 X10 1:3 X2:3
E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:4 X2:4 E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:4 X2:4
G2 6 X20 1:3 G2 6 X20 1:3
E2 7 X20 1:4 E2 7 X20 1:4

B B
-V041 2E2 -V061 2E2
X10 1:5 X10 1:5
X10 1:6 X10 1:6
X20 1:5 X20 1:5
X20 1:6 X20 1:6
C1 3 C1 3
C C
G1 4 X10 1:7 G1 4 X10 1:7
E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:8 E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:8
Driver board
Driver board
G2 6 X20 1:7 G2 6 X20 1:7
E2 7 X20 1:8 E2 7 X20 1:8

-V043 -V063
2E2 2E2
-A004 -A006
D D
1 X2:1
X2:1 X2:5 2 X2:2
3 X2:3
4 X2:4
Current sink
-A430 -T004
X3:1
X3:2
X3:3 X1 60 8
/10.5C
-X010 X3:4
E 2L+.1 E
+
/3.8A
X4:1
X4:2
X4:3
+
X4:4
X3:(L) + X2:(N) -
-A060
2L1 2L2
-C400 -X010
-A401
X1:PE
-
3L1
3L2
PE
/1.5B
a
FE2
-
/5.2A
/5.2A
14.10.21 2L-.1
/3.8A
F Rev. intern
-A062 F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BYPASS CABINET UE-EE-UPS
/4.4F
/4.5F
D400E230/174-BYP
3L1
3L2
A A
L N -X50
-X5.1
L N
-X005
3
W13 3 W13 2
-X050
B B
T00 6:42 T00 6:44
/14.1B /14.1A
T00 6:43 T00 6:45
/14.1A /14.1A
1U1
1U2
41 42 43 44
-T1L1 -T1L2
C C
-T006
2U1
2U2
L1
-BBR_A5_1
PE
D D
N
-BBR_A5_4
-BBR15
-A005
PE
W43
W44 W45
6L1.5
5N.2
5N.3
E E
/11.5A
/7.5A
/11.5A
W12 4
3L1.15
3L2.15
6L1.1
1
/6.2A
/6.2A
a -BBR_N
/7.2A
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/5.2F
/5.2F
3L1.15
3L2.15
A A
W12 6 W12 5
-L604
B n=2
B
N
W10 6
L1.1 N1.1
L1.2 N1.2
-A601
-C600
W46 5N.4
/14.1C
C C
W12 7 W12 8
D D
E E
5L1.7
5N.1
/8.1A
/9.4A
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/5.7E
/5.5F
A52 0 X4:1
/11.4E
6L1.1
5N.2
A52 0 X4:2
WZ_V500
A /11.4E
A
W52 W51
X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X10:N X***.3 X***.2 X***.1 X***.4

2
4K1 rd X1:4 -A050
gy X1:5 X61:1
-R501
5G1
1 2
X61:2
7K2 bu X1:2 X62:1

B B
X62:2
-V500
6G2 gy X1:1
X63:1
3
X63:2
X31:1 A10 0 X31:1

/10.3D
X31:2 A10 0 X31:2

/10.3D
C Changeover board C
-A521 X9:1 W5 A52 0 X9:1
/11.1E
X9:2
X9:3
X19:1
X19:2 W6 A52 0 X19:2

/11.1E
D D
X19:3
X19:4
X19:5
X7:1 W3 A40 0 X60 0:2

/11.5E
-A050
A40 0 X60 0:3
/11.5E
E X11:2 E
-T500 l X11:1 X7:2 W7
n=1 k
12
14
-Q401
/11.5A
11
X7:3 W4
5L1.2
Bypass ignition measurement

a -A520 X5
/9.5A
14.10.21 53 0
/10.5C
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/6.2F
A A
5L1.7
-T060 k T60 k
/13.2C
n=1 l T60 l
/13.2C
B B
2
4K1 V60 0:4K1
/14.5E
5G1 V60 0:5G1
/14.5E
1
7K2 V60 0:7K2
/14.5E
6G2 V60 0:6G2
/14.5E
-V600 3
C C
D D
-A600
E E
5L1.8
a
/9.3A
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/8.2F
/6.2F
/7.2F
5L1.8
5N.1
5L1.2
UPS2 UE-EE-UPS
A A
W12 9
0
-L600
1
W13 1
B B
C C
2
-BBR_N
W13 0
D D
L1
-BBR_A6_1
PE
-BBR16 N
PE
-BBR_A6_4
E E
-A006 L N
-X006
L N
-X6.2
a
14.10.21 BYPASS CABINET UE-EE-UPS
F Rev. intern
D400E230/174-BYP F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
60 5 X13A X8:1 A7 X8:1

/4.3A /11.1D
WZ_A007:X13A W55
X15A X8:2 A7 X8:2
/11.1D
W54
A A
X18A X8:3 A7 X8:3

/11.1D
W56
60 7 X13AN X8:4 A7 X8:4
/4.8A /11.1D
WZ_A007:X13AN W53
X13B X13
WZ_A100:X13-A007:X13
X15B X15
WZ_A100:X15-A007:X15
X18B X18
Parallel board- driver WZ_A100:X18-A007:X18
X13BN
B -A007 LA N B
2 1 rd +24V
-F75 0
SNMP- COM 1 A25 0 X2
/11.6F
-X750 0V
bk Adapter WZ4
WZ3
W57 W58 -A750
11 5
/2.5B
WZ_A100:X25
11 8 60 8
/2.8F /4.8E
WZ_A100:X16 WZ_A100:X20
-L460 -L450
C /2.5F
11 7
/7.8F
53 0
C
WZ_A100:X11 WZ_A100:X2
11 6
/2.3F
WZ_A100:X12
X12 X11 X16 X13 X15 X18 X2 X20 X25 X10 X3:1 X3:2 X3:3
A10 0 X31:1 W8 X31:1

/7.8C
X4:1 A10 0 X4:1
/11.1B
A10 0 X31:2 W27 X31:2 W59
/7.8C
X4:2 A10 0 X4:2
/11.1C
X31:3 W64
X4:3 A10 0 X4:3
/11.1C
W61 D
D P41
X19:1 A10 0 X19:1
/11.1C
W63
P42 X19:2 A10 0 X19:2
/11.1C
W60
WZ4 WZ5 X19:3 A10 0 X19:3
/11.1D
W62
PE
PE
X19:4 A10 0 X19:4

/11.1D
W65
Controller board CAN-bus

-A100 X27:1 X27:2 X33:1 X33:2 X1 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X22
E E
24 1.4 A26 0
/15.7F /19.1C
WZ_CAN-BUS 24 1.3 12 8
/11.6F /14.1D
WZ_A100:X5
12 7 12 9
/3.2C /13.1E
WZ_A100:X9 WZ_A100:X6
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/5.7E
/5.4E
2L+.40 0
/3.5D
2L-.40 0
/3.5C
6L1.5
5N.3
A A
/7.7E
12
14
1
3
-Q400 W77 -Q401
10A-D
4
6A
11
2
4
L+
LT
24
X1 22 21
14
IL_ PT 12 11 /16.3B -L402
W69 n=4
B PE B
-A009 W94 W95
20 0kOhm W47
PE
L- 1
-X040
X2 X1
A10 0 X4:1 -BBR_X040

/10.7D
A10 0 X4:2
/10.7D
1
A10 0 X4:3 W70 W71 -L401 -A402 Rectifier board
/10.7D
X22 X21
2
W78 W79
-L400
C C
n=4 X10 0:1 X10 0:2
X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X1:4 X1:8 X22 X21
A10 0 X19:1 X9:1
/10.7D
Input DC1 Input DC2
A10 0 X19:2 X9:2 X5:1 W82 A20 0 X6:1
/10.7D /12.1A
A10 0 X19:3 X9:3 X5:2 W83 A20 0 X6:2

/10.7D /12.1A
A10 0 X19:4 X9:4 X5:3

/10.7E
A7 X8:1 X8:1 X6:1 W84 A40 0 X6:1

/10.3A /12.6A
D D
A7 X8:2 X8:2 X6:2 W85 A40 0 X6:2
/10.3A /12.6A
A7 X8:3 X8:3 X6:3

/10.3A
A7 X8:4 X8:4
/10.3A Mains supply unit
X7:1 X7:2 X7:3 X10:1 X10:2 X10:3 X10:4 X11:1 X11:2 X11:3 X12:1 X12:2 X12:3 X600:1 X600:2 X600:3
-A400
W66 W68 W67 A52 0 X4:1 W80 W81 A40 0 X60 0:2
/7.5A /7.8E
A52 0 X4:2 A40 0 X60 0:3
/7.5A /7.8E
X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 A40 0 X12:1
/14.8D
A40 0 X12:2
/14.8E
E A52 0 X9:1 X1:1 X6:1 W72 X4:1 X5:1 W87 A45 0 X6:1 E
/7.8C /15.1D
X1:2 X6:2 X4:2

Protokoll - Gateway X5:2
A52 0 X19:2 W73 W88 A45 0 X6:2
/7.8D /15.1D
Logic Analyser
Interface
CAN-BUS
X6:3 W74 X4:3 X5:3 W86 A45 0 X6:3
PCMCIA
/15.1D
RS-485
RS-232
SLOT
2L-.46 2 X3:4
/3.2E
-A250
2L+.46 2 X3:8 X1 X2 X3 X6 X7
/3.2E
X5:1 A45 0 X5:1 24 1.2
/14.8E /12.6A
W75 A25 0 X2 WZ_CAN-BUS
/10.8B
a X5:2 A45 0 X5:2 X6
/14.8E
14.10.21 W76 24 1.3
DC-link precharger /10.4E
F Rev. intern
-A450 -A251 F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A40 0 X6:1
A /11.6D
A
A40 0 X6:2
/11.6D
A20 0 X6:1
/11.6C
A20 0 X6:2 24 1.2 24 1.6

/11.6D /11.8F /18.3E
WZ_CAN-BUS
X6:1 X6:2 X6:3 X8:1 X8:2 X8:3 X7 X9:1
B CAN-BUS B
Fan control
X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 X1:4 X1:5 X2:1 X2:2 X2:3 X2:4 X2:5 X3:1 X3:2 X3:3 X3:4 X3:5 X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X4:4 X4:5 X5:1 X5:2 X5:3 X5:4 X5:5
-A200
W12 W11 W10 W9 W13 W16 W14 W15
C C
1 2 3 5 1 2 3 5
-X200 -X202
rt bl ye wh rt bl ye wh rt bl ye wh rt bl ye wh
D D
M M M M
DC DC DC DC
-M200 -M202 -M200 -M202
Cooling fan Inverter 1 Left Cooling fan Inverter 1 Right Cooling fan Rectifier 1 Left Cooling fan Rectifier 1 Right
-A065 -A065
E E
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-T00 1_45
/1.4D
-T00 1_46
/1.4D
-T00 1_44
/1.4D
-T00 1_43
/1.4D
-T00 1_42
/1.3D
A23 0 X3.7:1
/15.3E
-T00 1_41
/1.3D
B B
A23 0 X3.7:3
/15.3F
W19
12
14
W17
/8.5A
T60 l -Q100
/3.4E
11
T60 k
/8.5A
C W18 C
X11:1 X11:2 X21:1 X21:2 X31:1 X31:2 X61:1 X61:2 X62:1 X62:2 X63:1 X63:2 X64:1 X64:2 X7:1 X7:2 X7:3
X10 X8:1
1L1.1 X1 X8:2
/1.3C
1L2.1 X2 X8:3
/1.3C
1L3.1 X3
/1.3C
X9:1
D D
X9:2
X9:3
Measurement board
X5 X18:1 X18:2 X18:3 X18:4 X18:5 X19:1 X19:2 X19:3 X19:4 X19:5
-A110
12 9
/10.6F
E E
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A23 0 X3.8:1
/15.3E
A23 0 X3.8:3
/15.3E
A A
T00 6:45 W20 W21

/5.3B
T00 6:44
/5.3B
W22
T00 6:43
/5.3B Supply air temperature sensor
T00 6:42
/5.3B
13
2
-R010 -K001
B .2D
B
14
W23
X11:1 X11:2 X21:1 X21:2 X31:1 X31:2 X61:1 X61:2 X62:1 X62:2 X63:1 X63:2 X64:1 X64:2 X7:1 X7:2 X7:3 W24
5N.4 X10
/6.3C :N
X4:1
X4:2
X4:3
C C
X9:1
X9:2
X9:3
Thyristor control
-A160 X5 X19:1 X19:2 X19:3 X19:4 X19:5 X***.1 X***.2 X***.3 X***.4 X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 X1:4 X1:5
12 8 W89 W90
D /10.6E D
gy bu rd gy
WZ_V600
A1
-K001
A2
A40 0 X12:1
/11.5E
A10 5 X4:1
/1.7C
V60 0:6G2 A40 0 X12:2
/8.5C /11.5E
A10 5 X4:3 V60 0:7K2
/1.7C /8.5C
V60 0:4K1 A45 0 X5:1

/8.5B /11.3F
V60 0:5G1
/8.5B
E A45 0 X5:2 E
/11.3F
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BYPASS CABINET UE-EE-UPS External battery circuit breaker

D400E230/174-BYP
12
A A
11
14
-X* * *
4
-X12.1
B B
Battery temperature
1
-R400
2
C C
X12.1:1 X12.1:2 X12.2:1 X12.2:2 X12.3:1 X12.3:2 X12.4:1 X12.4:2 X12.5:1 X12.5:2 X12.6:1 X12.6:2 X40 0:1 X40 0:2
Manual bypass
Remote Power OFF

External output isolator open
Battery temperature
Battery charging off
External battery circuit breaker
Coupling switch
A45 0 X6:1 X7:1 X24:1
/11.8E
A45 0 X6:2 X7:2 X24:2

/11.8E
A45 0 X6:3 X7:3

D /11.8E D
W91 X8:1 X1
W92 X8:2
CAN- X4
W93 X8:3 BUS
Manual bypass External battery circuit breaker

Customer connection board
-A230
E X3.8:1 X3.8:2 X3.8:3 X3.7:1 X3.7:2 X3.7:3 E
A23 0 X3.8:1
/14.6A
A23 0 X3.8:3
/14.6A
A23 0 X8:1 A23 0 X3.7:1

/16.1D /13.8B
A23 0 X8:2 A23 0 X3.7:3 24 1.4 24 1.10
/16.1D /13.8B /10.4E /16.7E
A23 0 X8:3 WZ_CAN-BUS
/16.1D
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BYPASS CABINET UE-EE-UPS Distribution MCCB

D400E230/174-BYP tripped/open
A A
-X* x x
6
-X12.1
B B
14
12
-A009
/11.4A
11
W26 W25
C C
X12.1:1 X12.1:2 X12.2:1 X12.2:2 X12.3:1 X12.3:2 X12.4:1 X12.4:2 X12.5:1 X12.5:2 X12.6:1 X12.6:2 X40 0:1 X40 0:2 X40 0:3
Output switch DC Earth fault MCCB

open alarm tripped/open
A23 0 X8:1 X7:1 X24:1

/15.2E
A23 0 X8:2 X7:2 X24:2

/15.2F
A23 0 X8:3 X7:3

/15.2F
D D
X8:1 X1
X8:2
CAN- X4
X8:3 BUS

-A231
X3.8:1 X3.8:2 X3.8:3 X3.7:1 X3.7:2 X3.7:3
E E
24 1.10
/15.8F
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
X3.1:1 X3.1:2 X3.1:3 X3.2:1 X3.2:2 X3.2:3 X3.3:1 X3.3:2 X3.3:3 X3.4:1 X3.4:2 X3.4:3 X3.5:1 X3.5:2 X3.5:3 X3.6:1 X3.6:2 X3.6:3 X3.1:1 X3.1:2 X3.1:3 X3.2:1 X3.2:2 X3.2:3 X3.3:1 X3.3:2 X3.3:3 X3.4:1 X3.4:2 X3.4:3 X3.5:1 X3.5:2 X3.5:3 X3.6:1 X3.6:2 X3.6:3
C C
* * * * * * * * * * * *
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6
Mains failure
Battery discharged
Battery circuit fault (MCCB tripped/open)

DC Earth fault alarm
Charger fault
Mains operation
Bypass operation
Manual bypass
Battery operation
Common alarm
Battery low voltage
D D
* Contact position in case of alarm/occurrence * Contact position in case of alarm/occurrence

E E
Customer connection board Customer connection board

a
14.10.21 -A230 -A231
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
X2:1 X2:2 X2:3 X2:4 X2:5 X2:6 X2:7 X2:8 X3:1 X3:2
GND
GND
RS485-
RS485+
LED Display
EPO_N
L+24
L+24
PE
H1 Power supply Intern H8 Failure
H2 Mains operation H9 Battery low voltage
B B
H3 Battery operation H10 Battery circuit fault
H4 Bypass operation H11 DC Earth fault alarm
H5 Parallel operation H12 Output switch open
C C
H6 Manual bypass H13 Distribution MCCB tripped
H7 Overload S1 LED-test/Reset
Control panel CAN-BUS LED-controller CAN-BUS

D A240 A241 D
X1 X4
-A240, -A241
WZ_CAN-BUS
E E
24 1.6
/12.7A
WZ_CAN-BUS
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
UPS 2 1 4 6 8 10
A -A260:X3.1
A
4 9 2 3 4 5 7 9 Sh ield
-A260:X3 -A260:X2
-C1000
B BK PK BN GN GY YE WH WH YE GY GN BN PK BK B
WZ10 WZ11
WZ260
C /10.6E
A26 0
C
X1 X3:1 X3:2 X3:3 X3:4 X3:5 X3:6 X3:7 X3:8 X3:9 X3:10 X3.1:1 X3.1:2 X3.1:3 X3.1:4 X3.1:5 X3.1:6 X3.1:7 X3.1:8 X3.1:9 X3.1:10 X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X4:4 X4:5 X4:6 X2:1 X2:2 X2:3 X2:4 X2:5 X2:6 X2:7 X2:8 X2:9 Shield
Shield
K6_BUS_IS_On
K6_BUS_IS_Off
K6_BUS_IS_Off
Controller
Thyonp
Thyonp
Shield
24V
GND
24V
GND
Connect3
Connect1
Connect2
Connect4
PE
PE
K6_BUS_IS_On
Synconbus
Synconbus
D D
Pardata6
Pardata7
Pardata5
Pardata5
Pardata6
Pardata7
E E
Parallel interface board

-A260 X8:1 X8:2 X8:3 X8:4 X8:5 X8:6
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External supply
A 230V, AC, 50Hz A
B B
N
L
L
-X030
-BBR_L
-BBR_N
PE
PE
W48
C C
1
-F302
6A-B
2
q
D D
RF/Acc.
-B300
+15 °C 2 3 L N
W28 W32
W30 W33
W29
L
L
-X301 -X302
E E
L
-E301 -E302 L
N
N
N
-X301 -X302
W31
a
14.10.21 Heater
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N conductor does
Rectifier input 3x400V 60Hz not have to be
connected
A -X001 L1 L2 L3 N
A
PE
8
4
7
2
5
3
-X050 WZ1
PE L1
-BBR_A1_1
FE1
L2
-BBR11 -BBR_A1_2
L3
/2.6A
-BBR_A1_3
PE
N N W10 4 W10 5 N
-BBR_A1_4
W10 7 W10 8 W11 3
B -A001 -A101 B
PE
4
2
8
4
7
2
5
3
-X051 -A130
WZ2
W10 3 L1 L2 L3
FE2
-Q001 I> I> I>
87,5-12 5A 3
1
5
87,5A W96 W97 W98
/4.7F
W34 1L1.1
/13.1D
W36 1L2.1
/13.1D
W35 1L3.1
/13.1D
W11 0 W10 9 W11 4
6
2
C -K001 C
/14.2D
5
1
W99 A10 5 X4:1

/14.1E
W10 0 A10 5 X4:3
/14.1E
W10 1
23
-K001
/14.2D
24
W11 2 W11 1 W11 5 W1
W10 2 W50 W49 W2
-L100 -T00 1_41 -T00 1_43 -T00 1_45 -C100 D

D X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X4:4 X4:5 BBR1:1 BBR1:2
/13.3B /13.3B /13.3A
n=2
-T00 1_42 -T00 1_44 -T00 1_46 X11
/13.3B /13.3A /13.3A X1
X6:1 L1 1N
X2 X6:2 L2 2N
1W1
1V1
1U1
1N
41 42 43 44 45 46 X6:3 L3 3N
X3 X6:4
X6:5 -C100
X10 X6:6
-T1L1 -T1L2 -T1L3
PE X6:7
X6:8
X6:9
E -T001 X7:1 X6:10 E
2W1
2V1
X7:3 X6:11
2U1
Charge unit
X7:5 X6:12
-A105
2L3
2L1
2L2
a
/2.1A
/2.2A
/2.2A
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/1.2F
/1.2F
/1.3F
/1.5A
2L1
2L2
2L3
FE1
W11 6 W11 7 W11 8
A A
-X010 2L+
+
-X010 /3.1A
1L1 1L2 1L3
+
1 X2:1 X3:(L) + X2:(N) -
2 X2:2 -C400
3 X2:3 -A401
X2:4
X1:PE
4 -
- 2L-
/3.1A
1 X3:1 PE
-T001
2 X3:2
B 3 X3:3 X1 11 5 B
/10.5C
4 X3:4
-T002 1 X4:1
2 X4:2
3 X4:3
4 X4:4 -A430 X2:1 X2:5
-A010
-T003 Current sink
C C
X10 1:1 X10 1:1 X10 1:1
X20 1:1 X20 1:1 X20 1:1
X10 1:3 X10 1:3 X10 1:3
X10 1:4 X10 1:4 X10 1:4
X20 1:3 X20 1:3 X20 1:3
X20 1:4 X20 1:4 X20 1:4
D C1 3 C1 3 C1 3 D
G1 4 X10 1:5 G1 4 X10 1:5 G1 4 X10 1:5
E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:6 E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:6 E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:6
G2 6 X20 1:5 G2 6 X20 1:5 G2 6 X20 1:5
E2 7 X20 1:6 E2 7 X20 1:6 E2 7 X20 1:6

-V012 -V022 -V032
2E2 2E2 2E2
E X10 1:7 X10 1:7 X10 1:7 E

X2:1 X2:1 X2:1
X10 1:8 X10 1:8 X10 1:8
X2:2 X2:2 X2:2
Driver board
Driver board
Driver board
X20 1:7 X20 1:7 X20 1:7
1
1
X2:3 X2:3 X2:3
X20 1:8 X20 1:8 X20 1:8
2
2
X2:4 -R012 X2:4 -R022 X2:4 -R032
X1 X1 X1
a
-A001 -A002 -A003
11 6 11 7 11 8
/10.1C /10.1C /10.1C
14.10.21 -A061
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2L+ 2L+.1
A /2.8A /4.2E
A
W12 2
2L- 2L-.1
/2.8B /4.2F
W12 3
W11 9
W12 0
B B
0
-L700
1
X2:1 W37
X2:2
X2:3 W38
X3:2 l
DC-measuring board X3:1 k -T040

n=1
-A410
C X1 12 7
/10.4F C
W12 1
W41
2L-.40 0
/11.1A
W42 2L+.40 0
/11.1A
D D
W40
n=2
W39
-L410 /13.7C
2 4
3
5
1
1
-Q100
2L+.46 2
2L-.46 2
E E
/11.1F
/11.1E
B- B+
-X004
Battery
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
60 5 60 7
/10.1A /10.1A
A A
X1 X1
X10 1:1 X2:1 X10 1:1 X2:1
C1 3
X20 1:1
-R041 C1 3
X20 1:1
-R061
X2:2 X2:2
1 2 1 2
G1 4 X10 1:3 X2:3 G1 4 X10 1:3 X2:3
E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:4 X2:4 E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:4 X2:4
G2 6 X20 1:3 G2 6 X20 1:3
E2 7 X20 1:4 E2 7 X20 1:4

B B
-V041 2E2 -V061 2E2
X10 1:5 X10 1:5
X10 1:6 X10 1:6
X20 1:5 X20 1:5
X20 1:6 X20 1:6
C1 3 C1 3
C C
G1 4 X10 1:7 G1 4 X10 1:7
E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:8 E1/C2 E1 5 X10 1:8
Driver board
Driver board
G2 6 X20 1:7 G2 6 X20 1:7
E2 7 X20 1:8 E2 7 X20 1:8

-V043 -V063
2E2 2E2
-A004 -A006
D D
1 X2:1
X2:1 X2:5 2 X2:2
3 X2:3
4 X2:4
Current sink
-A430 -T004
X3:1
X3:2
X3:3 X1 60 8
/10.5C
-X010 X3:4
E 2L+.1 E
+
/3.8A
X4:1
X4:2
X4:3
+
X4:4
X3:(L) + X2:(N) -
-A060
2L1 2L2
-C400 -X010
-A401
X1:PE
-
3L1
3L2
PE
/1.5B
a
FE2
-
/5.2A
/5.2A
14.10.21 2L-.1
/3.8A
F Rev. intern
-A062 F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BYPASS CABINET UE-EE-UPS
/4.4F
/4.5F
D400E230/174-BYP
3L1
3L2
A A
L N -X50
-X5.2
L N
-X005
3
W13 3 W13 2
-X050
B B
T00 6:42 T00 6:44
/14.1B /14.1A
T00 6:43 T00 6:45
/14.1A /14.1A
1U1
1U2
41 42 43 44
-T1L1 -T1L2
C C
-T006
2U1
2U2
L1
-BBR_A5_1
PE
D D
N
-BBR_A5_4
-BBR15
-A005
PE
W43
W44 W45
6L1.5
5N.2
5N.3
E E
/11.5A
/7.5A
/11.5A
W12 4
3L1.15
3L2.15
6L1.1
1
/6.2A
/6.2A
a -BBR_N
/7.2A
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/5.2F
/5.2F
3L1.15
3L2.15
A A
W12 6 W12 5
-L604
B n=2
B
N
W10 6
L1.1 N1.1
L1.2 N1.2
-A601
-C600
W46 5N.4
/14.1C
C C
W12 7 W12 8
D D
E E
5L1.7
5N.1
/8.1A
/9.4A
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/5.7E
/5.5F
A52 0 X4:1
/11.4E
6L1.1
5N.2
A52 0 X4:2
WZ_V500
A /11.4E
A
W52 W51
X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X10:N X***.3 X***.2 X***.1 X***.4

2
4K1 rd X1:4 -A050
gy X1:5 X61:1
-R501
5G1
1 2
X61:2
7K2 bu X1:2 X62:1

B B
X62:2
-V500
6G2 gy X1:1
X63:1
3
X63:2
X31:1 A10 0 X31:1

/10.3D
X31:2 A10 0 X31:2

/10.3D
C Changeover board C
-A521 X9:1 W5 A52 0 X9:1
/11.1E
X9:2
X9:3
X19:1
X19:2 W6 A52 0 X19:2

/11.1E
D D
X19:3
X19:4
X19:5
X7:1 W3 A40 0 X60 0:2

/11.5E
-A050
A40 0 X60 0:3
/11.5E
E X11:2 E
-T500 l X11:1 X7:2 W7
n=1 k
12
14
-Q401
/11.5A
11
X7:3 W4
5L1.2
Bypass ignition measurement

a -A520 X5
/9.5A
14.10.21 53 0
/10.5C
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/6.2F
A A
5L1.7
-T060 k T60 k
/13.2C
n=1 l T60 l
/13.2C
B B
2
4K1 V60 0:4K1
/14.5E
5G1 V60 0:5G1
/14.5E
1
7K2 V60 0:7K2
/14.5E
6G2 V60 0:6G2
/14.5E
-V600 3
C C
D D
-A600
E E
5L1.8
a
/9.3A
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/8.2F
/6.2F
/7.2F
5L1.8
5N.1
5L1.2
UPS1 UE-EE-UPS
A A
W12 9
0
-L600
1
W13 1
B B
C C
2
-BBR_N
W13 0
D D
L1
-BBR_A6_1
PE
-BBR16 N
PE
-BBR_A6_4
E E
-A006 L N
-X006
L N
-X6.1
a
14.10.21 BYPASS CABINET UE-EE-UPS
F Rev. intern
D400E230/174-BYP F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
60 5 X13A X8:1 A7 X8:1

/4.3A /11.1D
WZ_A007:X13A W55
X15A X8:2 A7 X8:2
/11.1D
W54
A A
X18A X8:3 A7 X8:3

/11.1D
W56
60 7 X13AN X8:4 A7 X8:4
/4.8A /11.1D
WZ_A007:X13AN W53
X13B X13
WZ_A100:X13-A007:X13
X15B X15
WZ_A100:X15-A007:X15
X18B X18
Parallel board- driver WZ_A100:X18-A007:X18
X13BN
B -A007 LA N B
2 1 rd +24V
-F75 0
SNMP- COM 1 A25 0 X2
/11.6F
-X750 0V
bk Adapter WZ4
WZ3
W57 W58 -A750
11 5
/2.5B
WZ_A100:X25
11 8 60 8
/2.8F /4.8E
WZ_A100:X16 WZ_A100:X20
-L460 -L450
C /2.5F
11 7
/7.8F
53 0
C
WZ_A100:X11 WZ_A100:X2
11 6
/2.3F
WZ_A100:X12
X12 X11 X16 X13 X15 X18 X2 X20 X25 X10 X3:1 X3:2 X3:3
A10 0 X31:1 W8 X31:1

/7.8C
X4:1 A10 0 X4:1
/11.1B
A10 0 X31:2 W27 X31:2 W59
/7.8C
X4:2 A10 0 X4:2
/11.1C
X31:3 W64
X4:3 A10 0 X4:3
/11.1C
W61 D
D P41
X19:1 A10 0 X19:1
/11.1C
W63
P42 X19:2 A10 0 X19:2
/11.1C
W60
WZ4 WZ5 X19:3 A10 0 X19:3
/11.1D
W62
PE
PE
X19:4 A10 0 X19:4

/11.1D
W65
Controller board CAN-bus

-A100 X27:1 X27:2 X33:1 X33:2 X1 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X22
E E
24 1.4 A26 0
/15.7F /19.1C
WZ_CAN-BUS 24 1.3 12 8
/11.6F /14.1D
WZ_A100:X5
12 7 12 9
/3.2C /13.1E
WZ_A100:X9 WZ_A100:X6
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/5.7E
/5.4E
2L+.40 0
/3.5D
2L-.40 0
/3.5C
6L1.5
5N.3
A A
/7.7E
12
14
1
3
-Q400 W77 -Q401
10A-D
4
6A
11
2
4
L+
LT
24
X1 22 21
14
IL_ PT 12 11 /16.3B -L402
W69 n=4
B PE B
-A009 W94 W95
20 0kOhm W47
PE
L- 1
-X040
X2 X1
A10 0 X4:1 -BBR_X040

/10.7D
A10 0 X4:2
/10.7D
1
A10 0 X4:3 W70 W71 -L401 -A402 Rectifier board
/10.7D
X22 X21
2
W78 W79
-L400
C C
n=4 X10 0:1 X10 0:2
X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X1:4 X1:8 X22 X21
A10 0 X19:1 X9:1
/10.7D
Input DC1 Input DC2
A10 0 X19:2 X9:2 X5:1 W82 A20 0 X6:1
/10.7D /12.1A
A10 0 X19:3 X9:3 X5:2 W83 A20 0 X6:2

/10.7D /12.1A
A10 0 X19:4 X9:4 X5:3

/10.7E
A7 X8:1 X8:1 X6:1 W84 A40 0 X6:1

/10.3A /12.6A
D D
A7 X8:2 X8:2 X6:2 W85 A40 0 X6:2
/10.3A /12.6A
A7 X8:3 X8:3 X6:3

/10.3A
A7 X8:4 X8:4
/10.3A Mains supply unit
X7:1 X7:2 X7:3 X10:1 X10:2 X10:3 X10:4 X11:1 X11:2 X11:3 X12:1 X12:2 X12:3 X600:1 X600:2 X600:3
-A400
W66 W68 W67 A52 0 X4:1 W80 W81 A40 0 X60 0:2
/7.5A /7.8E
A52 0 X4:2 A40 0 X60 0:3
/7.5A /7.8E
X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 A40 0 X12:1
/14.8D
A40 0 X12:2
/14.8E
E A52 0 X9:1 X1:1 X6:1 W72 X4:1 X5:1 W87 A45 0 X6:1 E
/7.8C /15.1D
X1:2 X6:2 X4:2

Protokoll - Gateway X5:2
A52 0 X19:2 W73 W88 A45 0 X6:2
/7.8D /15.1D
Logic Analyser
Interface
CAN-BUS
X6:3 W74 X4:3 X5:3 W86 A45 0 X6:3
PCMCIA
/15.1D
RS-485
RS-232
SLOT
2L-.46 2 X3:4
/3.2E
-A250
2L+.46 2 X3:8 X1 X2 X3 X6 X7
/3.2E
X5:1 A45 0 X5:1 24 1.2
/14.8E /12.6A
W75 A25 0 X2 WZ_CAN-BUS
/10.8B
a X5:2 A45 0 X5:2 X6
/14.8E
14.10.21 W76 24 1.3
DC-link precharger /10.4E
F Rev. intern
-A450 -A251 F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A40 0 X6:1
A /11.6D
A
A40 0 X6:2
/11.6D
A20 0 X6:1
/11.6C
A20 0 X6:2 24 1.2 24 1.6

/11.6D /11.8F /18.3E
WZ_CAN-BUS
X6:1 X6:2 X6:3 X8:1 X8:2 X8:3 X7 X9:1
B CAN-BUS B
Fan control
X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 X1:4 X1:5 X2:1 X2:2 X2:3 X2:4 X2:5 X3:1 X3:2 X3:3 X3:4 X3:5 X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X4:4 X4:5 X5:1 X5:2 X5:3 X5:4 X5:5
-A200
W12 W11 W10 W9 W13 W16 W14 W15
C C
1 2 3 5 1 2 3 5
-X200 -X202
rt bl ye wh rt bl ye wh rt bl ye wh rt bl ye wh
D D
M M M M
DC DC DC DC
-M200 -M202 -M200 -M202
Cooling fan Inverter 1 Left Cooling fan Inverter 1 Right Cooling fan Rectifier 1 Left Cooling fan Rectifier 1 Right
-A065 -A065
E E
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-T00 1_45
/1.4D
-T00 1_46
/1.4D
-T00 1_44
/1.4D
-T00 1_43
/1.4D
-T00 1_42
/1.3D
A23 0 X3.7:1
/15.3E
-T00 1_41
/1.3D
B B
A23 0 X3.7:3
/15.3F
W19
12
14
W17
/8.5A
T60 l -Q100
/3.4E
11
T60 k
/8.5A
C W18 C
X11:1 X11:2 X21:1 X21:2 X31:1 X31:2 X61:1 X61:2 X62:1 X62:2 X63:1 X63:2 X64:1 X64:2 X7:1 X7:2 X7:3
X10 X8:1
1L1.1 X1 X8:2
/1.3C
1L2.1 X2 X8:3
/1.3C
1L3.1 X3
/1.3C
X9:1
D D
X9:2
X9:3
Measurement board
X5 X18:1 X18:2 X18:3 X18:4 X18:5 X19:1 X19:2 X19:3 X19:4 X19:5
-A110
12 9
/10.6F
E E
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A23 0 X3.8:1
/15.3E
A23 0 X3.8:3
/15.3E
A A
T00 6:45 W20 W21

/5.3B
T00 6:44
/5.3B
W22
T00 6:43
/5.3B Supply air temperature sensor
T00 6:42
/5.3B
13
2
-R010 -K001
B .2D
B
14
W23
X11:1 X11:2 X21:1 X21:2 X31:1 X31:2 X61:1 X61:2 X62:1 X62:2 X63:1 X63:2 X64:1 X64:2 X7:1 X7:2 X7:3 W24
5N.4 X10
/6.3C :N
X4:1
X4:2
X4:3
C C
X9:1
X9:2
X9:3
Thyristor control
-A160 X5 X19:1 X19:2 X19:3 X19:4 X19:5 X***.1 X***.2 X***.3 X***.4 X1:1 X1:2 X1:3 X1:4 X1:5
12 8 W89 W90
D /10.6E D
gy bu rd gy
WZ_V600
A1
-K001
A2
A40 0 X12:1
/11.5E
A10 5 X4:1
/1.7C
V60 0:6G2 A40 0 X12:2
/8.5C /11.5E
A10 5 X4:3 V60 0:7K2
/1.7C /8.5C
V60 0:4K1 A45 0 X5:1

/8.5B /11.3F
V60 0:5G1
/8.5B
E A45 0 X5:2 E
/11.3F
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BYPASS CABINET UE-EE-UPS External battery circuit breaker

D400E230/174-BYP
12
A A
11
14
-X* * *
4
-X12.2
B B
Battery temperature
1
-R400
2
C C
X12.1:1 X12.1:2 X12.2:1 X12.2:2 X12.3:1 X12.3:2 X12.4:1 X12.4:2 X12.5:1 X12.5:2 X12.6:1 X12.6:2 X40 0:1 X40 0:2
Manual bypass
Remote Power OFF

External output isolator open
Battery temperature
Battery charging off
External battery circuit breaker
Coupling switch
A45 0 X6:1 X7:1 X24:1
/11.8E
A45 0 X6:2 X7:2 X24:2

/11.8E
A45 0 X6:3 X7:3

D /11.8E D
W91 X8:1 X1
W92 X8:2
CAN- X4
W93 X8:3 BUS
Manual bypass External battery circuit breaker

-A230
E X3.8:1 X3.8:2 X3.8:3 X3.7:1 X3.7:2 X3.7:3 E
A23 0 X3.8:1
/14.6A
A23 0 X3.8:3
/14.6A
A23 0 X8:1 A23 0 X3.7:1

/16.1D /13.8B
A23 0 X8:2 A23 0 X3.7:3 24 1.4 24 1.10
/16.1D /13.8B /10.4E /16.7E
A23 0 X8:3 WZ_CAN-BUS
/16.1D
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BYPASS CABINET UE-EE-UPS Distribution MCCB

D400E230/174-BYP tripped/open
A A
-X* x x
6
-X12.2
B B
14
12
-A009
/11.4A
11
W26 W25
C C
X12.1:1 X12.1:2 X12.2:1 X12.2:2 X12.3:1 X12.3:2 X12.4:1 X12.4:2 X12.5:1 X12.5:2 X12.6:1 X12.6:2 X40 0:1 X40 0:2 X40 0:3
Output switch DC Earth fault MCCB

open alarm tripped/open
A23 0 X8:1 X7:1 X24:1

/15.2E
A23 0 X8:2 X7:2 X24:2

/15.2F
A23 0 X8:3 X7:3

/15.2F
D D
X8:1 X1
X8:2
CAN- X4
X8:3 BUS

-A231
X3.8:1 X3.8:2 X3.8:3 X3.7:1 X3.7:2 X3.7:3
E E
24 1.10
/15.8F
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
X3.1:1 X3.1:2 X3.1:3 X3.2:1 X3.2:2 X3.2:3 X3.3:1 X3.3:2 X3.3:3 X3.4:1 X3.4:2 X3.4:3 X3.5:1 X3.5:2 X3.5:3 X3.6:1 X3.6:2 X3.6:3 X3.1:1 X3.1:2 X3.1:3 X3.2:1 X3.2:2 X3.2:3 X3.3:1 X3.3:2 X3.3:3 X3.4:1 X3.4:2 X3.4:3 X3.5:1 X3.5:2 X3.5:3 X3.6:1 X3.6:2 X3.6:3
C C
* * * * * * * * * * * *
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6
Mains failure
Battery discharged
Battery circuit fault (MCCB tripped/open)

DC Earth fault alarm
Charger fault
Mains operation
Bypass operation
Manual bypass
Battery operation
Common alarm
Battery low voltage
D D
* Contact position in case of alarm/occurrence * Contact position in case of alarm/occurrence

E E
Customer connection board Customer connection board

a
14.10.21 -A230 -A231
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
X2:1 X2:2 X2:3 X2:4 X2:5 X2:6 X2:7 X2:8 X3:1 X3:2
GND
GND
RS485-
RS485+
LED Display
EPO_N
L+24
L+24
PE
H1 Power supply Intern H8 Failure
H2 Mains operation H9 Battery low voltage
B B
H3 Battery operation H10 Battery circuit fault
H4 Bypass operation H11 DC Earth fault alarm
H5 Parallel operation H12 Output switch open
C C
H6 Manual bypass H13 Distribution MCCB tripped
H7 Overload S1 LED-test/Reset
Control panel CAN-BUS LED-controller CAN-BUS

D A240 A241 D
X1 X4
-A240, -A241
WZ_CAN-BUS
E E
24 1.6
/12.7A
WZ_CAN-BUS
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
UPS 1 2 3 5 7 9
A -A260:X3.1
A
3 10 2 3 4 5 7 9 Sh ield
-A260:X3 -A260:X2
-C1000
B BK PK BN GN GY YE WH WH YE GY GN BN PK BK B
WZ10 WZ11
WZ260
C /10.6E
A26 0
C
X1 X3:1 X3:2 X3:3 X3:4 X3:5 X3:6 X3:7 X3:8 X3:9 X3:10 X3.1:1 X3.1:2 X3.1:3 X3.1:4 X3.1:5 X3.1:6 X3.1:7 X3.1:8 X3.1:9 X3.1:10 X4:1 X4:2 X4:3 X4:4 X4:5 X4:6 X2:1 X2:2 X2:3 X2:4 X2:5 X2:6 X2:7 X2:8 X2:9 Shield
Shield
K6_BUS_IS_On
K6_BUS_IS_Off
K6_BUS_IS_Off
Controller
Thyonp
Thyonp
Shield
24V
GND
24V
GND
Connect3
Connect1
Connect2
Connect4
PE
PE
K6_BUS_IS_On
Synconbus
Synconbus
D D
Pardata6
Pardata7
Pardata5
Pardata5
Pardata6
Pardata7
E E
Parallel interface board

-A260 X8:1 X8:2 X8:3 X8:4 X8:5 X8:6
a
14.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External supply
A 230V, AC, 50Hz A
B B
N
L
L
-X030
-BBR_L
-BBR_N
PE
PE
W48
C C
1
-F302
6A-B
2
q
D D
RF/Acc.
-B300
+15 °C 2 3 L N
W28 W32
W30 W33
W29
L
L
-X301 -X302
E E
L
-E301 -E302 L
N
N
N
-X301 -X302
W31
a
14.10.21 Heater
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bypass-mains 400V 3W/PE~ 60Hz

A A
L1 L2 L3
-X5
-X50
8
4
7
2
5
3
W29 W30 W31
6
W44 W45
PE1
PE2
-Q1 I> I> I>
11 2-16 0A
PE
.3D
.3E
16 0A
B B
W32 W33 W34
S1
-T13 S2 W22
W21
S1
-T12 S2 W24
W19
C S1 W23
C
-T11 S2 W20
W35
1 9 3
1= Input cu rrent L1
2 6
W26 2= Input cu rrent L2
1W1
1U1
1V1
1V1
-S1 10
1 3
3= Input cu rrent L3
4
W27 W25
-T5
A
2
1
D D
-P1
.3B
Input cu rrent
0-20 0A
2U2
2U1
PE1
.3B
PE2
W46 W47
U1 N1
E PE E
-T55
U2 N2
W48
N.1
L.1
b
/3.1E
/2.1A
13.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 23.07.20 21
D400E230/174-BYP
Drawn SL AN BY PAS S CA BINE T UE-EE-UPS
Bypass
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/1.2F
N.1
A A
6
1
5
-BBR1
L.3.2
/3.1B
W53 L.3.1
/3.1B
1N.3
1
1
B -F51.1 -F51.2 B
W51 W52 W57 W58
40 0A aR 40 0A aR
/3.6C
2
2
W49 W54
-X50 -X50
L N L N
-X5.1 -X5.2
3
N
N
L
L
-X005 -X005
C -X050 -X050 C
UPS1 UE-EE-UPS UPS2 UE-EE-UPS
L
N
N
-X006 D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG -X006 D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
L N L N
-X6.1 -X6.2
W50 W55
1 2 /4.3D 1 2 /4.6D D
D BBR3 BBR5
12
14
12
14
2
2
6
-Q52.1 -Q52.2
11
11
1
1
5
BBR4 1 2
BBR6 1 2
W56 L.4
/3.1B
E E
b
13.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 23.07.20 21
D400E230/174-BYP
Bypass
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
L.4
/2.7E
L.3.2
/2.7A
B B
L.3.1
/2.7B
W38 W37 W39 W36
12
2
5
/4.5D
107 108
105 106
103 104
/4.2D
102 101
C C
/2.3B
1N.3
W42
6/10
W43
4/8
D D
1= Auto 1 2 3
1 2 /4.3D /4.7D
2= Test BBR7
3= Bypass
12
14
22
24
1
5
-Q6
11
21
2
6
BBR8 1 2
9/11
1/3
-Q500
W41 W40 W59 W60
E E
L.1
/1.2F
-X50
N
L
-X6
b
13.10.21
Load 230V 1W/N/PE~ 60Hz
F Rev. intern
F
Date 23.07.20 21
D400E230/174-BYP
Bypass
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
B B
C C
D D
10 7
10 2
12
14
12
14
12
14
22
24
-Q500 -Q52.1 -Q6 -Q500 -Q52.2 -Q6
/3.3E /2.4D /3.5D /3.3E /2.6D /3.5D
10 8
10 1
11
11
11
21
W2 W1 W4 W5 W3 W6 W7 W10 W9 W8 W11 W12
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
-X12.1 -X12.2
E E
X12.1:1 X12.1:2 X12.2:1 X12.2:2 X12.1:1 X12.1:2 X12.1:1 X12.1:2 X12.2:1 X12.2:2 X12.1:1 X12.1:2
-A230 -A231 -A230 -A231
UPS1 UE-EE-UPS UPS2 UE-EE-UPS

D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
b
13.10.21
F Rev. intern
F
Date 23.07.20 21
D400E230/174-BYP
Bypass
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
External supply
A 230V, AC, 60Hz A
B B
N
L
L
-X030
-BBR_L
-BBR_N
PE
PE
W28
C C
1
-F302
6A-B
2
q
D D
RF/Acc.
-B300
+15 °C 2 3 L N
W13 W17
W15 W18
W14
L
L
-X301 -X302
E E
L
-E301 -E302 L
N
N
N
-X301 -X302
W16
b
13.10.21 Heater
F Rev. intern
F
Date 23.07.20 21
D400E230/174-BYP
Bypass
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4. BOM
12/15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Row Part number ▲1 Remarks ▲2 Name Description Type designation Manufacturer

Pos.
A 1 10133427 -A001 RFI filter 10129416.00E0 Benning A
2 10133430 -A005 RFI filter 1-Phase, 300V, CAT III-UKH150 Benning

4 547348 -A007 Adapter board 61742.03E000A3; 1PH/2LT Benning
5 770132 -A009 Insulation monitor 12-280V DC IL5881.12/100 Dold
6 10063574 -A050 Power device BYP EN I 3-1, 50-60kVA Benning
7 10063513 -A061 Power device GR EN I3 060KVA 220V Benning
B B
8 10063482 -A062 Power device INV 220V 1PH 060KVA Benning
9 10116693 -A100 Controller board 10115868.00E0 Benning
10 10148776 -A101 RFI filter A101/601 480/690V CATIII/II Benning
11 10210854 -A105 Charging device 10210033.00E000A3 Benning
12 10148437 -A110 Measuring board 480VAC UL Benning
13 10051718 -A130 Filter USV-ANLAGEN 10-120KVA Benning
C
14 10147847 -A160 Bypass board 10149109.01E0 Benning
C
15 10063613 -A200 Fan control 24V Benning
16 10051778 -A230 Input/Output board 62572.01E000A3 Benning
18 548090 -A240, -A241 Display and operating unit ENERTRONIC (USV) Benning
19 10208722 -A250 Interface PG RS232/RS485/DIL-PC Benning
20 10020001 -A260 Parallel operation board ENERTRONIC I/P/L NEU Benning
D D
21 10023180 -A400 Power supply 62446.01E000A3 Benning
22 556926 -A402 Rectifier board Rectifier board, 1ph. ENERTRONIC Benning
23 10000037 -A410 Measuring board 62238.01E000A3 Benning
24 10020174 -A450 Charging device ZWK 110/220/380 VDC Benning
26 10150776 -A600 Power device double arm switch Benning
E E
28 744142 -A750 Adapter CS-121L (9-36VDC) Generex Hamburg
29 10082028 -B300 Temperature controller FZK 011, +5°C...+60°C STEGO Elektrotechnik GmbH
30 720843 -BBR_L Bridge FBS 2-5, 2-pol. Phoenix Contact
31 720843 -BBR_N Bridge FBS 2-5, 2-pol. Phoenix Contact
32 10154657 -C100 Filter 10196007.01M0 Benning
33 10145717 -C600 Output filter QC=28 % 220 VAC Benning
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
Parts list for customer 61300004182.00R000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 34 10063389 -E301 Switchgear cabinet heating 107053, 230V 40W Horn GmbH A
35 10063389 -E302 Switchgear cabinet heating 107053, 230V 40W Horn GmbH
36 10103509 -F302 Circuit-breaker 6A 1-pol. - B Schneider - Merlin Gerin
37 749385 -F750 Fuse contact 1-pol.Schraub.0,5-16mm? Phoenix Contact
38 10123037 -K001 Contactor AF52, 3-pol., 24-60V UC ABB Stotz - Kontakt
39 10028003 -K001_AUX1 Auxiliary contact CA4-10 ABB Stotz - Kontakt
B B
41 718593 -L100 Toroidal tape wound core RK102/76/25 Band, T60006-L2102W468 Vacuumschmelze
42 718324 -L400 Toroidal core RK36/23/15 Ferrit Ferroxcube
43 550488 -L401 Inductor EI 6623/21.0, 4-5,5 mH Benning
45 718324 -L402. Toroidal core RK36/23/15 Ferrit Ferroxcube
C
47 718123 -L450 Toroidal core RK20/10/10 Band Kaschke
C
49 10007930 -L600 Inductor DR 15042/164; 260A
51 10095307 -L700 Inductor DR 17057/112 Benning
52 10146322 -Q001 Circuit-breaker Tmax XT2N 3-pol. 690V/125A ABB Stotz - Kontakt
53 750373 -Q100 Fuse switch disconnector NH2 3-pol 690VAC 440VDC 400A Efen
D D
54 750376 -Q100_AUX Microswitch NH1-3 3-4-pol Efen
55 749087 -Q100_F1 Disconnecting blade NH Gr. 2 / 400A FREMD...
57 10050278 -Q400 Fuse holder 2-pol. / 10x38 Siba
58 10148646 -Q400_F1 Cartridge fuse 10x38 6AT 600V Bussmann
60 10103812 -Q401 Circuit-breaker 10A 2-pol. - D Schneider - Merlin Gerin
E E
61 10104318 -Q401_AUX Auxiliary switch A9A26869 Merlin Gerin
62 751395 -R010 Temperature sensor PT1000, 3000 mm Peters Indu-Produkt GmbH
63 OPTION95 -R400 Temperature monitoring unit ENERTRONIC I/L/P Benning
64 10109338 -T001 Transformer DTr 450120/7 Benning
65 10125308 -T006 Transformer ETR 300150/3 Benning
66 777367 -T040 Current transformer 008-B36, passiv 300A/0.5A 0.06kHz Gutre
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 67 777368 -T060 Current transformer 007-B36 Gutre A
68 777368 -T500 Current transformer 007-B36 Gutre

69 10152230 -X050 Contact rail PE 8xM8 Benning
70 10152230 -X051 Contact rail PE-Schiene Benning
71 734624 WZ4 Data cable RS232/DB9 FEM./FEM. Pro-Data
72 751449 -A050 -R501 Temperature sensor PT1000, 850 mm Peters Indu-Produkt GmbH
73 765059 -A050 -V500 Thyristor thyristor module MCC552-16io2 FREMD...
B B
74 547292 -A061 -A001 Driver board SMD 3R3 3,3 USEC Benning
77 547299 -A061 -A010 Measuring board 61864.00E000A3 Benning
78 10046848 -A061 -A401 Filter board 62324.00E000A3 Benning
79 547113 -A061 -A430 Current sink 61636.00E000A4 Benning
C
80 724334 -A061 -C400 Electrolytic capacitor EPC (52X132), 350V 3300uF 20% Epcos
C
81 751323 -A061 -R012 Temperature sensor PT1000, 400 mm Benning
84 777416 -A061 -T001 Current transformer HAL 300-S, aktiv 300A/4V 50kHz Benning
D D
87 767267 -A061 -V012 IGBT-Module CM600DY-12NF #... E,F,G..N Mitsubishi
E E
98 777370 -A062 -T004 Current transformer HAT 800-S, aktiv 800A/4V 50kHz Lem
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 100 767267 -A062 -V043 IGBT-Module CM600DY-12NF #... E,F,G..N Mitsubishi A

103 543526 -A065 inverter -M200 Fan 24VDC Benning
105 543526 -A065 rectifier -M200 Fan 24VDC Benning
B B
107 749310 -A130 -F130_L1 Fuse-link D01 16AgL/gG 400V Ferraz Shawmut - Lindner
110 10007635 -A200 -A200 Fan control 62349.01E000A3 Benning
111 10138917 -A520 -A521 Changeover board 10138054..00E000A3 Benning
C
113 724276 -C1000 -C1000 Foil capacitor MKP-SNUBBER (41.5X20X29.5h), 1600V 0.68… Wima
C
114 720753 -C1000 GND1 Terminal SK14 Sheeld terminal 3-14mm Phoenix Contact
118 713761 -X001 L1 Terminal block UKH 50, 1-pol. 25-70/16-70mm² Phoenix Contact
D D
121 713761 -X001 N Terminal block UKH 50, 1-pol. 25-70/16-70mm² Phoenix Contact
122 720693 -X005 L Terminal block UKH 150, 1-pol. 35/50-150mm² Phoenix Contact
123 720693 -X005 N Terminal block UKH 150, 1-pol. 35/50-150mm² Phoenix Contact
126 10000190 -X030 1 Triple level terminal ST 2,5-PE/L/N, 3-pol. Zugfeder 0,08-2,5/4mm² Phoenix Contact
E E
128 10063602 inverter -A065 Fan 2x Lufter 24V Benning
129 749013 link -F750 Cartridge fuse 5x20 0.5AT 250V Littelfuse- Tracor
130 10063602 rectifier -A065 Fan 2x Lufter 24V Benning
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 1 10133427 -A001 RFI filter 10129416.00E0 Benning A

4 547348 -A007 Adapter board 61742.03E000A3; 1PH/2LT Benning
5 770132 -A009 Insulation monitor 12-280V DC IL5881.12/100 Dold
6 10063574 -A050 Power device BYP EN I 3-1, 50-60kVA Benning
7 10063513 -A061 Power device GR EN I3 060KVA 220V Benning
B B
8 10063482 -A062 Power device INV 220V 1PH 060KVA Benning
9 10116693 -A100 Controller board 10115868.00E0 Benning
11 10210854 -A105 Charging device 10210033.00E000A3 Benning
12 10148437 -A110 Measuring board 480VAC UL Benning
13 10051718 -A130 Filter USV-ANLAGEN 10-120KVA Benning
C
C
15 10063613 -A200 Fan control 24V Benning
18 548090 -A240, -A241 Display and operating unit ENERTRONIC (USV) Benning
19 10208722 -A250 Interface PG RS232/RS485/DIL-PC Benning
20 10020001 -A260 Parallel operation board ENERTRONIC I/P/L NEU Benning
D D
21 10023180 -A400 Power supply 62446.01E000A3 Benning
22 556926 -A402 Rectifier board Rectifier board, 1ph. ENERTRONIC Benning
23 10000037 -A410 Measuring board 62238.01E000A3 Benning
24 10020174 -A450 Charging device ZWK 110/220/380 VDC Benning
26 10150776 -A600 Power device double arm switch Benning
E E
28 744142 -A750 Adapter CS-121L (9-36VDC) Generex Hamburg
29 10082028 -B300 Temperature controller FZK 011, +5°C...+60°C STEGO Elektrotechnik GmbH
30 720843 -BBR_L Bridge FBS 2-5, 2-pol. Phoenix Contact
31 720843 -BBR_N Bridge FBS 2-5, 2-pol. Phoenix Contact
32 10154657 -C100 Filter 10196007.01M0 Benning
33 10145717 -C600 Output filter QC=28 % 220 VAC Benning
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 34 10063389 -E301 Switchgear cabinet heating 107053, 230V 40W Horn GmbH A
37 749385 -F750 Fuse contact 1-pol.Schraub.0,5-16mm? Phoenix Contact
38 10123037 -K001 Contactor AF52, 3-pol., 24-60V UC ABB Stotz - Kontakt
B B
43 550488 -L401 Inductor EI 6623/21.0, 4-5,5 mH Benning
45 718324 -L402. Toroidal core RK36/23/15 Ferrit Ferroxcube
C
C
49 10007930 -L600 Inductor DR 15042/164; 260A
51 10095307 -L700 Inductor DR 17057/112 Benning
53 750373 -Q100 Fuse switch disconnector NH2 3-pol 690VAC 440VDC 400A Efen
D D
54 750376 -Q100_AUX Microswitch NH1-3 3-4-pol Efen
57 10050278 -Q400 Fuse holder 2-pol. / 10x38 Siba
60 10103812 -Q401 Circuit-breaker 10A 2-pol. - D Schneider - Merlin Gerin
E E
61 10104318 -Q401_AUX Auxiliary switch A9A26869 Merlin Gerin
62 751395 -R010 Temperature sensor PT1000, 3000 mm Peters Indu-Produkt GmbH
63 OPTION95 -R400 Temperature monitoring unit ENERTRONIC I/L/P Benning
64 10109338 -T001 Transformer DTr 450120/7 Benning
65 10125308 -T006 Transformer ETR 300150/3 Benning
66 777367 -T040 Current transformer 008-B36, passiv 300A/0.5A 0.06kHz Gutre
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 67 777368 -T060 Current transformer 007-B36 Gutre A
68 777368 -T500 Current transformer 007-B36 Gutre

69 10152230 -X050 Contact rail PE 8xM8 Benning
71 734624 WZ4 Data cable RS232/DB9 FEM./FEM. Pro-Data
72 751449 -A050 -R501 Temperature sensor PT1000, 850 mm Peters Indu-Produkt GmbH
B B
C
C
D D
E E
98 777370 -A062 -T004 Current transformer HAT 800-S, aktiv 800A/4V 50kHz Lem
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 100 767267 -A062 -V043 IGBT-Module CM600DY-12NF #... E,F,G..N Mitsubishi A

B B
110 10007635 -A200 -A200 Fan control 62349.01E000A3 Benning
111 10138917 -A520 -A521 Changeover board 10138054..00E000A3 Benning
C
113 724276 -C1000 -C1000 Foil capacitor MKP-SNUBBER (41.5X20X29.5h), 1600V 0.68… Wima
C
D D
121 713761 -X001 N Terminal block UKH 50, 1-pol. 25-70/16-70mm² Phoenix Contact
E E
128 10063602 inverter -A065 Fan 2x Lufter 24V Benning
129 749013 link -F750 Cartridge fuse 5x20 0.5AT 250V Littelfuse- Tracor
130 10063602 rectifier -A065 Fan 2x Lufter 24V Benning
F Rev. intern
F
Date 22.07.20 21
D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 1 10082028 -B300 Temperature controller FZK 011, +5°C...+60°C STEGO Elektrotechnik GmbH A
4 549984 -F51.1 Fuse-base NH Gr. 2 Jean Müller
5 748443 -F51.1 Fuse-link NH-GR.2 400AaR 500V Siba
6 549984 -F51.2 Fuse-base NH Gr. 2 Jean Müller
7 748443 -F51.2 Fuse-link NH-GR.2 400AaR 500V Siba
B B
9 10004775 -P1 Moving-iron ammeter 200A/400A/5A, SQ96DE KL 1,5 AMS-Messtechnik
11 10046097 -Q6 Switch-disconnector INV160, 690V 160A 3-pol. Schneider - Merlin Gerin
12 748238 -Q6_AUX1 Auxiliary contact 29452, LS Interpact. 1W Merlin Gerin
13 748238 -Q6_AUX2 Auxiliary contact 29452, LS Interpact. 1W Merlin Gerin
C
14 751440 -Q52.1 Switch-disconnector INS100 609V 100A 3-pol Schneider Electric
C
15 748238 -Q52.1 Auxiliary contact 29452, LS Interpact. 1W Merlin Gerin
16 751440 -Q52.2 Switch-disconnector INS100 609V 100A 3-pol Schneider Electric
17 748238 -Q52.2 Auxiliary contact 29452, LS Interpact. 1W Merlin Gerin
18 10225730 -Q500 Changeover switch C125 D-A1M9*02 E, 2-pol. 690V 150A Kraus & Naimer GmbH
19 721132 -S1 Changeover switch CH10-A017/D-W003EG, 1-pol. 690V 20A Kraus & Naimer GmbH
20 10228179 -T5 3- to 1-phase transformer DTR 915405 Benning
D D
21 10172848 -T11 Current transformer TA32750C200 IME Messgerate GmbH
24 00100172668 -T55 Project item Regulator M212E45 IREM
E E
29 720693 -X5.1 L Terminal block UKH 150, 1-pol. 35/50-150mm² Phoenix Contact
30 720693 -X5.1 N Terminal block UKH 150, 1-pol. 35/50-150mm² Phoenix Contact
F Rev. intern
F
Date 23.07.20 21
D400E230/174-BYP
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Pos.
A 34 720693 -X6 N Terminal block UKH 150, 1-pol. 35/50-150mm² Phoenix Contact A
39 10018815 -X12.1 1 Terminal block UT 4, 1-pol. 0.14-4/6mm² Phoenix Contact
B B
C
C
D D
E E
F Rev. intern
F
Date 23.07.20 21
D400E230/174-BYP
ENERTRONIC I3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BENNINGConversion d'énergie BILL OF MATERIAL
230VAC DISTRIBUTION BOARD - UE-EE-UPS
V5370-013
E230E230/250 VT
Part Number Quantity Designation Component Name
61314335 1 CB TRI XT3N 250 TMD 250A ABB 068059 Q001
61300862 1 AMM A96DI TI 250/5A CL1.5 250A P2
61300957 1 TC TA30 250/5A T1.1
61300178 1 RELAY 4RT 5A 220VAC 1401/RX-P7 K6
61300190 1 SOCKET DIN RXZE2S114M K6
61300055 1 CELLUL RC .22UF 47E PMR 209 RC1
61350133 1 CB BI S202L 6A "C" ABB 6kA 350233 Q31
61311406 1 CB UNI+N ABB ''C'' 6A SN201L Q1
61309201 1 THERMOSTAT 0-60°C 0 TH1
10063389 1 SWITCHGEAR CABINET HEATING 230V 40W (3.3x200x150) RH
61321756 2 CB TRI AC/DC 50A 18kA ABB XT1B160TMD 066804 Q01..Q02
61318209 4 CB TRI XT1B 160 TMD 32A ABB 066802 Q03..Q06
61318208 27 CB TRI XT1B 160 TMD 20A ABB 066800 Q07..Q33
61321757 33 AUX 1OF ABB XT1..XT4 066422 Q001-Q01..Q33
525173 1 FRONT PLATE M96 BLEU ANALOG (P2)
10017730 1 BASE CABINET UC 1988 CAB.
100174254 1 FRONT DOOR BRUT UC-XE198X 39U + VENTIL 12U RAL7033 DWG. 1021 DOOR
V5370-02_BOM 1/1
BAT. MCCB BOX
V5370-014

61308441 1 CAB. 835*635*300 RAL7035 POLYESTER NEMA4X FIBOX CAB
61313026 1 VOLT RELAY 220V GUW104/105 RV1
61306489 1 CB TRI MOELLER 200A NZMN2-A200 AC/DC QB
61321270 1 COIL MINI UVR 200-250VDC NZM2/3-XU220-250DC UVR
61308897 1 AUX. "10+1F" EATON M22-CK11 QB
61300670 1 SOCKET 2P CMS14 DF485204 F31
61300519 2 FUSE 14*51 Gl 690V 4A F31
V5370-02_BOM 1/1
220VDC BATTERY FOR 40KVA UPS 1 STRING 185xSBM84
V5370-015

61318207 1 BATTERY RACK SGL4-20 RACK
61307925 185 BAT NiCd 84Ah SBM 84 BAT.
61303221 1 DENSIMETRE/THERMOMETRE 0-60øC ACC.
61303218 1 SILICON/GREASE TERMINAL ACC.
734146 30 CABLE BLACK HO7VK 95mm²
761172 2 CABLE LUG 95mmý DIA= 8mm
761158 6 CABLE LUG 95mmý DIA=10mm
V5370-02_BOM 1/1
5. TCP/IP INTERFACE
13/15
A4170436
UPS WEB/SNMP MANAGER
CS121 Series
User Manual - English

Benutzerhandbuch - Deutsch
Rel.48
Limited Warranty
This software and the enclosed materials are provided without warranty of any kind.
The entire risk as to software quality, performance of the program, media free of
defects, faulty workmanship, incorrect use of the software or UPS, error free
documentation and enclosed material is assumed by the user. We do not take any
warranty to the correct functions of the software and the security of your system nor
files, that might be damaged to due to possibly not correct function of our software.
No warranty to correct functions of the software with the operating systems, loss of
data or interruption of work processes, other UPS problems or to other errors that
may occur out of this combination.
Copyright:
The information contained in this manual is non-conditional and may be changed

without due notice. The software manufacturer undertakes no obligations with this
information. The software described in this brochure is given on the basis of a
license contract and an obligation to secrecy (i.e. an obligation not to further
publicize the software material). The purchaser may make a single copy of the
software material for backup purposes. No parts of this manual may be transferred to
third persons, either electronically or mechanically, or by photocopies or similar
means, without the express written permission of the software manufacturer.
The UPS-Management software includes a license key for each license. This license
is valid for using the UPS service on one server with one UPS and an unlimited
number of connected UPSMON-WINDOWS workstations. For operation on several
servers a license for every new server is required, disregarding the fact if UPS
service runs at that location or if the server is halted by an UPS service via remote
command RCCMD. The same regulations are applicable to the use of remote
send/receive modules RCCMD and multiserver shutdown under Windows OS, MAC
OS and Unix. The service programs are generally delivered as a single license. If
there is more than one disk in one package all of them have the same serial number
and must not be used for future installations. To use a single CD-ROM for several
multiserver shutdown installations you have to purchase additional CD license keys.
Copyright of the European Union is effective (Copyright EU).
Copyright (c) 1994-2006 GENEREX GmbH, Hamburg, Germany. All rights reserved.
W E E E & R o H S : T h i s p r o d u c t i s c o m p l i a n t t o t h e EU Directive WEEE
2002/96/EC, RoHS 2002/95/EC and the German implementation of the Electrical
and Electronic Equipment Law. The product is leadfree and does not contain Lead,
Cadmium, Mercury, Chrome VI, PBB polybromated biphenyl, PBDE polybromated
diphenylether. RoHS registration at EAR register under productname "CS121".
2
CS121 Comparison :
CS121 MODELS NAME FEATURES Supported CS121 COMMON
and UPS FEATURES FOR ALL
OPTIONS models MODELS *
CS121 L Second mini All 1400 UPS
external din 9 COM port models from All CS121 devices are capable
for RS232. over 50 of managing the UPS models
AUX port for different for which they are compatible
digital input/ manufacturer. via the UPS’s native serial
output. protocol. Each CS121
MODBUS integrates seamlessly into all
RS485 option. contemporary SNMP facility
Remote RAS management systems.
management All CS121 models have their
options. own web server with
CS121 SC Like CS121 L All Chinese/ configurable event
slot external. Taiwanese management for automating
standard slot responses to power and UPS
UPS models. status conditions. This includes
Emails transmission, RCCMD
net work messages and
shutdowns, logfile entries,
grafical logfile for statistics,
CS121 F Second mini FUJI UPS
RCCMD Traps, UPS shutdown
FUJI slot din 9 COM port
functions and wake-up calls for
for RS232.
computers which have been
AUX port for
shutdowned before (wake-on-
digital input/
lan).
output. Remote
All actions and events may be
RAS
configured individually.
management
All CS121 have a built-in
options.
scheduler for regular tasks like
CS121 R Like CS121 F. Riello and battery tests, battery calibration
Riello slot Aros UPS and UPS shutdown/restore.
All CS121 have a wide range of
network management features
for alarming users and
managing other SNMP devices
and general overall Computer
CS121 BL Economic All 1400 UPS and Power resource
BUDGET CS121 with models from management via RCCMD.
external LAN UPS over 50 All CS121s (except BUDGET
management different models) include MODBUS-
only. (No manufacturer. over-IP and an optional
MODBUS over MODEM interface.
IP, no AUX port All CS121s (except BUDGET
for dry models) offer a COM2 for
contacts, no connecting environmental
COM2 interface sensors or for connecting other
for modem or products and software to
environmental manage the UPS.
sensors. All CS121 have 2 years
CS121 Like CS121 All Chinese/ warranty and a free update
BSC BUDGET Taiwanese period of 3 years. All CS121 are
BUDGET External standard slot made in Germany.
slot UPS models.
3
Contents
CS121 Comparison : 3
English Manual 6
1. Quickstart and Features Overview 6

2. Adapter Software-Updates 10
2.1 Firmware via CS121x_upd.exe 10
2.2 Firmware update via FTP: 10
3. Add-on software 11
3.1 RCCMD/RCCMD2 11
3.2 gChart 11
4. CS121 Adapter Package 12
4.1 Standard CS121 Package contents 12
4.2 Overview CS121Pictures 14
4.3 Details 14
4.3.1 UPS Status 14
4.3.2 Status of Network connectivity 15
4.3.3 DIP-Switches 15
4.3.4 Serial ports 15
4.3.5 MIB 16
4.3.6 Configuration cable 16
4.3.7 Power supply 16
4.3.8 UPS Interface cable 16
5. Verifying the CS121 Functions 16
5.1 UPS Status Displays (LEDs) 17
5.2 Network status LEDs 17
5.3 Ping the SNMP Adapter 17
6. Preparing for Configuration 17
6.1 Method of configuration: HTML, TELNET, and Terminal 17
6.2 Communication settings 19
6.2.1 Basic configuration for a network connection 19
6.2.2 Basic configuration for a serial connection 20
7. Configuration 21
7.1 Setting MIB System Group, IP and Gateway Addresses 22
7.2 Setting the access controls 23
7.3 Configuring the Trap-Receiver 23
7.4 UPS settings (UPSMAN Configuration) 24
7.5 Event Settings 25
7.5.1 Log Event Settings 25
7.5.2 Email Event Settings 28
7.5.3 RCCMD Shutdown 28
7.5.4 RCCMD2 Message Event Settings 33
7.5.5 RCCMD Execute/command 34
7.5.6 UPS Shutdown 37
7.5.7 AUX Port 38
7.5.8 RCCMD Trap 38
7.5.9 WOL 38
7.6 Network & Security Settings 38
7.6.1 Change CS121 Password 39
7.6.2 Timeserver Settings 39
7.6.3 Email Client Settings 41
7.6.4 Network Server Settings 43
7.6.5 Change UPSMON Password 43
7.6.6 Change Static ARP Entries 43
7.6.7 SNMP Trap Test 44
4
7.7 Com 2 Settings & AUX Settings 44
7.7.1 Configuration Mode 45
7.7.2 Pipe-Through Mode 1 45
7.7.4 MODBUS 45
7.7.5 TempMan/SensorMan 46
7.7.6 RAS 47
7.7.7 AUX and SS4 Settings 48
7.8 Display the settings 50
7.9 Delete the configuration settings 50
7.10 Save and Exit 50
7.11 Exit without saving 50
7.12 Scheduled actions 51
8. SS4 and SS4 AUX 52
8.1 SS4 - Feature overview: 53
8.2 SS4 Contents 53
8.3 SS4 Installation 53
8.4 SS4 Operation 54
8.5 SS4 Technical data 54
9. Configuring the NMS 54
Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch 56
1. Quickstart und Funktionsübersicht 56

2. Adapter Software-Updates 60
2.1 Firmware via CS121x_upd.EXE: 60
2.2 Firmware update via FTP: 60
3. Zusatz Software 60
3.1 RCCMD/RCCMD2 60
3.2 gChart 60
4. Lieferumfang 61
4.1 Standard CS121 Adapter Kit Inhalt 61
4.2 Übersicht CS121 Bilder 62
4.3 Einzelheiten 62
4.3.1 USV Status 62
4.3.2 Netzwerkstatus 62
4.3.3 DIP-Schalter 62
4.3.4 Serielle Schnittstellen 63
4.3.5 MIB 63
4.3.6 Konfigurationskabel 63
4.3.7 Spannungsversorgung 63
4.3.8 USV Interface Kabel 64
5. Überprüfung der SNMP Adapter Funktionen 64
5.1 USV Status Anzeigen Error/Link LED 64
5.2 Netzwerkanschluss Status LED 64
5.3 Ping(en) des SNMP Adapters 64
6. Konfigurationsvorbereitungen 65
6.1 Methoden der Konfiguration 65
6.2 Kommunikationseinstellungen 66
6.2.1 Grundkonfiguration für eine Netzwerkverbindung 66
6.2.2 Grundkonfiguration für eine serielle Verbindung 67
7. Konfiguration: Verwendung des Hauptmenus 67
7.1 Setzen von MIB System Group, IP und Gateway Adressen 67
7.2 Setzen der Zugangsberechtigung 68
7.3 Einstellen des Trap-Empfängers 69
7.4 UPS Settings (UPSMAN Konfiguration) 69
7.5 Event Settings 70
5
7.5.1 Log Event Settings 70
7.5.2 Email Event Settings 73
7.5.3 RCCMD Shutdown 73
7.5.4 RCCMD2 Message Event Settings 75
7.5.5 RCCMD Execute/command 76
7.5.6 UPS Shutdown (UPS SD) 78
7.5.7 AUX Port 79
7.5.8 RCCMD Trap 79
7.5.9 WOL 79
7.6 Network & Security Settings 79
7.6.1 Change CS121 Password 79
7.6.2 Timeserver Settings 80
7.6.3 Email client settings 81
7.6.4 Network Server Settings 82
7.6.5 Change UPSMON Password 82
7.6.6 Change Static ARP Entries 82
7.6.7 SNMP Trap Test 82
7.7 Com 2 Settings & AUX Settings 83
7.7.1 Configuration Mode 83
7.7.4 MODBUS 83
7.7.5 TempMan/SensorMan 84
7.7.6 RAS 84
7.7.7 AUX und SS4 Settings 85
7.8 Display Settings - Ansicht der Einstellungen 86
7.9 RESET Configuration to Default 86
7.10 Sichern und Schließen – Save, Exit and Reboot 86
7.11 Exit without saving 86
7.12 Scheduled actions 86
8. SS4 Und SS4 AUX 87
8.1 SS4 Funktionsübersicht 87
8.2 SS4 Lieferumfang 88
8.3 SS4 Installation 88
8.4 SS4 Bedienung 88
8.5 SS4 Technische Daten 88
9. Konfigurieren der NMS 90
Anhang/Appendix 92
A. RFC1628.MIB implemented commands 92

B Technical Specifications and Troubleshooting 92
C. Cable, Circuit board configuration/ Pin/ AUX-Ports and Sensor Manager 93
D MODBUS Interface 97
D.1 MODBUS general 97
D.2 Available Modbus Function Codes 97
D.3 Exception Codes 98
D.4 MODBUS Modes in the CS121 M (ASCII and RTU) 98
D.5 UPS Parameter 104
D.6 Bus termination 109
D.7 Configuration 109
D.8 TCP/IP - UDP Ports 109
D.9 MODBUS Cables 110
E. CS121 Recovery 111
G Abbildungsverzeichnis/Picture catalogue 114
6
English Manual
1. Quickstart and Features Overview
Quickstart for the CS121L External and CS121SC Slot UPS SNMP Adapters
Introductory Instructions: 3 way s of conf iguringthe IPaddress anddef ining theUPS modelstep-by -step
(The newest v ersion of the CS121 Firmware is required f or completing these instructions. Bef ore conf iguring, it is recommended that the newest
sof twareupdate, av ailable at http://www.generex.de, beinstalled.)
1 TELNET: 17 steps 1 Term inal program: 13steps 1 Webbrowser:14 steps
Make sure that the DIP switches 1 and 2 are of f (ref er to Section II. pictures on page 50 Nr.5 and 52 Nr.5). This setting makes the adapters take on the
def ault IP address 10.10.10.10, and enables the serial and telnet connections.
2 2 2
Connect the AC adapter and network cable to the Connect the CS121L/SC SNMP Adapter with a PC Connect the AC adapter and network cable to the
CS121L, respectiv ely power up the UPS and on which a terminal program is started using the CS121L, respectiv ely power up the UPS and
instert theCS121SC into theslotcard interf ace included serial cable to COM2 on the SNMP instert theCS121SC into theslotcard interf ace
and connect the network cable. adapter. A Dumb-Terminal or terminal simulator and connect the network cable.
such as the Microsof t Windows Hy perTerminal will
suf f ice. Use COM1and conf igurethe
communication settings in accordancewith the
f ollowing table:
3 3
Waite until the dev ice has rebooted. This can Waite until the dev ice has rebooted. This can
take up to 3 minutes. Make sure the green LED take up to 3 minutes. Make sure the green LED
by the LAN connection is lit.(see sectionIII.1.1 by the LAN connection is lit.(see sectionIII.1.1
and 1.2) and 1.2) If the red Error Link LED is lit, this may
be an indication that a sof tware update is
neccessary alsotry switching to theterminal or
telnet Quickstart in this case.
4 4
Set a route to the dev ice with the command line Set a route to the dev ice with the command line
"route add 10.10.10.10 <y our computers IP "route add 10.10.10.10 <y our computers IP
address>".(see section IV.1.1 line 2) address>".(see section IV.1.1 line 2)
5 5
Test dev ice responce to the command line "PING Test dev ice responce to the command line "PING
10.10.10.10", by negativ eresults check route 10.10.10.10", by negativ eresults check route
settings v ia commandline "route print". settings v ia commandline "route print".
6 6
Start the telnet conf iguration module with Open the IPaddress,http://10.10.10.10 (see
command line"telnet 10.10.10.10". section IV page 56 f or details)
7 3 7
At the prompt password: ty pe in "cs121-snmp" (in lower case) and hit return. Click the Network &Securtiy link under
Conf iguration. Enterusername: "admin"and
password: "cs121-snmp" and click the OK
button.
8 4 8
Follow the onscreen instructions by pressing the <enter> key and the Main Menu will be opened. Fill out the f ields with the corresponding IP
inf ormation andclick theAPPLY button.
9 5
Entering a "1" at the Enter Command => Prompt calls up the submenu f or the network settings.
10 6
Followingthe EXAMPLE: , conf igure the indiv idual IP settings one af ter the other. Ty pe in the number
of the command f ollowed by a <space> and then ty pe in the inf ormation corresponding to the
selected command. Finally , complete the entry by pressingthe <enter> key af terwhich the changes
can be seen in the menu heading. (see picture on page 20 in section IV.1.3)
11 7
Upon completing the conf iguration of the IP address return to the Main Menu by entering a "0" and
pressing the<enter> key .
12 8 9
The last conf iguration will be selecting the UPS model. This is done in the UPS Settings menu which Click the UPS Model & Sy stem link under
can be reached in the Main Menu by ty ping "4" and pressing the <enter> key . Entering "1" without Conf iguration . Select y our UPSf rom the UPS
any parameter prints a list of supported UPS models onto the screen. Af ter determining the the Model: dropdown menu and click the APPLY
corresponding number f or y ou UPS, the command can be re-entered by ty ping a "1" f ollowed by a button.
<space> and <number of y our UPS>. Af ter pressing the <enter> key the new setting will be display ed
in the heading of the menu.
13 9 10
Go back to the Main Menu by entering a "0". Then enter an "s" in the Main Menu inorder to sav e, exit Leav e theconf iguration moduleby clickingthe
and reboot the dev ice with the new conf iguration. Save Conf iguration link underConf iguration and
then click the Sav e, Exit & Reboot link in the
CS121Conf iguration Managerf rame.
14 10 11
When the message "Connection to host lost." Once the password: prompt reappears, the The message, "Adapter will reboot now!"
appears, the telnet window can be closed. terminal window can be closed. appears. When the dev ice can once again be
reached using the web browser, the browser
window can then be closed.
15 11 12
Unplug the power supply of the CS121L and turn DIP switch 1 back of f . The CS121SC must be pulled out of the slot inorder to complete this task. Now
that both DIP switches are in the OFF position the adapter no longer has per def ault the IP address 10.10.10.10
16 12 13
Reconnect the power supply to the CS121L, respectiv ely plug CS121SC back into its slot.
17 13 14
Repeat steps 3 and 4 checking to see if the dev ice responds to the new IP address. Also open the new IP address in a web browser or connect to the
address using the UPS Monitor program.
6
General Information:
The CS121 Series are a group of products designed especially for critical resource
management within technical facilities. The CS121 can act as a power consumption
manager for all other computers in the network. All of these products share many of
the same basic CS121 features, and some have special components and functions.
The CS121 products are most commonly used for the management of UPS systems,
so in this manual we specially reflect to the usage of such devices with your CS121.
All of the basic features and most of the product specific features and operation are
explained in this manual. This manual is the basis also for other CS121 based
products like CS121, CS121BUDGET, SENSORMANAGER, SMT_COM,
SITEMANAGER, SITEMONITOR, SITESWITCH4 und RASMANAGER.
Note: When using the CS121 to act as a power consumption manager

for other computers in a network it is necessary for those computers that are being
managed by the CS121 to have its own RCCMD installation. RCCMD is the only
possibility for enabling the communication between the CS121 acting as a UPSMAN
manager and other client computers in a network. While it is possible to add the
different computers as clients in the CS121 settings it is only possible for those
computers to act as an RCCMD client when they are running RCCMD. Each
computer running RCCMD must have its own RCCMD license. This is the only
possibility for the CS121 to fulfil its function as a network power consumption
manager. Setting up the RCCMD commands is described in depth in section 7.5
Event Settings.
There are several CS121 SNMP adapters available for different UPS and although
they are mainly made for UPS, the adapters can easily be modified by simply
plugging in other products like the SiteSwitch SS4-AUX, SensorManager, and
Modems in order to add new features. There are two basic types of CS121 adapters
external and slot cards. The basic external adapters for UPS come with or without
modbus protocol. There are other external products based on the CS121 such as the
RASManager which is an adapter with a built-in ISDN or analog modem. Other
external devices include the SiteSwitch (for the direct control over power sockets),
the SiteMonitor (for monitoring up to 64 digital alarms), and the SiteManager (a
device with multiple functions) which are used for handling facility management
purposes that go beyond the UPS systems.
Generally, the SNMP adapter runs an embedded Simple Network Management

Protocol (SNMP) software agent. This agent responds to the SNMP operations
“gets” and “sets” and also forwards “trap-messages” to designated recipients when
critical conditions occur to the UPS - such as low battery status. Additionally, the
adapter can send RCCMD signals to client computers running the Remote Console
Command (RCCMD) initiating automatic shutdowns or other actions in case of an
extended powerfail. (The RCCMD client is an extra system module requiring its own
license.)
7
Functions of your CS121:
• SNMP Adapter CS121/CS121 Slot: The SNMP adapter is a
compact unit requiring minimal workspace (ca. 28x69x126 mm
for the external adapter CS121L). The slot card versions of the
adapter (CS-111 and CS121SC) get inserted into the
extension slots of UPS models supporting its card type.
• Serial Port: Two DIP switches change the adapter's serial port
(COM2) to a configuration port for installation or to a
communication port for modem operation. The MODBUS
version uses the COM2 as RS485 and is not available for
configuration. The MODBUS version can be configured via
Telnet and Default IP address.
• SNMP Traps for remote monitoring and pre-alarming: The main
function of the SNMP adapter lays in the transmission of alarm
conditions of the UPS to the monitoring station (traps). It also
makes UPS data access able for users in the network upon
request. With this function it is possible to retrieve and monitor
the battery load of an UPS from an SNMP management
station. The Event settings configuration menu also allows for
SNMP trap testing.
• Remote Control: With this function it is possible to switch the UPS
to Bypass (depending on the model). This remote command is
executed either via the Network Management Station or the
UPS Management Software.
• Telnet: Every Adapter maybe reconfigured via the network, using
Telnet or http after the initial configuration of an IP Address for
the adapter. Current UPS data can also be shown using
Telnet.
• Works with all major NMS: The SNMP adapter works with most,
widely used Network Management Systems e.g. HP Open
View HP UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT, Novell NMS,
Spectrum, Sun NetManager, IBM Net View/600 and others. All
SNMP systems which either allow the compilation of the MIB
or already incorporate MIB RFC 1628 for UPS Systems, can
be operated with Adapter.
• Multiserver shut down via RCCMD/RCCMD2 compatibility: The
SNMP adapter CS121 is able to initiate a network shutdown
with any RCCMD modules from the UPS-Management
Software CD. A TCP/IP based RCCMD signal is sent to all
RCCMD clients in the network. This enables the remote
shutdown of practically an unlimited number of client
computers, independent of which operating systems the clients
are running. RCCMD is an optional part of the UPS-
Management Software. Your UPS dealer is able to provide you
with CD keys for the RCCMD and UPS-Management Software
installation.
• RS-232 UPS Protocol Router – Pipe- through: The CS121 (not
BUDGET versions) is able to transfer the UPS RS-232
protocol on COM1 directly to COM2. This allows the use of
additional monitoring software on COM2 while making extra
hardware(RS-232 multiplexer) to multiply the UPS comport
unnecessary.
8
• Real time logfile: CS121 has an internal logfile synchronized with
either a set timeserver in your network or from timeservers in
the internet. This logfile can be accessed through the
UPSMON, JAVAMON or via FTP. Due to the maximum file
size of 720 lines, old entries are deleted automatically.
• Network settings : The CS121 Models are adjustable to the
network environment. An auto-sensing function 10 or 100Mbit
can be activated.
Note: In large fast networks as is normally the case by CISCO or HP

Procurve with autosensing switches problems can occur during the reboot of the
CS121. If this is the case and switches are being used then the auto-sensing
function might very well be the problem. Because the CS121 is per default set to
auto-sensing (ON), this can lead to the network devices not being able to harmonise
communication rates with one another. This auto-sensing process can take a long
time and is sometimes never attainable. This taxes the CPU capacities of the
switches and can greatly slow down the network or even lead ultimately to its failure.
In this case a default network speed should be determined and set after which, the
CS121 can be changed from AUTO to the given speed, "100half" for example.
• Email client: The CS121 adapters incorporate a built in SMTP

Email client, which is able to send emails automatically in the
event of an alarm.
• Web server: The CS121 Models contain a web server, which
displays all functions and settings of the adapter. The
JAVAMON graphically displays UPS data (The JAVAMON
module is not implemented in all versions.).
Network connectivity
A typical installation on the SNMP adapter monitoring a UPS in an Ethernet network

follows in the illustration below. The SNMP adapter communicates with the UPS, to
inform you about your systems power condition.
9
CS121
Figure 1 CS121 in a network environment
2. Adapter Software-Updates
2.1 Firmware via CS121x_upd.exe

Firmware updates are available for free at www.generex.de or consult your UPS
dealer for further information.
2.2 Firmware update via FTP:
A firmware update can be made via FTP during normal operation of the CS121
Adapter(username: “admin”, password: “cs121-snmp”). Simply overwrite the older
firmware files, PROJECT.HEX, UPSTYP.UPS, and MESSAGES.DAT, in the FILES
folder with the newer files and reboot the adapter. Afterwards, reconfigure the device
via TELNET. For more details read the README.TXT of the firmware update
package.
Note: The configuration of the CS121 can be saved for archiving

purposes using an ftp connection. Simply download the „upsman.cfg“ to the directory
of your choice. Later on after the CS121 has been updated the configuration can be
saved back into the „flash“ directory of the CS121 per ftp.
10
Figure 2 CS121 configuration settings per ftp. The host address can be the either the
IP address or the DNS.
A firmware update via FTP changes not only the operating system part of the
CS121, if you want to change also UPS manufacturers data you have to overwrite
also the file UPSTYP.UPS. Please contact your UPS software support for further
information.
Notice: Any interruption of a firmware upload may damage your adapter if this is the
case, you have to reformat the adapter with special software Contact your UPS
software support for more information.
3. Add-on software
3.1 RCCMD/RCCMD2
With the UPS Management Software (optional UPS software product) you may use
the multi server shutdown module RCCMD (separate client license required) to
shutdown an unlimited number of networking computers, send messages and
execute other programs on remote computer via the CS121 SNMP adapter. In
general, most every job can be broadcasted and relayed from a machine within its
own segment. Depending on the network configuration and the number of RCCMD
licenses, an unlimited number of Computers/Servers can be shutdown. Please also
check the section RCCMD in the user manual of the UPS-Management Software,
and section 7.5 in this manual. Contact your UPS dealer to purchase RCCMD
software.
3.2 gChart
gChart is a GENEREX plug in for the internet explorer available as a free download
from the GENEREX web site. Quickly and easily visualise all of the CS121 adapter
log files using Generex's ActiveX graphical log controller GChart when using the
Internet Explorer. Discover UPS problems more easily and optimise system tuning
more rapidly. Navigate through the data with the mouse using functions like zoom
and pan with continuous motion in real time and query interpolated data values by
clicking in the areas of interest. Customize the view by moving or toggling off the
legend, toggle off and on the data grid and also switch individual log values on and
off.
Get the GChart experience now by visiting our online CS121 at:
http://q01.generex.de/ and be sure to follow the GChart log file links.
11
Figure 3 gchart plug in for the internet explorer
4. SNMP Adapter Package
4.1 Standard CS121 Package contents

The standard SNMP adapter package contains an SNMP adapter unit with
supporting hardware and software. Details to the SS4 and SS4 AUX are in section 8.
SS4 and SS4 AUX. The Budget models do not have all features: see in the appendix
Product included in delivery
CS121 L (Extern) 12VDC 300 Powersupply external. (For USA/CA UL: Supplied by
mA. NEC Class 2 Powersupply only) Usermanual englisch,
german. Configurationcable for serial port configuration
Size: (12,5 cm x 7cm x 2,8cm) via Terminalsoftware - and for connection of optional
Weight: 210 gr devices for your CS121.
Operating temperature: < 40° C
CS121 Typ SC (Slot chinese) Usermanual englisch, german. Configurationcable for
Size: (13,5 cm x 6 cm x 1,5 cm) serial port configuration via Terminalsoftware - and for
Weight: 66 gr. connection of optional devices for your CS121.
CS121 Typ F (Slot FUJI) Usermanual englisch, german. Configurationcable for
CS121 Typ R (Slot RIELLO) Usermanual englisch, german. Configurationcable for
Size: (14,5 cm x 7,5 cm x 1,5 serial port configuration via Terminalsoftware - and for
cm) connection of optional devices for your CS121.
Weight: 80 gr.
CS121 M Modbus (Extern) Powersupply external. (For USA/CA UL: Supplied by
Size: (12,5 cm x 7 cm x 2,8 cm) NEC Class 2 Powersupply only) Usermanual englisch,
12
Weight: 210 gr. german. Configurationcable for serial port configuration
Operating temperature: < 40° C via Terminalsoftware - and for connection of optional
devices for your CS121. Mini-8 connector for your
MODBUS RS-485 connection via COM 2.
CS121 BL (Budget Extern) 12V Powersupply external. (For USA/CA UL: Supplied by
300mA DC NEC Class 2 Powersupply only) Usermanual englisch,
Size: (12,5 cm x 7cm x 2,8 cm) german. Configurationcable for serial port configuration
Weight: 202 gr. via Terminalsoftware - and for connection of optional
Operating temperature: < 40° C devices for your CS121. (Configuration via networkcable
or via optional Zeromodemcable and Terminalsoftware)
CS121 BSC (Budget Slot Usermanual englisch, german. Configurationcable for
Chinese) serial port configuration via Terminalsoftware - and for
Size: (12,5 cm x 7 cm x 2,8 cm) connection of optional devices for your CS121.
Weight: 59 gr. (Configuration via networkcable or via inbuilt RS232
Operating temperature: < 40° C inteface of your UPS and the original RS232
communication cable via Terminalsoftware.)
Optional is a mounting kit for wall mounting.
ATTENTION: Please do not open the CS121 chassis !
13
4.2 Overview CS121Pictures
SNMP L, C and Slot card types
Nr. Description Beschreibung

7 Netzwerk
Network
6 connection RJ 45 Anschluss:
5 1 10/100 Base T
Connector (with RJ 45 10/100
Status LED) Base T Connector
(mit Status LED)
Serielle
Schnittstelle
4 Serial comport
(COM2) für
(COM2) for
3 Konfiguration
2 Configuration or
2 oder zum
connection of
Anschluss von
optional devices.
1 Optionalen
(not BUDGET
Geräten (not
versions)
BUDGET
versions)
Error/Link LED Error/Link LED
3
UPS Status USV Status
AUX
AUX Input/Output
Eingang/Ausgang
4 for drycontact
für Alarme über
alarms and relais
Kontakte
5 Dip Switch DIP Schalter
Serielle
Serial port
Schnittstelle
(COM1) UPS
(COM1) USV
Connection (at
6 Anschluss. (beim
BUDGET for
BUDGET für die
terminal
Terminal
configuration)
configuration)
(12V) DC (12V) DC
7
Connection Anschluss
Model differences:
CS121 L= external device with external Powersupply 9V (also BUDGET, CS121BL)

CS121 SC = slot device for chinese UPS with slot. (also as BUDGET, CS121BSC)
CS121 F = slot device for FUJI UPS Japan
CS121 R = slot device for RIELLO/AROS UPS Italy
CS121 ML = external device with MODBUS RS485 port
CS121 MSC = slot device with MODBUS RS485 port
4.3 Details
4.3.1 UPS Status

The red/green LED (see Nr. 3 in above graphic) will inform the user about the status
of the UPS communication. The green LED will flash in constant intervals when the
UPS is operating normally. The red LED is lit for the duration of the system boot. The
14
error status „Communication lost“ will also be displayed via the red LED. The system
boot may take up to 3 minutes.
4.3.2 Status of Network connectivity

The LEDs that are integrated into the RJ45 Connector (see Nr. 1 in above graphic)
will signal with green, a connection to the network and with yellow network
communication.
Green LED Red LED Adapter
off On Adapter is looking for UPS/initializing. Start
phase can take up to 2 minutes
flashing Off Data flow/normal mode of the UPS
on On Communication to UPS interrupted
4.3.3 DIP-Switches
The DIP Switches differentiate between two functions: Configuration and Normal
mode.
Switch 1 Switch 2 Description

Normal operations
ON OFF
(Configured IP Address)
Default IP Address
OFF OFF
( =10.10.10.10 and COM 2 configuration)
Please note : In the Configurationmode the full functionality of the CS121 is

not provided ! Please change to a valid network adress and put DIP SW to
position ON as soon as you made youre basic network setting. After this
please continue configuring your CS121 in your network via Webbrower or
Telnet.
Information for CS121 BUDGET : The BUDGET versions do not have an external
connection for COM2. This configuration interface has been routed to COM1 (UPS
port) .
EXTERNAL Version: At the CS121 Budget Extern in configuration mode a
zeromodem cable (not included) may be connected to COM1. Use a
Terminalprogramm to configure your CS121 BUDGET via this connection.
SLOT Version: At the CS121 Budget Slot in configuration mode you can use the
original UPS serial cable of the UPS and the inbuilt RS232 UPS interface to connect
via a Terminalprogramm to your CS121 BUDGET Slot.
4.3.4 Serial ports

The SNMP adapter incorporates two serial ports (not BUDGET) , whereas COM1
(see graphic 4.2 Overview) provides the connection to the UPS and COM2 (see
table above) is used to configure the SNMP adapter.
15
4.3.5 MIB
The CS-121 comes with the standard MIB RFC 1628. This MIB is already part of
most SNMP software products. Because of this it is not required to compile the MIB.
Systems which do not have the standard MIB RFC1628 can download the MIB from
our website.
http://www.generex.de/e/download/cs12x/download_p.html
Copy the MIB file to the appropriate MIB directory of your SNMP station and compile
this file. In most cases your SNMP recognizes the MIB and a compilation is not
necessary. Please search the MIB2 directory tree for a UPSMIB. This MIB should be
a RFC1628 compatible version. Please use the MIB from the disk, if a correct MIB is
missing in the MIB2 directory.
4.3.6 Configuration cable
(not CS121 BUDGET) Your package contains a configuration cable, which connects
to the serial port (COM2) of the SNMP adapter and the serial port of a PC with
terminal software. It is sufficient to use a Dumb-Terminal or Terminal emulation
program, such as Microsoft Hyper Terminal. During configuration of the SNMP
adapter please ensure that the DIP switches are in the correct position. Please refer
to the chapter 7. Configuration: in this manual.
4.3.7 Power supply

A power supply adapter (wall socket unit) (DC, 12V) provides power for the SNMP
Adapter (external Model CS121 L only).
Note: If you are using a different power supply unit from the one in the adapter
package, please note that the polarity is set correctly. The SNMP adapter
might be damaged if the wrong polarity is used. The power supply
current should be at least 9V, 12 V is recommended .
For the CS121SC models C and the slot card, there are no power supply
units. These unit will receive power directly from the UPS device. The
SNMP adapter C and slot card both incorporate a variable 9-36V input.
4.3.8 UPS Interface cable
Please use the manufacturer’s serial port cable that came with your UPS to connect
the UPS with the SNMP adapter. Please contact your UPS manufacturer, if you have
questions. Only use the original RS-232 UPS cable for communication, which was
provided with the UPS. If your UPS has a contact closure port, please use the
manufacturer’s special cable. Please consult your UPS dealer on information
regarding special cables.
5. Verifying the SNMP Adapter Functions

A setup system can be checked before and after a configuration using the following
3 steps.
16
5.1 UPS Status Displays (LEDs)
(See section 4.2 Nr. 3)
During the boot procedure, the red LED is on, whereas the green LED is off. The
boot process can take up to 3 minutes. The red LED does not go out when there is
an error.
After five to ten seconds after the boot process, the green LED flashes rapidly; this
indicates that the SNMP adapter is trying to start the communication. The adapter
will indicate its communication accessibility with random green LED flashes.
5.2 Network status LEDs

(see section 4.2 Nr. 1)
The LEDs that are integrated into the RJ45 Connector will signal with green, a
connection to the network and with yellow network connectivity.
5.3 Ping the SNMP Adapter

Perform a PING command from the SNMP station or NMS (Network Management
Station).
If you do not get a response, check the SNMP adapter network connection and IP
address of the SNMP adapter.
Note: The different response rates during the ping process do correspond to
an error. The adapter does not answer every ping signal at the same
speed, due to different sized UPS protocols. If UPS protocols are of
extensive size a timeout can occur briefly. A permanent timeout,
however is an error.
6. Preparing for Configuration
6.1 Method of configuration: HTML, TELNET, and Terminal

There are three methods available for configuring the SNMP adapter: telnet, terminal
and http. These methods differ in the type of user interface and in the type of
connection to be used for the configuration. The telnet method share similarities with
both the terminal and the http method. Like the http method, the telnet method uses
a network connection via the IP address to establish a communication, but it has the
same type of user interface as used in the terminal method. The terminal method
requires that the SNMP Adapter be connected via the serial cable to a host
computer. The terminal and telnet methods provide the user with a text menu
indicating per alpha-numeric keys the possibilities for the user to either enter
configuration commands or navigate through the menu levels. The http method
provides the user with forms in which the system settings are either typed directly
into a form or chosen per drop down menu.
After you have completed the hardware setup and connected the SNMP adapter,
any of these three methods can be used to configure the adapter for the network.
For this purpose depending on the configuration method, a communication must be
17
established between the adapter and user via a serial terminal session or via an
established network route in a telnet or http sitting. Upon entering a telnet or terminal
session with the adapter authorization is required for which the default password is:
“cs121–snmp”
This password is also valid for the Configuration – Submenu ”Network and Security
settings” – Option 1
Upon entering a http configuration session, the user is also required to enter a user
name, ”admin”, in addition to the password,”cs121-snmp”.
Figure 4 HTTP administrator login
Note: If the http method does not seem to be available, check to see whether or
not the red LED is lit. This may indicate that either the telnet or terminal
method must be initially used to configure the adapter(see section 5.1 a).
Starting the three methods:
Use of TELNET and configuration via the default IP address 10.10.10.10 (or the
configured IP-Address) Command: „telnet <IP-Address>“
Start a terminal program (e.g. MS Hyper terminal) and connect the serial
communication cable for COM 2. Details to follow in section 6.2.2.
Configuration via web browser - The entire configuration can be done via HTML
page. Please use the default-IP address 10.10.10.10 and the TELNET password
(default= cs121-snmp). The configured IP address can later be used address for the
web browser. Please refer to the online help buttons on the HTML page, if you have
further questions.
For the configuration, using the web browser/server please observe the following:
We recommend the use of Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.x or Mozilla 1.3x (Please
refer to the Mozilla Help in the Menu “Help” – “Help Contents”) Please note that Java
scripting has to be activated. Using Internet Explorer, the corresponding settings
have to be made under “Internet options” - “security”. If Java script is not activated,
18
some settings when changing the UPS model have to be made manually e.g. baud
rate, capacity etc.
We also recommend, to never use the history function of the browsers, as this may
lead to multiple transfer of commands (e.g. delete event jobs) to the adapter.
The following steps guide you in connecting the SNMP adapter to the network and
UPS. Please take care that your UPS has been correctly installed before and is
running.
6.2 Communication settings
6.2.1 Basic configuration for a network connection

Put the DIP Switch 1 of the adapter to „OFF“ and connect the device with your
Ethernet cable. Check if the network LED is flashing green or yellow. The slot must
be you have to insert and remove the device for any reboot this will not have any
effect on your UPS but we recommend doing such operations only when the UPS is
not supplying any load.
As soon as the network LED is flashing, add a TCP/IP route on your computer to
10.10.10.10. This is done via a call from your command line e.g. "route add
10.10.10.10 <your computers IP address>“. See also route -? for more help of route
syntax.
Test if you can ping the device now, enter „PING 10.10.10.10“ and check if there is
any response. Now you can connect with any TELNET or http software and finish
your configuration.
We strongly recommend to update any firmware lower than 2.69 to the actual
version !
19
6.2.2 Basic configuration for a serial connection
The DIP switches of the SNMP adapter firstly need to be set for the configuration.
DIP switch 1 is switched off in the top (OFF) position. DIP switch 2 is switched on in
the bottom (OFF) position. Please note that the DIP switches of the SNMP slot card
adapter are situated on top of the circuit board and DIP switch 2 remains in the OFF
position in both configuration and normal mode.
Connect the SNMP adapter (COM2) with the provided configuration to a PC. A
Terminal emulation program or Microsoft Hyper Terminal needs to be started. .
Configuration of the communication settings: Please use the following table for the
configuration of the Terminal program. Clicking the restore default button results in
the same settings. Please confirm this window with OK, when you have done all
settings. The Terminal is now ready for communication with the SNMP adapter.
Adapter
Baud rate 9600
Data bits 8
Parity
None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control
None
Xon/Xoff
Handshaking None
CR/LF OFF
Local Echo OFF
ANSI
Terminal Type
(VT100)
Figure 5 Terminal settings
20
7 Configuration: using the main menu
Although all of the configuration possibilities, Telnet, Terminal and http are generally
available, later in the newer parts of this manual like the section “Scheduled Actions”
only the explanation for usage of the http interface will be provided. The main menu
will start after the password has been entered. From this menu you can enter the IP
address, Gateway address, and MIB system group. You can also set the access
controls of the SNMP communities, set traps, set display settings, reset the settings
to default values, save the new values and exit the program, exit without saving, are
options that can be selected also.
---------------------- Main Menu ----------------------
[ 1] IP Address, Gateway Address & SNMP System Group

[ 2] Access Controls of SNMP Communities
[ 3] Trap Receivers
[ 4] UPS Settings
[ 5] Event Settings
[ 6] Network & Security Settings
[ 7] COM2 & AUX Settings
[ 8] Display Settings & Logfiles
[ 9] Reset Configuration to Default
[ U] Current UPS Status
[ S] Save, Exit and Reboot
[ Q] Exit without Saving
Enter Command =>
----------------------- UPS Status --------------------
Model : FUJI 700ADC

Location :
Status : UPS Status OK
InVolt : 232.7 V InFreq : 50.0 Hz
OutVolt : 230.2 V OutFreq : 50.0 Hz
Load : 0.0 % Autonomy Time : 40.0 Min.
BattCap.: 100.0 % Temperature : 21.0 Deg. C
BattVolt : 21.0 V Avg. BattTemp.: 27.6 Deg. C
Uptime : 73 Days Est.Batt.Lifetime : 36 Months
[Press Enter to refresh, 0 to go back to the main menu]
Figure 6 Telnet - Main Menu
To select any option in the main menu, enter the number of the option at the Enter
command => prompt. The program displays the desired screen.
21
7.1 Setting MIB System Group, IP and Gateway Addresses
To set the IP address, Gateway address, MIB system group, and other system
configurations, type 1 at the Enter command => prompt. The following menu
displays:
Figure 7 Telnet - IP Settings
Note: The minimum requirement to operate the SNMP adapter is to set the IP
address, the subnet mask and the UPS model.
To change values, enter the number of the option, type a <space>, and enter the
name. Press <enter>. Your new value displays next to the field heading on the top of
the screen.
If you want to return to the main menu, press 0 (zero) and press <enter>.
To assign the IP address of the SNMP adapter, the gateway and the network, type
at the prompt:
1, <space>, the IP address of the SNMP adapter, <enter>.

Check:
Enter Command => 1 192.10.200.0
Enter Command => 2 192.10.200.254
Enter Command => 3 255.255.255.0
To assign the system contact name, type 4 and enter the name of the person to
contact about the SNMP adapter
Check: Enter Command => 4 Mr. Harry Hirsch
To assign the UPS name SysName, type 5 and enter name of the UPS:
Check: Enter Command => 5 USV 1
To assign the UPS location SysLocation, type 6 and enter the location name:
Check: Enter Command => 6 Building 12
22
7.2 Setting the access controls
To set access controls of the SNMP communities from the main menu, select „Set
access controls of SNMP communities“ The submenu displays a column of 10
manager IP addresses with the corresponding access permission, the commands
and an example. Use this screen to specify which managers have access to the
SNMP adapter agent, the community names (password) and also what type of
access the IP managers have - read only or read and write.
Figure 8 Telnet - SNMP communities
Enter the following at the prompt in order to setup an authorization:
set, <space>, enter the number of the corresponding Manager Address from 1-10,
<space>, enter the IP address, <space>, name of the community string, <space>,
and access code - r for read only or -w for read and write. Press <enter>.
For example:
Enter Command => set 1 132.217.227.025 public w
To clear access controls of all manager IP address, type:
clear, <space>, and the desired list number at the prompt. Press <enter>.
Check:
Enter Command => clear 3
7.3 Configuring the Trap-Receiver

Use this to determine which IP managers receive traps (messages) from your SNMP
adapter. This screen permits you to send traps about your UPS to IP addresses
(managers).
Note: Since Firmware Release V 1.77: The CS121 will send a

„upsCommunicationLost“ after 5 failed attempts of trying to establish
communications with the UPS following operation start up by sending a
„commlost“ trap.
23
7.4 UPS settings (UPSMAN Configuration)
In this menu, the user needs to select a UPS model. The CS121 adapter
distinguishes here between CABLE and SERIAL models. With CABLE, the adapter
and the contact interface of the UPS are connected with a special cable. Using
SERIAL, UPS models connect to the adapter via the serial UPS cable. (Part of the
UPS package). SERIAL is default, when the user selects a UPS model name from
the drop-down list. When CABLE is used, please search the list for the
corresponding UPS model and cable type e.g. cable 6.
The CS-121 supports serial models with its own RS-232 protocol as well as contact
UPS models with the cable types O,C,1-10. Those contact cables are UPS or alarm
system specific and should be provided by the corresponding manufacturer. Our
CABLE documentation shows examples of those cables if they are individually made
cables (self-made).
UPS Model
Please choose the corresponding SERIAL UPS model or CABLE model
communication parameters, baud rate etc. are preset for the corresponding UPS
model.
Attention: By selecting the UPS model, the communication protocol is

selected at the same time. If your UPS does not appear in
the list, ask your UPS dealer if another model from the same
series can be substituted.
Figure 9 Telnet UPS Settings

Please note the menu: “System shutdown“ (minutes before battery end – downtime):
This value determines how many minutes before a complete battery unload the
event action, (3) System shutdown from event menu (see picture below in the next
section) is executed.
The shutdown time interval needs to be set large enough, so that adequate time for
a system shutdown is allocated before the UPS runs out of power. Please calculate
this value generously e.g. if the battery time of the UPS is 10 minutes and the event
24
procedure takes 2,5 minutes, make sure you start (configure) the shutdown (or other
event action) 3 minutes before the UPS is switched off, so that more than enough
time is available to complete the corresponding event action.
Select 1, to get to the page with the UPS models. After choosing a model, the default
values of the corresponding UPS model can be configured by typing the number of
the option followed by the value. (see above picture)
7.5 Event Settings

In this section of the configuration menu the relationships between system events
such as alarms and the actions to be taken those events are defined. This includes
sending of RCCMD, Email, sending of log file entries and UPS shutdown. This
screen shows the “X” marked actions as active, actions without “X” are not active
and can be configured. The following demonstrates how to configure an action.
Figure 10 Telnet - Event overview

Telnet Events/Alarms menu
7.5.1 Log Event Settings
In this section the SNMP adapter logfile settings are done. By entering the text
“powerfail” p100, the text “powerfail” will written into the logfile every 100 seconds for
as long as the event is present. Other actions on events such as Email, RCCMD
shutdown, UPSDIALER, TempMan etc. can be configured in the same way. Every
event may have an unlimited number of actions (executed now, delayed etc.)
configured. The CS121 adapter logfile is located in the adapter root directory
../Flash/text.log. The user can read this file using a FTP connection to the adapter
using the default IP address 10.10.10.10 or the configured IP address and the
username/password combination “admin/cs121-snmp”, as well as UPSMON or
JAVAMON.
25
Figure 11 Telnet - Log Event Settings
Reading the ALARM Logfiles of the CS121:
The CS121 Alarmlog contains the alarm protocol of events that were designated as
alarms in the Event/Settings section which include the user defined alarm settings of
the CS121 configuration as well as the events that are designated as alarms in the
UPS native protocol. These entries include such things as CS121 ADMIN defined
email notifications which lead to a much higher alarm entry log level than would
otherwise be the case if only UPS protocol defined alarms were being recorded. For
explanation, the following illustrates typical log file entries made by the UPS:
The CS121 logs the status of all connected devices after a new start up:
05/27/2005,08:05:58, Synchronized with timeserver 192.168.202.8. OK

This indicates a successful synchornisation with the time server.
05/27/2005,08:06:50, UPSMAN on <UPS MODEL> has started

UPS communications function and device is in normal operation mode.
(The following entries result only from user defined settings as with the CS121
ADMINSTRATOR EMAIL Settings.)
05/27/2005,08:06:51, MAIL: subject "CS121 Event 4" successfully sent.

All “EVENT X” designated alarms are viewable in the EVENT list of the web browser.
EVENT 4 for the this particular UPS is the EVENT "UPSMAN started" – This means
that an Email was sent with the text "UPSMAN started" which acts to confirm the log
entry of 08:06:50 as Email.

In this case, the Scheduler has been activated and is ready for operations. In this
case, the scheduler is set to conduct a "Selftest" which it in turn relays per email to
the designated CS121 ADMIN.
26
These are 4 Emails indicating the status of the AUX Ports (Auxiliary connection for
external alarms), which are set to give notification of the status signal LOW. Since
the AUX Status can only be set to High or Low and given that the CS121 in itself
cannot distinguish the device, an alarm email will be sent by the CS121 to the
designated ADMIN at startup per default with the startup status of each connected
alarm. In this case, it is up to the administrator to determine if the emails indicate an
actual alarm or not.

These are 8 Emails sending information about analogue sensors (temperature,
humidity and the like) that are connected to a SENSORMANAGER, indicating that all
controlled values are within tolerance levels - or that no sensor is connected to the
device or connection port.

These 4 Emails indicate that the digital sensors (for airconditioning, fire alarms and
the like) of the SENSORMANAGER, are either in the normal state or that no sensor
is connected.

These 4 Emails indicate the status of the digital alarm contacts of the sensors (for
Emergency OFF, fire extinguisher and the like) connected with the
SENSORMANAGER, showing either the the status is NORMAL or that nothing is
connected.

This Email shows that no Sensormanager is connected although the CS121 is
configured as having a connection to a Sensormanager. This informs the ADMIN
that the CS121 is incorrectly configured. In this case, the user should correct the
settings.
27
7.5.2 Email Event Settings
The email settings are configured here for the individual events. Please also check
the settings in section 7.6 “Network and Security settings”
Figure 12 Telnet E-Mail Event Settings
Besides text entries, variables can also be integrated into the email from the CS121
adapter.
Example:
Add [email protected] “Powerfail to #Model IP 204 CS121 Frank

#AUTONOMIETIME minutes left.” o
This method is valid for all events, whereas the job can only be executed by a real
event and not the Telnet test command. In order to test the above settings, the
command “test” and the corresponding list number (Email entries in the above
window) can be entered to check the functionality. For the test it is not required to
switch the UPS to battery mode, as the test only tries to send the email in this
scenario. The logfile will also show if the email has been sent or not.
7.5.3 RCCMD Shutdown
Certain presetting are imperative for all RCCMD actions. First of all in general
regards to the CS121 adapter as an UPSMON Server, the „Enable UpsMon Server“
and the „Use RCCMD2 Traps“ controls boxes must be checked. This enables the
CS121 to execute its RCCMD actions.
28
Figure 13 HTTP - Network & Security Settings
Secondly, the CS121 adapter and the RCCMD client must both be appropriately
configured in order to reach one another using RCCMD commands over the
network. Because the CS121 adapter plays an active roll when executing the first
three listed actions, Msg, SD, and Exe, (that is to say the CS121 adapter sends an
RCCMD signal to an RCCMD client) the parameters 1, IP address, and parameter 2,
port number of the RCCMD client must be entered into the event editor for these
jobs. Additionally, the RCCMD client must either be pre-configured with absolutely
no sender filter or be pre-configured with the IP addresses of the particular
UPSMON servers that are to function as recognized senders. These configurations
take place when installing the RCCMD client service. Further details are in the
RCCMD software documentation. By the fourth action, RCCMD Trap, it is the
RCCMD client which takes on the active roll and this is why no receiver information
is entered in the parameters of this job (see number 4 in the following figure), but in
this case it is imperative that the IP address of the UPSMON server to which the
RCCMD client should contact be entered into the UPSMON server list during
installation. Consequently, this means that a sender filter must be set on the
RCCMD client. In addition the „Enable Traps“ control box must be checked during
installation. These are the prerequisites for enabling an RCCMD client to establish a
connection to the UPSMON server of the CS121. Otherwise, the CS121 adapter as
UPSMON server will not be requested to send the traps with which it is configured.
29
Figure 14 HTTP - Server Job configuration menu
Attention! For security reasons we recommend to make the same RCCMD

shutdown entries for Battery low - but without any delays.
The maximum number of RCCMD clients is unlimited. However it is only possible to

execute 50 clients at the same time, meaning that the first 50 RCCMD clients are
executed followed by the next 50 etc.
The timeout is 60 seconds, meaning that after this time the communication to the
RCCMD client will be stopped. When no response from the client is received, the
systems assumes a successful RCCMD Shutdown and proceeds with a shutdown of
the next 50 RCCMD clients. Every minute one batch of up to 50 RCCMD clients can
be executed.
Add RCCMD Here, IP addresses from computers with RCCMD connection
(receivers) in the network can be entered. The SNMP adapter
can then initiate a multi-server shut down. The timing for such a
shut down procedure depends on the configured down time of
the adapter (default, time of the remaining capacity of battery in
min., during a long power fail.) or on a count down timer.
Extended CS121 adapters can also use more Events (e.g.
battery low, battery defect, communication lost etc.) as RCCMD
signals. Please contact your UPS dealer for more information.
Test RCCMD In case a connection is established using telnet or http, the
RCCMD command can be tested without using disrupting power
to the UPS.
30
Figure 15 HTTP Event Editor RCCMD Shutdown test
From the menu, please choose the command „send <number of receiver>”. The
adapter will then send the command immediately.
Note: Due to network settings it is possible that this test is answered with
"failed". The signal is often sent and received although the receiver may
not respond correctly. In such cases, only use the receiver side to check
if the signal has actually been received.
Delete RCCMD This option deletes single RCCMD receivers from the list. The command
“del <Nr. of RCCMD receiver>“ executes the option.
RCCMD Broadcasting: Broadcasting RCCMD commands into your network are
possible after FW 3.20. This functions transmits your RCCMD command to all
computers in your LAN/WAN. Since this process may take a while, please consider
to start such broadcasts early during your discharge process.
31
Figure 16 RCCMD signal broadcast
Figure 17 HTTP Event overview configuration with tool tips
SNMP adapter CS121 uses parameter based RCCMD Version 2, which can execute
different actions on the same channel. RCCMD Version 1 clients can only execute
one action (shutdown file execution as default).
Note: For all 3 RCCMD event functions a list of the user configured
RCCMD receivers appear in every RCCMD event.
Figure 18 Telnet - RCCMD- Shutdown Event Settings
32
Down time With a set down time of 3 minutes, the shut down procedure via
RCCMD would start when the UPS has only 3 minutes
remaining time left. The port address should be 6003. If a secret
port should be used, please enter an available port address on
which the RCCMD program is able to work with network
computers.
Countdown If instead of the system down time (remaining capacity time) of
the UPS, a count down is used for the start of the RCCMD
command, the value eg 5 minutes must be entered –5. The
RCCMD command is initiated after 5 minutes battery running
time.
License regulations:
Please note that in order to use these functions legally, the corresponding RCCMD
program is installed and started from the UPS-Management Software CD. The
license code can only be used once per installation. If more computers need to be
added to the shutdown process, additional licenses are required. The CS121
adapter does not contain any licenses for RCCMD, only the option to shutdown up to
50 network computers (at a time) the RCCMD send command is included.
In order to reach a bigger number of RCCMD receivers, the adapter needs to be

operated as relay station. The receiver will be configured so that it will receive a
RCCMD signal and this signal is then used to start a batch file, which then starts
even more RCCMD sender signals. This computer is then sender and receiver at the
same time and is therefore an important link in the UPS monitoring chain. For this
reason, it is advisable to protect this computer with an UPS device also.
Note: All network components, such as Routers, Hubs etc. need to be fully
UPS supported, as it is otherwise not possible to reach all clients during
the network shutdown.
7.5.4 RCCMD2 Message Event Settings
In this menu the user can combine and configure a text message with RCCMD
event. Text messages can be sent to RCCMD receivers. This makes it possible to
send text messages via RCCMD2 to a Windows 2000 server or a Unix computer,
using the “NET SEND” or the respective “WALL” method. The problem with notifying
network users on different operating systems is therefore solved.
Note: The corresponding RCCMD clients must be running with RCCMD

version 2. RCCMD version 1 can only execute eg a shutdown as more
than one actions are not supported by version 1. Please contact your
UPS dealer if you want to use these functions.
33
Figure 19 Telnet - RCCMD2 Message Event Settings
7.5.5 RCCMD Execute/command

This RCCMD signal will cause any RCCMD receiver (eg. another CS121, RCCMD
client or SITEMANAGER, SITESWITCH4) to execute a command or program.
Any CS121, SITEMANAGER, SITESWITCH can also act as an RCCMD listener;

see the following examples:
Figure 20 RCCMD execute/command
Example 1: If it is necessary to execute a command with parameters or a user

defined script then these commands must be prepared as an executable batch on
the RCCMD client.
Telnet example: In the below window, the program “Exitwin_logoff” on IP address

192.168.202.121, port 6003 is executed once after the event powerfail has occurred.
34
Figure 21 Telnet- RCCMD2 Execute Event Settings
When a CS121 is set to act as an RCCMD listener, then it can also receive event
based RCCMD commands from another UPSMAN manager whether it be another
CS121 or a computer running UPS Management Software. The following example in
Figure 25 toggles the state of AUX output port 2 to high.
To insure that the above command works with a CS121 as RCCMD client the
following four criteria must be met:
Criteria 1:
Figure 22 CS121 as RCCMD client criteria 1: enable RCCMD listener and set
listener port
Criteria 2:
Figure 23 CS121 as RCCMD client criteria 2: IP of UPSMAN sender must be in the

SNMP community of the CS121 RCCMD client.
35
Criteria 3:
Figure 24 CS121 as RCCMD client criteria 3: Target AUX port must be set to "use as
Output"
Criteria 4:
Figure 25 CS121 as RCCMD client criteria 4: The send RCCMD exe must match the
settings of the CS121 RCCMD listener client.
See the UPSMAN User Manual for setting up this job on a computer running UPS
Management Software.
Example 2: If you want to send from a CS121, UPSMAN, SITEMANAGER,

SITEMONITOR, SITESWITCH 4 or any other RCCMD sender a signal to any other
CS121, SITEMANAGER, SITEMONITOR, SITESWITCH 4 or any other RCCMD
client a signal to switch an output, please follow the example below:
Generally there are 3 commands which can be transmitted from any RCCMD
Sender:
Switch Output: Syntax „|UPSCMD|20000|x,y“
where “x” is the portnumber from 1-8 (4 ports for CS121 AUX, SENSORMANAGER
and SITESWITCH and there are 8 ports for the SITEMANAGER)
y=1 => switch on

y=0 => switch off
“20000” is the command to switch outputs.
Syntax examples:
|UPSCMD|20000|1,1 = Output 1 on
|UPSCMD|20000|1,0 = Output 1 off
36
Confirm a Digital-Alarm : You can also use this syntax to eg. aonfirm alarms for
digital inputs (eg. Firealarm, door open, aircondition failed, etc.) which you see in the
UNMS software as “NEW ALARM”. Eg. If your UNMS software shows an active
alarm and you want to “acknowledge” this alarm by a switch wich you connected to a
CS121 or SITEMANAGER, than you can use the following syntax to program your
device to send an “ACK” signal to the receiver. After this your UNMS will show
“Alarm acknowledged – recovery action in progress”.
Syntax : |UPSCMD|20001|x
where x is the Portnr. (1-8). („20001“ is the ACK command for digital signals)
Syntax example: |UPSCMD|20001|2

This command confirms the Digital-Alarm 2 on a SITEMANAGER, SITEMONITOR,
SITEMONITOR or CS121 AUX Inputs.
Confirm Analog-Alarm : The way it works with the ACK of analog alarms like
Temperature thresholds exceed on the UNMS.
where x is the Portnr. (1-8). („20002“ is the ACK command for for analog signals)
Syntax example: |UPSCMD|20001|4

This command confirms the Analog-Alarm 4 on a SITEMANAGER, SITEMONITOR,
SITEMONITOR or CS121 AUX Inputs.
7.5.6 UPS Shutdown

This event action allows for the UPS shutdown. It is possible to configure when to
send a shutdown signal to the UPS in case of an e.g. battery low. The following
example:
"Add 60 120 o"
37
Configures that 60 seconds after the event powerfail has occurred, the UPS is
initiating a shutdown and the UPS waits another 120 seconds after the event
powerfail is gone (power restored), before the UPS start up is initiated.
Figure 26 Telnet - UPS Shutdown Event Settings

7.5.7 AUX Port
In general, the AUX port is used for auxiliary contacts that can be configured to
function as either an INPUT or an OUTPUT. When these contacts are set as
INPUTs, they are to be treated as an event in the „Events settings“ menu. Reverse,
the AUX contacts to be treated as actions when they are being used as OUTPUTs.
The AUX port is also used for connecting an SS4/AUX power outlet manager in
which case all AUX ports function as OUTPUTs.
7.5.8 RCCMD Trap
If jobs have been configured in this category, the actions that are set here will be
executed only when an RCCMD client has established a connection to the UPSMON
server of the CS121.
7.5.9 WOL
WOL stands for Wake on LAN this function uses data packages to prompt other
computers in a local network to start-up. Not all network cards support this function,
and for those network cards that do, some of them are password protected.
Figure 27 WOL configuration

7.6 Network & Security Settings
This option lets you configure the CS121 password, network card settings,
timeserver and email settings, as well as static arp entries, and it also lets you test
38
SNMP traps. The most recent addition to the settings is point 8 which allows the
CS121 to act as an RCCMD listener client. This makes it possible for another
UPSMAN manager to send the adapter an RCCMD command like sending one of
the AUX output ports a high or low signal.
Figure 28 Telnet Network & Security Settings
7.6.1 Change CS121 Password

Change the telnet password. Using telnet, the SNMP adapter can be configured
again and again, as soon as it is available in the network. The password protects
against unauthorized usage and manipulation. The default password is "cs121-
snmp". In case you have "forgotten" your password a master password can be
generated, using your adapter serial number. Please contact your manufacturer for
more information.
7.6.2 Timeserver Settings
Figure 29 HTTP Timer Settings
Note: The time server will synchronise immediately following the reboot
(feautured with FW 3.03 and newer). If the synchronisation fails the CS121 will
attempt another time server synchronisation. Following that, the CS121 will attempt
a sychronisation with the time server every 24 hours.
The adapter supports up to three different time server IP address. Both RFC868 and
SNTP protocols are available. Enter the IP address of any timeserver in your LAN or
in the internet. In the internet you will find many timeservers supporting RFC 868
39
TCP requests, eg. The IP address of the timeserver of the National Institute of
Standards and Technology is 129.6.15.29, the timeserver of the Physikalisch-
Technische Bundesanstalt is 192.53.103.103. You may also use any local
timeserver in your network if you have timeserver installed. If you need any
timeserver, search the internet for free timeserver tools for your OS. The CS121
uses a timeserver to supply the correct date and time of any event in its local logfile.
If no Timeserver is set, the CS121 will not use date and time in this logfile and will
default to the date stamp of 1970. For the normal operation of the CS121 a
timeserver is not required.
Time Difference
Please enter any offset from your timeserver to match your local time and or
summer/winter time adjustments in hours, range –24 - + 24. Note that this difference
is valid for all three of the time servers.
Test Timeserver connection
This option is testing the Timeserver connection with a time and date stamp. Please
note that the connection to the timeserver only works, when the adapter is not in the
configuration mode (IP 10.10.10.10).
The CS121 should have a any timeserver to synchronize the UPS alarms with your
local time. Without a timeserver the CS121 would use a default time 1970.
Microsoft Windows SNTP Timeserver: As timeserver you can use any eg. Windows
PC in your network which has access to a timeserver in the internet or a local PC
clock. To use the Microsoft Windows timeserver you have to configure and start
the “Windows Time Server” service – see screenshot in the service list:
To turn your Windows computer into a timeserver, double-click on the clock in the
lower right taskbar and open the following menue. After some seconds the “internet
time” tab should appear.
40
Click on “Internet Time” and check if the
timeserver you have choosen here works
correctly.
After having configured and started your

Microsoftt Windows Timeserver you have
to reboot your computer and check the
EVENT LOGFILE of windows again if if
the service has correctly started. If this is
the case you can configure your CS121
TIMESERVER using the IP address of
this Windows computer. See the
following page.
Attention: Please check if your computer
is reachable through the network. You
may have to change the Windows
Firewall settings.
If you do not want to use MICROSOFT

Timeserver, you can use any other
freeware or commercial SNTP
compatible timeserver software. You find
download links also on the GENEREX
Webpage at :
http://www.generex.de/e/download/cs12x
/download_p.html
7.6.3 Email Client Settings

In this menu the internet name of your SMTP mail client is required e.g. it is
important that not the actual mail server name but the IP address of the server is
entered. Please also note that sender address (mail server) should not be a random
41
name. An existing address (and account) should be used. Most servers require
matching account and mail server names. E.g. [email protected] would
be correct, whereas just “someone” would not be sufficient. If server name and
account name do not match, the following error message will be displayed in the
logfile:
Mail: bad answer from mail server: 501 UPSIP204@wrong server.com sender
domain must exist
The user can check the logfile if the email transfer works ok. The logfile (text.log
under: adapter root directory ../Flash/text.log) can be viewed using FTP or via the
UPSMON tool.
Figure 30 Telnet - E-Mail Client Settings
Please note that the email password remains empty, if the SMTP server does not
require authorization.
If authorization is required, the “AUTH LOGIN” (the CS121 adapter support only this
method to date) method needs to be supported. (eg. Freemail.de). This changes the
protocol from SMTP to ESMTP and a password is required.
The method “AUTH LOGIN” incorporates a small insecurity: The password

encryption is light. Although, the password is not sent in plain text, a user which is
able to receive the network packages would be able to decode the password
(BASE64-method). This is the only security risk, which may be considered negligible
for use with UPS systems.
The length of the password should be a minimum 3 and a maximum of 63

characters.
42
7.6.4 Network Server Settings
The user may activate or deactivate different options from this menu. Telnet and or
SNMP may be switched on or off and the UPSMON access can be blocked. The
network speed can also be selected and the user can select and adjust the desired
security level.
Also, the menu for switching authentication and cold boot traps are located here. If
activated these traps are send to the configured SNMP trap receivers in the trap
receiver list.
Figure 31 Telnet - Network Server Settings

7.6.5 Change UPSMON Password
Figure 32 Telnet - Change Upsmon Password
The UPSMON password blocks entry to the UPSMON tools battery test and
emergency shut down. Knowledge of this password enable users to gain access to
these security relevant functions.
7.6.6 Change Static ARP Entries
From Firmware V 1.76 onwards the user may send a trap response from an adapter
to a specific IP address with a specific MAC (ARP) address.
43
Figure 33 Telnet - Static ARP Settings
7.6.7 SNMP Trap Test
In this menu the user may test the SNMP traps, whereas the defined traps are only
used for test purposes and do not represent real traps. The receiver must also be
configured in order to make this test work. Additionally, save settings before testing
communications with the configured IP address.
Figure 34 Telnet - SNMP Trap Test

7.7 Com 2 Settings & AUX Settings
This menu takes the user into the submenus for the general settings of the COM2
and AUX connection ports of the CS121 adapter. As of FW 2.56 there are 6 entries
for the COM2 settings in the Telnet menu and the http configuration contains one
additional entry “SensorMan”.
Figure 35 Telnet COM2 & AUX Settings
44
Figure 36 Telnet - COM2 Settings
7.7.1 Configuration Mode
This sets the normal configuration mode for using the provided cable (configuration
cable).
7.7.2 Pipe-Through Mode 1
Enable or disable the “pipe-through” of the adapter. If enabled, the RS-232 protocol
of the UPS will be transmitted to the COM 2 of the adapter, so now you can connect
any other RS-232 software to the adapter to make use of the RS-232 UPS protocol –
parallel to the adapter. This makes the use of multiplexer hardware is no longer
necessary. 2 serial interfaces on your UPS which are working parallel are utilized
now. Reminder: If you have enabled this function, you can no longer configure the
adapter via the serial cable, you must changed the settings via TELNET. As
communication cable between CS121 and your application you have to use the
original CS121 configuration cable.
Analog to Pipe-through mode 1, the UPS data is piped through to COM2 but not
directly. In order to accelerate the internal processes of the adapter, the UPS data is
accumulated into memory before being made available to COM2. Consequently,
Pipe-through mode 2 also does not provide for the relaying of signals to the UPS
through COM2 either.
7.7.4 MODBUS
Note: The following menu entry is only visible, if the hardware is the MODBUS
CS121 SNMP adapter hardware. This menu entry is not visible for normal
CS121 SNMP adapters.
Modbus is a protocol used in the building surveillance and facility management. This
function is only available for adapters with the MODBUS RJ485 interface (CS121
MODBUS; see Appendix), where also output and protocol interface are shown.
The configuration using Modbus requires only the following entries:
Enable Modbus over IP: Every CS121 model after Firmware version 2.0 can
also transfer UPS data via MODBUS protocol on IP (port 502). You may use any
MODBUS client to read the UPS value from CS121. For using the RS-485 interface,
you must use a CS121MODBUS (special hardware) in other cases you have to use
MODBUS-over IP. This is enabled by default, you may disable this feature via
TELNET or HTML configuration.
45
Modbus Slave Address: Enter the corresponding number, meaning which
number in the chain (bus) the adapter is.
Modbus Mode: RTU (Binary mode) or ASCII mode text output. Please select the
type with the scroll down menu.
NOTE: ASCII Mode works with Parameters 7,N,1. The RTU Mode (binary) works
with 8,N,1.
7.7.5 TempMan/SensorMan
The TempMan and SensorManager are extensions to the CS121 that connect to
COM2 of the adapter. The newer of the two products is the SensorManager. These
devices are simply plugged into the CS121 for setup and the only mandatory change
on the adapter to enable this functioning is to set the COM2 Settings to either
TempMan or SensorMan. The configuration is easily achieved via the HTML page of
the CS121 web server. Please note the drop-down menu and entry fields on the
page. (see screen shot below)
Figure 37 HTTP COM2 Tempman/SensorMan
A configuration via the usual CS121 telnet menu is also possible. Please note the
entry syntax of the telnet menu. (see screen shot below).
Figure 38 Telnet - Tempman Settings
46
The scaling factors for the sensors currently available through GENEREX are in the
following picture. Further instructions for installing and setting up the SensorManager
are included separately with the SensorManager.
Figure 39 HTTP Sensor Manager Settings calibration

7.7.6 RAS
The last entry in the drop down menu of the COM2 settings is “RAS” see Figure 37
HTTP COM2 Tempman/SensorMan on page 46. Selecting this option for COM2
enables the CS121 RASManager function. While it is also possible to select this
entry in the Telnet menu, presently, FW 2.56, it is only possible to configure the
RASManager settings using the HTTP interface of the CS121.
This is the standard setting for the RASManager, the CS121 with the built in modem.
Most of the CS121 products can also have the RASManager feature enabled by
purchasing PPP License Key and by connecting a supported modem. The
RASManager and RASControl software come with an extra user manual for
describing this feature.
Figure 40 HTTP RAS Manager Settings
47
7.7.7 AUX and SS4 Settings
The AUX connection is an input/output port for connecting external contact devices
such as alarms or for connecting to an SS4AUX SiteSwitch power socket manager.
The SS4 SiteSwitch is a standalone device with a built in CS121. The SS4 AUX
SiteSwitch is an inexpensive and practical extension to the CS121 adapters enabling
the individual power switching of up to four power sockets.
Figure 41 Telnet AUX Settings
By entering the corresponding list number, the AUX ports are switched to output or
input.
When using the AUX settings the user can switch the corresponding AUX ports (4
Pins) as input or output. The AUX port can only read signals, if the port is switched
to input. If switched to output the AUX port can send signals to an opto coupler for
example. (Refer to the circuit diagrams in the appendix.)
After a reboot, the state of the switches remains in the status previous to the reboot.
The following describes the configuration of the AUX ports using the HTML interface.
All of the AUX ports 1 – 4 can be manually set to „OUTPUT“ so that in the event of
an alarm, the CS121 can be pre configured in the “EVENTS” menu to switch the
ports individually. When all ports are set to “OUTPUT”, this is equivalent to activating
the „SS4 Mode“. The SS4 mode is to be activated when connecting a SiteSwitch 4 to
the AUX port of the CS121.
When the OUPTUT options are deactivated, the AUX ports act as inputs used for
monitoring signals such as input from alarm contacts. For example, while configuring
port 2 as an input to monitor an alarm, the CS121 can also be pre configured to
respond to the alarm signal from port 2 to shut on or off a device connected to one of
the other ports that has been set to OUTPUT.
48
Figure 42 HTTP COM2 & AUX with TempMan
The OUTPUT setting is to be configured with a Power up sequence so that ,for
example as in the picture above, the fileserver on port 1 will be switched on upon
Power up. In the Power up Delay fields the number of seconds after a Power up in
which a connected port device is to be switched on can be entered, in the picture
above, the setting 10 in the Power Delay column will cause the switching on of the
fileserver on Port 1 to be delayed by 10 seconds after the Power up. Note that
executing the Save, Exit & Reboot does not cause a Power up, in order to cause a
Power up the power supply to the adapter must be interrupted. The differences
between a Reboot and a Power up become more noticeable when considering the
AUX port contacts. During a Reboot the current status of the ports remain
unchanged unless the settings of the ports have been changed from input to output
or vice versa. A Power up will set the ports to the pre configured Power up settings.
The following picture depicts AUX Ports 1 and 2 in the OUTPUT configuration, and
AUX ports 3 and 4 in the INPUT configuration. Activating the SS4 mode
automatically sets all ports into the OUTPUT configuration.
49
Figure 43 HTTP AUX & TempMan Status
In the above picture, a button menu is presented in which the ports 1 and 2 can be
clicked on and off. A yellow light bulb indicates that output to the corresponding port
is being provided, while the gray unlit light bulb indicates the status of being switched
off in which case the connected device is not being provided with power.
The buttons „SWITCH OFF“ and “SWITCH ON” are password protected. This is the
same password that has been set in the CS121 configuration.
7.8 Display the settings
(only TELNET) This screen displays all of the SNMP adapters current settings as
list. Please check your entries and change it if necessary.
7.9 Delete the configuration settings
By pressing <6> in the main menu, the program will delete all values.
7.10 Save and Exit
If you are satisfied with your configuration, and wanting to save them, please enter
the number 7 at the prompt. Please wait until the adapter informs that a reboot is
necessary.
The setup program is now finished, please disconnect the SNMP adapter from the
power supply and bring DIP switch 1 in the lower position (switched on). You can
now reconnect the adapter with the power supply.
7.11 Exit without saving
This option lets you quit the program without saving any of your configuration
settings. To exit, type 0 (zero).
REBOOT Process:
50
Please notice that a reboot of the CS121 may take up to 3 minutes. During the boot
phase the CS121 is compiling the user settings and waits for timeserver response.
As soon as the startup process is through and all requested data are present or
„timed-out“, the UPS communication starts and the green LED is flashing to signalize
the UPS RS-232 traffic. Now the device is ready for use and you may check the UPS
values with any Web browser (http:://<IP address>) or SNMP software - or you may
connect with Datawatch Pro tools UPSMON, UNMS, USW or JAVAMON. When
connecting with UPSMON or UNMS, TCP/IP can be selected instead of SNMP. This
is faster and contains more UPS values than SNMP communication.
7.12 Scheduled actions
The Scheduled actions tool is one of the easiest to use and most convenient
features of the CS121 adapters. When combined with the other facility managing
functions of the CS121 adapter, the Scheduled actions tool can be used to operate
and run many different tasks. After starting the “Scheduled Actions” configuration
window for the first time, one of the following two pictures will likely appear.
Figure 44 Scheduled Actions no time server
Figure 45 Scheduled actions empty

After pressing the new button a configuration window will be opened for the making
of new entries into the scheduled events of the adapter. This is a very dynamic and
versatile configuration window that automatically readjusts itself to adapt to the
selected job. Just select a different type of Action and see how the configuration
window changes. This makes it very easy for the user to configure the individual
jobs. In addition, the window makes the scheduling of reoccurring events very easy
by offering the selection of ONCE, DAILY, WEEKLY, and MONTHLY for each new
entry.
51
Figure 46 Edit Scheduled Action drop down menus
For WEEKLY routines the day of the week will be displayed in the
scheduler overview after making the entry. Note that a warning is still
displayed in the overview when no time server is
set.
Figure 47 Scheduled actions overview with warning

8. SS4 and SS4 AUX
Using the integrated Webserver, the SiteSwitch 4 enables the monitoring and the
remote control of 4 power outputs. The power sockets can be switched on and off
individually. This can be done either manually via the HTML browser interface or
UPSMON or automatically using the EVENT manager of the CS121. When
executing the action using the EVENT manager of the CS121, the power switching
can be pre configured to run with delays or to run on a schedule. Both the UPSMON
time scheduler and the HTML time scheduler can be used to configure a power
switching time schedule.
This task can also be achieved using the full version of the UNMS UPS Network
Management Software.
Note: If you wish to use a UPS with your SS4, then you must install the
appropriate CS121 Firmware on your SS4. You must also be sure to set the
Exchange COM Ports checkbox and then use the configuration cable to connect the
SS4 with your UPS.
52
Figure 48 Exchange COM Ports 1 & 2 for SS4
8.1 SS4 - Feature overview:

4 configurable powers sockets with a breaking capacity of 230V/8A
Power socket status indicator via HTML, UPSMON, UNMS or SNMP
control via the internal CS121
remote control of the powers sockets via HTML Browser (Password protected)
LED-Status of the power sockets
small metal casing with 1.5 RU, designed for 19"-Rack Mountings (mounting frame
included)
high breaking capacity (8A), input with IEC 16A.
programmable power switching via the HTML and UPSMON Scheduler
delay of alarm (e.g. UPS alarms) triggered power switching on COM1 of the CS121
8.2 SS4 Contents

SiteSwitch 4
16A IEC 230V power cable
2 mounting irons for 19“-Rack installation
manual for SS4
The manuals are being constantly updated and therefore the reader is encouraged
to check our website for a newer download version of the adapter manual. Check
http://www.generex.de for manual updates.
Attention Due to errors that may cause the switched off power outlet to remain on
it is necessary to conduct the following: Before connecting any power
consuming devices with the SiteSwitch 4 or working on any power
consuming devices already connected to the SiteSwitch 4, make sure
that the SiteSwitch 4 is not connected to the power supply by pulling its
power cable out of the power socket.
8.3 SS4 Installation
The power consuming devices are connected to the SS4 using IEC 250 VAC/6A
plug cables. The SS4 has 4 IEC 250VAC/6A chassis sockets that can be switched
on and off separately. Special notice is to be given to the 8A threshold breaking
capacity; exceeding this limit will cause the SS4 fuse to break leaving all connected
devices without electricity.
Use the provided mounting irons to fix the SS4 into a 19“ rack. Place the SS4 so that
the front panel of the SS4 can be securely screwed onto the 19“ rack housing while
insuring also that the power cables can be connected from behind as well.
53
As soon as all of the power consuming devices are connected to the SS4, the IEC
16 power supply cable can be connected. Upon establishing power to the SS4, the
green „POWER„ LED will light up, and the 4 „Power Socket Status LED“ one for
each of the sockets should be unlit. This means that none of the sockets are being
provided with power thus cutting the connected devices from the power supply.
8.4 SS4 Operation
The CS121 establishes a user interface for the SS4 for which the user has the option
of using either UPSMON, Webbrowser, UNMS or an SNMP-Program. All
communications take place either through a modem or network connection. Detailed
information is covered in section 7.7.9 AUX and SS4 Settings.
8.5 SS4 Technical data
Inputvoltage: 230V AC +/- 5%
Max. Power Input: 16A
Max. Power Output per socket: 8A (Load at cos phi 1)
Dimensions 260x180x60mm (BxTxH), with 19” : 1,5U
Operating temperature: 0-40°C/rel.Humidity0-95% non condensating
9. Configuring the NMS

Perform a „get" and a „set". If the get or set command fail, check the SNMP adapter
access control. The manager must have read permission to execute a get command
and read / write permission to execute a set command successfully.
To identify CS121 adapters in your network you may use the MAC address. The
MAC address of every CS121 adapter starts with 00-03-05-02-XX-XX, whereas this
address can be found in the Telnet menu (menu: IP address, gateway address, MIB
system group).
Your SNMP adapter is now installed and fully functional. Please read the following
for configuration and functionality descriptions of the adapter.
The MIB (Management Information Base) are loaded onto each SNMP Management
Station that is monitoring an UPS via an UPS SNMP Agent. The MIB determines
which UPS parameters can be monitored and controlled with the SNMP commands
„get“ and „set“.
To complete the SNMP adapter installation and configuration process, you must
compile the necessary MIBs to configure the NMS. Any NMS with a MIB compiler
can manage the SNMP adapter.
For instructions on how to compile MIBs for the most popular NMSs - Novell's
NetWare Management Station, Hewlett-Packard´s OpenView Network Node
Manager, and SunConnect; SunNet Manager; see the corresponding heading below.
54
Please note that the CS121 uses the standard MIB, which is included in most SNMP
software already. This MIB is called UPSMIB and corresponds with the Standard
RFC 1628. In most cases compiling of the MIB is not required as it can be found
under – iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib2.upsMIB Please check your MIB directory
before compiling the RFC 1628.
General Network Management Stations
Follow these general procedures to configure an NMS:
Set/compile the device MIB, if there is no standard UPS MIB RFC 1628 (CS121
only!)
Add the SNMP adapter object to the management map and configuration of the
events (e.g. message to the operator)
Ping the SNMP adapter
Due to the different compilation procedures of the SNMP software products, it is not
possible to explain the general procedures in greater detail. The compilation of a
MIB file is explained in the general SNMP software manuals. Please contact the
support, if you cannot resolve errors using this manual.
After the compilation the UPS software can be polled via a MIB browser and data
can be read. Please choose the corresponding MIB variable or string of MIB variable
and set the destination address TCP/IP of the adapter. The adapter will answer with
the UPS data.
Alternatively the Windows UPSMON, JAVAMON or the UPS SNMP WATCH of the
DataWatch Pro Software can be used. The UPS data will then be displayed
graphically and internal UPS information, which are only useful to the technical
support, will be hidden. In addition to this, the UPS SNMP WATCH is able to
manage groups of UPS devices, in order to manage parallel redundant UPS
systems.
As an optional add-on for the HP OpenView software, a snap-in may be ordered for
UPSMAN/CS121.
Note: (SNAP-IN FOR HP OPENVIEW for WINDOWS NT, SNAP-IN FOR HP

OPENVIEW for HP UNIX). This software implements itself into the HP
Openview Node Manager surface and displays UPS devices as objects in
the colors GREEN (OK), GREEN and RED (Alarm). With a mouse click,
the graphic window starts (JAVAMON or Windows UPSMON) and
displays current UPS data.
55
Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch
1. Quickstart und Funktionsübersicht
Quickstart mit den CS121L External und CS121SC Slot UPS SNMP Adapter
Kurzanleitung: 3 Methoden f ür die Einstellung der gewünschten IP-Adresse und Auswahl der USV Schritt f ür Schritt als allgemeiner Schnelleinstieg
(Die erfolgreiche Durchf ührung dieser Kurzanleitung setzt die neuesten Firmware Version f ür Ihr CS121 v oraus. Vor der Konf iguration, empf iehlt es sich
das aktuelleSof twareupdate aus dem Downloadbereichv on http://www.generex.dezu installieren.)
1 TELNET: 17 Schritte 1 Term inalprogramm :13Schritte 1 Web-brow ser:14Schritte

Vergewissern Sie sich ob DIP Schalter 1 und 2 auf OFF geschaltet sind(Siehe Abschnitt IV.1.2). In dieser Stellung hat das Gerät unabhängig v on der
Einstellung die IP Adresse 10.10.10.10 und damit wird eine serielle Verbindung bwz. Telnet ermöglicht.
(Siehe Bild S.10 Abschnitt II.1 Nr. 5 f ür die CS121L und Bild auf S.12 Abschnitt II.1.4 Nr. 5 f ür die CS121SC)
2 2 2
Netzwerkkabel und Stromkabel mit dem CS121L- Verbinden Sie den SNMP Adapter (COM2) über Netzwerkkabel und Stromkabel mit dem CS121L-
Gerät v erbinden bzw. stellen Sie die das beiliegende Konf igurationskabelmit einem PC Gerät v erbinden bzw. stellen Sie die
Spannungsv ersorgungzum USVinternenNetzteil auf dem ein Terminalprogramm gestartet ist. Spannungsv ersorgungzum USVinternenNetzteil
her und schieben Sie die CS121SC-Slotcard in Hierzu genügt ein Dumb-Terminal bzw. ein her und schieben Sie die CS121SC-Slotcard in
denentsprechenden AdapterSchacht. Terminal-Emulationsprogramm, wie z.B. Microsof t denentsprechenden AdapterSchacht.
Windows Hy perTerminal. Verwenden Sie hierzu
den COM1 als Verbindung und entnehmen Sie die
Kommunikationseinstellungenaus dieserTabelle:
3 3
Warten Sie ca. 1 bis 3 Minuten bis das Gerät Warten Sie ca. 1 bis 3 Minuten bis das Gerät
gebootet hat und stellen Sie f est ob die Grüne gebootet hat und stellen Sie f est ob die Grüne
LED am LAN-Kabeleingang grün leuchtet. (Siehe LED am LAN-Kabeleingang grün leuchtet. Der
auch Abschnitt III.1.1 &1.2) Error Link sollte nicht rot leuchten. (Sonst ist das
Gerät möglicherweisev orkonf iguriert. Indiesem
Fall wenden Sie entweder die Telnet- oder die
Terminalmethodean.)
4 4
Setzen Sie eine TCPIP Route auf das Gerät mit Setzen Sie eine TCPIP Route auf das Gerät mit
dem Kommandoshellbefehl dem Kommandoshellbefehl
"route add 10.10.10.10 <Ihre IP Adresse>". "route add 10.10.10.10 <Ihre IP Adresse>".
(Sieheauch Abschnitt IV.1.1) (Sieheauch Abschnitt IV.1.1)
5 5
Wenn das Gerät auf den Bef ehl "PING Wenn das Gerät auf den Bef ehl "PING
10.10.10.10" keine Antwort gibt überprüf en Sie 10.10.10.10" keine Antwort gibt überprüf en Sie
die Einstellungen mit dem Bef ehl "route print". die Einstellungen mit dem Bef ehl "route print".
6 6
Öf f nen Sie dieTelneteinlogmaske mit dem Öf f nenSiedie IPAdresse,http://10.10.10.10
Kommandoshellbefehl: "Telnet 10.10.10.10" Einzelheiten hierzu entnehmenSie Abschnitt IV.
auf Seite 16.
7 3 7
Wenn die password: Auf f orderung auf dem Bildschirm erscheint tragen Sie das Passwort "cs121- Klicken Sie den Link zur Network &Securtiy unter
snmp" (klein geschrieben) ein. Conf iguration. Tragen Sie in die eingeblendete
Maske Ihren Benutzername: "admin" und
Kennwort: "cs121-snmp" ein und bestätigen Sie
dieses mit einem Klick auf den OK-Knopf .
8 4 8
Drücken Sie die Eingabetaste, um in die Maske des Hauptmenus zu gelangen. Tragen Sie die IP-Einstellungen in die
entsprechenden Felder ein und übernehmen Sie
die Veränderungen anschließend mit einem Klick
auf den APPLY -Knopf .
9 5
Geben Sie die Zif f er 1 am Enter Command => Prompt ein um in das Submenu f ür die Netzwerk zu
gelangen.
10 6
Richten Sie die einzelnen IP-Settings analog zu dem auf gef ührten Beispiel in der IP Setting Maske
nacheinander ein. Erst die Eingabe der Zeilen-Zahl und dann, nach Eingabe eines Leerzeichens
<space>, können Sie nun den neuen Wert eintragen und mit der Eingabetaste <enter> bestätigen.
Ihre Änderung erscheint im oberen linken Bereich des Bildschirms. (Siehe auch Bild s. 20 Abschnitt
IV.1.3)
11 7
Nachdem Sie mit der Konf iguration der IP-Adresse f ertig sind können Sie das IP Settingsmenu
v erlassen. Das Hauptmenü ist mit der Eingabe der Zif f er 0 und Betätigen der Eingabetaste <enter>
zu erreichen.
12 8 9
Als letzte Konf iguration wird die USV ausgewählt. Über die Auswahl 4 im Hauptmenu werden die Klicken Sie auf den unter Conf iguration
UPS Settings-menu Kommandozeilen erreicht. Zuerst kann die Zeile 1 ohne Parameter eingegeben UPS Model & Sy stem Link. Wählen Sie Ihre
werden um die USV-Modelzuordnungstabelle durchzugehen. Danach kommt die Eingabe der 1 und USV aus dem UPS Model: Dropdownmenu und
dann, nach Eingabe eines Leerzeichens <space>, können Sie nun den zu Ihrer USV zugehörigen übernehmen Sie die Veränderungen
Wert eintragen und mit der Eingabetaste <enter> bestätigen. Ihre Änderung erscheint im oberen anschließend mit einem Klick auf den APPLY -
linkenBereich des Bildschirms. Knopf.
13 9 10
Kehren Sie mit der "0"-Eingabe zurück in das Hauptmenu und "S" eingeben und die Returntaste Um den Conf igurationbereichzuv erlassen
drücken um die Veränderungen zu übernehmen und um zu Rebooten. klicken Sie den Save Conf iguration Link unter
Conf iguration und dann klicken Sie auf den Sav e,
Exit & Reboot Link in dem CS121 Conf iguration
ManagerFenster.
14 10 11
Wenn die "Connection to host lost." Meldung Wenn die Auf f orderung zur Passworteingabe im Die Meldung, "Adapter will reboot now!"
erscheint kanndas Telnetf enstergeschlossen Terminalf enster wieder erscheint kann der erscheint. Wenn das Gerät wieder über den Web-
werden. Terminal geschlossenwerden. browser erreichbar ist können Sie den Web-
browser schließen.
15 11 12
Das Netzteil des CS121L herausziehen und den DIP-Schalter 1 in die ON Position schalten damit das Gerät die IP-Adresse 10.10.10.10 nicht mehr
belegt. Das CS121SC muss hierf ür kurz aus den Schacht gezogen werden.
16 12 13
Bei CS121L, schließen Sie das Netzteil wieder an bzw. schieben Sie den CS121SC Adapter wieder in den Schacht.
17 13 14
Analog zu Schritt 3 warten Sie ein paar Minuten bis das Sy stem rebootet und dann wie im Schritt 4 kontrollieren Sie ob das Gerät unter der neuen IP
eine Antwort gibt bzw. öf f nen Sie die neue IP Adresse ev entuel mit dem Browser oder mit der UPS Monitor sof tware.
56
Alle Bilder werden nur im englischen Teil dieses Handbuches aufgeführt ! Im
deutschen Text wird lediglich auf die Bilder verwiesen. Zusätzlich werden die
Seitenzahlen der Bilder in das Abbildungsverzeichnis im Anhang abgelegt.
Der CS121 Series ist eine Reihe von Produkten die besonders für die
Anlagenverwaltung im Bereich der kritischen Ressourcenmanagement für
technische Einrichtungen entwickelt wurden. Für alle dieser Geräte ist die
Kernfunktion als Endgerätemanager mit SNMP Eigenschaften das gleiche und
dieses Handbuch beschreibt sowohl die Kernfunktion des CS121s als auch die
Funktionen die mit den zusätzlichen Komponenten zu tun haben. Damit bildet dieses
Handbuch auch die Grundlage für die Produkte CS121, CS121BUDGET,
SENSORMANAGER, SMT_COM, SITEMANAGER, SITEMONITOR, SITESWITCH4
und RASMANAGER.
Hinweis: Um andere Rechner im Netzwerk als Endgeräte verwalten zu

können ist eine RCCMD Installation auf dem jeweiligen Clientrechner erforderlich.
RCCMD ist die einzige Möglichkeit die Kommunikation zwischen dem CS121 als
UPSMAN Manager und den jeweiligen Clientrechner im Netzwerk sicherzustellen.
Während die Möglichkeit besteht, andere Rechner als RCCMD
Nachrichtenempfänger einzustellen, können diese Nachrichtenempfänger nur als
solche fungieren wenn sie über einen laufenden RCCMD Prozess verfügen. Jeder
Clientrechner muss seine eigene RCCMD Lizenz haben. Nur so kann der CS121
seine Funktion als Endgerätemanager erfüllen. Das Einstellen von RCCMD Befehlen
wird im Abschnitt 7.5 Event Settings ausführlich erklärt.
Zumeist werden die CS121 Produkte für die Verwaltung von USV-Anlagen
eingesetzt. Hierfür stehen eine große Auswahl an CS121 SNMP Netzwerkadapter
zur Verfügung. Diese Adapter die im wesentlichen für die Verwaltung von USV-
Anlagen konzipiert sind können aber auch durch das anschließen von
Zusatzmodulen wie der SiteSwitch SS4-AUX, SensorManager, und Modems um
andere Funktionen erweitert werden. Es gibt externer Adapter (normaler Adapter
oder Modbusversion), Slotversionen des CS121 (Herstellerspezifische
Einschubkarte) und es gibt andere externer Geräte die auf dem CS121 basieren:
Der RASManager ist ein externer Adapter mit eingebautem ISDN/Analog Modem.
Die SiteSwitch (direkter Zugriff auf Stromverteilung), SiteMonitor (Verwaltung für bis
zur 64 digitale Alarme), und SiteManager (Multifunktionsgerät) sind externe Geräte
mit zusätzlichen Komponente um andere Überwachungs- und
Verwaltungsmöglichkeiten der technischen Anlagenverwaltung abzudecken die über
das eigentliche USV-Management hinaus gehen.
Im SNMP Betrieb arbeitet der CS121 Adapter mit einem eingebauten Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Software Agent. Dieser Agent reagiert auf
die SNMP Funktionen (Befehle) „get“ und „set“ und leitet so genannte „trap
messages“ an vorbestimmte Empfänger weiter. Diese „trap messages“ können den
Benutzer über kritische Situationen der Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung (USV)
57
informieren. Hierzu zählt z.B. das Umschalten auf Batteriebetrieb. Zusätzlich kann
der SNMP Adapter Remote Console Command (RCCMD) Signale versenden die
z.B. auf RCCMD Empfangsrechnern einen Shutdown oder andere Funktionen
auslösen (RCCMD ist ein Zusatzmodul.).
Der SNMP Adapter Kit hat folgende Funktionen:

SNMP Adapter CS121L/CS121 Slot: Der SNMP Adapter nimmt
aufgrund seiner kompakten Ausmaße nur wenig Platz in
Anspruch. Der Adapter hat eine Größe von 69x126 mm.
(Externer SNMP Adapter.) – oder der Adapter kann in einen
Erweiterungssteckplatz der USV integriert werden (abhängig
von USV Modell)
Serielle Schnittstelle: Mit den DIP-Schaltern kann die serielle
Schnittstelle (COM2) in eine Konfigurations-Schnittstelle zur
Installation bzw. in eine Kommunikations-Schnittstelle für
Modembetrieb umgeschaltet werden. Bei der MODBUS
Version wird die COM 2 als RS 485 ausgelegt und steht für die
Konfiguration nicht mehr zur Verfügung. Die MODBUS
Variante kann nur über TELNET und Default IP Adresse
konfiguriert werden.
SNMP Traps senden : Grundaufgabe des Adapters ist es
Alarmzustände der USV an eine Überwachungsstation zu
senden (Traps) oder alle USV Daten im Netzwerk zur Abfrage
bereitzustellen. Mit dieser Funktion kann z.b. die
Spannungsversorgung und der Batteriezustand einer USV,
von einer SNMP Managementstation überwacht werden. Über
den Menüpunkt Event settings können SNMP traps zu
Testzwecken auch simuliert werden.
Fernbedienung : Über diese Funktion kann die USV beispielsweise
auf Bypass geschaltet werden (herstellerabhängig); ausgelöst
wird dieses durch ein entsprechendes Kommando über die
Network Management Station oder durch die zur USV
gehörige USV Management Software.
Telnet : Per Telnet kann jeder Adapter (nach der erstmaligen
Initialisierung und Vergabe einer IP Adresse) über das
Netzwerk umkonfiguriert werden oder auch die aktuellen
Messwerte der USV angezeigt werden.
Kompatibilität mit allen gängigen Network Management
Systemen (NMS): Der SNMP Adapter ist mit fast allen
gebräuchlichen Network Management Systems
kompatibel, z.B. HP Open View HP UNIX und Microsoft
Windows NT, Novell NMS, Spectrum, Sun NetManager, IBM
Net View/600 u.a. Alle SNMP Systeme, die das Einkompilieren
einer MIB erlauben – oder bereits die Management
Information Base (MIB) Request for Comment (RFC) 1628 für
USV Systeme enthalten, können mit dem Adapter betrieben
werden.
Multiserver shut down via RCCMD/RCCMD2: Der SNMP Adapter
Typ CS121 kann mit allen RCCMD Modulen der UPS-
Management Software einen Netzwerk-Shut-Down einleiten.
Ein auf TCP/IP basierendes RCCMD Sendesignal wird an alle
RCCMD Empfänger (Server im Netzwerk mit RCCMD
Empfänger Software) versendet. Damit kann z.b. ein shutdown
direkt auf unbegrenzt vielen Computern ausgelöst werden,
58
unabhängig von deren Betriebssystem. RCCMD ist optionaler
Bestandteil der USV Management Software. USV-
Management software und RCCMD Lizenzen sind vom USV
Fachhändler erhältlich.
RS-232 USV Protokoll Router – Pipe- through: Der SNMP
Adapter Typ CS121 kann das USV Protokoll welches über
COM 1 gelesen wird direkt auf COM 2 wieder ausgeben.
Damit ergibt sich die Möglichkeit weitere Software an die USV
anzuschließen ohne zusätzliche Hardware (RS-232
Multiplexer) einzusetzen.
Zeitgenaues Logfile:
Der CS121 besitzt ein eigenes Logfile welche bei Verwendung
eines Timeservers im Netzwerk (Atomuhr im Internet oder ein
Server mit Zeitserver Software als Referenz) festhält welche
Alarme bisher aufgetreten sind. Auf dieses Logfile kann vom
UPSMON, JAVAMON oder via FTP zugegriffen werden. Die
Logfile Grösse beträgt 720 Zeilen und löscht ältere Einträge
automatisch.
Email Client:
Die CS121 Modelle besitzen einen Simple Mail Transfer
Protokoll (SMTP) kompatiblen Email Client, der automatisch
Emails bei Alarmen versenden kann.
Netzwerk settings:
Die CS121 Modelle können auf Ihre Netzwerkumgebung
abgestimmt werden, es kann z.b. 10Mbit oder 100 Mbit,
Autosensing on/off eingestellt werden.
Hinweis: In größeren schnellen Netzwerken wie CISCO oder auch HP

Procurve mit Autosensing Switches können Probleme mit dem CS121 Adaptern
beim Reboot entstehen. Wenn dieses zutrifft und Switches im Einsatz sind, dann ist
die Ursache vermutlich das AUTOSENSING der Netzwerkgeschwindigkeit. Da auch
beim CS121 AUTOSENSING per Default auf ON steht, kann dies dazu führen, dass
die beiden Geräte über längere Zeit versuchen sich gegenseitig auf eine
Geschwindigkeit einzustellen. Dieser Prozess kann länger dauern und manchmal
auch nie erfolgreich beendet werden. Dadurch ist die CPU des Switches stark
belastet was dazu führen kann, dass die gesamte Netzwerkperformance
beeinträchtigt wird oder sogar ganz ausfällt. In diesem Fall legen Sie fest welche
Netzwerkgeschwindigkeit gewünscht ist. Dann über die CS121 Konfiguration die
Geschwindigkeit von AUTO auf den gewünschten Wert z.B. "100half" einstellen.
Webserver: Die CS121 Modelle besitzen einen Webserver der alle

Informationen des Gerätes anzeigt. Mit dem JAVAMON kann
auch eine grafische Darstellung der Daten angezeigt werden
(Das JAVAMON Modul wird nicht bei allen Versionen
implementiert.).
Netzwerkanschluss : Einen möglichen Einsatz des SNMP Adapters zeigt die

Darstellung unten, in der der SNMP Adapter eine USV in einem Ethernet-Netzwerk
überwacht. Der SNMP Adapter kommuniziert mit der USV, um beispielsweise über
die Spannungsversorgung Ihres Systems zu informieren. Siehe : Figure 1 CS121 in
a network environment.
59
2. Adapter Software-Updates
2.1 Firmware via CS121x_upd.EXE:

Updates für die Firmware stehen kostenfrei zur Verfügung im Downloadbereich der
Webseite: http://www.generex.de oder bei Ihrem USV Hersteller.
2.2 Firmware update via FTP:
Ein Firmwareupdate kann auch via FTP erfolgen. Benutzernamen: admin Passwort:
cs121-snmp. Die neuen files PROJECT.HEX, UPSTYP.UPS, MESSAGES.DAT
werden einfach in das Verzeichnis „FILES“ übertragen, überschreiben Sie dabei das
ältere vorhandene File. Nun kann neu gestartet werden und per TELNET die
Konfiguration verändert werden.
Hinweis: Die Konfiguration des CS121 kann mittels einer ftp-Verbindung zum
Adapter lokal gesichert werden. Hierfür wird die „upsman.cfg“ Datei im
„flash“ Verzeichnis des Adapters per ftp heruntergeladen. Nach einem
Firmwareupdate kann die gesicherte Konfiguration des Adapters auf den
Adapter per ftp zurückgespielt werden. Siehe Figure 2 CS121
configuration settings per ftp. The host address can be the either the IP
address or the DNS.
Ein Firmwareupdate über FTP ändert nicht nur die Betriebssoftware des CS121.
Sollen auch Herstellerspezifische Daten verändert werden, so ist immer eine
UPSTYP.UPS Datei notwendig – wenden Sie sich an ihren Support für weitere
Informationen. Hinweis: Ein Firmwareupdate kann bei Abbruch den Adapter
beschädigen. Sollte dies der Fall sein so muss der Adapter komplett neu formatiert
werden, dazu ist spezielle Software bei ihrem USV Support erhältlich. Wir empfehlen
die Nutzung des CS121x_upd.exe Tools.
3. Zusatz Software
3.1 RCCMD/RCCMD2
Mit dem zur USV-Management Software gehörenden Multiserver shutdown Modul
RCCMD bzw. RCCMD2 (zusätzliche „Client“ Lizenz notwendig) kann der SNMP
Adapter Typ CS121 unbegrenzt viele andere Netzwerkcomputer direkt
herunterfahren, Nachrichten senden und Programme auf Remote Rechnern
ausführen und bei entsprechender Netzwerk-Konfiguration können beliebig viele
Rechner/ Server gesteuert werden. Im allgemeinen können die meisten Signale von
einem Rechner aus, der sich in einem bestimmten Netzwerk befindet, als Rundruf
(Broadcast) versendet werden.
Einzelheiten zu RCCMD finden Sie im Handbuch zur USV-Management Software,

Kapitel RCCMD und in diesem Handbuch in Abschnitt
7.5.3 RCCMD Shutdown. Für den Erwerb von RCCMD Software, wenden Sie sich
an ihren Fachhändler.
Siehe Error! Reference source not found..
3.2 gChart
gChart ist ein Plugin für den Internet Explorer und steht als kostenloser Download
zur Verfügung auf der Website von Generex. Der ActiveX graphische Logkontroller
GChart für den Internet Explorer ermöglicht die schnelle Visualisierung von
Messwerten, die der CS121 Adapter in seine Logdateien speichert. Somit werden
60
Fehler im USV System schneller aufgedeckt und Systementwickler brauchen
weniger Zeit, um die Optimierung der Leistung eines Systems durchzuführen.
Innerhalb des graphischen Bereiches können Ausschnitte vergrößert und verkleinert
werden und dabei wird die Maus dazu verwendet, durch den Datensatz hin und her
zu bewegen. Mit einem Mausklick in der Nähe einer gezeichneten Linie kann der
Anwender die interpolierten Werte direkt in der Graphik abfragen. Zusätzlich können
sowohl die ganze Legende oder einzelne Werte als auch die Gitterlinien anhand der
Toggelknöpfe und Häkchen für eine benutzerdefinierte Ansicht ein- und
ausgeschaltet werden.
Der GChart-Kontroller wird bereits auf dem Q01 eingesetzt und kann unter den
folgenden Links als Onlinedemo betrachtet werden: http://q01.generex.de/ Folgen
Sie bitte hierzu die Chart links. Siehe Figure 3 gchart plug in for the internet explorer.
4. Lieferumfang
4.1 Standard CS121 Adapter Kit Inhalt
Das Standard SNMP Adapter Kit beinhaltet ein SNMP Adapter und die
dazugehörige Hard- und Software. Einzelheiten zu den SS4 und SS4 AUX sind im
Abschnitt 8. SS4 Und SS4 AUX enthalten. Die Budget Modelle verfügen nicht über
alle Eigenschaften des Standardmodeles. Eine Vergleichstabelle ist im Anhang.
Siehe Seite 3 CS121 Comparison.
Produkt Lieferumfang
CS121 L (Extern) 12VDC 300 Powersupply external. (For USA/CA UL: Supplied by
mA NEC Class 2 Powersupply only) Usermanual englisch,
Size: (12,5 cm x 7 cm x 2,8 cm) german. Configurationcable for serial port configuration
Weight: 210 gr via Terminalsoftware - and for connection of optional
Operating temperature: < 40° C devices for your CS121.
CS121 Typ SC (Slot chinese) Usermanual englisch, german. Configurationcable for
CS121 Typ F (Slot FUJI) Usermanual englisch, german. Configurationcable for
CS121 Typ R (Slot RIELLO) Usermanual englisch, german. Configurationcable for
Size: (14,5 cm x 7,5 cm x 1,5 serial port configuration via Terminalsoftware - and for
cm) connection of optional devices for your CS121.
Weight: 80 gr.
CS121 M Modbus (Extern) Powersupply external. (For USA/CA UL: Supplied by
Size: (12,5 cm x 7 cm x 2,8 cm) NEC Class 2 Powersupply only) Usermanual englisch,
Weight: 210 gr. german. Configurationcable for serial port configuration
Operating temperature: < 40° C via Terminalsoftware - and for connection of optional
devices for your CS121. Mini-8 connector for your
MODBUS RS-485 connection via COM 2.
CS121 BL (Budget Extern) 12V Powersupply external. (For USA/CA UL: Supplied by
300mA DC NEC Class 2 Powersupply only) Usermanual englisch,
Size: (12,5 cm x 7 cm x 2,8 cm) german. Configurationcable for serial port configuration
Weight: 202 gr. via Terminalsoftware - and for connection of optional
Operating temperature: < 40° C devices for your CS121. (Configuration via networkcable
or via optional Zeromodemcable and Terminalsoftware)
CS121 BSC (Budget Slot Usermanual englisch, german. Configurationcable for
Chinese) serial port configuration via Terminalsoftware - and for
Size: (12,5 cm x 7 cm x 2,8 cm) connection of optional devices for your CS121.
61
Weight: 59 gr. (Configuration via networkcable or via inbuilt RS232
Operating temperature: < 40° C inteface of your UPS and the original RS232
communication cable via Terminalsoftware.)
Tabelle: Lieferumfang
Optional ist ein Montage-Kit für Wand bzw. Hutschienen-Montage erhältlich.
ACHTUNG: Bitte öffnen Sie nicht das Gehäuse des CS121 !
4.2 Übersicht CS121 Bilder

Siehe Abschnitt 4.2 Overview CS121Pictures.
Grundsätzlich gibt es folgende Unterscheidungen:
CS121 L= externer Adapter mit AC/DC Wandler Stromversorgung (Standard Modell
mit externem Netzteil, 12V)
CS121 SC = slot Adapter für chinesische USV mit Slot.
CS121 F = slot Adapter für FUJI UPS Japan
CS121 R = slot Adapter für RIELLO/AROS UPS Italien
CS121 M = externer Adapter mit MODBUS Ausgang
CS121 MSL = Slot Adapter mit MODBUS Ausgang
4.3 Einzelheiten
4.3.1 USV Status
Die rote/grüne LED (siehe Nr. 3 in oberer Grafik) hat die Aufgabe, über den Zustand
der USV Kommunikation zu informieren. Normale USV Kommunikation wird durch
eine in regelmäßigen Abständen blinkende grüne LED angezeigt. Die rote LED
leuchtet permanent während des Bootvorgangs. Der Fehlerzustand „Communication
lost“ wird ebenfalls durch die rote LED signalisiert. Der Bootvorgang kann bis zu 3
Minuten dauern, in dieser Zeit wird die rote LED angezeigt.
4.3.2 Netzwerkstatus
Die LED die in der RJ45 Buchse integriert sind (siehe Nr. 1 in oberer Grafik)
signalisieren mit grün eine Verbindung zum Netzwerk an und mit gelb
Netzwerkverkehr.
Grüne LED Gelbe LED Adapter
Aus An UPS wird gesucht/initialisiert, Startphase, dauert bis
zu 2 Minuten
Blinkt Aus Daten fließen/Normalzustand der USV
An An Kommunikation zur UPS unterbrochen.
Tabelle: Netzwerkstatus LEDs
4.3.3 DIP-Schalter
Mit den DIP-Schaltern kann zwischen zwei Funktionen gewählt werden:
Konfigurationsbetrieb und Normalbetrieb.
Tabelle: DIP-Schalter Positionen
Schalter 1 Schalter 2 Beschreibung
ON OFF Normalbetrieb (Konfigurierte IP Adresse)
Default IP Adresse
OFF OFF
( =10.10.10.10 und COM 2 Konfigurationsbetrieb)
62
Bitte beachten Sie: Im Konfigurationsmodus ist nicht die gesamte
Funktionalität des CS121 verfügbar ! Bitte stellen Sie das Gerät auf eine
gültige IP Adresse in ihrem Netzwerk baldmöglichst um und fahren Sie erst
dann mit der endgültigen Konfiguration fort.
Hinweis für CS121 BUDGET : Die BUDGET Varianten des CS121 besitzen keine
Externe COM2 für Konfiguration mehr. Diese Konfigurationsschnittstelle wurde auf
die COM1 (UPS Port) umgeleitet.
EXTERNE Version: Beim CS121 Budget Extern kann im Konfigurationsbetrieb ein
Nullmodem am COM1 angeschlossen werden (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten) und
via Terminalprogramm konfiguriert werden.
SLOT Version: Beim CS121 Budget Slot kann im Konfigurationsbetrieb das Original
seriellen Kabel der USV an die eingebaute RS232 Schnittstelle der USV
angeschlossen werden und mit ihrem Terminalprogramm eine Verbindung zum
CS121 BUDGET aufgebaut werden.
4.3.4 Serielle Schnittstellen

Der SNMP Adapter verfügt über zwei serielle Schnittstellen, wobei über COM1
(siehe Adapter) der Anschluss der USV stattfindet und über COM2 (Siehe obige
Tabelle) die SNMP Adapter Konfiguration erfolgt. (Bei Modell MODBUS ist die COM
2 eine RS485 Schnittstelle)
4.3.5 MIB
Ihr Adapter „spricht“ SNMP USV Standard MIB RFC 1628. Diese MIB wird von den
meisten SNMP Software Produkten unterstützt. Daher ist es meist nicht notwendig
eine MIB in die SNMP Software einzukompilieren. Systeme welche diese Standard
UPS MIB noch nicht beinhalten können die RFC 1628 von unserer Website
herunterladen und die MIB nachträglich einkompilieren.
Hierzu kopieren Sie die MIB Datei in Ihr entsprechendes MIB Verzeichnis Ihrer
SNMP Station, und kompilieren Sie diese Datei. Suchen Sie daher zuerst im MIB2-
Baum nach einer UPSMIB. Dies sollte eine auf RFC1628 Standard MIB
entsprechen.
4.3.6 Konfigurationskabel
Ihr Adapter wird mit einem Konfigurationskabel geliefert (nicht BUDGET), welches
an die serielle Schnittstelle (COM2) des SNMP Adapters und an die Schnittstelle
eines PCs (mit Terminalsoftware) angeschlossen wird. (Außer MODBUS, hier erfolgt
Konfiguration ausschließlich über TELNET und Default IP Adresse). Hierzu genügt
ein Dumb-Terminal bzw. ein Terminal-Emulationsprogramm, wie z.b. Microsoft
Windows Hyperterminal. Im Falle der Konfiguration des SNMP Adapters stellen Sie
bitte sicher, dass sich die DIP-Schalter in der korrekten Position befinden.
Vergleichen Sie hierzu bitte den Abschnitt 7. Konfiguration: Verwendung des
Hauptmenus.
4.3.7 Spannungsversorgung
Die Spannungsversorgung des SNMP Adapters (nur externes Modell CS121L)
erfolgt über das mitgelieferte Steckernetzteil an einer Netzdose (230 V).
63
Hinweis: Für die CS121 Adapter Version L gilt, dass wenn Sie ein anderes als das
mitgelieferte Netzteil benutzen, Sie darauf achten sollten, dass die
Polarität richtig gewählt ist. Wird das Netzteil mit der falschen Polarität
an den SNMP Adapter angeschlossen, könnte der SNMP Adapter
beschädigt werden und die Garantie erlischt. Die Versorgungsspannung
sollte nicht geringer als 9V DC (Standardmodelle) sein, empfohlen ist
12Volt.
Für die CS121 Modelle C und die Slot Card wird kein Netzteil mitgeliefert.
Diese Adapter bekommen ihre Stromversorgung direkt von der USV,
wobei beide über einen variablen 9-36V DC Eingang verfügen.
4.3.8 USV Interface Kabel
Als USV Verbindungskabel nehmen Sie bitte das der USV beiliegende Originale
Schnittstellenkabel. Das herstellerspezifische Schnittstellenkabel verbindet die USV
mit dem SNMP Adapter. Bitte wenden Sie sich bei Fragen an den Hersteller der von
Ihnen eingesetzten USV. Verwenden Sie nur das Original RS-232 USV Kabel zur
Kommunikation. Wenn Ihre USV nur über eine Kontaktschnittstelle verfügt, müssen
Sie das entsprechende Spezialkabel verwenden. Weiter Informationen zu speziellen
Kabeln für Ihre USV erfragen Sie bitte bei Ihrem Lieferanten.
5. Überprüfung der SNMP Adapter Funktionen
Der Verbindungsstatus des SNMP Adapters kann sowohl vor einer als nach einer
Konfiguration kontrolliert werden. Dabei sind drei Punkte zu beachten.
5.1 USV Status Anzeigen Error/Link LED
(Siehe Error! Reference source not found.)
a) Während des Bootvorganges leuchtet die rote LED permanent.
Die grüne LED ist zunächst nicht an. Dieser Prozeß kann bis zu
3 Minuten dauern. Die rote LED bleibt an wenn ein ERROR
vorliegt.
b) Ungefähr fünf bis zehn Sekunden nach dem Ende des
Bootvorgangs beginnt die grüne LED zu blinken. Das grüne
Blinken bedeutet, daß der Adapter für die Kommunikation bereit
ist.
5.2 Netzwerkanschluss Status LED

(Siehe Error! Reference source not found.r)
Die LEDs, die in der RJ45 Buchse integriert sind, signalisieren mit der grünen LED
eine Verbindung zum Netzwerk und mit der gelben LED, Netzwerkverkehr.
5.3 Ping(en) des SNMP Adapters
a) Senden Sie ein Ping Kommando von der SNMP Station oder
einem anderen Netzwerkrechner (NMS, Network Management
Station) an den SNMP Adapter ab wenn Sie die IP-Adresse des
Adapters kennen.
b) Für den Fall, daß Sie keine Rückmeldung bekommen,
überprüfen Sie bitte den Netzwerkanschluß und die IP Adresse
des SNMP Adapters. Weiteres hierzu im nächsten Abschnitt 7.
Konfiguration: Verwendung des Hauptmenus.
64
Hinweis: Die unterschiedlichen Antwortzeiten bei einem Ping stellen keinen Fehler
dar. Der Adapter beantwortet nicht jede PING Anfrage gleich schnell, bei
langsamen oder umfangreichen USV Protokollen kann es sogar zu einem
kurzfristigen timeout kommen. Eine ständiger timeout ist allerdings ein
Fehlerzustand.
6. Konfigurationsvorbereitungen
6.1 Methoden der Konfiguration
Es stehen drei Methoden zur Verfügung, um eine Konfiguration des SNMP Adapters
vorzunehmen: Telnet, Terminal und http. Diese Methoden unterscheiden sich in der
Art der Verbindung und in der Art der Benutzeroberfläche. Die Telnet Methode hat
Gemeinsamkeiten mit den zwei anderen Methoden. Die Telnet Methode lässt wie
bei der http Methode eine Kommunikationsverbindung zum Adapter über das
Netzwerk durch seine IP Adresse zu und in der Bedienung hat die Telnetmethode
die gleiche Benutzeroberfläche wie bei der Terminalmethode. Bei der
Terminalmethode wird der SNMP Adapter seriell mit einem Rechner verbunden.
Über die Terminal und Telnet Schnittstellen bietet der SC121 Adapter ein
Systemskonfigurationsmenu an über das der Benutzer verschiedene Ebenen des
Hauptmenus per Befehlszeilen durchwandert und einzelne Konfigurationen im
System vornimmt. Bei der http Methode bietet der Adapter Möglichkeiten an
Konfigurationen direkt in Maskenfelder einzutragen oder per Dropdown-Menü
auszuwählen.
Wenn Sie im Vorfeld Ihre USV aufgebaut und angeschlossen haben, können Sie
jetzt mit einer von diesen drei Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten des SNMP Adapters für
das Netzwerk fortfahren. Hierfür sollte der SNMP Adapter an einem PC mit einem
Terminal-Emulationsprogramm/Dumb-Terminal seriell angeschlossen sein und/oder
über TELNET/http per IP-Adresse vom Netzwerk erreichbar sein. Es gilt
grundsätzlich für alle drei Konfigurationszugänge eine Anmeldung im System zuerst
vorzunehmen. Für den Zugang per Terminal und Telnet wird der Benutzer gleich
beim Starten des Programms aufgefordert das Passwort einzutragen. Das
werksmäßig eingestellte Passwort lautet:
„cs121–snmp“
Dieses Passwort gilt auch für die Passwortabfrage im Abschnitt
7.6 Network & Security Settings – Option 1 In diesem Abschnitt kann ebenfalls das
Passwort geändert werden.
Bei dem Zugang per http in die Konfiguration des Adapters muss zusätzlich der
Benutzername eingeben werden. Der Benutzername ist mit „admin“ voreingestellt
und das Passwort ist „cs121-snmp“.
Siehe Figure 4 HTTP administrator login.
65
Achtung Vergleichen Sie unbedingt den Abschnitt 5.3 Ping(en) des SNMP
Adapters a, wenn die ERROR LED rot leuchtet. In diesem Fall steht die
Konfigurationsmöglichkeit wahrscheinlich per http nicht zu Verfügung.
Aufruf der drei Methoden:
Verwendung von TELNET und Konfiguration des Adapters über die Default IP
Adresse 10.10.10.10 (oder bereits konfigurierte IP-Adresse) Befehl: „telnet <IP-
Address>“
Nutzung eines Terminalprogramms und serielles Verbindungskabels über COM 2.
Konfiguration über Web Browser - Hier wird über eine HTML Seite die gesamte
Konfiguration möglich gemacht. Hierzu kann entweder die default-IP Adresse
10.10.10.10 und dem User Name: admin; Passwort des TELNET Clients (default=
cs121-snmp). Später kann die konfigurierte IP Adresse als Adresse für den Web
Browser verwendet werden. Bitte beachten Sie die integrierten online Hilfen der
HTML Seite bei weiteren Fragen.
Für die Konfiguration mit Web Browser/Server sind folgende Dinge zu beachten:
Grundsätzlich empfehlen wir den Einsatz von Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.x oder
auch Mozilla 1.3x (Bitte holen Sie hierzu Informationen aus dem Mozilla „Help“ –
Help Contents“ Menü ein). Hierbei gilt zu beachten, dass Java Script aktiviert sein
sollte. Im Internet Explorer müssen unter „Internetoptionen“ - „Sicherheit“ – „Stufe
anpassen“ die entsprechenden Optionen aktiviert sein. Ist Java Script nicht aktiviert,
müssen bei einem Modellwechsel (USV) in der HTML Adapter Konfiguration,
Baudrate, Kapazität etc. manuell eingetragen werden.
Auf den Konfigurationsseiten empfehlen wir die Hitstory Funktion („Back“) des web
Browsers nie einzusetzen, da dieses dazu führen kann, dass Befehle (z.b. Löschen
von Event Jobs) an den Adapter unter Umständen mehrmals gesendet werden.
6.2 Kommunikationseinstellungen
6.2.1 Grundkonfiguration für eine Netzwerkverbindung
Stellen Sie den DIP Schalter 1 des Adapters auf OFF und verbinden Sie den
Adapter mit dem Ethernet Kabel und prüfen Sie ob die Netzwerk LED grün o. gelb
leuchtet. Bei den SLOT Modellen muss dazu das Gerät in die USV geschoben
werden – jeder Reboot erfolgt dann durch Hineinstecken des Gerätes.
Sobald die Netzwerk LED leuchtet setzen Sie eine TCP/IP Route auf das Gerät.
Dies erfolgt über einen Aufruf von der Kommandoshell Ihres Betriebssystems "route
add 10.10.10.10 <Ihre IP Adresse>“. Sehen Sie auch route -? für weitere
Informationen zu ROUTE und verwenden Sie eventuell andere Syntax für dieses
Kommando wenn dies von unserer Beschreibung abweicht.
Danach testen Sie ob der Adapter nun auf „PING 10.10.10.10“ eine Antwort gibt. Ist
dies der Fall, dann können Sie sich mit jedem TELNET bzw. http Programm nun mit
dieser IP Adresse verbinden und nach der Passwort Eingabe die Konfiguration fertig
stellen.
66
HINWEIS: Nach Eingabe des Passworts können Sie die Versionsnummer der
Firmware sehen. Wir empfehlen alle Versionen unter V 1.87 auf den aktuellsten
Stand zu bringen.
6.2.2 Grundkonfiguration für eine serielle Verbindung
Die DIP-Schalter des SNMP Adapters müssen zunächst für die Konfiguration
eingestellt werden. Schalter 1 sollte in der OFF Position sein. Die Stellung von
Schalter 2 ist für die Konfiguration zunächst unerheblich und sollte auf OFF bleiben.
Verbinden Sie den SNMP Adapter (COM2) über das beiliegende

Konfigurationskabel mit einem PC auf dem ein Terminal Emulationsprogramm oder
Microsoft Hyperterminal gestartet ist.
Konfiguration der Kommunikationseinstellungen: Benutzen Sie bitte nachfolgende

Tabelle, für die Konfiguration des Terminalprogramms. Diese Einstellungen
entsprechen den Voreinstellungen die sich beim Klicken des Restore Defaults
Knopfs ergeben.
Siehe Figure 5 Terminal settings.
Bestätigen Sie mit OK, wenn Sie mit dem Windows Kommunikationsfenster die Ein-
stellungen vorgenommen haben. Ihr Terminal ist nunmehr bereit zur Kommunikation
mit dem SNMP Adapter.
7. Konfiguration: Verwendung des Hauptmenus
Grundsätzlich können alle (Telnet, Terminal und Webserver) Bedien- und
Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten verwendet werden. In den neueren Abschnitten dieses
Handbuches ab Abschnitt 7.12 Scheduled actions werden lediglich die Webserver
Erklärungen präsentiert werden da die neuesten Funktionen und
Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten nur noch über den Web-Server zur Verfügung, nicht
mehr in Telnet und Terminal. Nach der Eingabe des Passwortes gelangen Sie zum
Hauptmenü (main menu), von wo aus Sie die IP und Gateway Adressen, sowie die
MIB System Group setzen können. Des weiteren ist hier das Setzen der
Zugangsberechtigung der SNMP Communities, des Trap-Empfängers, der
Einstellungen im Display und das Löschen der Konfigurationseinstellungen möglich.
Das Sichern neuer Einstellungen, das Beenden des Programms ist ebenfalls aus
dem Hauptmenü anwählbar.
Siehe Figure 6 Telnet - Main Menu.

Um aus dem Hauptmenü eine Option auszuwählen, geben Sie bitte die Ziffer der
Option an der Stelle Enter Command => ein. Das Programm wird Sie dann
weiterführen.
7.1 Setzen von MIB System Group, IP und Gateway Adressen
Das Setzen der MIB System Group, der IP und Gateway Adressen, sowie anderer
System Konfigurationen geschieht über den Menüpunkt 1 aus dem Hauptmenü.
Geben Sie die Ziffer 1 am Enter Command => Prompt ein und das nachfolgende
Menü erscheint:
67
Siehe Figure 7 Telnet - IP Settings
Hinweis: Die Mindestvoraussetzung für den Betrieb des SNMP Adapter, ist die
Eingabe der IP Adresse, der Subnetz Adresse und eines USV Modells.
Für die Änderung von Werten, geben Sie bitte zunächst die Nummer des Menüs ein.
Nach Eingabe eines Leerzeichens <space>, können Sie nun den neuen Wert
eintragen und mit der Eingabetaste <enter> bestätigen. Ihre Änderung erscheint im
oberen linken Bereich des Bildschirms.
Das Hauptmenü ist mit der Eingabe der Ziffer 0 und Betätigen der Eingabetaste
<enter> zu erreichen.
Um dem SNMP Adapter die richtigen IP und Gateway Adressen sowie die
Subnetzmaske zuzuweisen, geben Sie bitte wie folgt ein:
1, Leerzeichen <space>, entsprechende IP Adresse des Adapters, <enter>

Vergleiche: Enter Command => 1 192.10.200.0
Enter Command => 2 192.10.200.254
Enter Command => 3 255.255.255.0
Für die Zuweisung des System Kontakt Name geben Sie bitte die Ziffer 4 ein, gefolgt
vom Namen der zu benachrichtigenden Person:
Vergleiche: Enter Command => 4 Mr. Harry Hirsch
Für die Zuweisung des SysName (USV Name) geben Sie bitte die Ziffer 5 ein,
gefolgt vom Namen der USV:
Vergleiche: Enter Command => 5 USV 1
Für die Zuweisung der SysLocation (UPS Location) geben Sie bitte 6 ein, gefolgt
vom Location Name:
Vergleiche: Enter Command => 6 Building 12
7.2 Setzen der Zugangsberechtigung

Vom Hauptmenü aus gelangen Sie unter dem Menüpunkt „Set access controls of
SNMP communities“ in das Untermenü von wo aus Sie die Zugangsberechtigungen
setzen können. Das Untermenü stellt sich als ein Block von 10 Manager IP
Adressen mit den jeweiligen Zugangsberechtigungen, Kommandos und einem
Beispiel dar. Welche Manager Zugriff auf den SNMP Adapter Agenten haben und
welche Art von Zugriff diese besitzen, kann in diesem Menü, Siehe Figure 8 Telnet -
SNMP communities, eingestellt bzw. geändert werden. Es wird zwischen dem
reinen Lesezugriff (read only) und dem Lese- und Schreibzugriff (read and write)
unterschieden. Des weiteren wird hier der Community Name (Passwort) eingeben.
Um die Zugangsberechtigung einzusetzen, geben Sie bitte am Prompt folgendes

ein:
set, Leerzeichen <space>, Nummer 1-10 für die korrespondierenden Manager

Adressen, Leerzeichen <space>, Name des Community-String, Leerzeichen
68
<space>, Zugangscode -r für read only oder -w für read and write, Bestätigung der
Eingabe mit der Eingabetaste <enter>. Bitte beachten sie, das pro Community nur
ein Recht, also nur „read“ oder „read und write“ benutzt werden kann.
Beispiel :
Enter Command => set 1 132.217.227.025 public w
Möchten Sie eine Manager IP Adresse löschen, so geben Sie bitte folgendes ein:
clear, Leerzeichen <space>, gewünschte Nummer der Zugangsberechtigung,

Bestätigung mit der Eingabetaste <enter>.
Beispiel:
Enter Command => clear 3

7.3 Einstellen des Trap-Empfängers
Dieses Untermenü gestattet Ihnen die Zuteilung von trap messages (Mitteilungen).
Sie können bestimmen welcher IP Manager (IP Adresse) eine trap message von
dem SNMP Adapter empfängt und über dies hinaus ist die Filterung von trap
messages über den Zustand der USV an bestimmte IP Adressen (Manager)
möglich.
Hinweis: Ab Firmware Release V 1.77: Wird der CS121 Adapter mit

„upsCommunicationLost“ in Betrieb genommen wird nach 5
Kommunikationsversuchen der „commlost“ Trap gesendet.
7.4 UPS Settings (UPSMAN Konfiguration)

In diesem Menü muss ein USV Modell ausgewählt werden. Dabei wird beim CS121
unterschieden zwischen CABLE und SERIAL Modellen. Mit CABLE wird über ein
Spezialkabel der Adapter mit der Kontaktschnittstelle der USV verbunden. Mit
SERIAL wird eine serielle Verbindung mit der USV hergestellt. Dazu wird das
serielle USV Kabel verwendet (USV Lieferumfang). SERIAL ist Standard sobald Sie
ein USV Modell anhand des Namens auswählen. Wenn Sie CABLE benutzen
wollen, dann suchen Sie bitte nach dem USV Modell mit dem entsprechenden
Namen, z.b. CABLE 6
Das Modell CS121 unterstützt sowohl serielle Geräte mit den jeweiligen USV
eigenen RS-232 Protokollen, als auch die Kontakt USV Modelle von Kabeltypen
O,C,1-10. Diese Kontaktkabel sind USV- oder alarmmeldesystemspezifisch und vom
Hersteller der USV oder des Alarmsystems zu liefern. Unsere CABLE
Dokumentation zeigt Beispiele für solche Kabel wenn diese selbst konfektioniert
werden sollen. Löschen: Bei CABLE muss der richtige Typ ausgewählt werden, die
Kommunikationsparameter sind automatisch auf die entsprechenden
Kommunikations-Werte voreingestellt.
UPS Model
69
Hier erfolgt die Auswahl des seriellen USV Typ oder des CABLE Modells, dabei
werden die Kommunikationsparameter Baudrate usw. bereits zur USV Anlage
passend vorgegeben.
Achtung: Mit der Auswahl des USV Typs bestimmen Sie das
Kommunikationsprotokoll. Sollte Ihre USV nicht aufgeführt sein, so
befragen Sie Ihren USV Fachhändler ob ein anderes USV Gerät aus
derselben Modellreihe gewählt werden kann.
Siehe Figure 9 Telnet UPS Settings.
Bitte beachten sie bei dem Menüpunkt ups model „System shutdown“ (minutes
before battery end – downtime):
Dieser Wert legt fest, wie viele Minuten vor dem vollständigen Entladen der
Batterien, die Event action „(3) System shutdown“ aus dem Event Menü (siehe Bild
im nächsten Abschnitt) ausgeführt (wenn Kreuz gesetzt ist = aktiv) wird.
Dieser Wert legt fest, wie viele Minuten vor Entladung der USV-Batterie der
Shutdown-Vorgang (bzw. die vom Benutzer konfigurierte Event Aktion) eingeleitet
wird. Dieses Zeitintervall muss so groß sein, dass beispielsweise zum Herunter-
fahren des Systems vor dem Abschalten der USV ausreichend Zeit verbleibt.
Kalkulieren Sie diesen Wert eher großzügig (Beispiel: Bei zehn Minuten Standzeit
der USV beginnen Sie mindestens 3 Minuten vor Entladung der Batterie den
Shutdown-Vorgang).
Mit 1 <Enter> kommen Sie zur nächsten Seite mit der USV Modellauswahl. Um nach
der Auswahl der USV aus der Liste die Default Werte zu ändern, geben sie die
entsprechende Option, gefolgt von dem neuen gewünschten Wert ein. (Siehe obige
Grafik)
7.5 Event Settings
In diesem Abschnitt des Konfigurationsmenus werden die Beziehungen zwischen
den auftretenden Systemereignisse bzw. Alarmen, die sog. events, und die darauf
zu erfolgende Maßnahmen bzw. Aktionen, die sog. actions, eingestellt. Dazu gehört
z.b. das senden von RCCMD, Email, Logfileeinträge, UPSDIALER, TempMan und
USV- Abschaltung. Dieser Bildschirm zeigt die mit „X“ markierten Aktionen als
AKTIV an, Aktionen ohne „X“ sind nicht aktiv und können konfiguriert werden. Im
unteren Abschnitt des Fensters wird erläutert wie eine Aktion konfiguriert werden
kann. Siehe Figure 10 Telnet - Event overview
7.5.1 Log Event Settings
In diesem Abschnitt der SNMP Adapter Konfiguration wird der Logfile Eintrag
eingestellt. Zum Beispiel kann mit „Powerfail“ p100 alle 100 Sekunden der Text
„Powerfail“ ins CS121 Logfile geschrieben werden, solange der Alarm ansteht.
Ebenso verhält es sich mit den anderen Funktionen Email, RCCMD Shutdown und
allen anderen Events – jedes Ereignis kann eine unbegrenzte Anzahl von Aktionen
(verzögert, sofort, wiederholt, etc.) zur Folge haben. Das CS121 Logfile befindet sich
70
im Adapter Root-Verzeichnis unter ../Flash/text.log. Der Benutzer kann das Logfile
mit dem UPSMON oder JAVAMON, aber auch mit FTP auslesen. (Unter Einsatz
der konfigurierten IP Adresse oder der Default IP Adresse 10.10.10.10 und der
Benutzername/Passwort Kombination „admin/cs121-snmp“ hat der Anwender Zugriff
auf den SNMP Adapter.)
Siehe Figure 11 Telnet - Log Event Settings.
Lesen des ALARM Logfiles des CS121:
Das Alarmlog des CS121 enthält Einträge die entweder durch die Konfigurations
gemacht werden (Customized EVENTS durch den Anwender mit eigenen
Logfiletexten) oder die durch den USV Typ als Alarm vorgegeben sind. Z.b. ein
Eintrag eines CS121 ADMINs bei der Emailkonfiguration würde erheblich mehr
Einträge verursachen weil auch weniger interessante Statusänderungen eingetragen
werden, die sonst nicht gemacht würden. Um das Logfile besser zu verstehen
zeigen wir folgend ein typisches Logfile an einer USV:
Der CS121 schreibt z.b. den Status aller angeschlossenen Geräte wenn das Gerät
"kalt" gestartet wird:
05/27/2005,08:05:58, Synchronized with timeserver 192.168.202.8. OK

Erfolgreich mit Timeserver die Zeit abgeglichen.
05/27/2005,08:06:50, UPSMAN on <UPS MODEL> has started

Erfolgreich mit der USV Kommunikation aufgenommen. Gerät ist jetzt betriebsbereit
(Die folgenden Einträge werden nur vorgefunden wenn ein CS121

ADMINSTRATOR in den EMAIL Settings eingetragen wurde. )

Alle mit “EVENT X” bezeichneten Alarme kann man in der EVENT liste im
Webbrowser sehen. Beim EVENT 4 es handelt sich bei dieser USV um den EVENT
"UPSMAN started" - D.h. das eine Email versendet wurde mit dem Text "UPSMAN
started" - also die Bestätigung des Eintrages von 08:06:50 als Email.

Der Scheduler wurde aktiviert und ist bereit zur Ausführung von Aktionen, in diesem
Fall ist eine Aktion aktiv, "Selftest". Diese Information wird als Email an den CS121
ADMIN versendet.
71
Dies sind 4 Emails über den Status des AUX Ports (Auxiliary Schnittstelle für externe
Alarmkontakte), welche im Auslieferungszustand auf LOW stehen. Weil der AUX
Status entweder High oder Low für einen Alarmzustand konfiguriert sein kann und
es
dem CS121 unbekannt ist was dort angeschlossen wurde, sendet er den aktuellen
Status beim Start immer per Email weg so das der Benutzer sehen kann in welchen
Zustand beim Start sich die Schalter befunden haben. Ob dies ein Alarm ist oder
nicht kann in diesem Fall nur der Anwender entscheiden.

Dies sind 8 Emails über den Status der analogen Sensoren (Temperatur, Luftfeuchte
usw.) des SENSORMANAGERS, welche anzeigen das sich die Messwerte
im NORMAL Bereich befinden - oder schlichtweg nichts angeschlossen ist.

Dies sind 4 Emails über den Status der digitalen Eingänge der Sensoren (z.b
Klimaanlage, Feuermelder usw. ) des SENSORMANAGERS, welche anzeigen das
sich die Stati im NORMAL Bereich befinden - oder schlichtweg nichts angeschlossen
ist.

Dies sind 4 Emails über den Status der digitalen Ausgänge der Sensoren (z.b.
Emergency OFF, Feuerlöscher, usw.) des SENSORMANAGERS, welche anzeigen
das sich die Stati im NORMAL Bereich befinden - oder schlichtweg nichts
angeschlossen ist.

Diese Email zeigt an das KEIN Sensormanager angeschlossen ist, obwohl einer
konfiguriert wurde, es wird also eine Fehlerhafter Konfiguration angezeigt.
In diesem Fall ist es wirklich ein Fehler und sollte durch den Anwender korrigiert
72
werden.
7.5.2 Email Event Settings

In diesem Menü werden die Email Einstellungen für die einzelnen Events
konfiguriert. Bitte beachten Sie hierzu auch die Einstellungen im Abschnitt
7.6 Network & Security Settings. Siehe Figure 12 Telnet E-Mail Event Settings.
Es können neben Textangaben auch Variablen in die Email vom CS121 übergeben
werden
Beispiel:
Add “[email protected]” "Powerfail an #MODEL IP 204 CS121 Frank

#AUTONOMIETIME minutes left." o
Dieses Vorgehensweise ist grundsätzlich für alle Events möglich wobei der Job nur
durch einen echten Event ausgeführt werden kann und nicht durch das Telnet TEST
command. Um die oben konfigurierte Eingabe zu Testen kann mit dem Befehl „Test“
und der Listennummer (Email Entries) die Funktionalität überprüft werden, daher ist
es nicht notwendig die USV wirklich in Batteriebetrieb zu bringen – ein einfaches
TEST genügt um zu sehen ob z.b. die Email gesendet wird. Das Logfile im CS121
zeigt an, ob die Mail korrekt versendet wurde oder ob ein Fehler aufgetreten ist.
7.5.3 RCCMD Shutdown

EinigeeVoreinstellungen sind für alle RCCMD Aktionen notwendig. Erstens sollten
die „Enable UpsMon Server“ und „Use RCCMD2 Traps“ Häkchen gesetzt sein.
Dieses ermöglicht dem CS121 seine RCCMD Aktionen auszuführen.
Siehe Figure 13 HTTP - Network & Security Settings.
Zweitens müssen der CS121 Adapter und der RCCMD Clientrechner über das
Netzwerk einander erreichen können und hierfür sind weitere Einstellungen auf den
jeweiligen Rechner vorzunehmen. Weil der CS121 Adapter für die ersten drei
aufgelisteten Aktionen MSG, SD, und Exe eine aktive Rolle spielt (d.h. der Adapter
schickt ein RCCMD Signal an einen RCCMD Client) müssen bei diesen Jobs in dem
Event Editor als erster Parameter die IP Adresse und als zweiter Parameter die Port
Nummer des RCCMD Clients Deingetragen werden. Zusätzlich muss an dem
RCCMD Clientrechner entweder gar kein Senderfilter gesetzt sein oder es sind die
IP Adressen der UPSMON Server, die als zugelassene Sender fungieren sollen
einzutragen. Diese Einstellungen werden bei der Installation von RCCMD auf dem
Clientrechner vorgenommen.Weitere Einzelheiten hierzu sind in der RCCMD
Dokumentation aufgeführt.
Bei der vierten Aktion, RCCMD Trap, ist der RCCMD Client der aktiver Teilnehmer
und deswegen werden hier keine Empfänger-Parameterinformationen eingetragen
(siehe Nummer 4 im folgenden Bild). H müssen in der Liste der zugelassenen
UPSMON Server des RCCMD Clientrechners die UPSMON Server IP Adressen, zu
73
denen der RCCMD Client eine Verbindung aufbauen soll, eingetragen sein.
Außerdem sollte auf dem RCCMD Clientrechner ein Filter gesetzt werden so da nur
berechtigte Sender das Signal absenden dürfen. Ferner muss auch auf dem
RCCMD Client bei der Installation das „Enable Traps“ Häkchen gesetzt sein, sonst
wird sich der RCCMD client nicht beim CS121 Adapter anmelden. Hinweis: Bei
einem Reboot des CS121 sollte auch der RCCMD Dienst neu gestartet werden,
sonst wird der Neuaufbau der Verbindung erst nach 12 Stunden automatisch
erfolgen (auto. Loginprozess des RCCMD clients).
Siehe Figure 14 HTTP - Server Job configuration menu.
Achtung! Die selben RCCMD shutdown Einträge die man unter Powerfail gemacht
hat, muss mann AUCH UNTER Battery low eintragen und zwar OHNE
Verzögerung
Grundsätzlich gilt, dass die maximale RCCMD Anzahl unbegrenzt ist, jedoch können
immer nur 50 RCCMD Empfänger am Stück abgearbeitet werden. D.h. erst wird an
50 Empfänger gesendet, danach die nächsten 50 usw.
Der Timeout 60 Sekunden. Nach Ablauf dieser Zeit wird die Kommunikation mit
dem RCCMD Client beendet. Wenn keine Antwort des Clients empfangen wird,
unterstellt das System einen erfolgreichen RCCMD Shutdown und fährt mit dem
Shutdown der nächsten 50 RCCMD Klienten fort. In jeder Minute können 50
RCCMD Empfänger abgearbeitet werden.
Add RCCMD Hier können die IP Adressen von Computern im Netzwerk mit
RCCMD Empfängern angegeben werden, so dass der Adapter
direkt einen Multiservershutdown auslösen kann. Der Zeitpunkt
des Auslösens richtet sich nach der konfigurierten Downtime des
Adapters (default, Zeitpunkt der Batterierestkapazität in Minuten
während eines längeren Stromausfalls) bzw. nach einem
Countdown Timer. Erweiterte CS121 Modelle können
zusätzliche Events (z.B. Battery Low, Battery defect,
Communication lost, etc.) als RCCMD Signal verwenden,
befragen Sie dazu Ihren Fachhändler.
Test RCCMD Wenn mit Telnet oder per http auf das Gerät verbunden wird,
kann der RCCMD Befehl auch ohne Netzausfall der USV
getestet werden (Siehe Figure 15 HTTP Event Editor RCCMD
Shutdown test). Dazu wird in diesem Menü der Befehl „test
<Listen-Nr. des Empfängers>“ eingegeben. Dann führt der
Adapter das RCCMD Sendekommando auf diese Adresse sofort
aus.
Hinweis: Aufgrund von Netzwerkeinstellungen kann es vorkommen, dass dieser

Test mit „failed“ antwortet. Das Signal wird jedoch oft trotzdem
abgesendet und der Empfänger reagiert korrekt. Benutzen Sie daher nur
die Empfängerseite zur Überprüfung, ob das Signal korrekt abgesetzt
wurde.
74
Delete RCCMD Diese Option löscht einzelne der RCCMD Empfänger aus der
Liste. Der Befehl „del <Listen-Nr. des Empfängers>“ führt die
Option aus.
Der CS121 verwendet das Parameter Basierende RCCMD Version 2, welches auf
dem gleichen Kanal unterschiedliche Aktionen auslösen kann. Bei RCCMD Version
1 Clients kann nur eine Aktion (in der Regel wird ein Shutdown file ausgelöst)
gestartet werden.
Hinweis: Grundsätzlich gilt für alle 3 RCCMD Event Funktionen, dass die Liste der
vom Benutzer konfigurierten RCCMD Empfänger für diesen Event im
oberen Teil des Fensters aufgelistet wird.
Siehe Figure 18 Telnet - RCCMD- Shutdown Event Settings.

Down time Bei einer Downtime von 3 Minuten würde bei Erreichen von nur
noch 3 Minuten Restzeit in der USV der RCCMD Befehl zum
Shutdown abgesendet. Die Portadresse ist default 6003. Soll ein
geheimer Port verwendet werden so tragen Sie hier eine freie
Portadresse ein auf der das RCCMD Programm auf den
Netzwerkcomputern „hört“.
Countdown Soll anstatt der System-Downtime (Restkapazitätszeit) der USV
ein Countdown zum Auslösen des RCCMD Kommandos
verwendet werden, so wird anstatt z.b. 5 Minuten der Wert – 5
eingeben. Nun wird das RCCMD Kommando nach 5 Minuten
Batterielaufzeit ausgelöst.
Lizenzbedingungen:
Bitte beachten Sie: Um diese Funktion legal nutzen zu können, wird auf den
Netzwerkcomputern das jeweilige RCCMD Programm von der USV Management
Software CD-ROM installiert und gestartet. Dabei darf der Lizenz-Keycode pro
Installation nur 1 mal benutzt werden, danach sind weitere Lizenzen zu erwerben.
Der CS121 beinhaltet keine Lizenzen für RCCMD, er bietet nur die Möglichkeit bis
zu 50 Netzwerkcomputer direkt per RCCMD Sendebefehl zu erreichen.
Soll eine größere Anzahl von RCCMD Empfängern von diesem Adapter erreicht
werden, so muss einer der Empfänger als Relaisstation arbeiten. Dieser Empfänger
wird so konfiguriert, dass er von dem Adapter ein RCCMD Signal empfängt und
dieses dazu verwendet, ein Batchfile mit dem Aufruf weiterer RCCMD Sendersignale
zu starten. Dieser Computers ist damit Sender und Empfänger gleichzeitig und ein
wichtiges Glied in der USV Überwachungskette. Versorgen Sie diesen Computer
ebenfalls aus der USV.
Hinweis: Alle Netzwerkkomponenten wie Router/ Hubs, etc. müssen auch USV-
gestützt sein, da sonst bei einem Netzwerk-Shut Down nicht alle Clients
erreicht werden können.
7.5.4 RCCMD2 Message Event Settings

In diesem Menü kann der Benutzer eine Textnachricht mit einen RCCMD Event
verbinden und konfigurieren. Textnachrichten können an RCCMD Empfänger
75
verschickt werden. Damit ist es z.b. möglich von einem CS121 eine RCCMD 2
Nachricht an einen Windows 2000 oder UNIX Rechner zu senden, welche dieser als
„NET SEND“ oder „WALL“ Nachricht ins Netzwerk weitersendet. Das Problem der
Benachrichtigung von Netzwerkbenutzern mit unterschiedlichen Betriebssystem
kann somit gelöst werden.
Hinweis: Die jeweiligen RCCMD Clients müssen Version 2 entsprechen, mit

RCCMD V1 Clients kann nur z.b. ein Shutdown ausgelöst werden –
mehrere Aktionen sind von RCCMD V1 nicht unterstützt. Fragen Sie
ihren Händler nach RCCMD V2 wenn Sie diese Funktionen nutzen
möchten.
Figure 19 Telnet - RCCMD2 Message Event Settings.
RCCMD MESSAGE sendet an den RCCMD 2 Client den Befehl ein

„net send“ Kommando auszuführen.
7.5.5 RCCMD Execute/command

Dieses Signal macht es möglich ein beliebiges Programm oder Kommand auf einem
entfernen RCCMD client auszuführen. Dies kann auch verwendet werden um z.b.
von einem CS121, SITEMANAGER, SITESWITCH4 oder einem anderen RCCMD
sender ein Kommando auf einen anderen CS121, SITEMANAGER, SITESWITCH4,
RCCMD client zu senden . Anwendungsbeispiel: um z.b. ein Kommando von einem
CS121 auf einem SITEMANAGER zu senden um dort die Steckdose (Ausgang) Nr.
8 abzuschalten.
Jeder CS121, SITEMANAGER, SITESWITCH kann als RCCMD “listener” arbeiten

um so Kommandos von anderen Geräten per RCCMD auszuführen, sehen Sie dazu
die folgenden Beispiele: .
Beispiel 1: In der „command“ Zeile wird der Befehlsname eines Programms

zusammen mit seinem Pfad eingetragen. Wenn das Programm in der Registry des
RCCMD clients eingetragen ist kann die Eingabe des vollständigen Pfades
übergangen werden und es genügt nur den Namen in der „command“ Zeile
einzugeben wie z.B. „notepad“.
Siehe Figure 20 RCCMD execute/command.
Wenn der „command“ durch zusätzliche Parameter ergänzt werden soll oder wenn
eine Reihe von Befehlen als Skript ausgeführt werden soll, dann müssen diese
Abläufe als entsprechende Batch- bzw. Skriptdatei auf dem RCCMD Klient
vorbereitet werden.
Telnet Beispiel: Im unteren Fenster wird das Programm „Exitwin_logoff“) auf IP

Adresse 192.168.202.121, Port 6003 einmalig nach Eintreten des Events Powerfail
ausgeführt.
Siehe Figure 21 Telnet- RCCMD2 Execute Event Settings.
76
Wenn der CS121 auch als RCCMD Listener Client konfiguriert ist, ist der CS121 in
der Lage RCCMD Nachrichten zu empfangen sei es von einem anderen CS121
Adapter oder von einem Rechner auf dem der UPSMAN Manager läuft. Der Beispiel
Event Job im Figure 25 sendet dem AUX output port 2 ein “high“ Signal.
Damit dieses funktioniert müssen auf dem CS121 als RCCMD Listener Client vier
Einstellungen vorgenommen werden:
1 Im CS121 Menu Network & Security Settings, muss das Häkchen „Enable RCCMD
Listener“ gesetzt sein und der „RCCMD Listener Port“ muss festgelegt werden.
(Siehe Figure 22)
2 Die IP Adresse des UPSMAN Senders muss in die „SNMP Communities“
eingetragen werden. (Siehe Figure 23)
3 Der Ziel AUX Port des CS121 als Listener Client muss als „use as Output“
konfiguriert werden. (Siehe Figure 24) und
4 Der „send RCCMD exe“ Befehl im Event Editor des CS121 Senders oder des
Rechners mit UPSMAN, (Siehe UPSMAN Handbuch) muss mit den Einstellungen
des CS121 als RCCMD Listener Clients übereinstimmen. (Siehe Figure 25)
Beispiel 2: Um ein signal von einem CS121, UPSMAN, SITEMANAGER,

SITEMONITOR, SITESWITCH 4 oder irgendeinem anderen RCCMD sender ZU
einem weiteren RCCMD Empfänger zu senden (z.b. an einen CS121,
SITEMANAGER, SITEMONITOR, SITESWITCH 4) um damit einen Ausgang zu
schalten so sehen Sie das folgende Beispiel:
Generell können 3 Arten von Kommandos mit dem RCCMD sender verschickt
warden:
Ausgang schalten : Syntax „|UPSCMD|20000|x,y“
wobei “x” die Portnummer des Ausgangs darstellt von 1-8 (4 Ausgänge am CS121
AUX, SENSORMANAGER, SITESWITCH, 8 Ausgäng am SITEMANAGER)
y=1 => einschalten

y=0 => ausschalten
“20000” ist da Kommando für das schalten von Ausgängen.
Syntax Beispiele:
77
Bestätigen eines Digital-Alarms : Mittels RCCMD commands können auch Alarme
der UNMS bestätigt warden. Man kann beispielsweise einen digitalen Alarm an
einem SITEMANAGER oder CS121 AUX Eingang von fern durch einen Schalter der
an einem anderen SITEMANAGER oder CS121 AUX angebracht ist „bestätigen“
So kann zum beispile ein „Feueralarm” den man in der UNMS software als “NEW
ALARM” sieht von einem Schalter vor Ort als “erkannt” bestätigt werden, die UNMS
zeigt dann “Alarm acknowledged – recovery action in progress”. Dafür muss der
Sender an dem der Schalter angeschlossen ist die folgende Syntax verwenden:
wobei x die Portnr. ist (1-8). („20001“ ist das “ACK” Kommando für digitale signale)
Syntax beispiel : |UPSCMD|20001|2

Dieses Kommando bestätigt den Digital Alarm 2 an einem SITEMANAGER,
SITEMONITOR, SITEMONITOR or CS121 AUX Eingang.
Bestätigen von Analogen-Alarm : Genauso können auch Analoger Alarme (z.b.

überschreiten einer bestimmten Temperatur) in der UNMS als „ACK“ bestätigt
werden.
wobei x die Portnr. ist (1-8). („20002“ ist das ACK Kommando für analoge Signale)
Syntax Beispiel : |UPSCMD|20001|4

Dieses Kommando bestätigt den analogen Alarm 4 an einem SITEMANAGER,
SITEMONITOR, SITEMONITOR oder CS121 AUX Eingang.
7.5.6 UPS Shutdown (UPS SD)

Siehe Figure 26 Telnet - UPS Shutdown Event Settings.
78
Diese Event Aktion ermöglicht den UPS SHUTDOWN. Hier kann festgelegt werden
wann an die USV ein Abschaltsignal zu senden ist wenn z.b. die USV auf „Battery
low“ läuft. Das folgende Beispiel:
"add 60 120 o"
stellt ein, dass 60 Sekunden nachdem der Event Powerfail eingetreten ist die USV
runtergefahren wird (Abschaltung) und nachdem der Event Powerfail vorüber ist
(Stromversorgung wiederhergestellt) die USV noch 120 Sekunden bis zum
Hochfahren wartet.
7.5.7 AUX Port

Der AUX Port stellt eine Verbindung zu zusätzlichen extrenen Alarmkontakten her,
die wahlweise als INPUTs oder OUTPUTs konfiguriert werden können. Wenn die
Kontakte als INPUTS konfiguriert sind, sind diese als Events in de „Events settings“-
Menue zu behandeln. Umgekehrt werden die AUX Kontakte als "actions" behandelt
wenn diese als OUTPUTs konfiguriert sind. Der AUX Port dient auch als Anschluss
für einen SS4/AUX Steckdosenstromverwalter und in diesem Fall dienen alle Ports
als OUTPUT.
7.5.8 RCCMD Trap
Werden an dieser Stelle Jobs konfiguriert, werden die hier eingetragenen
Nachrichten an diejenigen RCCMD Clients verschickt, die sich als Client bei dem
Adapter angemeldet haben.
7.5.9 WOL
WOL ist eine Abkürzung für Wake-on-LAN mit dieser Funktion werden andere
Rechner im Netzwerk aufgefordert mittels eines Datenpakets sich einzuschalten und
hoch zufahren. Diese Funktion wird nicht von allen Netzwerkkarten unterstützt und
diejenigen die diese Funktion unterstützen muessen im BIOS Explizit angeschaltete
werden und benötigen eventuell noch ein Passwort.
Siehe Figure 27 WOL configuration.
7.6 Network & Security Settings

Mit dieser Option erreichen Sie das Menü zum Einstellen der Netzwerkkarte, CS121
und UPSMON Passworte, Timeserver und Email Client Einstellungen, sowie das
Konfigurieren von ARP-Einträge und das Testen von SNMP Traps. Der neueste
Eintrag in diesem Menu ist Punkt 8 der dem CS121 ermöglicht als RCCMD Listener
Client zu arbeiten. Mit dieser Funktion kann ein anderer UPSMAN Manager dem
Adapter eine RCCMD Nachricht zuschicken z.B. die RCCMD Nachricht kann den
Zustand eines AUX Portes wechseln.
Siehe Figure 28 Telnet Network & Security Settings.
7.6.1 Change CS121 Password

Ändern des Telnet Passwortes. Mittels Telnet kann der SNMP Adapter jederzeit neu
konfiguriert oder beobachtet werden, sobald er im Netzwerk erreicht werden kann.
Das Passwort schützt vor unberechtigter Benutzung und Manipulation. Das Default
79
Passwort des Adapters ist "cs121-snmp". Sollten Sie Ihr Passwort “vergessen”
haben, so wenden Sie sich an Ihren Hersteller für weitere Hilfe.
7.6.2 Timeserver Settings
Siehe Figure 29 HTTP Timer Settings.
Hinweis: Der Timerserver wird sofort nach dem Reboot (ab FW 3.03)
synchronisiert und wenn nicht erfolgreich wird erneut versucht nach 5 minuten und
danach wird der Timeserver alle 24 Stunden neu synchronisiert.
Hier können bis zur drei verschiedene Timeserver IP-Adressen aus dem LAN oder
Internet eingetragen werden. Für die jeweiligen Timeserver können zwischen zwei
Zeitprotokolle ausgewählt werden: RFC868 und SNTP. Im Internet finden Sie eine
große Zahl von Zeitservern, die Sie verwenden können. Zum Beispiel bietet das
National Institute of Standards and Technology unter IP 129.6.15.29 einen
hochgenauen Zeitserver an, genauso die Physikalisch- Technische Bundesanstalt
unter 192.53.103.103. Wenn Sie keinen Internetzugang haben können Sie auch
einen Timeserver in ihrem LAN installieren. Laden Sie sich dazu entsprechende
Software vom Internet (meist Free oder Shareware) und geben Sie nun dem Adapter
diese IP Adresse an. Timerserver wird benötigt um den lokalem Logfile des SNMP
Adapter richtige Zeitstempel zu übermitteln. Die Funktion ist ohne Timeserver nicht
beeinträchtigt, allerdings tragen die Logfiles dann Zeitstempel von 1970.
Time Difference
Geben Sie den Zeitunterschied zwischen Timeserver und ihrer Zeitzone an.
Beachten Sie dabei auch die Anpassung der Sommer- und Winterzeit. Sie können
Werte von –24 bis +24 Stunden eingeben. Beachten Sie auch dass dieser Eintrag
für alle drei eingetragenen Timeserver gilt.
Test Timeserver connection: Testet die Timeserver Verbindung und gibt einen
Datumstempel und Uhrzeit aus. Bitte beachten Sie, dass die Verbindung zu einem
Timeserver nur funktioniert, wenn der Adapter nicht im Konfigurations-Modus (IP
10.10.10.10) läuft.
80
Microsoft Windows SNTP Timeserver: Als timeserver können Sie z.b. eine
Windows PC im Netzwerk benutzen. Dazu muss der Windows Time Dienst
configuriert und gestartet sein. Dazu bitte den Windows Time Dienst starten und
danach auf die „uhr“ im unteren rechten Taskbar clicken – nach einigen Sekunden
erscheint dann dort INTERNET TIME als Folder oben rechts. Prüfen Sie ob der
Windows Time Server funktioniert und ob Ihr Rechner im Netzwerk erreichbar ist
(Firewall !), dann können Sie Ihren CS121 unter Timerserver auf diesen Rechner
konfigurieren und verwenden.
Wenn Sie keinen MS Timeserver verwenden wollen können Sie auch andere
Timerserver z.b. als Freeware aus dem Internet laden, auf der GENEREX Website
finden Sie einige Freeware Timeserver unter:
http://www.generex.de/e/download/cs12x/download_p.html
7.6.3 Email client settings

Hier sollte angegeben welche Internet Adresse ihr SMTP Email Server hat. Dabei
darf nicht der Mailserver Name verwendet werden, sondern es muss die IP Adresse
verwendet werden. Beachten Sie, dass die Sender Adresse (Mail-server) nicht
willkürlich sein darf, man sollte eine Email Adresse (und account) verwenden die
tatsächlich existiert. Bei den meisten Servern ist es wichtig, das Account
und Mailserver zusammenpassen. Der Account muss den vollen Namen enthalten
(z.B. [email protected] nur „jemand“ wäre nicht ausreichend. Wenn trotzdem
Servernamen und/oder Account Angabe nicht richtig sind oder nicht
übereinstimmen, wird der Anwender z.b. folgender Eintrag im Log-file des Adapters
finden:
MAIL: bad answer from mail server: 501 <UPSIP204@falscher Server.de>... Sender
domain must exist
Siehe Figure 30 Telnet - E-Mail Client Settings.
Des weiteren gilt es zu beachten, dass das Email-Passwort leer bleiben muss, wenn
der SMTP-Server KEINE Authentifizierung erfordert.
Falls der Server Authentifizierung erfordert, muss er das Verfahren "AUTH LOGIN"
(Der CS121 SNMP unterstützt zur Zeit nur dieses Verfahren) unterstützen (z.b.
81
Freemail.de ). Hierdurch ändert sich das Protokoll von SMTP zu ESMTP und ein
Passwort ist erforderlich. Beim Verfahren "AUTH LOGIN" stellt sich folgende
Unsicherheit dar: Das Passwort wird nur gering verschlüsselt verschickt. Es wird
zwar nicht im Klartext verschickt. Jedoch könnte ein Anwender, der in der Lage ist
die Netzwerkpakete abzufangen, das Passwort zu dekodieren (BASE64-Verfahren).
Dies ist der einzige Nachteil, aber bei USV Anlagen mitunter von nicht zu hoher
Bedeutung. Die Länge des Passwortes sollte mindestens 3 Zeichen lang sein und
maximal 63.
7.6.4 Network Server Settings
Der Benutzer kann verschiedene Optionen aus dem Menü 6 aktivieren und
deaktivieren. Der Benutzer hat die Möglichkeit Telnet und/oder SNMP an/aus
zuschalten, oder den UPSMON Zugang zu blockieren, außerdem kann die
Netzwerkgeschwindigkeit gewählt werden. Damit kann die vom Benutzer
gewünschte Sicherheitsstufe individuell angepasst werden.
Des weiteren gibt es hier die Menüpunkte zum Ein- bzw. Ausschalten der
Authentication und Cold boot Traps, für die im Adapter konfigurierten SNMP
Receiver. Wenn aktiviert, werden diese Traps an die konfigurierten SNMP Trap
Empfänger in der Liste geschickt. Der Cold boot Trap wird gesendet, nachdem der
Adapter nach einem Kaltstart hochfährt, wobei eine Meldung auf der SNMP Konsole
ausgegeben wird (z.b. HP Openview). Bei dem Authentication Trap wird ein Trap an
die SNMP Manager gesendet, wenn ein nicht-autorisierter Benutzer versucht, auf
den Adaptern zuzugreifen. Die Liste der autorisierten Benutzer ist dabei in den
„Access Controls“ im Telnet Menü des Adapters festgelegt.
Siehe Figure 31 Telnet - Network Server Settings.
7.6.5 Change UPSMON Password

Siehe Figure 32 Telnet - Change Upsmon Password.
Das UPSMON Passwort blockiert den Zugang im UPSMON zu den Funktionen
Batterietest und Notfall-Shutdown. Nur UPSMON Benutzer, die dieses Passwort
kennen erhalten Zugang zu diesen sicherheitsrelevanten Funktionen.
7.6.6 Change Static ARP Entries
Ab Version Firmware 1.76 kann der Benutzer die (Trap) Antwort eines Adapters auf
eine bestimmte IP Adresse mit bestimmter MAC Adresse (ARP) senden. Damit kann
z.b. der CS121 in Netzwerk mit "Load Balancing" eingesetzt werden. Achtung: die
ARP Funktion ist bei einigen Firmware Versionen nut mit TELNET konfigurierbar.
Siehe Figure 33 Telnet - Static ARP Settings.
7.6.7 SNMP Trap Test
In diesem Menü können SNMP traps getestet werden, wobei die hier definierten
traps zu Testzwecken eingesetzt werden und keine realen traps darstellen. Bitte
beachten Sie, dass vor einem Test die Einträge für die trap Receiver gemacht
werden müssen und dass einmal die Einstellungen gespeichert werden sollten.
Diese Tests sollten also erst am Ende der Konfiguration gemacht werden, wenn der
Adapter auf der normalen IP Adresse arbeitet.
Siehe Figure 34 Telnet - SNMP Trap Test.
82
7.7 Com 2 Settings & AUX Settings
Über das „COM2 & AUX Settings“ Menu gelangt man in zwei Untermenüs für die
Konfiguration der COM2 und der AUX Port. Ab FW 2.56 stehen 6 Einträge im Telnet
Untermenu für COM2. Die Webserver Konfiguration enthält hierfür noch einen
Eintrag „SensorMan“. Die Bilder für dieses Menu sind wie folgend abgelegt:
Siehe Figure 35 Telnet COM2 & AUX Settings.
Siehe Figure 36 Telnet - COM2 Settings.
7.7.1 Configuration Mode

Normaler Konfigurations-Modus unter Einsatz des mitgelieferten Kabels.
Mit dieser Funktion wird der RS-232 “pipe-through” ein- oder ausgeschaltet. Bei ON
wird das RS-232 Protokoll der USV auf dem COM2 weitergeleitet von wo aus jede
andere Software nun „mithören“ kann und ebenfalls parallel zum CS121 die USV
Daten verwalten. Dies bedeutet, dass man einen RS-232 Multiplexer nicht mehr
benötigt um mit einer zweiten Software die USV zu überwachen. Achtung: Bitte
beachten Sie, dass der COM2 für eine serielle Konfiguration nicht mehr benutzt
werden kann solange diese Funktion eingeschaltet ist. Eine Änderung der CS121
Konfiguration kann dann nur über TELNET erfolgen. Als Verbindungskabel zwischen
CS121 COM2 und ihrer Anwendung wird das Konfigurationskabel des CS121
benutzt
Analog zu Pipe-through Mode 1 werden die USV Daten an Port COM2
weitergeleitet, jedoch nicht unmittelbar. Um die Prozessabläufe des Adapters zu
erhöhen werden die USV Daten erst mal zwischengespeichert, bevor sie COM2 zur
Verfügung gestellt werden. Pipe-through Mode 2 hat auch zufolge, dass keine
Signale durch COM2 an die USV weitergeleitet werden.
7.7.4 MODBUS
Hinweis: Der nachfolgende Menüpunkt wird nur sichtbar, wenn es sich um einen
MODBUS (Hardware) SNMP Adapter handelt. Für normale SNMP Adapter
ist dieser Menüpunkt nicht sichtbar.
MODBUS ist ein in der Gebäudeüberwachung und im Facility Management

eingesetztes Protokoll. Diese Funktion ist nur verfügbar bei Geräten die mit dem
MODBUS RS-485 Interface ausgestattet sind (CS121 MODBUS). Bitte beachten Sie
dazu den Abschnitt
D MODBUS Interface im Anhang dieses Handbuches. Hier wird die Belegung des
MODBUS Ausganges und die Protokollschnittstelle offengelegt.
Die Konfiguration unter Modbus benötigt nur die folgenden Einträge:
Enable Modbus over IP: Diese Funktion ist im Standard aktiviert. Die Funktion kann
via TELNET oder HTML Konfiguration deaktiviert werden. Jeder CS121 nach
83
Firmware 2.0 kann auch USV Daten via Modbus Protokoll über IP (Port 502)
übermitteln. Es kann jeder Modbus client eingesetzt werden, um USV Daten vom
CS121 zu lesen. Bei einem RS-485 Interface muss der CS121 MODBUS (spezielle
Hardware) zum Einsatz kommen, in allen anderen Fällen kann Modbus über IP zum
Einsatz kommen.
Modbus Slave Address: Bitte tragen Sie hier die entsprechende Nummer ein, wobei
die Nummer des Adapters in der Reihe der Modbus Geräte zu wählen ist.
Modbus Mode: RTU (Binär mode) oder ASCII mode Text Ausgabe. Bitte wählen Sie
mit der Menübox aus.
Hinweis: ASCII Mode arbeitet mit Schnittstellenparametern 7,N,1. Der RTU Mode
(binär) wird mit 8,N,1betrieben.
7.7.5 TempMan/SensorMan
Der TempMan und SensorManager sind Erweiterungsmodule für den CS121 die
über COM2 angeschlossen werden. Der SensorManager ist der Nachfolger des
Tempman und kann 8 anstelle von 4 Temperaturen oder auch andere Messwerte
verarbeiten. Beide dieser Geräte werden einfach per Kabel an den CS121 COM2
Port angeschlossen - es muss nur die COM2 Settings im Adapter auf diese Geräte
eingestellt werden um die zugehörigen Funktionen einzuschalten.
Siehe Figure 37 HTTP COM2 Tempman/SensorMan.
Die Konfiguration (Alarme, threshold Werte) kann komfortabel über die HTML Seite
des CS121 Webservers vorgenommen werden. Bitte beachten Sie hierzu die drop-
down bzw. Eingabe Felder. Siehe Figure 39 HTTP Sensor Manager Settings
calibration.
Bemerkung: Die aktuellen Skalierungsbeiwerte für die von GENEREX erhältlichen

Sensoren sind in dem o.g. Bild enthalten.
Eine Konfiguration im Telnet Menü des CS121 Adapters ist ebenfalls möglich. Bitte
beachten Sie hierzu die Syntax bei der Eingabe im Telnet Menüs. Siehe Figure 38
Telnet - Tempman Settings.
7.7.6 RAS
Der letzter Eintrag in der HTTP COM2 Dropdown menu ist “RAS”. Siehe Figure 37
HTTP COM2 Tempman/SensorMan. Diese Option schaltet die RASManager
Funktion ein. Obwohl diese Funktion im Telnet auch eingeschaltet werden kann ist
die Konfiguration des RASManagers (bis FW 2.56) nur im HTTP Menu möglich.
Dieses ist die standardmäßige Einstellung für den richtigen RASManager, der
CS121 mit eingebautem Modem. Um ein normaler CS121 Adapter in ein
RASManager um zubauen ist eine zusätzliche PPP Lizenz (RASControl Software
Paket) und ein passendes Modem erforderlich. Der Setup und die Bedienung vom
RASManager und RASControl wird ausführlich im Beiblatt für den RASManager und
die RASControl Software beschrieben. Siehe Figure 40 HTTP RAS Manager
Settings.
84
7.7.7 AUX und SS4 Settings
Der AUX Port ist ein Ausgang/Eingang für externe Geräte oder Alarme über
Kontakte oder für den Anschluss eines SS4 Steckdosenmanagers. Der SS4
SiteSwitch wird mit einem eingebautem CS121 Adapter ausgestattet. Der SS4 AUX
SiteSwitch ist eine kostengünstige Erweiterung für CS121 Adapter die das
individuelle Schalten von bis zu vier Steckdosen ermöglicht.
Siehe Figure 41 Telnet AUX Settings.
Durch Eingabe der entsprechenden Listennummer wird der jeweilige AUX Port auf
Input oder Output geschaltet.
Bei den AUX Settings kann der Benutzer die jeweiligen AUX Ports (4 Pins) entweder
als Eingang (Input) oder Ausgang (Outputs) schalten. Ist der jeweilige AUX Port als
Eingang geschaltet, so kann der Adapter Signale einlesen, wenn die AUX Ports als
Ausgänge geschaltet sind, können Signale z.b. an einen Opto-Koppler geleitet
werden. Siehe hierzu auch den Schaltplan etc. im Anhang (Appendix) im englischen
Teil des Benutzerhandbuches.
Die Schaltlage der Eingänge oder Ausgänge wird beim Reboot des Adapters in der
Lage belassen, wie vor dem Reboot gesetzt.
Über HTML sieht die AUX Konfiguration wie folgt aus. Man kann den
Port 1 - 4 des AUX manuell auf „OUTPUT“ umkonfigurieren und bei Eintritt eines
Alarms dann über die „EVENTS“ des CS121 die einzelnen Ports schalten. Dies
entspricht dann der Einstellung „SS4 Mode Active“. Diese Einstellung wird gewählt
wenn man einen SS4 an den AUX Port anschließen will.
Wenn man den OUTPUT abschaltet, dann werden die AUX Signale als
Alarmeingang benutzt, d.h. hierüber können Alarmkontakte ihr Alarmsignal zur
Weiterverarbeitung an den CS121 übergeben, daraufhin kann z.b. der CS121 den
Port 2 als OUTPUT benutzen und ein Gerät ihrer Wahl einschalten.
Siehe Figure 42 HTTP COM2 & AUX with TempMan.
Dabei kann auch ein OUTPUT Zustand bei einem Power up des CS121 gesetzt
werden, z.B. wenn Switch on CS121 Power up eingeschaltet ist (siehe Beispiel im
oberen Bild: Port 1 „Fileserver“), dann wird der OUTPUT 1 bei einem Power up des
CS121 sofort wieder eingeschaltet. Hierbei kann noch eine Zeitverzögerung in
Sekunden angegeben werden, z.b. 10 bedeutet dass der Port 1 erst 10 Sekunden
nach Power up des CS121 wieder angeschaltet wird. Der Vorgang: Save, Exit &
Reboot löst keinen Power up aus, hierfür muss die Stromversorgung des Adapters
einmal unterbrochen werden. Dieser Unterschied zwischen Reboot und Power up
wird beim Zustand der AUX Kontakte deutlich. Beim Reboot bleiben die Zustände
der Kontakte erhalten es sei denn die Einstellung der Portkonfiguration sich von
OUTPUT auf INPUT oder umgekehrt verändert hat. Beim Neustart wird der Zustand
der Kontakte auf die konfigurierte Einstellungen zurückgesetzt.
Das folgende Bild zeigt die Bedienung der AUX Ports 1 und 2 an, wenn diese als
OUTPUT und die AUX Ports 3 und 4 als INPUTs konfiguriert sind. Das Aktivieren
der SS4 Mode schaltet alle Ports auf OUTPUT ein.
Siehe Figure 43 HTTP AUX & TempMan Status.
85
Über dieses Menu kann im oberen Bild nun der Port 1 des AUX OUTPUT ein- bzw.
ausgeschaltet werden. Eine gelbe Glühbirne symbolisiert den eingeschalteten
Zustand der Steckdose, eine graue Glühbirne zeigt an dass der Port ausgeschaltet
ist, also die angeschlossenen Geräte nicht mit Strom versorgt werden.
Der Knopf „SWITCH OFF“ bzw. “SWITCH ON” ist mit einem Passwort geschützt.
Dieses Passwort ist identisch mit dem CS121 Konfigurationspasswort.
7.8 Display Settings - Ansicht der Einstellungen

(nur telnet) Dieses Untermenü zeigt alle derzeitigen Einstellungen des SNMP
Adapters als durchlaufende Liste an. Prüfen Sie Ihre Eingaben und ändern Sie
gegebenenfalls.
7.9 RESET Configuration to Default
Um Ihre gesamten Einstellungen zu löschen geben Sie die Ziffer 9 (6 bei älteren
Firmware Versionen) im Hauptmenü ein.
7.10 Sichern und Schließen – Save, Exit and Reboot
Für den Fall, dass Sie nunmehr alle Einstellungen vorgenommen haben und diese
auch sichern möchten, geben Sie im Hauptmenü den Buchstaben S ein. Warten Sie
unbedingt bis der Adapter meldet, dass ein Reboot notwendig ist.
Das Setup-Programm ist jetzt beendet. Trennen Sie den SNMP Adapter von der
Spannungsversorgung und bringen Sie den DIP-Schalter 1 in die untere Position
(eingeschaltet). Nachdem dieses geschehen ist, können Sie den Adapter wieder mit
der Spannungsversorgung verbinden.
7.11 Exit without saving
Schließen ohne Sichern der Einstellungen: Mit dieser Option beenden Sie das
SNMP Programm und sichern dabei nicht die Konfigurationseinstellungen. Vom
Hauptmenü aus, geben Sie bitte den Buchstaben Q ein.
REBOOT Hinweis:
Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Neustart des CS121 bis zu 3 Minuten dauern kann. In
dieser Zeit werden die Eingaben umgerechnet und eventuelle Timeserver Daten
abgefragt. Sobald der Startprozess durchlaufen wurde und die erforderlichen Daten
vorhanden sind bzw. als „Timed-out“ markiert wurden, startet die USV
Kommunikation und die grüne LED fängt an zu leuchten. Nun ist das Gerät
betriebsbereit und man kann die USV Daten mit einem Webbrowser (http:://<IP
Adresse>) oder SNMP Software überprüfen - oder auch sich mit dem UPSMON,
UNMS, USW oder JAVAMON verbinden. Beim UPSMON und UNMS sollte TCP/IP
anstelle SNMP als Verbindungsprotokoll gewählt werden – dies ist schneller und
enthält mehr Daten als das SNMP Protokoll.
7.12 Scheduled actions
Das „Scheduled actions“ Menu ist einer der praktischsten und am leichtesten zu
bedienenden Werkzeugs des CS121 Adapters und stellt eine Art Terminplaner für
den Anwender dar. Im Zusammenhang mit den anderen Verwaltungsfunktionen des
86
CS121 Adapters können viele regelmäßige Aufgaben erledigt werden. Nachdem
ersten Start von dem Terminplaner werden eins zwei Bildern angezeigt.
Siehe Figure 44 Scheduled Actions no time server und Figure 45 Scheduled actions
empty.
Durch das betätigen vom dem “NEW” Knopf wird die “Edit Scheduled Action”
Konfigurationsmaske aufgerufen. Diese Maske ist sehr leicht zu konfigurieren da es
sich auf die Auswahl der „Action“ im Dropdown menu gleich anpasst und stellt dem
Anwender die „Action“ Auswahl- und Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten zur Verfügung.
Die Wiederholungsmöglichkeiten werden auch im „Frequency“ Dropdown Menü
zugänglich gemacht werden.
Siehe Figure 46 Edit Scheduled Action drop down menus.
Für Termine die jede Woche ausgeführt werden wird in der Übersicht der geplanten
Aufgaben der Name des nächsten Wochentages an dem die nächste Ausführung
vorkommt. Achte auf den Warnhinweis des Adapters wenn kein Timeserver
eingestellt ist um Zeitfehler zu vermeiden.
Mittels Scheduler können auch RCCMD Kommandos versendet werden, z.b. um

regelmäßig Rechner im Netzwerk herunterzufahren - um diese dann z.b. per WAKE
On LAN wieder zu starten.
Siehe Figure 47 Scheduled actions overview with warning.
8. SS4 Und SS4 AUX

Der SiteSwitch 4 Model SS4 AUX erlaubt die Überwachung und Fernbedienung von
4 Kaltgerätesteckdosen über eine AUX-Kabelverbindung mit einem CS121 SNMP
Webadapter, und Model SS4 hat bereits einen integrierten CS121 Webadapter. Die
Steckdosen können einzeln ein- und ausgeschaltet werden. Dies kann sowohl durch
direkte Benutzereingabe über den HTML Browser oder UPSMON erfolgen, oder
auch automatisiert über den EVENT Manager des CS121. Wird die Aktion über den
EVENT Manager des CS121 durchgeführt kann das Ein- Ausschalten auch
zeitverzögert oder über einen Terminplaner erfolgen. Sowohl der Timescheduler des
UPSMON als auch der Scheduler im HTML Browser kann dazu verwendet werden.
Die Steuerung kann ebenfalls über eine UNMS USV-Netzwerk-Management-

Software erfolgen (kostenpflichtige Version).
Hinweis: Wenn Sie eine USV mit Ihrem SS4 verwenden wollen dann
müssen Sie die entsprechende CS121 Firmware installieren. Beachten Sie , dass
die COMPORTS 1 & 2 miteinander vertauscht werden müssen. Setzen Sie hierfür
ein Häkchen in das „Exchange COM Ports“ Checkbox und verbinden Sie den SS4
mit Ihrer USV mittels des Konfigurationskabels. (Siehe Figure 48 Exchange COM
Ports 1 & 2 for SS4)
8.1 SS4 Funktionsübersicht
4 konfigurierbare Ausgänge / Kaltgeräte Steckdosen mit Schaltleistung 230V/8A
Abfrage des Status der Steckdosen über HTML, UPSMON, UNMS oder SNMP
Steuerung über internen CS121
Fernbedienung der Ausgänge über HTML Browser (Passwort geschützt)
LED-Statusanzeige der Steckdosen
Kleines Metallgehäuse mit 1.5 HE, vorbereitet für 19"-Rack Montage
(Winkelbefestigung im Lieferumfang)
87
Hohe Schaltleistung (8A), Eingang mit IEC 16A.
Termingesteuerte Schaltvorgänge programmierbar über HTML und UPSMON
Scheduler
Verzögerte Schaltvorgänge als Reaktion auf Alarme am COM1 des CS121 (z.b.
USV Alarme)
8.2 SS4 Lieferumfang

SiteSwitch 4
16A IEC 230V Stromversorgungskabel
2 Winkel für Montage im 19“-Rack
Benutzerhandbuch
Handbücher unterliegen einer ständigen Aktualisierung. Wir bitten daher sich die
aktuellste Version von unserer Website herunterzuladen.
Aktuelle Benutzerhandbücher finden Sie unter http://www.generex.de
Hinweis: Vor dem Anschließen der zu schaltenden Verbraucher an die

Ausgänge des SiteSwitch4, bzw. bei Arbeiten an Geräten, die am Ausgang des
SiteSwitch4 angeschlossen sind, ist auf jeden Fall der Netzstecker des SiteSwitch 4
zu ziehen. Durch einen Steuerbefehl, der über das Netzwerk zum SiteSwitch4
gesendet werden kann, bzw. durch einen Fehler innerhalb des SiteSwitch4 kann,
trotz ausgeschaltetem Ausgang, Spannung am entsprechenden Ausgangs anliegen.
8.3 SS4 Installation

Der SS4 wird mit den zu schaltenden Endgeräten über ein Kaltgerätekabel
verbunden. Der SS4 hat 4 getrennt schaltbare Steckdosen für Kaltgeräte. Bitte
beachten Sie, dass die Leistungsabgabe von 8A nicht überschritten wird. Im Falle
einer Überschreitung oder eines Kurzschlusses wird die Sicherung im Gerät
ausgelöst und alle Endgeräte des entsprechenden Ausgangs stromlos gemacht.
Bei Betrieb des SS 4 einem 19“ Rackgehäuse sind die mitgelieferten Winkel
anzubringen und der SS4 mit der Vorderseite im 19“ Gehäuse zu verschrauben. Die
Versorgungskabel werden von hinten angeschlossen.
Sobald alle Endgeräte angeschlossen sind kann der IEC 16 Versorgungsstecker
angeschlossen werden. Bei Betrieb muss die grüne „POWER“ LED aufleuchten
und die 4 Zustands LEDs („Power Socket Status LED“) für die Steckdosen müssen
AUS sein.
Wenn die LEDs aus sind bedeutet dies das KEINE Versorgungsspannung anliegt –
also die Endgeräte werden nicht mit Strom versorgt.
8.4 SS4 Bedienung

Die Kommunikation mit dem Bedienerinterface des SS4 erfolgt über den CS121.
Dazu können UPSMON, Webbrowser, UNMS oder ein SNMP-Programm verwendet
werden. Jegliche Kommunikation erfolgt über Netzwerk bzw. Modem. Detaillierte
Angaben hierzu sind im Abschnitt
7.7.7 AUX und SS4 Settings enthalten.
8.5 SS4 Technische Daten
Eingangsspannung: 230V AC +/- 5%

Maximale Stromaufnahme: 16A
Ruhestrom (typisch) : 25mA (bei 230V Eingang, Ausgänge ausgeschaltet)
88
Max. zulässiger Strom je Ausgang: 8A (bei ohmscher Last, cos phi 1)
Maße: 270mm x 160mm x 70mm (BxTxH)
mit Halterwinkeln: 19”, 1,5HE
Betriebstemperatur: 0 - 40°C
Rel. Luftfeuchte: 0 - 95%, nicht betauend
Schutzart: IP 20
Anzeigen Vorderseite:
1 – Steckdose 1 an/aus (LED AN = Steckdose AN)
Anschlüsse/ Schalter Rückseite:
1 – Stromversorgung IEC 16A
2 - 4 Kaltgeräte Steckdosen 8A
3 - Sicherung 230V 16A
4 - LAN-Anschluss
5 - COM 2 Anschluss
6 - Schalter zur Konfiguration CS121
89
9. Konfigurieren der NMS
Führen Sie ein "get" und "set" Kommando aus. Sollte dies nicht gelingen, überprüfen
Sie bitte die Zugangsberechtigung des Adapters. Der Manager muss eine read
Genehmigung haben, um ein "get" Kommando auszuführen. Für ein "set"
Kommando benötigt der Manager eine read/write Genehmigung. Dafür kann
üblicherweise ein SNMP MIB Browser eingesetzt werden.
Um den CS121 Adapter im Netzwerk zu identifizieren, kann die MAC Adresse

eingesetzt werden. Die MAC Adresse des CS121 Adapter beginnt mit 00-03-05-02-
XX-XX, wobei diese im Telnet Menü (menu: IP address, gateway address, MIB
system group) einzusehen ist.
Der SNMP Adapter ist jetzt betriebsbereit und kann nun vollständig für Ihr Netzwerk
SNMP Management verwendet werden. Für weitere Konfigurations- und
Nutzungsmöglichkeiten beachten Sie bitte nachfolgende Hinweise.
Bei den MIB handelt es sich um die sog. Management Information Base,
die auf die SNMP Management Station geladen wird, welche eine USV über einen
SNMP Agenten überwacht. Die MIB bestimmt, welche USV Parameter durch die
SNMP Befehle „get“ und „set“ überwacht und kontrolliert werden sollen.
Zur Vervollständigung des Installations- und Konfigurationsvorgangs ist es nötig, die

entsprechende MIB für die Konfiguration der NMS bereitzulegen. In der Regel ist
jede NMS mit einem MIB Compiler in der Lage, mit dem SNMP Adapter zu
kommunizieren.
Hinweis: Der CS121 verwendet eine Standard MIB welche in den modernen SNMP
Software bereits enthalten ist. Diese MIB nennt sich „UPSMIB“ und entspricht dem
Standard RFC 1628. In den meisten Fällen kann daher auf das Einspielen der MIB
verzichtet werden da die MIB bereits unter – iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib2.upsMIB
- vorhanden ist. Bitte prüfen Sie Ihren MIB Zweig bevor Sie die RFC1628 MIB
einspielen.
Für weitere Instruktionen zur Kompilierung der MIB der einzelnen NMS wie z.B.
Novell/ NetWare Management Station, Hewlett-Packard /Open View Network Node
Manager sowie SunConnect und SunNet Manager beachten Sie bitte die
nachfolgenden Unterkapitel.
General Network Management Stations
Grundsätzlich gelten für die Konfiguration einer NMS folgende Prozeduren:
• Einsetzen/Kompilieren der MIB Datei, wenn nicht bereits eine Standard
USV MIB RFC 1628 vorhanden ist. (nur bei CS121)
• Hinzufügen des SNMP Adapter Objekt zur Management Map und
Konfigurierung der Ereignisse (z.B. Meldung an Operator).
• Ping(en) des SNMP Adapters und Test ob Traps empfangen werden.
Da sich der Kompilierungsprozess bei den unterschiedlichen SNMP
Softwareprodukten deutlich unterscheidet, kann hier nicht weiter darauf
eingegangen werden. Die Einkompilierung einer MIB Datei wird in den Handbüchern
der SNMP Software ausführlich beschrieben. Bitte setzen Sie sich mit dem Support
90
in Verbindung falls Sie hier Fehler nicht durch die Nutzung des Handbuches lösen
können.
Nachdem die MIB einkompiliert ist kann mittels eines MIB Browsers die USV
angepollt werden und die Daten ausgelesen werden. Dazu wählen Sie die
entsprechende MIB Variable oder auch Satz von Variablen aus und setzen die Ziel
TCP/IP Adresse des Adapters ein. Der Adapter antwortet mit den Messwerten.
Alternativ kann auch der Windows UPSMON, JAVAMON, UNMS oder UPS-SNMP-
WATCH der USV-Management Software CD eingesetzt werden, dieser stellt die
USV Daten in grafischer Form leicht verständlich dar und unterdrückt interne USV
Informationen welche nur für den technischen Support wichtig sind. Neben diesen
Darstellungsformen kann der USV SNMP WATCH auch Gruppen von USV Geräten
verwalten um so parallel-redundanten USV Anlagen zu managen.
Als optionale Zusatzsoftware kann für HP Openview auch ein Snap-In für UPSMAN /
CS121 bestellt werden.
Hinweis: SNAP-IN FOR HP OPENVIEW für WINDOWS NT, SNAP-IN FOR HP

OPENVIEW für HP UNIX), diese Software fügt sich in die HP Openview
Node Manager Oberfläche eine und stellt die USV Geräte als Objekt in
den Farben Grün (OK) und Rot (Alarm) dar. Sobald dieses Objekt per
Maus doppelgeklickt wird, startet eine grafische Oberfläche (JAVAMON
oder Windows UPSMON) und stellt die aktuellen Messwerte der USV dar
ANHANG : Mehr Informationen auch zur Reparatur ihres CS121 finden Sie im
Anhang/Appendix des Handbuches ab Seite 92.
91
Anhang/Appendix
A. RFC1628.MIB implemented commands
For the CS121 SNMP MIB Implementation, please refer to the GENEREX
downloadpage at: http://www.generex.de/e/download/cs12x/download_p.html
This MIB is specially designed for the CS121 and includes SNMP values for all
CS121 optional products (Temperature, humidity, Alarmkontakts, etc.) Basicly this
RFC1628CS121.MIB is the original UPS MIB, extended by extra values supported
from your CS121.
B Technical Specifications and Troubleshooting

CS121-L CS121-C CS121 Slot
Power supply 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC
Power output 350mA 100mA bei 12V 100mA bei 12V
Size 69x126 mm 69x126 mm 60x120 mm
Ethernet 10/ 100Base-T 10/ 100Base-T 10/ 100Base-T
connections
RS-232 interface 2 2 2
LED’s 4 4 4
DIP Switches 2 2 2
Operating 0 – 40 °C 0 – 40 °C 0 – 40 °C
temperature
Humidity during 10-80%, no condensation
normal
operations
Problem: The Terminal Software is not displaying anything.

Solution: Make sure the DIP switch is set correctly. DIP Switch 1 and 2
in (OFF) position. Please make sure the communication
parameters are correct. They should be 9600 baud rate, no
parity, 8-data bits, and 1 stop bit. Please make sure the ends
of the NSP-CFG-01A (or cable 30) cable are plugged into their
respective ports.
Problem: The NMS cannot ping the SNMP adapter.

Solution: a. Make sure the network connection to the SNMP adapter is
working.
Make sure the cable is in good condition.
Make sure to set the community string [Set access control,
type 3, Set 1 through 4]. Follow these steps: name the
community with any lower case name. (A UPS monitors a
designated community.
Make sure to set the manager table. [Set access controls, type
3, Set 1 through 4]. Follow these steps: Define the manager IP
address, community string, and access permission together.
The trap manager's community should be the same number as
the number of the community it monitors. The trap manager's
status is set to accept YES to enable sending traps or to
accept NO to disable.
A temporary non-answering of a ping request or an unusual
ping answer delay does not relate to an error. The adapter
handles the ping requests as a lower priority as the actual
SNMP requests and UPS polling commands. In case the
adapter is busy answering a UPS request, the ping will be
answered a later stage or in some instances cancelled.
92
C. Cable and Circuit board configuration/ Pin/ AUX-Ports and Sensor Manager
Figure 49 Appendix: Cable configuration COM2
SUB-D 9 male
connector
1
PIN 3 6
PIN 2 2
PIN 1 3 7
8
shield 4
9
Pin COM2 5
Mini-DIN 8 pol
(male), CS121
Figure 50 Cable type 113: CS121 adapter to modem
93
Pin Layout CS121 COM1:
Figure 51 External D-SUB 9-polig male

Pin1: -> DCD Pin6: -> DSR
Pin2: -> RxD Pin7: -> RTS
Pin3: -> TxD Pin8: -> CTS
Pin4: -> DTR Pin9: -> RI
Pin5: -> GND
Figure 52 Slot version: Circuit board connection

Pin1: -> GND
Pin2: -> VDD
Pin3: -> TxD
Pin4: -> RxD
Pin9: -> GND
Pin8 connected with Pin 10
94
Figure 53 Pin COM2 Mini-DIN 8 pol
Mini DIN 8 socket
RS-485 (optional):
RS-232: Pin1: -> RS485-A
Pin1: -> DCD Pin5: -> RS485-B
Pin2: -> RxD
Pin3: -> TxD RS-422 (optional):
Pin4: -> DTR Pin1: -> RS422-TX-A
Pin5: -> DSR Pin5: -> RS422-TX-B
Pin6: -> RTS Pin2: -> RS422-RX-A
Pin7: -> CTS Pin6: ->RS422-RX-B
Pin8: -> RI
Schirm -> GND
Figure 54 AUX-Port (Hardware Revision 1.1 = from Serial numbers 0121-1203,

0122-00198, 0123-00564 onwards) RJ11 6-pol
Pin1: -> +3,3V
Pin2: -> Input/Output 1
95
Pin6: -> GND
The maximum input voltage is 3,3V. The input signals may be fed from external
power sources or fed directly from Pin 1. If the external power supply delivers more
than 5V a pre-resistor has to be fitted. The input resistance of the input is 5,1 kΩ
When using a opto coupler switch, a Pull up resistor of 1,5kOhm has to be used.
Outputvoltage: If configured as OUTPUT, every Pin delivers 3.3 Volt/10mA.
Figure 55 Example (Inputs): Opener or closer contact
Figure 56 Opto Coupler logic
Figure 57 Example (Outputs)
96
Figure 58 Example (AUX Output at cables with more than 10 m)
D MODBUS Interface
D.1 MODBUS general

For remote control and monitoring of devices the MODBUS interface in each CS121 M
can read out measurement values, events, status and other information in a master-
slave protocol.
Note: Please note that not all UPS models support all or specific measurement
values (e.g. battery low).
D.2 Available Modbus Function Codes
Implemented MODBUS functions in the CS121 M units:
03H read n output words (read- and write able words)
04H read n input words (only readable words)
06H write one output word
10H write n output words
The CS121 M makes no difference between output- and input-bits or words, that
means there is no difference between function 03H and 04H. The baud rate is
adjustable up to 115200 Baud.
97
Note: Please note that the MODBUS adapter client allows for a timeout of 40ms
at 9600 baud for one value.
D.3 Exception Codes
Except for broadcast messages, when a master device sends a query to a slave
device it expects a normal response. One of four possible events can occur from the
master's query:
If the slave device receives the query without a communication error, and can handle
the query normally, it returns a normal response.
If the slave does not receive the query due to a communication error, no response is
returned. The master program will eventually process a timeout condition for the
query.
If the slave receives the query, but detects a communication error parity, LRC, or
CRC, no response is returned. The master program will eventually process a timeout
condition for the query.
If the slave receives the query without a communication error, but cannot handle it (for
example, if the request is to read a non existent register the slave will return an
exception response informing the master of the nature of the error.
Available Exception codes:
Code Meaning
Illegal data Address:
02H The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the
slave.
Illegal data value:
03H A value contained in the query is not an allowable value for the slave.
Slave device busy:
06H The slave is processing a long-duration program command. The master should
retransmit the message later when the slave is free.
D.4 MODBUS Modes in the CS121 M (ASCII and RTU)

MODBUS Command
The following tables contain the general command descriptions and examples with
ASCII and RTU framing.
Read Words (Functions 03h and 04h)
For the CS121 there is no difference between these two functions.
Query:
slave function address of first word word count checksu

number code to read m, LRC
or CRC
high Low high 1 or 2
1 byte 1 byte low byte
byte byte byte byte(s)
Answer:
98
bytes
high Checks
low byte with
slave function Byte byte of um
of first contents
number code count first LRC or
word of n
word CRC
words
n * 2 1 or 2
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
bytes byte(s)
Example: Read Words, Function 04h, ASCII Mode
Read one word at address 63h (= 99 decimal):
Query:
Byte 10, 12, 14, 17

1 2, 3 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9 16
11 13 15
address of
word count to
leadi Slave functi first word to Carri line
Bede read
ng numb on read LRC age feed
utung
colon er code high low high low return LF
byte byte byte byte
ASCII : 0 1 0 4 0 0 6 3 0 0 0 1 9 7 <CR> <LF>
HEX [3A] [30][3 [30][3 [30][3 [36][3 [30][3 [30][3 [39][3 [0D] [0A]
1] 4] 0] 3] 0] 1] 7]
Answer:
Byte 10, 12, 15

1 2, 3 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9 14
11 13
contents of
leadi Slave functi carria line
Bede byte the word
ng numb on LRC ge feed
utung count high low
colon er code return LF
byte byte
ASCII : 0 1 0 4 0 2 1 2 3 4 B 3 <CR> <LF>
HEX [3A] [30][3 [30][3 [30][3 [31][3 [33][3 [42][3 [0D] [0A]
1] 4] 2] 2] 4] 3]
ASCII: Data, which will send over the link as ASCII characters.
HEX: Hexadecimal values of the data
Æ The word at address contains the value 1234h = 4660 decimal.

Example: Read Words, Function 04h, RTU Mode
Read one word at address 63h (= 99 decimal):
99
Query:
Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
silent address of silent
word count to
interv first word to CRC interv
read
al Slave functi read al
Bede
>= numb on >=
utung
3.5 er code high low high low low High 3.5
chara byte byte byte byte byte byte chara
cters cters
RTU
[01] [04] [00] [63] [00] [01] [C1] [D4]
HEX
Answer:
Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
silent Contents of Silent
CRC
interv the word interv
al Slave functi al
Bede byte
>= numb on >=
utung count high low low high
3.5 er code 3.5
byte byte byte byte
chara chara
cters cters
RTU
[01] [04] [02] [12] [34] [B4] [47]
HEX
Æ The word at address contains the value 1234h = 4660 decimal.

Write One Word (Function 06h)
Query:
slave function address of word to checksum,

word value
number code write LRC or CRC
low
high
1 byte 1 byte high byte low byte byt 1 or 2 byte(s)
byte
e
Answer:
slave function address of word value checksum, LRC

number code word to write or CRC
high low high low
1 byte 1 byte 1 or 2 byte(s)
byte byte byte byte
Example: Write One Word, Function 06h, ASCII Mode
Write one word at address 3Dh (= 61 decimal) with value 10E1h (= 1234 decimal).
Query:
Byte 10, 12, 14, 17

1 2, 3 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9 16
11 13 15
Bede leadi Slave function address of car Lin
word value LRC
utung ng numb code word to write ria e
100
colon er hig ge fee
high low h low ret d
byte byte byt byte urn LF
e
ASCII : 0 1 0 6 0 0 3 D 1 E 1 C B <C <L
0 R> F>
HEX [3A] [30][3 [30][36] [30][3 [33][4 [31 [45][3 [43][4 [0D [0A
1] 0] 4] ][3 1] 2] ] ]
0]
Answer :
Byte 10, 12, 14, 17

1 2, 3 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9 16
11 13 15
address of
leadi Slave functi word value carria Line
Bede word to write
ng numb on LRC ge feed
utung high low high low
colon er code return LF
byte byte byte byte
ASCII : 0 1 0 6 0 0 3 D 1 0 E 1 C B <CR> <LF>
HEX [3A] [30][3 [30][3 [30][3 [33][4 [31][3 [45][3 [43][4 [0D] [0A]
1] 6] 0] 4] 0] 1] 2]
Example: Write One Word, Function 06h, RTU Mode

Write one word at address 3Dh (= 61 decimal) with value 10E1h (= 1234 decimal).
Query:
Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
silent address of silent
word value CRC
interv word to write interv
al Slave functi al
Bede
>= numb on >=
utung high low high low low high
3.5 er code 3.5
byte byte byte byte byte byte
chara chara
cters cters
RTU
[01] [06] [00] [3D] [10] [E1] [D5] [8E]
HEX
Answer:
Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
silent address of Silent
word value CRC
interv word to write interv
al Slave functi al
Bede
>= numb on >=
utung high low high low low high
3.5 er code 3.5
chara chara
cters cters
RTU
[01] [06] [00] [3D] [10] [E1] [D5] [8E]
HEX
Write Words (Function 10h)
Query:
101
slav func Address of Number of num high low data che
e tion first word to words to ber byte data byte cks
num cod write write of for byte s um
ber e data first for LRC
byte wor first or
s d wor CR
d C
1 or
Hig n
1 1 low high low 1 1 1 2
h byte
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
byte s
(s)
Answer:
slav func address of number of che

e tion first word to words to cks
num cod write write um,
ber e LRC
or
CR
C
1 or
1 1 high low high low 2
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
(s)
Example: Write Words, Function 10h, ASCII Mode

Write three words at address 41h..43h (= 65..67 decimal) with the values
10E1h (= 1234 decimal), 1357h (= 4951 decimal) and ABCDh (= 43981 decimal).
Query:
Byte 10, 12, 14,

1 2, 3 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9
11 13 15
address of number of
numb
leadi Slave functi first word to words
Bede er of
ng numb on write to write
utung data
colon er code high low high low
bytes
byte byte byte byte
ASCII : 0 1 1 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 3 0 6
HEX [3A] [30][3 [31][3 [30][3 [34][3 [30][3 [30][3 [30][3
1] 0] 0] 1] 0] 3] 6]
16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 31

30
17 19 21 23 25 27 29
Word value word value word value
for for for carria line
first word second word third word LRC ge feed
high low high low high low return LF
1 0 E 1 1 3 5 7 A B C D D 2 <CR> <LF>
[31][3 [45][3 [31][3 [35][3 [41][4 [43][4 [44][3 [0D] [0A]
0] 1] 3] 7] 2] 4] 2]
102
Answer :
Byte 10, 12, 14, 14, 17

1 2, 3 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9
11 13 15 15
address of number of
leadi Slave functi first word to words carria line
Bede
ng numb on write to write LRC ge feed
utung
colon er code high low high low return LF
byte byte byte byte
ASCII : 0 1 1 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 3 A B <CR> <LF>
HEX [3A] [30][3 [31][3 [30][3 [34][3 [30][3 [30][3 [41][4 [0D] [0A]
1] 0] 0] 1] 0] 3] 2]
Example: Write Words, Function 10h, RTU Mode

Write three words at address 41h..43h (= 65..67 decimal) with the values
10E1h (= 1234 decimal), 1357h (= 4951 decimal) and ABCDh (= 43981 decimal).
Query:
Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
silent address of number of
interv first words
numb
al Slave functi word to write to write
Bede er of
>= numb on
utung data
3.5 er code high low high low
bytes
chara byte byte byte byte
cters
RTU
[01] [10] [00] [41] [00] [03] [06]
HEX
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
word value word value word value silent
for for for CRC interv
first word second word third word al
>=
High low high low high low low high 3.5
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte chara
cters
[10] [E1] [13] [57] [AB] [CD] [00] [E6]
103
Answer:
Byte 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
silent address of number of silent
interv first words CRC interv
al Slave functi word to write to write al
Bede
>= numb on >=
utung
3.5 er code high low high low low high 3.5
chara byte byte byte byte byte byte chara
cters cters
RTU
[01] [10] [00] [41] [00] [03] [D0] [1C]
HEX
D.5 UPS Parameter
Standard UPS – Address Description

Please note that this is just an example for a typical UPS, not every UPS has all these
values, some UPS may have more, some less. Please contact your UPS manufacturer
to check which variables are available and which requests are not supported.
Note: “Type U/S” – this defines whether the answer has a algebraic sign (math. +/-) or
not. U means “unsigned”. S means “signed”, this answer may be positive or negative.
Write Descriptio
Address Type Name Length
able n
Outpower
100 U No OUTP0WER0 1
Phase 1
Outpower
Phase 2 %
Outpower
Phase 3 %
Battery
103 U No BATTCAP Capacity 1
%
Input
104 S No INVOLT0 Voltage 1
Phase 1 V
Input
Phase 2 V
Input
Phase 3 V
Temperatu
107 S No TEMPDEG 1
re C°
Autonomy
108 S No AUTONOMTIME Time 1
minutes
104
Write Descriptio
able n
UPS
Status
(ASCII
HEX)
Please
109 U No STATUS
note 1
UPSMAN
statusbyte
s table
below
Battery
110 S No BATTVOLT 1
Voltage V
Input
Frequency
111 U No INFREQ0 1
Hz
Phase 1
Input
Frequency
112 U No INFREQ1 1
Hz Phase
2
Input
Frequency
113 U No INFREQ2 1
Hz Phase
3
Powerfail
114 U No CNT_PF 1
Counter
1 = active
Alarm
115 U No 0 = not 1
Battery Bad
active
1 = active
Alarm
116 U No 0 = not 1
On Battery
active
1 = active
Alarm
117 U No 0 = not 1
Battery Low
active
1 = active
Alarm
118 U No 0 = not 1
Battery Depleted
active
1 = active
Alarm
119 U No 0 = not 1
Over temperature
active
1 = active
Alarm
120 U No 0 = not 1
Input Bad
active
1 = active
Alarm
121 U No 0 = not 1
Output Bad
active
1 = active
Alarm
122 U No 0 = not 1
Output Overload
active
Alarm 1 = active
123 U No 1
On Bypass 0 = not
105
Write Descriptio
able n
active
1 = active
Alarm
124 U No 0 = not 1
Bypass Bad
active
Alarm 1 = active
125 U No Output Off as 0 = not 1
requested. active
Alarm 1 = active
126 U No UPS Off as 0 = not 1
requested. active
1 = active
Alarm
127 U No 0 = not 1
Charger Failed
active
1 = active
Alarm
128 U No 0 = not 1
UPS Output Off
active
1 = active
Alarm
129 U No 0 = not 1
UPS System Off
active
1 = active
Alarm
130 U No 0 = not 1
Fan Failure
active
1 = active
Alarm
131 U No 0 = not 1
fuse failure
active
1 = active
Alarm
132 U No 0 = not 1
general fault
active
Alarm 1 = active
133 U No diagnose test 0 = not 1
failed active
Alarm 1 = active
134 U No communication 0 = not 1
lost active
1 = active
Alarm
135 U No 0 = not 1
awaiting power
active
1 = active
Alarm
136 U No 0 = not 1
shutdown pending
active
Alarm 1 = active
137 U No shutdown 0 = not 1
imminent active
1 = active
Alarm
138 U No 0 = not 1
test in progress
active
1 = active
(high)
139 U No AUX Port 1 0 = not 1
active
(low)
106
Write Descriptio
able n
1 = active
(high)
active
(low)
1 = active
(high)
active
(low)
1 = active
(high)
active
(low)
Section
NEWAVE UPS :
OEM
Manual Bypass 0 = open
139 U No 1
Switch Closed 1 = closed
Outputvolt
140 U No OUTPUT_VOLT0 age Phase 1
1
Outputvolt
2
Outputvolt
3
Output
Current
OutputCurrent
143 U No Phase 1 in 1
Phase A * 10
Ampere
*10
Output
Current
OutputCurrent
Phase B * 10
Ampere
*10
Output
Current
OutputCurrent
Phase C * 10
Ampere
*10
Statusbit
of UPS 1 =
146 U No xid3017 Bits 0-15 1
true, 0 =
false
Statusbit,
for details
xid3017 Bits 16-31
147 U No please 1
contact
NEWAVE
107
Write Descriptio
able n
Alarmbit,
for details
148 U No xid645 Bits 0-15 please 1
contact
NEWAVE
Alarmbit,
for details
contact
NEWAVE
Alarmbit,
for details
contact
NEWAVE
Alarmbit,
for details
contact
NEWAVE
Section
MASTERGUARD
OEM
139 U No PXWARN 2
141 U No FAULT CODE 1 1

BADBATTBLOCK
145 U No 1
1
BADBATTBLOCK
146 U No 1
1
BADBATTBLOCK
147 U No 1
1
BADBATTBLOCK
148 U No 1
1
BADBATTBLOCK
149 U No 1
1
BADBATTBLOCK
150 U No 1
1
Other See OEM

OEMs MODBUS docu
UPSMAN Status Bytes - Standard Device Status Bits
108
UPS Status Hex-Value Description
UPS_SB_BYPASS_MODE 0x0001 power piped thru
UPS_SB_SHUTDOWN 0x0002 shutdown ups
UPS_SB_OUTPUT_ACT 0x0004 inverter on
UPS_SB_BACKUP_MODE 0x0008 battery power
UPS_SB_BATTERY_LOW 0x0010 low battery err
UPS_SB_OVER_TEMP 0x0020 over temp err
UPS_SB_TEST_ACT 0x0040 test in progress
UPS_SB_INPUT_HIGH 0x0080 over power err
UPS_SB_OUTPUT_HIGH 0x0100 over load err
UPS_SB_INVERTER_FAILURE 0x0200 Inverter error
UPS_SB_BATTERY_BAD 0x0400 Battery error
UPS_SB_ECO_MODE 0x0800 eco - bypass
UPS_SB_INVERTER_WARN 0x1000 eco - bypass
UPS_SB_UPS_FAILED 0x2000 prser flag
UPS_SB_COMM_LOST 0x4000 for snmp
UPS_SB_DVG_ALARM 0x8000 SiteManager/SiteMonitor
D.6 Bus termination

It is necessary to set the last bus device on the RS-485 Bus jumper for the bus
termination. The jumper in already set in newly delivered adapters. Please remove the
4 screws at the underside of the adapter in order to open the box. You will find the
jumper J1 near the network connector. Default is ON = CS121 is last device. If you
take off the Jumper, then the CS121 can be used inside a group of chained devices.
D.7 Configuration
Please use Telnet (network connection) for the configuration with the default IP
address 10.10.10.10. Put DIP switch 1 into the “OFF” position. If you have a RS-232/
RS-485 converter available you can also use a HyperTerminal via COM2 with both
DIP switches in the “OFF” position.
D.8 TCP/IP - UDP Ports
The following are ports of the CS121 SNMP Adapter. These are the ports that have to
be made available in the Firewall in order to use all of the CS121 functions:
Echo 7/tcp
echo 7/udp
109
ftp-data 20/tcp
ftp 21/tcp
telnet 23/tcp
smtp 25/tcp
http 80/tcp
snmp 161/udp
snmptrap 162/udp
time (rfc868) 37/tcp
time (sntp) 123/tcp
rccmd 6003
Upsmon 5769
Modbus over IP 502/tcp
D.9 MODBUS Cables

The following cable (Cable 112) is used for connecting the Schneider Electrics TSX
SCY CM6030 MODBUS device and the CS121 MODBUS adapter.
Figure 59 Cable 112
NOTE: it is very important that the Shield is connected to the MINI 8 housing and to
the MODBUS requesting device common ground !
110
E. CS121 Recovery
GENEREX CS121 SNMP adapter firmware flash renewal and recovery :
CAUTION ! This upgrade process requires some technical knowledge. This process
can seriously damage your CS121 if not performed correctly. Please follow the
instructions carefully to avoid damaging your system!
General information regarding the upgrading process of the CS121 - Known Problems
and Preliminary Precautions:
- Any update will cause a deletion of all former settings. The adapter must be
reconfigured after the update. The current settings information can be saved by using
an FTP connection to your adapter to save the upsman.cfg file in the flash directory to
a local directory. This file contains all of the information about the current CS121
settings in a formatted text. Do not copy this file back onto the adapter after the update
as a replacement for the new upsman.cfg. The information must be entered back into
the settings using the adapters configuration interface. Note that the http interface
often contains newer settings options that are not yet implemented in the telnet and
terminal interfaces.
- Any recovery should be made on the default IP Address 10.10.10.10. Put DIP
Switch 1 and 2 in the OFF position before starting.
- Please avoid the use of routers and switches between your computer and the
CS121, if available use Hub (recommended) or a direct line (Ethernet-cross-cable).
Instructions for recovery procedure of GENEREX CS121 SNMP adapter:
In case the CS121 is not running, has any defect or other problem, please put dip
switch 1 to OFF (Dip 2 should be always OFF) and follow the procedure below:
1. Before starting the update, unplug the adapter from the power supply (slot cards
have to be removed from the slot).
2. Set a route to default IP Address. Command syntax on your windows computer:

"route add 10.10.10.10 <your IP address>"Also note that the flash tool can also be
used to set the route for you by checking the set route check box in the update
interface.
3. Check if your route is correctly set with the console command "route print". You
should see that 10.10.10.10 is in the list
4. Make sure that no other device is answering on "ping 10.10.10.10". If you get any
answer then you have to disable this device first before you can continue.
5. As an extra notice, the update interface displays an unmark able stereo button with
the text "FORMAT & REWRITE" to show that all settings will be lost.
6. Press the "Start Update" button and re-power the CS121 in THE EXACT SAME
MOMENT !
If the start was successful, you will see that the firmware is loading. DO NOT
INTERRUPT THIS PROCESS ! Pay attention to the process. If during the loading the
following text reappears in the dialogue:
"Connecting to target 10.10.10.10 on port 4000....."
111
then shortly disrupt the power supply to the adapter in order to initiate the
communication call between the updating computer and the adapter once again. The
process should then flow through all the way to the following text: "update successful"
It is important to start the update and the adapter at the same time because even with
a defect firmware installation, there is a window of 1 second during the start of a cold
boot in which the CS121 will answer IP calls to 10.10.10.10. When the firmware
update tool gets a connection during this time, the recovery process can start.
If you get a timeout, retry this procedure.
7. After the firmware has been loaded, you can reboot the adapter and configure the
system with TELNET, still using IP address 10.10.10.10
FINISH.
112
CS121 Wiederherstellung (deutsch):
GENEREX CS121 SNMP Adapter Firmware Flash Erneuerung und

Wiederherstellung
VORSICHT ! Dieses Upgrade erfordert ein wenig Fachkenntnisse. Eine fehlerhafte

Ausführung dieses Vorgangs kann den Adapter ernsthaft beschädigen. Bitte führen
Sie die folgenden Anleitungen vorsichtig aus um einen Schaden des Systems zu
vermeiden!
Allgemeine Informationen über den Upgradevorgang des CS121 Adapters - Bekannte

Schwierigkeiten und Vorsichtsmaßnahmen:
- Alle Voreinstellungen werden im Rahmen eines Updates überschrieben. Nach einem

Update müssen die Einstellungen wieder vorgenommen werden. Die Informationen
über die Voreinstellungen können jedoch gespeichert werden. Hierzu wird die
upsman.cfg Datei aus dem flash Verzeichnis lokal gesichert werden und dieses
benötigt zuerst eine FTP Verbindung mit dem Adapter. Diese Datei enthält alle
Informationen über die Adaptereinstellungen als formatierter Text. Diese Datei soll
nicht mit der neuen upsman.cfg Datei nach dem Upgrade anschließend ausgetauscht
werden. Die Informationen müssen mithilfe der Bedienoberfläche wieder eingestellt
werden. Anmerkung: Die http Bedienoberfläche enthält häufig neuerer
Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten die noch nicht in der Telnet- und
Terminalbedienoberflächen enthalten sind.
- Es empfiehlt sich grundsätzlich das Upgrade aller Adapter mit der vorgegebenen IP
Adresse 10.10.10.10 durchzuführen. Hierfür werden vor dem Upgradebeginn beide
DIP Schalter 1 und 2 auf OFF umgelegt.
- Vorzugsweise: Es sollen weder Routers noch Switches zwischen dem Upgrade

ausführenden Rechner und zwischen dem Adapter geschaltet werden. Stattdessen
verwenden Sie eine Direktverbindung anhand eines Hub (empfohlen !) oder gedrehten
Netzwerkkabels. (Ethernet-cross-cable).
Anleitung für die Wiederherstellung eines GENEREX CS121 SNMP Adapters:
Falls der CS121 nicht mehr läuft oder einige Fehler oder Defekten aufweist, schalten
Sie zuerst beide DIP-Schalter 1 und 2 in die Ausgangsposition OFF (Dip 2 bleibt
grundsätzlich in der OFF Position.) und folgen Sie anschließend mit den folgenden
Schritten fort:
1. Vor dem Beginn des Updates, entfernen Sie die Stromversorgung von dem
Adapter. Slot Adapter müssen hierfür aus der USV Stecker hinaus gezogen werden.
2. Fügen Sie die vorgegebene IP Adresse in Ihre Netzwerkumgebung ein. Unter

Windows kann dieses mit der Verwendung vom folgenden Konsolbefehlssatz
eingestellt werden: "route add 10.10.10.10 <vorgegebene IP Adresse>"
Wenn Sie das "set route" Häkchen in der Updatemaske des Setuptools setzen wird
das gleiche bewirkt wie mit dem "route add ..." Befehl.
3. Die Einstellung Ihrer Netzwerkumgebung können Sie mit folgendem Befehl

überprüfen: "route print". Die 10.10.10.10 sollte sich nun in dieser Liste befinden.
113
4. Überprüfen Sie ob andere Geräte im Netzwerk die vorgegebene IP belegen mit dem
Befehl "ping 10.10.10.10". Wenn Sie eine Antwort erhalten, dann müssen Sie zuerst
das Gerät vom Netzwerk trennen bevor Sie fortfahren.
5. Mit dem Stereoknopf "FORMAT & REWRITE" das nicht umgestellt werden kann
direkt über den "Start Update" Knopf soll Ihre Aufmerksamkeit auf die Endgültigkeit
dieses Vorgangs dass alle Voreinstellungen verloren gehen geweckt werden.
6. Während Sie den "Start Update" Knopf betätigen fügen Sie dem CS121 die
Stromversorgung zeitgleich wieder hinzu. Gelingt dieser Start erscheint die Meldung:
"firmware is loading". Unterbrechen Sie diesen Vorgang auf keinem Fall!
Folgen Sie aufmerksam den Ablaufsprozess. Achten Sie darauf ob der Prozess wieder
zum folgenden Zustand zurückkehrt: "Connecting to target 10.10.10.10 on port
4000....."
An dieser Stelle sollten Sie die Stromversorgung des Adapters erneut kurz
unterbrechen um die Kommunikation noch mal im Gang zu setzten. Anschließend
sollte der Prozess durch laufen bis zur folgenden Meldung: "update successful"
Es ist äußerst wichtig den Updatevorgang zeitgleich mit dem Stromzufuhr zum
Adapter zu starten denn selbst bei einer defekten Firmware Installation wird der
CS121 Adapter kurz für ca. 1 Sekunde die Kommunikationsleitung im Rahmen einer
sog. Coltboot offen legen mit Antwort auf einem Ping Aufruf auf seiner vorgegebenen
IP 10.10.10.10. Während dieser Antwort, ergreift das Firmware Updatetool die
Möglichkeit den Adapter vollständig wieder her zu stellen.
Sollte stattdessen nach einer gewissen Zeit eine "timeout" Meldung erscheinen
müssen Sie den Vorgang erneut versuchen.
7. Nachdem die neue Firmware erfolgreich geladen wurde können Sie den Adapter
Neustarten und mittels TELNET und die IP 10.10.10.10 den Adapter konfigurieren.
FERTIG.
G. Abbildungsverzeichnis/Picture catalogue
Figure 1 CS121 in a network environment 10
Figure 2 CS121 configuration settings per ftp. 11
Figure 5 gchart plug in for the internet explorer 12
Figure 8 HTTP administrator login 18
Figure 9 Terminal settings 20
Figure 10 Telnet - Main Menu 21
Figure 11 Telnet - IP Settings 22
Figure 12 Telnet - SNMP communities 23
Figure 13 Telnet UPS Settings 24
Figure 14 Telnet - Event overview 25
Figure 15 Telnet - Log Event Settings 26
Figure 16 Telnet E-Mail Event Settings 28
Figure 17 HTTP - Network & Security Settings 29
Figure 18 HTTP - Server Job configuration menu 30
Figure 19 HTTP Event Editor RCCMD Shutdown test 31
Figure 3 RCCMD signal broadcast 32
Figure 4 HTTP Event overview configuration with tool tips 32
Figure 20 Telnet - RCCMD- Shutdown Event Settings 32
Figure 21 Telnet - RCCMD2 Message Event Settings 34
Figure 22 RCCMD execute/command 34
Figure 23 Telnet- RCCMD2 Execute Event Settings 35
Figure 24 CS121 as RCCMD client criteria 1: 35
114
Figure 28 Telnet - UPS Shutdown Event Settings 38
Figure 29 WOL configuration 38
Figure 30 Telnet Network & Security Settings 39
Figure 31 HTTP Timer Settings 39
Figure 32 Telnet - E-Mail Client Settings 42
Figure 33 Telnet - Network Server Settings 43
Figure 34 Telnet - Change Upsmon Password 43
Figure 35 Telnet - Static ARP Settings 44
Figure 36 Telnet - SNMP Trap Test 44
Figure 37 Telnet COM2 & AUX Settings 44
Figure 38 Telnet - COM2 Settings 45
Figure 39 HTTP COM2 Tempman/SensorMan 46
Figure 40 Telnet - Tempman Settings 46
Figure 41 HTTP Sensor Manager Settings calibration 47
Figure 42 HTTP RAS Manager Settings 47
Figure 43 Telnet AUX Settings 48
Figure 44 HTTP COM2 & AUX with TempMan 49
Figure 45 HTTP AUX & TempMan Status 50
Figure 46 Scheduled Actions no time server 51
Figure 47 Scheduled actions empty 51
Figure 48 Edit Scheduled Action drop down menus 52
Figure 49 Scheduled actions overview with warning 52
Figure 50 Exchange COM Ports 1 & 2 for SS4 53
Figure 51 Appendix: Cable configuration COM2 93
Figure 53 External D-SUB 9-polig male 94
Figure 54 Slot version: Circuit board connection 94
Figure 55 Pin COM2 Mini-DIN 8 pol 95
Figure 60 AUX-Port (HW Rev.1.1) 95
Figure 61 Example (Inputs): Opener or closer contact 96
Figure 62 Opto Coupler logic 96
Figure 63 Example (Outputs) 96
Figure 64 Example (AUX Output at cables with more than 10 m) 97
Figure 65 Cable 112 110
115
6. UPS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
To make any repairing, refer to the electrical drawings of the equipment.
The unit in question is an electrical device dangerous level of voltage and current.
The following instructions should be there before be carefully observed.
 Installation, operation, maintenance and servicing should be carried out in strict accordance with
these documents.
 Ensure that only trained and authorised personnel have access to the unit. Only certain persons
should be authorised to open the housing.
 Even when the unit is switched off, some of the internal components may still be lives as long as
they are connected to the mains power supply or to the battery.
 Integrated capacitors may still be live, even when the unit is disconnected and free of any voltage.
They should there before be correctly discharged by a qualified person before to touch to the
terminals.
 Only insulated tools should be used for work on the unit.
 All persons working with the unit should be familiar with first aid-measure to be taken in the event
of an accident involving electricity.
 The regulations of the local power supply authority and all applicable safety regulations should be
observed at all times.
Preventive maintenance:
The UPS system is virtually maintenance-free however, please respect the following
instructions:
To ensure trouble free operation, it is recommended to check the air inlet and outlet
yearly. Dust should be removed by suction. Do not used compressed air, as dust particles
may enter the interior of the UPS part.
The door filters must be cleaned or replaced periodically, the period will be determined with
the site ambient conditions.
It’s recommended every 8 years to replace the front UPS cooling fans and the chemical
capacitors of the power bridges.
14/15
7. DESCRIPTION OF BATTERY TYPE SBM84 SAFT
15/15
May 2020
Block battery Ni-Cd range

SBLE, SBM, SBH types for standard
SBL, SBM, SBH types for non standard
Installation & operating instructions for Block battery range
Safety precautions Storage of a filled battery at
temperatures above +30°C (+86°F)
■ WARNING: Risk of fire, explosion,
can result in permanent change
or burns. Do not disassemble,
and loss of product performance,
heat above 70°C, or incinerate.
depending on the duration of the
■ Never smoke while performing any storage above the maximum
operation on the battery. recommended temperature.
■ For protection, wear rubber gloves, ■ Cells empty and discharged
long sleeves and appropriate splash •S
aft recommends to store cells ■ Cells delivered empty
goggles or face shield. empty and discharged. and discharged:
■ The electrolyte is harmful to skin •C
ells can be stored like this for Important: The commissioning
and eyes. In the event of contact many years. charge must start within 24 hours
with skin or eyes, wash immediately but not before 4 hours after the
with plenty of water. If eyes are electrolyte has been filled.
3. Installation
affected, flush with water, and After commissioning, the battery
obtain immediate medical attention. 3.1. Location shall be charged permanently
according to section 5.
■ Remove all rings, watches and Install the battery in a dry and clean If the electrolyte is supplied dry,
other items with metal parts before room. Avoid direct sunlight and heat. prepare it according to its separate
working on the battery. instructions sheet. The electrolyte to
The battery will give the best
■ Use insulated tools. performance when the ambient be used is E22. Fill the cells about
temperature is between +10°C 20 mm above the minimum level
■ Avoid static electricity and take mark (lower) with electrolyte. Start
to +30°C (+50°F to +86°F).
measurements for protection the commissioning charge within
against electric shocks. 3.2. Mounting 24 hours but not before 4 hours
■ Discharge any possible static Verify that cells are correctly
electricity from clothing and/or interconnected with the appropriate 4. Commissioning
tools by touching an earth- polarity and with the connectors are Verify that the vents are closed and
connected part “ground” before correctly torque. ventilation, in accordance with the
working on the battery. IEC 62485-2 standard, is provided
The connecting lugs to the battery
■ Ventilation, in accordance with the terminals should be nickel plated. during this operation.
IEC 62485-2 standard, is A good commissioning is important
Recommended torques values for
mandatory during commissioning and mandatory. Charge at constant
terminal bolts are:
and operation current is preferable.
• M 6 = 11 ± 1.1 N m (97.4 ± 9.8 lbf.in) After commissioning, the battery shall
1. Receiving the shipment • M 8 = 20 ± 2 N m (177.0 ± 17.7 lbf.in) be charged permanently according to
• M10 = 30 ± 3 N m (265.0 ± 26.6 lbf.in) section 5.
Do not overturn the package. Inspect
cells for any damage and report any to The connectors and terminals should Prior and during commissioning
the freight company immediately. be corrosion-protected by coating with charge, record all data requested in
the commissioning report available on
■ If the cells are shipped filled and a thin layer of anti-corrosion oil or
www.saftbatteries.com.
charged, the cells are ready for NO-OX-ID”A”
assembly. 4.1. Constant current charge
3.3. Ventilation
If the current limit is lower than
During charging, the battery is
2. Storage indicated in the Table A or B, charge
emitting gases (oxygen and hydrogen for a proportionally longer time.
Store the battery indoors in a dry, mixture).
clean, cool location (0°C to +30°C / ■ F or cells filled and charged by
+32°F to+ 86°F) and well ventilated Ventilation of the battery room, in the factory and stored less than
space. accordance with the IEC 62485-2 6 months:
standard, must be provided. Charge for 10 h at 0.2 C5 A
Do not store in direct sunlight or
recommended (see Tables A or B).
expose to excessive heat. 3.4. Electrolyte
■ F or cells filled on location or for
■ Cells filled and charged ■C
ells delivered filled and charged: filled cells which have been stored
• If cells are stored filled, they must be Check for spilling. more than 6 months:
fully charged prior to storage. If spilling is noticed, the spilled cells a) Charge for 10 h at 0.2 C5 A
•C
ells may be stored filled and must be refilled with E22 recommended (see Tables A or B)
charged for a period not exceeding electrolyte, only after assembly b) Discharge at 0.2 C5 A to 1.0 V/cell
12 months from date of dispatch (see 3.2 Mounting), to the same c) Charge for 10 h at 0.2 C5 A
from factory. level as the other cells in the string. recommended (see Tables A or B).
Note: At the end of the charge, the Note: When full battery performance ■ Check visually the electrolyte level.
cell voltage may reach the level of is required for capacity test purposes, Never let the level fall below the
1.85 V per cell, thus the charger shall the battery has to be charged in minimum level mark (lower). Use
be able to supply such voltage. When accordance with IEC 60623. only distilled or deionized water to
the charger maximum voltage setting top-up. Experience will tell the time
is too low to supply constant current 5. Charging in service interval between topping-up.
charging, divide the battery into two Maintaining the recommended battery Note: Once the battery has been
parts to be charged individually. charging voltage is very important to filled with the correct electrolyte
insure long life to the battery. The either at the battery factory or
4.2. Constant voltage charge
battery charger must be set to the during the battery commissioning,
■ For cells filled and charged by the recommended charging values.
factory and stored less than there is no need to check the
6 months: electrolyte density periodically.
5.1. Continuous parallel operation,
Charge for 24 h at 1.65 V/cell, with occasional battery discharge. Interpretation of density
current limited to 0.2 C5 A or Recommended charging voltage measurements is difficult and could
charge for 48 h at 1.55 V/cell, (+20°C to +25°C / +68°F to +77°F): be misleading.
current limited to 0.2 C5 A The connectors and terminal bolts
(see Tables A or B). For two level charge: ■
•F
loat level should be corrosion protected by
■ F or cells filled on location or for
= 1.42 ± 0.01 V/cell for L cells coating with a thin layer of anti-
filled cells which have been stored
= 1.40 ± 0.01 V/cell for M and H cells corrosion oil or NO-OX-ID”A”
more than 6 months:
a) Charge for 30 h at 1.65 V/cell •H
igh level (Boost) ■ High water consumption is usually
with current limited to 0.2 C5 A = 1.47 - 1.70 V/cell for L cells caused by high improper voltage
(see Tables A or B) = 1.45 - 1.70 V/cell for M and H cells. setting of the charger.
b) Discharge at 0.2 C5 A to 1.0 V/cell A high voltage will increase the speed Note that all these maintenance
c) Charge for 30 h at 1.65 V/cell and efficiency of the recharging. recommendations followed the IEEE
with current limited to 0.2 C5 A or
For single level charge (Float and 1106 standard ‘Recommended
charge for 48 h at 1.55 V/cell
Boost charge are not available): Practice for Installation, Maintenance,
current limited to 0.2 C5 A
(see Tables A or B) 1.43 - 1.50 V/cell. Testing and Replacement of Vented
Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for
The battery container temperature is 5.2. Buffer operation, where the load
Stationary Applications’.
to be monitored during charge. If the exceeds the charger rating.
temperature exceeds + 45°C (+113°F) Recommended charging voltage 6.1. Changing Electrolyte
during charging, then it must be (+20°C to +25°C / +68°F to +77°F):
stopped to reduce the temperature. In most stationary battery applications,
1.50 - 1.60 V/cell. the electrolyte will retain its
The charging can be resumed when
battery container temperature drops effectiveness for the life of the battery.
6. Preventive maintenance
below + 40°C (+ 104°F). However, under special battery
■ Keep the battery clean using only
operating conditions, if the electrolyte
4.3.Electrolyte adjustment after water. Do not use a wire brush or
commissioning is found to be carbonated, the battery
solvents of any kind. Vent plugs can
performance can be restored by
or cells delivered filled by the
■ F be rinsed in clean water if necessary.
replacing the electrolyte.
factory: heck the charging voltage.
■ C
- Check the electrolyte level and The electrolyte type to be used for
It is important that the
adjust it to the maximum level mark replacement in these cells is: E13.
recommended charging voltage
(upper) by adding distilled or remains unchanged. Refer to "Electrolyte Instructions".
deionized water.
The charging voltage should be
or cells filled on location:
■ F 7. Environment
checked and recorded at least once
- Check the electrolyte level and yearly. If a cell float voltage is found To protect the environment all used
adjust it to the maximum level mark below 1.35 V, high-rate charge is batteries must be recycled. Contact
(upper) by adding: electrolyte. recommended to apply to the cell your local Saft representative for
The battery is ready for use. concerned. further information.
Table A: Standard range
Electrolyte Electrolyte Cell Electrolyte Cell
Charging Cell Charging Charging
per cell Cell per cell connect. Cell per cell connect.
Cell current connect. current current
type 0.2 C5 A bolt type 0.2 C5 A Solid* Liquid* bolt type 0.2 C5 A Solid* Liquid* bolt
Solid* Liquid*
(A) (kg) (l) per pole (A) (kg) (l) per pole (A) (kg) (l) per pole
SBLE 7.5 1.5 0.08 0.2 M6 SBM 11 2.2 0.10 0.3 M6 SBH 8.3 1.7 0.1 0.4 M6
SBLE 15 3.0 0.11 0.4 M6 SBM 15 3.0 0.11 0.3 M6 SBH 12 2.4 0.1 0.4 M6
SBLE 22 4.4 0.17 0.5 M6 SBM 22 4.4 0.15 0.5 M6 SBH 16 3.2 0.2 0.5 M6
SBLE 30 6.0 0.15 0.5 M6 SBM 30 6.0 0.15 0.5 M6
SBH 19 3.8 0.3 0.9 M6
SBLE 40 8.0 0.29 0.9 M6 SBM 43 8.6 0.32 1.0 M6
SBLE 47 9.4 0.19 0.6 M6 SBM 50 10 0.32 1.0 M6 SBH 29 5.8 0.4 1.1 M6
SBLE 62 12 0.23 0.7 M6 SBM 56 11 0.39 1.2 M6 SBH 39 7.8 0.4 1.2 M8
SBLE 75 15 0.32 1.0 M8 SBM 65 13 0.36 1.1 M8 SBH 49 9.8 0.5 1.5 M8
SBLE 85 17 0.45 1.4 M8 SBM 72 14 0.36 1.1 M8 SBH 59 12 0.5 1.6 M 10
SBLE 95 19 0.45 1.4 M8 SBM 84 17 0.42 1.3 M8 SBH 69 14 0.7 2.1 M 10
SBLE 110 22 0.49 1.5 M 10 SBM 93 19 0.42 1.3 M8 SBH 79 16 0.6 2.0 M 10
SBLE 125 25 0.58 1.8 M 10 SBM 100 20 0.52 1.6 M8
SBLE 140 28 0.58 1.8 M 10 SBM 112 22 0.52 1.6 M8 SBH 88 18 0.8 2.5 M 10
SBLE 165 33 0.71 2.2 M 10 SBM 118 24 0.52 1.6 M8 SBH 98 20 0.8 2.4 M 10
SBLE 185 37 0.71 2.2 M 10 SBM 130 26 0.58 1.8 M 10 SBH 110 22 0.9 2.9 M 10
SBLE 200 40 0.84 2.6 M 10 SBM 138 28 0.65 2.0 M 10 SBH 118 24 0.9 2.7 M 10
SBLE 215 43 0.84 2.6 M 10 SBM 150 30 0.75 2.3 M 10 SBH 137 27 1.3 4.1 2 x M 10
SBLE 230 46 0.84 2.6 M 10 SBM 161 32 0.68 2.1 M 10 SBH 157 31 1.3 3.9 2 x M 10
SBLE 255 51 0.97 3.0 M 10 SBM 168 34 0.87 2.7 M 10
SBH 177 35 1.6 4.9 2 x M 10
SBLE 275 55 0.97 3.0 M 10 SBM 184 37 0.87 2.7 M 10
SBLE 300 60 1.26 3.9 2 x M 10 SBM 192 38 0.87 2.7 M 10 SBH 196 39 1.5 4.7 2 x M 10
SBLE 395 79 1.52 4.7 2 x M 10 SBM 241 48 0.97 3.0 M 10
SBH 270 54 2.0 6.1 2 x M 10
SBLE 415 83 1.52 4.7 2 x M 10 SBM 250 50 1.26 3.9 2 x M 10
SBLE 435 87 1.68 5.2 2 x M 10 SBM 260 52 1.26 3.9 2 x M 10 SBH 281 56 2.2 6.7 2 x M 10
SBLE 600 120 2.20 6.8 3 x M 10 SBM 392 78 1.91 5.9 2 x M 10
SBH 363 73 2.8 8.6 3 x M 10
SBLE 650 130 2.37 7.3 3 x M 10 SBM 415 83 2.07 6.4 2 x M 10
SBLE 925 185 3.34 10.3 4 x M 10 SBM 555 111 2.59 8.0 3 x M 10
SBH 460 92 3.1 9.6 3 x M 10
SBLE 980 196 3.47 10.7 4 x M 10 SBM 576 115 2.59 8.0 3 x M 10
SBLE 1250 250 4.41 13.6 5 x M 10 SBM 740 148 3.43 10.6 4 x M 10
SBLE 1600 320 5.64 17.4 6 x M 10 SBM 940 188 3.89 12.0 4 x M 10
SBH 800 160 5.5 17.0 6 x M 10
SBLE 1660 332 5.77 17.8 6 x M 10 SBM 965 193 4.05 12.5 6 x M 10
SBM 1040 208 5.15 15.9 5 x M 10 SBH 920 184 6.2 19.1 6 x M 10
SBM 1082 216 5.15 15.9 5 x M 10
SBM 1107 221 5.05 15.6 5 x M 10
SBM 1150 230 4.76 14.7 5 x M 10
* Value for initial filling (E22).
SBM 1181 236 4.86 15.0 5 x M 10
The cell type shows the rated capacity
SBM 1220 244 5.99 18.5 6 x M 10
in ampere hours (Ah).
SBM 1274 254 5.99 18.5 6 x M 10
SBM 1324 264 6.09 18.8 6 x M 10
SBM 1390 278 5.73 17.7 6 x M 10
SBM 1445 289 5.73 17.7 6 x M 10
Table B: Non standard range
Electrolyte Cell Electrolyte Cell Electrolyte Cell

Charging Charging Charging
Cell per cell connect. Cell per cell connect. Cell per cell connect.
current current current
type 0.2 C5 A Solid* Liquid* bolt type 0.2 C5 A Solid* Liquid* bolt type 0.2 C5 A Solid* Liquid* bolt
(A) (kg) (l) per pole (A) (kg) (l) per pole (A) (kg) (l) per pole
SBL 7.5 1.5 0.08 0.24 M6 SBM 86 17 0.42 1.3 M8 SBH 25 5.0 0.30 0.92 M6
SBL 16 3.2 0.11 0.35 M6 SBM 287 57 1.39 4.3 2 x M 10 SBH 38 7.6 0.39 1.2 M6
SBL 30 6.0 0.15 0.46 M6
SBM 359 72 1.62 5.0 2 x M 10 SBH 51 10 0.42 1.3 M8
SBL 37 7.4 0.22 0.69 M6
SBM 431 86 2.07 6.4 3 x M 10 SBH 64 13 0.52 1.6 M8
SBL 45 9.0 0.19 0.59 M6 SBM 540 108 2.43 7.5 3 x M 10 SBH 77 15 0.52 1.6 M 10
SBL 48 9.6 0.28 0.86 M6
SBM 575 115 2.78 8.6 4 x M 10 SBH 89 18 0.61 1.9 M 10
SBL 59 12 0.23 0.7 M6
SBM 720 144 3.24 10.0 4 x M 10 SBH 102 20 0.68 2.1 M 10
SBL 70 14 0.32 1.0 M8
SBM 900 180 4.05 12.5 5 x M 10 SBH 115 23 0.91 2.8 M 10
SBL 90 18 0.39 1.2 M8 SBH 128 26 0.84 2.6 M 10
SBL 102 21 0.39 1.2 M 10
SBH 141 28 1.07 3.3 M 10
SBL 131 27 0.49 1.5 M 10
SBL 135 27 0.55 1.7 M 10 SBH 153 31 1.04 3.2 M 10
SBH 179 36 1.23 3.8 2 x M 10
SBL 167 34 0.65 2.0 M 10
SBH 230 46 1.81 5.6 2 x M 10
SBL 173 35 0.65 2.0 M 10
SBL 199 40 0.78 2.4 M 10
SBL 214 43 0.74 2.3 M 10
SBL 237 48 0.97 3.0 2 x M 10

SBL 256 52 0.94 2.9 M 10
SBL 269 54 1.13 3.5 2 x M 10
SBL 301 61 1.20 3.7 2 x M 10
SBL 304 61 1.13 3.5 2 x M 10
SBL 334 67 1.26 3.9 2 x M 10
SBL 346 70 1.26 3.9 2 x M 10
SBL 366 74 1.42 4.4 2 x M 10
SBL 387 78 1.36 4.2 2 x M 10
SBL 398 80 1.55 4.8 2 x M 10
SBL 429 86 1.49 4.6 2 x M 10
SBL 470 94 1.68 5.2 2 x M 10
SBL 500 100 1.91 5.9 3 x M 10
SBL 510 102 1.88 5.8 2 x M 10
SBL 595 119 2.33 7.2 3 x M 10
SBL 600 120 2.14 6.6 3 x M 10
SBL 645 129 2.23 6.9 3 x M 10
SBL 665 133 2.56 7.9 4 x M 10
SBL 770 154 2.78 8.6 3 x M 10
SBL 795 159 3.11 9.6 4 x M 10
SBL 835 167 3.11 9.6 5 x M 10
SBL 860 172 2.98 9.2 4 x M 10
SBL 995 199 3.88 12.0 5 x M 10
SBL 1020 204 3.72 11.5 4 x M 10
SBL 1070 214 3.72 11.5 5 x M 10
SBL 1280 256 4.66 14.4 5 x M 10
* Value for initial filling (E22).
SBL 1450 290 5.31 16.4 6 x M 10 The cell type shows the rated capacity in ampere hours (Ah).
SBL 1540 308 5.60 17.3 6 x M 10
Saft
Doc N° 22037-0520-2
Industrial Standby Division
26, quai Charles Pasqua Data in this document is subject to change without
notice and becomes contractual only after written
92300 Levallois-Perret - France confirmation.
Tel: +33 1 58 63 16 00 Société Anonyme au capital de 26 300 205 €
Fax: +33 1 58 63 16 18 / +33 1 58 63 16 19 RCS Nanterre 481 480 465
www.saftbatteries.com Le Révérend Imprimeur - Printed in France - 6k

V5370 02ae Not

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

V5370 02ae Not

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

V5370 02ae Not

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Conversion d'énergie Technical Manual – Dual UPS 40kVA V5370-02

NAME DATE NAME DATE

43, Avenue Winston Churchill - 27400 LOUVIERS

RESPONSIBILITY AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................. 3

NORMS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS NCE1195 ................................... 4

1. PRESENTATION OF THE EQUIPMENT .............................................. 5

3. ELECTRICAL EQUIPEMENT AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS .. 11

5. TCP/IP INTERFACE .............................................................................. 13

6. UPS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................. 14

7. DESCRIPTION OF BATTERY TYPE SBM84 SAFT .......................... 15

RESPONSIBILITY AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

This unit in question is an electrical device requiring DANGEROUS LEVELS OF

The followings instructions should be therefore be carefully observed:

BENNING Conversion d'énergie

NORMS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS NCE1195

MAIN NORMS APPLICABLE IN OUR PRODUCTION:

IEC 60146-2 Semiconductors converters

IEC 76 Choke and transformer

IEC 51558 1.2.4.6 Small transformer specification

IEC 947-2-3 Circuit breakers rules

IEC 269 Fuses rules

IEC 947 Contactor rules

IEC 255 Relay rules

IEC 384 Chemical capacitors rules

IEC 950 Safety for telecom equipment

IEC 60529 Degree of protections (IP code)

- Temperature: Operating - 5°C to + 50°C.

- Altitude: 1000 m without derating

1. PRESENTATION OF THE EQUIPMENT

In accordance with the single line diagram N° V5370-02 sheet 04.

A. UPS TYPE ENERTRONIC I, D400E230/174/3rfg-UEG

TAG number : UE-EE-UPS

UPS cabinet (x2):

Max. ambient temperature ...................................................... + 50°C

2. INPUT AC DATA FOR RECTIFIER PART (EACH UPS)

. Nominal voltage 3 phases /3W ................................................................................................................................................................ 400V ± 10% 3Ph., PE

3. OUTPUT DC DATA FOR RECTIFIER PART (EACH UPS)

. Nominal voltage ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 220V

4. OUTPUT AC DATA FOR INVERTER PART (EACH UPS)

. Nominal voltage 1 phase 2W ....................................................................................................................................................................... 230Vac, 1 Ph, 2W, PE

. Nominal input voltage ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 400V ± 10% 3Ph., PE

6. CONTROL AND ALARM

. 13 LED’s for single event :

- Internal power supply (green LED)

. Measurement readings on UPS Digital display :

- Input AC voltage - L-L for each phase

. Measurement readings on BYPASS cabinet through digital display :

- AC Analog Input Ammeter with phase selector switch.

. no-nc contact (remote alarms)

7. REMOTE MONITORING FACILITIES

B. 230VAC Distribution type E230E230/250 VT

1. MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS (per Distribution)

Front: 800 mm Depth: 800 mm Height: 2000+100 mm Weight: around 270 kg

- 2 x MCCB 3 poles, rating 50A, Icu 25kA

3. INSTRUMENTS AND REMOTE ALARMS

. AC Analog Input Ammeter.

. Alarm contacts on terminal X5 (opened in fault condition):

 Load CB open (to UPS)

. Voltage free alarm contacts on terminal X3 (opened in fault condition):